for keesee tract multifamily development...054000 cold-formed metal framing 055000 metal...

PROJECT MANUAL FOR

KEESEE TRACT MULTIFAMILY DEVELOPMENT AUSTIN, TEXAS

DEVELOPER: ARDENT RESIDENTIAL

5350 Burnet Road, #215 Austin, Texas 78756 512-472-6110 voice

ARCHITECT: THE DAVIES COLLABORATIVE

5453 Burnet Road, Suite 202 Austin, Texas 78756 512-852-4310 voice

INTERIOR DESIGNER: LAURA BRITT DESIGN, LLC 911 W. 29

th Street

Austin, Texas 78705 512-458-8963 voice STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: VIEWTECH, INC. 4205 Beltway Drive Addison, Texas 75001 972-661-8187 voice MEP ENGINEERS: MEP DELTA DESIGN 5453 Burnet Road, Suite 202 Austin, Texas 78756 512-731-5820 voice CIVIL ENGINEER: LONGARO & CLARK, LP 3839 Bee Caves Road, Suite150 Austin, Texas 78746 512-306-0228 voice LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: COLEMAN & ASSOCIATES 9890 Silver Mountain Dr. Austin, Texas 78737 512-476-2090 voice VOICE DATA, AUDIOVISUAL, DATACOM DESIGN GROUP SECURITY, ACOUSTICS: 3500 Jefferson St, Suite 300 Austin, Texas 78731

512-478-6001 voice

DATE: 14 December 2015 – Issued for GMP

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 000107 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 000107

PROFESSIONAL SEALS PAGE

The following sections were prepared by the Architect: THE DAVIES COLLABORATIVE

5453 Burnet Road, Suite 202 Austin, Texas 78756 512-852-4310 voice DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary 012000 Price and Payment Procedures 012100 Allowances 012200 Unit Prices 012300 Alternates 013000 Administrative Requirements 013216 Construction Progress Schedule 014000 Quality Requirements 014100 Regulatory Requirements 014216 Definitions 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 015713 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 016000 Product Requirements 017000 Execution and Closeout Requirements 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

035400 Cast Underlayment

DIVISION 05 - METALS

054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing 055000 Metal Fabrications 055100 Metal Stairs 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings 057300 Decorative Metal Railings 057500 Decorative Formed Metal

DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061001 Rough Carpentry – Non Structural 061120 Composite Lumber 061500 Wood Decking 061600 Sheathing 062000 Finish Carpentry 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry 064100 Architectural Wood Casework 066400 Plastic Paneling

[SEAL GOES HERE]


DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071300 Sheet Waterproofing 071400 Elevator Pit Waterproofing 071413 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing – Elevated Decks 071800 Traffic Coatings 072100 Thermal Insulation 072119 Foamed-in-Place Insulation 072126 Blown Insulation 072129 Spray-Applied Insulation 072500 Weather Barriers - Sheet 072600 Under Slab Vapor Barrier 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers 073110 Asphalt Shingles 074646 Fiber Cement Siding and Soffits 075400 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 076210 Flexible Flashing 077100 Roof Specialties 077210 Roof Accessories – Steep Slope 078400 Firestopping 079005 Joint Sealers

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 081413 Preassembled Wood Door and Frame Units 081416 Flush Wood Doors 081550 Insulated Steel Door and Frame Units 083100 Access Doors and Panels 084313 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 085313 Vinyl Windows 087100 Door Hardware 088000 Glazing 088300 Mirrors 089000 Louvers and Vents

DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092116 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies 092216 Gypsum Board Assemblies 092423 Portland Cement Plaster 093000 Tiling 096800 Carpeting 096813 Tile Carpeting 097200 Wall Coverings 098521 Sound Control Matting 099000 Painting and Coating 099450 Decorative Exterior Finish System

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101400 Signage 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories 104400 Fire Protection Specialties 105523 Mail Boxes 108251 Shower Enclosures – Frameless 109900 Miscellaneous Specialties

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

113100 Residential Appliances 113300 Retractable Stairs 118227 Waste Compactors


DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds 123530 Residential Casework 123600 Countertops

DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 Electric Traction Elevators

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

313116 Termite Control

END OF DOCUMENT

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TABLE OF CONTENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 000110 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 000110

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION TITLE ISSUE DATE

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

000010 Title Page ......................................................................................... 14Dec15 000110 Table of Contents ............................................................................. 14Dec15 003132 Geotechnical Data ............................................................................ 14Dec15 007000 General Conditions........................................................................... 14Dec15 008000 Supplementary Conditions ............................................................... 14Dec15 DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary .......................................................................................... 14Dec15 012000 Price and Payment Procedures ........................................................ 14Dec15 012100 Allowances ....................................................................................... 14Dec15 012200 Unit Prices ........................................................................................ 14Dec15 012300 Alternates ......................................................................................... 14Dec15 013000 Administrative Requirements ........................................................... 14Dec15 013216 Construction Progress Schedule ...................................................... 14Dec15 014000 Quality Requirements ....................................................................... 14Dec15 014100 Regulatory Requirements ................................................................. 14Dec15 014216 Definitions ........................................................................................ 14Dec15 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls .................................................... 14Dec15 01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection (L) ......................................... 14Dec15 015713 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control ....................................... 14Dec15 016000 Product Requirements ...................................................................... 14Dec15 017000 Execution and Closeout Requirements ............................................ 14Dec15 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data .................................................... 14Dec15 017839 Project Record Documents .............................................................. 14Dec15 017900 Demonstration and Training ............................................................. 14Dec15 DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS – not used DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

035400 Cast Underlayment........................................................................... 14Dec15 DIVISION 04 - MASONRY – not used

DIVISION 05 - METALS

054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing ............................................................ 14Dec15 055000 Metal Fabrications ............................................................................ 14Dec15 055100 Metal Stairs ...................................................................................... 14Dec15 055213 Pipe and Tube Railings .................................................................... 14Dec15 057300 Decorative Metal Railings ................................................................. 14Dec15 057500 Decorative formed Metal .................................................................. 14Dec15 DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061001 Rough Carpentry – Non Structural ................................................... 14Dec15 061120 Composite Lumber ........................................................................... 14Dec15 061500 Wood Decking .................................................................................. 14Dec15 061600 Sheathing ......................................................................................... 14Dec15 062000 Finish Carpentry ............................................................................... 14Dec15 062013 Exterior Finish Carpentry .................................................................. 14Dec15 064100 Architectural Wood Casework .......................................................... 14Dec15 066400 Plastic Paneling ................................................................................ 14Dec15



DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071300 Sheet Waterproofing ........................................................................ 14Dec15 071400 Elevator Pit Waterproofing ............................................................... 14Dec15 071413 Fluid-Applied Waterproofing – Elevated Decks ................................ 14Dec15 071800 Traffic Coatings ................................................................................ 14Dec15 072100 Thermal Insulation ............................................................................ 14Dec15 072119 Foamed-in-Place Insulation .............................................................. 14Dec15 072126 Blown Insulation ............................................................................... 14Dec15 072129 Spray-Applied Insulation .................................................................. 14Dec15 072500 Weather Barriers - Sheet .................................................................. 14Dec15 072600 Under Slab Vapor Barrier ................................................................. 14Dec15 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers ............................................... 14Dec15 073110 Asphalt Shingles .............................................................................. 14Dec15 074646 Fiber Cement Siding and Soffits ....................................................... 14Dec15 075400 Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing ................................................... 14Dec15 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim ........................................................ 14Dec15 076210 Flexible Flashing .............................................................................. 14Dec15 077100 Roof Specialties ............................................................................... 14Dec15 077210 Roof Accessories – Steep Slope ...................................................... 14Dec15 078400 Firestopping ..................................................................................... 14Dec15 079005 Joint Sealers .................................................................................... 14Dec15 DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ...................................................... 14Dec15 081413 Preassembled Wood Door and Frame Units .................................... 14Dec15 081416 Flush Wood Doors............................................................................ 14Dec15 081550 Insulated Steel Door and Frame Units ............................................. 14Dec15 083100 Access Doors and Panels ................................................................ 14Dec15 084313 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts ......................................................... 14Dec15 085313 Vinyl Windows .................................................................................. 14Dec15 087100 Door Hardware ................................................................................. 14Dec15 088000 Glazing ............................................................................................. 14Dec15 088300 Mirrors .............................................................................................. 14Dec15 089000 Louvers and Vents ........................................................................... 14Dec15 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES

092116 Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies ............................................. 14Dec15 092216 Gypsum Board Assemblies .............................................................. 14Dec15 092423 Portland Cement Plaster .................................................................. 14Dec15 093000 Tiling ................................................................................................. 14Dec15 096800 Carpeting .......................................................................................... 14Dec15 096813 Tile Carpeting ................................................................................... 14Dec15 097200 Wall Coverings ................................................................................. 14Dec15 098521 Sound Control Matting ...................................................................... 14Dec15 099000 Painting and Coating ........................................................................ 14Dec15 099450 Decorative Exterior Finish System ................................................... 14Dec15 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

101400 Signage ............................................................................................ 14Dec15 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories ............................................. 14Dec15 104400 Fire Protection Specialties ................................................................ 14Dec15 105523 Mail Boxes ........................................................................................ 14Dec15 108251 Shower Enclosures – Frameless ...................................................... 14Dec15 109900 Miscellaneous Specialties ................................................................ 14Dec15 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

113100 Residential Appliances ..................................................................... 14Dec15 113300 Retractable Stairs ............................................................................. 14Dec15 118227 Waste Compactors ........................................................................... 14Dec15



DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds .................................................................. 14Dec15 123530 Residential Casework ....................................................................... 14Dec15 123600 Countertops ...................................................................................... 14Dec15 12 93 00 Site Furnishings (L) .......................................................................... 14Dec15 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – not used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

142100 Electric Traction Elevators ................................................................ 14Dec15

DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing ............................................... 14Dec15 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation .......................................................................... 14Dec15 22 10 00 Plumbing Piping ............................................................................... 14Dec15 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures............................................................................. 14Dec15

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC .................................................... 14Dec15 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC .................................... 14Dec15 23 30 00 HVAC Air Distribution ....................................................................... 14Dec15 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation ............................................................................... 14Dec15 23 11 23 Facility Natural-Gas Piping ............................................................... 14Dec15 23 81 26 Split-System Air Conditioners DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods ............................................ 14Dec15 26 05 03 Equipment Wiring Connections ........................................................ 14Dec15 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ................................ 14Dec15 26 05 53 Identification for Electrical Systems .................................................. 14Dec15 26 22 00 Transformers .................................................................................... 14Dec15 26 24 13 Switchboards .................................................................................... 14Dec15 26 24 16 Panelboards ..................................................................................... 14Dec15 26 27 26 Wiring Devices ................................................................................. 14Dec15 26 50 00 Lighting ............................................................................................ 14Dec15 DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS

27 00 00 Communications (E) ......................................................................... 14Dec15 270000 Communications (T) ......................................................................... 14Dec15 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems (T) .............. 14Dec15 270528 Pathways for Communications Systems (T) ..................................... 14Dec15 271100 Communications Room Fittings (T) .................................................. 14Dec15 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling (T) ........................................... 14Dec15 274116 Audiovisual Systems (T) ................................................................... 14Dec15 274170 Community Access Television –CATV (T) ....................................... 14Dec15 DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

280000 Electronic Security (T) ...................................................................... 14Dec15 281000 Access Control (T)............................................................................ 14Dec15 282300 Video Surveillance (T) ...................................................................... 14Dec15 282600 Telephone Entry (T) ......................................................................... 14Dec15 28 31 00 Fire Detection and Alarm .................................................................. 14Dec15

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

313116 Termite Control ................................................................................ 14Dec15 DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 14 00 Unit Paving (L) ................................................................................. 14Dec15 32 84 00 Irrigation (L) ...................................................................................... 14Dec15 32 92 00 Turf and Grass (L) ............................................................................ 14Dec15 32 93 00 Plants (L) .......................................................................................... 14Dec15



DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

INTERIOR DESIGN APPENDIX:

Paint & Cabinetry Schedule Flooring, Tile & Countertop Amenity Lighting Apartment Unit Plumbing, Cabinetry & Paint Apartment Unit Lighting

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas GEOTECHNICAL DATA Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 003132 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 003132

GEOTECHNICAL DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. This document includes information pertaining to geotechnical data.

1.2 INVESTIGATION A. An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by the Owner, and was

subsequently performed by ECS, Project No 17-4312, dated July 27, 2015.

1.3 REPORT A. The Geotechnical Investigation Report is for information only, and is not a warranty of subsurface

conditions. B. The Report is made available for information only, and is not a Contract Document. C. The information contained in the Report represents design criteria, recommendations, and guidelines that

were utilized as the basis of design for the engineering of the earthwork operations, paving design, and foundation design indicated in the Contract Documents. No changes in this design criteria will be considered or permitted.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITY A. Bidders are expected to examine the site and subsurface investigation reports and then decide for

themselves the character of the materials to be encountered. B. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations in subsoil conditions, quality, or stability,

or for the presence, level, and extent of underground water. C. The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for Bidder’s interpretation of data contained in the

Report.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas GENERAL CONDITIONS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 007000 - 1 14 December 2015

DOCUMENT 007000

GENERAL CONDITIONS

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, Sixteenth Edition, 2007, Articles 1 through 15 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is available for review from the Architect. The General Conditions and all modifications listed hereinafter shall apply to all various subcontracts and sub-subcontractors.

B. Refer to Document 008000 for Supplementary Conditions.

END OF DOCUMENT

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 008000 - 1 14 December 2015

DOCUMENT 008000

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

1.1 SUPPLEMENTS

A. The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, Sixteenth Edition, 2007. Where any Article of the General

Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provision of the Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.

1.2 REFERENCE TO DIVISION 01

A. With regard to provisions of General Conditions related to project administrative or work-related requirements of the Contract, some of those paragraphs are modified or deleted from General Conditions, and are specified in Division 01, "General Requirements" of the Specifications.

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS

Add the following new paragraphs:

1.1.9 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS

1.1.9.1 The term "Product" as used in these Contract Documents includes materials, systems, and equipment.

1.1.9.2 The term "provide" as used in this Project Manual means to furnish and install.

1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Add the following new subparagraphs:

1.2.4 The inter-relation of the Project Manual, the Drawings and the schedules is as follows: The Project

Manual determines the quality, nature and setting of the several materials; the Drawings establish the quantities, dimensions and details; and the schedules give the location when schedules are provided. The documents are to be considered as one and whatever is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all.

1.2.5 Should the drawings disagree in themselves, or with the Project Manual, or if proprietary information

disagrees with performance requirements in either the Drawings or the Project Manual, the better quality or greater quantity of the Work or materials shall be estimated upon, and unless otherwise ordered by the Architect in writing, shall be performed or furnished. Notify the Architect if discrepancies occur. Contractor shall request clarification in sufficient time to avoid delays and increases in the contract sum.


ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR

3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR

Add following sentences to subparagraph 3.2.2:

3.2.2.1 ….If a dimensional discrepancy exists, Contractor shall take field measurements required for proper

fabrication and installation of work. Upon commencement of any item of work, Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions related to such item of Work and shall make any corrections necessary to make work properly fit at no additional cost to Owner.

3.2.2.2 …..Before ordering any material or doing any work, Contractor shall verify dimensions and check conditions in

order to assure himself that they properly reflect those on the Drawings. Any inconsistency shall be brought to attention of the Architect. In the event that discrepancies occur between ordered material and actual conditions, of which Architect was not notified beforehand, costs to correct such discrepancies shall be borne by Contractor.

3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

Supplement as provided in Division 01.

3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS

Add the following new paragraph:

3.4.4 After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the

substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements of the Specifications, Division 01. Refer to Division 01 for supplemental information.

3.5 WARRANTY


3.8 ALLOWANCES


3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES


3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE


3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES


3.13 USE OF SITE


3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING


3.15 CLEANING UP


ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

Add the following new paragraph

6.1.5 Coordinated construction work under this Contract includes, but not be limited to, providing concealed

blocking as noted for attachment of separate contract items in locations necessary for the actual items to be installed. Providing proper dimensional coordination of separate contract supplied items for general construction work and trim that is to meet and/or adjoin Furniture, Fixtures, Equipment and Accessories.

6.1.6 It is a requirement of the Contractor’s work schedule to provide the cooperation, coordination and

exchange of information necessary for a timely execution of separate contract work.


ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK

7.1 GENERAL

Supplement as provided in Division1.

Add the following new paragraphs:

7.1.4 Except as provided in this article, no oral statement, or direction of Architect or Owner shall be treated as a

Change Order or entitle Contractor to an adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

7.1.5 Unit prices shall be inclusive of all costs including mark-up for overhead and profit and shall be applied to

units of measure as defined in the Contract Documents for each category of Work.

7.1.6 The allowance for the combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner shall be based on the following schedule:

7.1.6.1 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s own forces, 15 percent of the cost.

7.1.6.2 For the Contractor, for Work performed by the Contractor’s Subcontractor, 10 percent of the amount due the Subcontractor.

7.1.6.3 For each Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor involved, for Work performed by that Subcontractor’s or Sub-subcontractor’s own forces, 15 percent of the cost.

7.1.6.4 For each Subcontractor, for Work performed by the Subcontractor’s Sub-subcontractors, 10 percent of the amount due the Sub-subcontractor.

7.1.6.5 Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6.

7.1.6.6 In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all proposals, except those so minor that their propriety can be seen by inspection, shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs including labor, materials and Subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are Subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. In no case will a change involving over $2,000.00 be approved without such itemization.

ARTICLE 8 - TIME

8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

Add the following new paragraphs

8.3.4 Apart from extension of time, no payment or claim for damages shall be made to Contractor as compensation for damages for any ordinary delays or hindrances from any cause whatsoever in the progress of the Work, notwithstanding whether such delay be avoidable or unavoidable.

8.3.5 In order to claim an inclement weather delay day, Contractor must:

8.3.5.1 Document, in writing, that the weather on the particular day was of such nature (rain, wind, snow, ice, and

subsequent resultant effects) that it significantly impacted its ability to make progress on critical path work items. Inclement weather delay days will not be granted for weekends or holidays unless Contractor can demonstrate that it had been and intended to work on these days. Provide weather station/guage present on site and that all claims must be backed up by that instrument?

8.3.5.2 Submit such delay claims on a weekly basis, not more than 7 days following the day of occurrence.

8.3.5.3 Summarize the number of days claimed for the entire month accompanying each month’s application for

payment.


ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES


9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT


Add the following new subparagraph:

9.3.4 Unless otherwise stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Owner will retain, until Final Payment, 10

percent of the amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments, payable 30 days after Substantial Completion and/or satisfactory evidence to the owner that all payments, bills, and claims have been paid.

Add following Sub-subparagraphs:

9.3.5 Monthly Applications for Payment shall include waivers of liens for all work included in previous months' application for payment. Waiver of Liens for subcontractors and materialmen shall be total amount paid prior to previous months' application for payment.

9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION

Add following Sub-subparagraph 9.5.1.8 to Subparagraph 9.5.1:

9.5.1.8 Failure to submit written plan indicating action by Contractor to regain time schedule for completion of Work within Contract Time.

9.5.1.9 Failure to keep record documents current.

9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION


9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

Add the following new paragraph

9.10.2.1 In addition to the items listed in 9.10.2, the Contractor shall deliver 4 sets of the following items to the

Owner before final payment will be made:

1. Other close-out submittals as specified in Division 01.

2. Project record documents as specified in Division 01.

3. Operations and maintenance data as specified in Division 01.

4. All warranties as required on specific products or portions of the Work, in format outlined in Division 01.

5. Spare parts, overages, and maintenance materials as outlined in Division 01 and described in the various technical sections.

6. Certificates of occupancy.

7. Copies of all inspection tags from authorities having jurisdiction.

8. Executed Certificate of Substantial Completion.


ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS

11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

Add the following new Sub-subparagraphs:

11.1.1.9 Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including:

Worker’s compensation:

Comprehensive General Liability (including Premises – Operations; Independent Contractors; Protective; Products and Completed Operations; Broad Form Property Damage; Contractual):

Property Damage Liability Insurance shall include coverage for the following hazards as applicable:

X (Explosion), C (Collapse), U (Underground).

Comprehensive Automobile Liability

Provide in limits of liability as determined by the Owner.

11.1.1.10 Insurance certificate(s) shall specify Owner as the certificate holder and (except for Workers' Compensation) as an additional insured.

11.1.2 Add the following to the first sentence after the word “law”

“or as otherwise required by the Owner”

11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE

Delete sub-paragraph in its entirety and substitute the following:

11.2.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain for the duration of the Contract a standard Owner’s and contractor’s Protective Liability Policy, as outlined in Paragraph 11.1, naming the Owner and Architect as insured. The Policy shall designate the Contractor and all sub-contractors. The Policy shall be endorsed to provide that the immunity of the Owner from suite shall not be a defense for the insurance company.

11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE

In the first sentence, replace the word “Owner” with “Contractor”.

Add the following sub-paragraph 11.3.1.6:

11.4.11 The Contractor shall furnish all insurance called for in paragraph “Property Insurance”. The roles of Owner and Contractor when related each to the other are reversed for the purpose of accomplishing Contractor insurance responsibility with the exception that Contractor shall remain responsible for determining need for any additional coverage for his interest.

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS


END OF DOCUMENT

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SUMMARY Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 011000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 011000

SUMMARY

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT A. Project Name: Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas B. Developer’s Name: Ardent Residential, Austin, Texas. C. Architect's Name: The Davies Collaborative, Austin, Texas. D. The Project consists of the construction of a new, 4-story, 235-unit multi-family residential apartment

project, with 390 surface parking spaces, amenities, and associated site work, located in Austin, Texas.

1.2 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Owner intends to occupy portions of the Project upon Substantial Completion of each. Confirm

phasing of the work to accommodate owner’s schedule. B. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict and to facilitate Owner's operations. C. Schedule the Work to accommodate Owner occupancy.

1.3 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.

1. Owner occupancy. 2. Work by Others.

B. Provide access to and from site as required by law and by Owner: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by code open during

construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered. 2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

C. Existing building spaces may not be used for storage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 012000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 012000

PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Procedures for preparation and submittal of applications for progress payments. B. Documentation of changes in Contract Price and Contract Time. C. Change procedures. D. Correlation of Contractor submittals based on changes. E. Procedures for preparation and submittal of application for final payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form

specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. B. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. C. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date of Owner-Contractor Agreement.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Electronic media printout including equivalent information will be considered in lieu of standard form

specified; submit sample to Architect for approval. C. Forms filled out by hand will not be accepted. D. For each item, provide a column for listing each of the following:

1. Item Number. 2. Description of work. 3. Scheduled Values. 4. Previous Applications. 5. Work in Place and Stored Materials under this Application. 6. Authorized Change Orders. 7. Total Completed and Stored to Date of Application. 8. Percentage of Completion. 9. Balance to Finish. 10. Retainage.

E. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. F. Use data from approved Schedule of Values. Provide dollar value in each column for each line item for

portion of work performed and for stored products. G. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar

amount as for an original item of Work. H. Submit three copies of each Application for Payment. I. Include the following with the application:

1. Transmittal letter as specified for Submittals in Section 013000. 2. Construction progress schedule, revised and current as specified in Section 013000. 3. Current construction photographs specified in Section 013000. 4. Project record documents as specified in Section 017800, for review by Owner which will be

returned to the Contractor. 5. Affidavits attesting to off-site stored products.

J. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide one copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 012000 - 2 14 December 2015

1.4 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES A. For minor changes not involving an adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time, Architect will

issue instructions directly to Contractor. B. For other required changes, Architect will issue a document signed by Owner instructing Contractor to

proceed with the change, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. The document will describe the required changes and will designate method of determining any

change in Contract Price or Contract Time. 2. Promptly execute the change.

C. For changes for which advance pricing is desired, Architect will issue a document that includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised drawings and specifications, a change in Contract Time for executing the change with a stipulation of any overtime work required and the period of time during which the requested price will be considered valid. Contractor shall prepare and submit a fixed price quotation within 14 days.

D. Computation of Change in Contract Amount: As specified in the Agreement and Conditions of the Contract. 1. For change requested by Architect for work falling under a fixed price contract, the amount will

be based on Contractor's price quotation. 2. For change requested by Contractor, the amount will be based on the Contractor's request for a

Change Order as approved by Architect. 3. For pre-determined unit prices and quantities, the amount will based on the fixed unit prices. 4. For change ordered by Architect without a quotation from Contractor, the amount will be

determined by Architect based on the Contractor's substantiation of costs as specified for Time and Material work.

E. Substantiation of Costs: Provide full information required for evaluation. 1. On request, provide following data:

a. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. b. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. c. Overhead and profit. d. Justification for any change in Contract Time. e. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.

2. Support each claim for additional costs with additional information: a. Origin and date of claim. b. Dates and times work was performed, and by whom. c. Time records and wage rates paid. d. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented.

3. For Time and Material work, submit itemized account and supporting data after completion of change, within time limits indicated in the Conditions of the Contract.

F. Execution of Change Orders: Architect will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract.

G. After execution of Change Order, promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price.

H. Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of work affected by the change, and resubmit.

I. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.

1.5 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying total adjusted

Contract Price, previous payments, and sum remaining due. B. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished:

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ALLOWANCES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 012100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 012100

ALLOWANCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cash allowances. B. Contingency allowance. C. Inspecting and testing allowances. D. Payment and modification procedures relating to allowances.

1.2 CASH ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Cash Allowances: Cost of product to Contractor or subcontractor, less applicable

trade discounts , less cost of delivery to site , less applicable taxes . B. Costs Not Included in Cash Allowances: Product delivery to site and handling at the site, including

unloading, uncrating, and storage; protection of products from elements and from damage; and labor for installation and finishing.

C. Architect Responsibilities: 1. Consult with Contractor for consideration and selection of products , suppliers , and installers. 2. Select products in consultation with Owner and transmit decision to Contractor. 3. Prepare Change Order.

D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Assist Architect in selection of products , suppliers , and installers. 2. Obtain proposals from suppliers and installers and offer recommendations. 3. On notification of which products have been selected, execute purchase agreement with

designated supplier and installer. 4. Arrange for and process shop drawings, product data, and samples. Arrange for delivery. 5. Promptly inspect products upon delivery for completeness, damage, and defects. Submit

claims for transportation damage. E. Differences in costs will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.3 CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE A. Contractor's costs for products, delivery, installation, labor, insurance, payroll, taxes, bonding,

equipment rental, overhead and profit will be included in Change Orders authorizing expenditure of funds from this Contingency Allowance.

B. Funds will be drawn from the Contingency Allowance only by Change Order. C. At closeout of Contract, funds remaining in Contingency Allowance will be credited to Owner by

Change Order.

1.4 INSPECTING AND TESTING ALLOWANCES A. Costs Included in Inspecting and Testing Allowances: Cost of engaging an inspecting or testing

agency; execution of inspecting and tests; and reporting results. B. Costs Not Included in the Inspecting and Testing Allowances:

1. Costs of incidental labor and facilities required to assist inspecting or testing agency. 2. Costs of testing services used by Contractor separate from Contract Document requirements. 3. Costs of retesting upon failure of previous tests as determined by Architect.

C. Payment Procedures: 1. Submit one copy of the inspecting or testing firm's invoice with next application for payment. 2. Pay invoice on approval by Architect.

D. Differences in cost will be adjusted by Change Order.

1.5 ALLOWANCES SCHEDULE A. To be determined.



END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas UNIT PRICES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 012200 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 012200

UNIT PRICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. List of unit prices, for use in preparing Bids. B. Measurement and payment criteria applicable to Work performed under a unit price payment method. C. Defect assessment and non-payment for rejected work.

1.2 COSTS INCLUDED A. Unit Prices included on the Bid Form shall include full compensation for all required labor, products,

tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit.

1.3 UNIT QUANTITIES SPECIFIED A. Quantities indicated in the Bid Form are for bidding and contract purposes only. Quantities and

measurements of actual Work will determine the payment amount.

1.4 MEASUREMENT OF QUANTITIES A. Measurement methods delineated in the individual specification sections complement the criteria of

this section. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the individual specification section govern. B. Take all measurements and compute quantities. Measurements and quantities will be verified by

Architect. C. Assist by providing necessary equipment, workers, and survey personnel as required. D. Measurement Devices:

1. Weigh Scales: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable state Weights and Measures department within the past year.

2. Platform Scales: Of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate the conveying vehicle. 3. Metering Devices: Inspected, tested and certified by the applicable state department within the

past year. E. Measurement by Weight: Concrete reinforcing steel, rolled or formed steel or other metal shapes will

be measured by handbook weights. Welded assemblies will be measured by handbook or scale weight.

F. Measurement by Volume: Measured by cubic dimension using mean length, width and height or thickness.

G. Measurement by Area: Measured by square dimension using mean length and width or radius. H. Linear Measurement: Measured by linear dimension, at the item centerline or mean chord. I. Stipulated Price Measurement: Items measured by weight, volume, area, or linear means or

combination, as appropriate, as a completed item or unit of the Work. J. Perform surveys required to determine quantities, including control surveys to establish measurement

reference lines. Notify Architect prior to starting work. K. Contractor's Engineer Responsibilities: Sign surveyor's field notes or keep duplicate field notes ,

calculate and certify quantities for payment purposes.

1.5 PAYMENT A. Payment for Work governed by unit prices will be made on the basis of the actual measurements and

quantities of Work that is incorporated in or made necessary by the Work and accepted by the Architect, multiplied by the unit price.

B. Payment will not be made for any of the following: 1. Products wasted or disposed of in a manner that is not acceptable. 2. Products determined as unacceptable before or after placement. 3. Products not completely unloaded from the transporting vehicle. 4. Products placed beyond the lines and levels of the required Work. 5. Products remaining on hand after completion of the Work. 6. Loading, hauling, and disposing of rejected Products.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas UNIT PRICES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 012200 - 2 14 December 2015

1.6 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct one

of the following remedies: 1. The defective Work may remain, but the unit price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the

discretion of Architect. 2. The defective Work will be partially repaired to the instructions of the Architect, and the unit

price will be adjusted to a new unit price at the discretion of Architect. C. The individual specification sections may modify these options or may identify a specific formula or

percentage price reduction. D. The authority of Architect to assess the defect and identify payment adjustment is final.

1.7 SCHEDULE OF UNIT PRICES A. Unit Price No. 1: Import of fill material. B. Unit Price No. 2: Removal of rock.



END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ALTERNATES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 012300 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 012300

ALTERNATES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Description of alternates. B. Procedures for pricing alternates. C. Documentation of changes to Contract Price and Contract Time.

1.2 ACCEPTANCE OF ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at Owner's option.

Accepted alternates will be identified in the Owner-Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work to integrate the Work of each alternate.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES A. To be determined.



END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 013000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 013000

ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electronic document submittal service. B. Preconstruction meeting. C. Progress meetings. D. Construction progress schedule. E. Progress photographs. F. Submittals for review, information, and project closeout. G. Number of copies of submittals. H. Submittal procedures.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 011000 - Summary: Work covered by each contract, occupancy, . B. Section 017000 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional coordination requirements. C. Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents.

1.3 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Project Coordinator: Construction Manager. B. Cooperate with the Project Coordinator in allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and

sheds, for access, traffic, and parking facilities. C. During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through the Project Coordinator. D. Comply with Project Coordinator's procedures for intra-project communications; submittals, reports and

records, schedules, coordination drawings, and recommendations; and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.

E. Comply with instructions of the Project Coordinator for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities.

F. Coordinate field engineering and layout work under instructions of the Project Coordinator. G. Make the following types of submittals to Architect through the Project Coordinator:

1. Requests for interpretation. 2. Requests for substitution. 3. Shop drawings, product data, and samples. 4. Test and inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions and field reports. 6. Applications for payment and change order requests. 7. Progress schedules. 8. Coordination drawings. 9. Closeout submittals.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL SERVICE A. All documents transmitted for purposes of administration of the contract are to be in electronic (PDF)

format and transmitted via an Internet-based submittal service, hosted by the Contractor, that receives, logs and stores documents, provides electronic stamping and signatures, and notifies addressees via email. 1. Besides submittals for review, information, and closeout, this procedure applies to requests for

information (RFIs), progress documentation, contract modification documents (e.g. supplementary instructions, change proposals, change orders), applications for payment, field reports and meeting minutes, and any other document any participant wishes to make part of the project record.

2. Contractor and Architect are required to use this service. 3. It is Contractor's responsibility to submit documents in PDF format. 4. Subcontractors, suppliers, and Architect's consultants will be permitted to use the service at no

extra charge.


5. Users of the service need an email address, Internet access, and PDF review software that includes ability to mark up and apply electronic stamps (such as Adobe Acrobat, www.adobe.com, or Bluebeam PDF Revu, www.bluebeam.com), unless such software capability is provided by the service provider.

6. Paper document transmittals will not be reviewed; emailed PDF documents will not be reviewed.

7. All other specified submittal and document transmission procedures apply, except that electronic document requirements to not apply to samples or color selection charts.

B. Project Closeout: Architect will determine when to terminate the service for the project and is responsible for obtaining archive copies of files for Owner.

3.2 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice of Award. B. Attendance Required:

1. Owner. 2. Architect. 3. Contractor.

C. Agenda: 1. Execution of Owner- Contractor Agreement. 2. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 3. Distribution of Contract Documents. 4. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of Products, schedule of values, and progress

schedule. 5. Designation of personnel representing the parties to Contract and Architect. 6. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for

payments, proposal request, Change Orders, and Contract closeout procedures. 7. Scheduling.

D. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at maximum monthly intervals. B. Make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Owner, Architect, as

appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda:

1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems that impede, or will impede, planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off-site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE A. Within 10 days after date of the Agreement, submit preliminary schedule defining planned operations

for the first 60 days of Work, with a general outline for remainder of Work. B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for

review. 1. Include written certification that major contractors have reviewed and accepted proposed

schedule. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment.


3.5 PROGRESS PHOTOGRAPHS A. Submit not less than 20 photographs with each application for payment, taken not more than 3 days

prior to submission of application for payment. B. Photography Type: Digital; electronic files. C. In addition to periodic, recurring views, take photographs of each of the following events:

1. Completion of site clearing. 2. Excavations in progress. 3. Foundations in progress and upon completion. 4. Structural framing in progress and upon completion. 5. Enclosure of building, upon completion. 6. Final completion, minimum of ten (10) photos.

D. Views: 1. Provide non-aerial photographs from four cardinal views at each specified time, until Date of

Substantial Completion. 2. Consult with Architect for instructions on views required. 3. Provide factual presentation. 4. Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field,

and minimum distortion. E. Digital Photographs: 24 bit color, minimum resolution of 1024 by 768, in JPG format; provide files

unaltered by photo editing software. 1. Delivery Medium: Via email. 2. File Naming: Include project identification, date and time of view, and view identification. 3. PDF File: Assemble all photos into printable pages in PDF format, with 2 to 3 photos per page,

each photo labeled with file name; one PDF file per submittal. 4. Hard Copy: Printed hardcopy (grayscale) of PDF file and point of view sketch.

3.6 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for review:

1. Product data. 2. Shop drawings. 3. Samples for selection. 4. Samples for verification. 5. Sample warranties.

B. Submit to Architect for review for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

C. Samples will be reviewed only for aesthetic, color, or finish selection. D. After review, provide copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article

below and for record documents purposes described in Section 017800 – Closeout Submittals.

3.7 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them for information:

1. Design data. 2. Certificates. 3. Test reports. 4. Inspection reports. 5. Manufacturer's instructions. 6. Manufacturer's field reports. 7. Other types indicated.

B. Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator or for Owner. No action will be taken.

3.8 SUBMITTALS FOR PROJECT CLOSEOUT A. When the following are specified in individual sections, submit them at project closeout:

1. Project record documents. 2. Operation and maintenance data. 3. Warranties. 4. Bonds. 5. Other types as indicated.

B. Submit for Owner's benefit during and after project completion.


3.9 NUMBER OF COPIES OF SUBMITTALS A. Documents: Submit one electronic copy in PDF format; an electronically-marked up file will be

returned. Create PDFs at native size and right-side up; illegible files will be rejected. B. Samples: Submit the number specified in individual specification sections; one of which will be

retained by Architect. 1. After review, produce duplicates. 2. Retained samples will not be returned to Contractor unless specifically so stated.

3.10 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Keep submittal schedule, updated during Construction. B. Transmit each submittal with approved form. C. Sequentially number the transmittal form. Revise submittals with original number and a sequential

alphabetic suffix. D. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent drawing and detail number, and

specification section number, as appropriate on each copy. E. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, approval, verification of Products

required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. For concurrent reviews, allow 21 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor.

F. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and coordinate submission of related items. G. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the Contractor. H. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations that may be detrimental

to successful performance of the completed Work. I. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. J. When revised for resubmission, identify all changes made since previous submission. K. Distribute reviewed submittals as appropriate. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply

with requirements. L. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 013216 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 013216

CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preliminary schedule. B. Construction progress schedule, bar chart type.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 011000 - Summary: Work sequence.

1.3 REFERENCES A. AGC (CPSM) - Construction Planning and Scheduling Manual; Associated General Contractors of

America ; 2004; Thomas E. Glavinich, D.E. P.E. B. M-H (CPM) - CPM in Construction Management - Project Management with CPM, O'Brien, McGraw-

Hill Book Company; 7th

edition, 2009.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Within 10 days after date of Agreement, submit preliminary schedule to Owner and Architect . B. If preliminary schedule requires revision after review, submit revised schedule within 10 days. C. Within 20 days after review of preliminary schedule, submit draft of proposed complete schedule for

review. D. Within 10 days after joint review, submit complete schedule. E. Submit updated schedule with each Application for Payment. F. Submit the number of opaque reproductions that Contractor requires, plus two copies that will be

retained by Owner.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduler: Contractor's personnel or specialist Consultant specializing in CPM scheduling with one

years minimum experience in scheduling construction work of a complexity comparable to this Project, and having use of computer facilities capable of delivering a detailed graphic printout within 48 hours of request.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PRELIMINARY SCHEDULE A. Prepare preliminary schedule in the form of a horizontal bar chart.

3.2 BAR CHARTS A. Include a separate bar for each major portion of Work or operation. B. Identify the first work day of each week.

3.3 REVIEW AND EVALUATION OF SCHEDULE A. Participate in joint review and evaluation of schedule with Architect at each submittal. B. Evaluate project status to determine work behind schedule and work ahead of schedule. C. After review, revise as necessary as result of review, and resubmit within 10 days.

3.4 UPDATING SCHEDULE A. Maintain schedules to record actual start and finish dates of completed activities. B. Indicate progress of each activity to date of revision, with projected completion date of each activity. C. Annotate diagrams to graphically depict current status of Work. D. Identify activities modified since previous submittal, major changes in Work, and other identifiable

changes. E. Indicate changes required to maintain Date of Substantial Completion. F. Submit reports required to support recommended changes.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 013216 - 2 14 December 2015

3.5 DISTRIBUTION OF SCHEDULE A. Distribute copies of updated schedules to Contractor's project site file, to Subcontractors, suppliers,

Architect, Owner , and other concerned parties. B. Instruct recipients to promptly report, in writing, problems anticipated by projections shown in

schedules.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 014000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 014000

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. References and standards. B. Quality assurance submittals. C. Mock-ups. D. Control of installation. E. Tolerances. F. Testing and inspection services. G. Manufacturers' field services.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Testing Agency Qualifications:

1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer.

2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

B. Design Data: Submit for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

C. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Architect and to Contractor. 1. Test report submittals are for Architect's knowledge as contract administrator for the limited

purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents, or for Owner's information.

D. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting

reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. 2. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product, but must be

acceptable to Architect. E. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed

instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the Owner's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

F. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given

and the design concept expressed in the contract documents. G. Erection Drawings: Submit drawings for Architect's benefit as contract administrator or for Owner.

1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

1.3 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS A. For products and workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the

Project Manual, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue current on date of Contract Documents, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. Obtain copies of standards where required by product specification sections. D. Maintain copy at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until

Substantial Completion. E. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding.


F. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of Architect shall be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

1.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES A. Owner will employ services of an independent testing agency to perform certain specified testing;

payment for cost of services will be derived from allowance specified in Section 012100; see Section 012100 and applicable sections for description of services included in allowance.

B. Employment of agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and

workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from

Architect before proceeding. D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent

tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship. E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality. F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer. G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses,

vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.2 MOCK-UPS A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective

product specification sections. B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals,

and finishes. C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work. D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Architect and is specified in product specification sections to be

removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not

permit tolerances to accumulate. B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract

Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.4 TESTING AND INSPECTION A. See individual specification sections for testing required. B. Testing Agency Duties:

1. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services.

2. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with specified standards. 3. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. 4. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work

or products. 5. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Architect. 6. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

C. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.


D. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used

that require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers'

facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with Owner's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

E. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Architect.

F. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be paid for by Contractor.

3.5 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES A. When specified in individual specification sections, require material or product suppliers or

manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, start-up of equipment, test, adjust and balance of equipment, as applicable, and to initiate instructions when necessary.

B. Report observations and site decisions or instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions.

3.6 DEFECT ASSESSMENT A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements. B. If, in the opinion of Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Architect will direct an

appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 014100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 014100

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Regulatory requirements applicable to this project are the following (edition and local amendments as

adopted by authority having jurisdiction): B. ATBCB ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. C. 29 CFR 1910 - Occupational Safety and Health Standards ; current edition; as a work place. D. ICC (IFC) - ICC International Fire Code. E. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. F. ICC (IBC) - ICC International Building Code. G. ICC (IPC) - ICC International Plumbing Code. H. ICC (IMC) - ICC International Mechanical Code. I. ICC (IFGC) - ICC International Fuel Gas Code. J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code K. ICC (IEC) - ICC International Electrical Code L. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Regulations: Local jurisdiction. M. TDLR – Texas Department of Licensing and Registration. N. TAS – Texas Accessibility Standards.

O. Land Development Code of the City of Austin. P. Texas Elevator Code. Q. Texas Rules and Regulations for Pools. R. Regulatory requirements as described in each specification Section.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 014000 - Quality Requirements.



END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas DEFINITIONS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 014216 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 014216

DEFINITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. This section supplements the definitions contained in the General Conditions. B. Other definitions are included in individual specification sections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Furnish: To supply, deliver, unload, and inspect for damage. B. Install: To unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, finish, cure, protect, clean, start up, and make ready

for use. C. Product: Material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the work result.

Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new, never before used, or re-used materials or equipment.

D. Project Manual: The book-sized volume that includes the procurement requirements (if any), the contracting requirements, and the specifications.

E. Provide: To furnish and install. F. Supply: Same as Furnish.



END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 015000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 015000

TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary utilities. B. Temporary telecommunications services. C. Temporary sanitary facilities. D. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures, and fencing. E. Security requirements. F. Vehicular access and parking. G. Waste removal facilities and services. H. Project identification sign. I. Field offices.

1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and pay for all electrical power, lighting, water, heating and cooling, and ventilation required for

construction purposes. B. New permanent facilities may be used. C. Use trigger-operated nozzles for water hoses, to avoid waste of water.

1.3 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SERVICES A. Provide, maintain, and pay for telecommunications services to field office at time of project

mobilization. B. Telecommunications services shall include:

1. Windows-based personal computer dedicated to project telecommunications, with necessary software and laser printer.

2. Internet Connections: Minimum of one; DSL modem or faster.

1.4 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide and maintain required facilities and enclosures. Provide at time of project mobilization. B. New permanent facilities may not be used during construction operations. C. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. D. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition as originally found.

1.5 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to prevent access to areas that

could be hazardous to workers or the public , to allow for owner's use of site and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition.

B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights-of-way and for public access to existing building.

C. Protect non-owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site, and structures from damage.

1.6 FENCING A. Construction: Commercial grade chain link fence. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with

locks.

1.7 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable

working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self-closing hardware and locks.

1.8 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,

vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 015000 - 2 14 December 2015

1.9 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING A. Comply with regulations relating to use of streets and sidewalks, access to emergency facilities, and

access for emergency vehicles. B. Coordinate access and haul routes with governing authorities and Owner. C. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. D. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. E. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not

adequate, provide additional off-site parking.

1.10 WASTE REMOVAL A. Provide waste removal facilities and services as required to maintain the site in clean and orderly

condition. B. Provide containers with lids. Remove trash from site periodically. C. If materials to be recycled or re-used on the project must be stored on-site, provide suitable non-

combustible containers; locate containers holding flammable material outside the structure unless otherwise approved by the authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Open free-fall chutes are not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.

1.11 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide project identification sign of design and construction indicated on Drawings. B. Erect on site at location established by Architect. C. No other signs are allowed without Owner permission except those required by law.

1.12 FIELD OFFICES A. Office: Weathertight, with lighting, electrical outlets, heating, cooling equipment, and equipped with

sturdy furniture , drawing rack and drawing display table. B. Provide space for Project meetings, with table and chairs to accommodate 6 persons. C. Locate offices a minimum distance of 30 feet from existing and new structures.

1.13 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary utilities, equipment, facilities, materials, prior to Substantial Completion inspection. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore new permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.



END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 015713 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 015713

TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Prevention of erosion due to construction activities. B. Prevention of sedimentation of waterways, open drainage ways, and storm and sanitary sewers due to

construction activities. C. Restoration of areas eroded due to insufficient preventive measures. D. Compensation of Owner for fines levied by authorities having jurisdiction due to non-compliance by

Contractor.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with all requirements of U.S. Environmental Protection Agency for erosion and sedimentation

control, as specified for the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Phases I and II, under requirements for the 2012 Construction General Permit (CGP) , whether the project is required by law to comply or not.

B. Also comply with all more stringent requirements of local jurisdiction. C. Develop and follow an Erosion and Sedimentation Prevention Plan and submit periodic inspection

reports. D. Do not begin clearing, grading, or other work involving disturbance of ground surface cover until

applicable permits have been obtained; furnish all documentation required to obtain applicable permits. E. Timing: Put preventive measures in place as soon as possible after disturbance of surface cover and

before precipitation occurs. F. Storm Water Runoff: Control increased storm water runoff due to disturbance of surface cover due to

construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent runoff into storm and sanitary sewer systems, including open drainage channels, in

excess of actual capacity or amount allowed by authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is less.

2. Anticipate runoff volume due to the most extreme short term and 24-hour rainfall events that might occur in 25 years.

G. Erosion On Site: Minimize wind, water, and vehicular erosion of soil on project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Control movement of sediment and soil from temporary stockpiles of soil. 2. Prevent development of ruts due to equipment and vehicular traffic. 3. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no

cost to Owner. H. Erosion Off Site: Prevent erosion of soil and deposition of sediment on other properties caused by

water leaving the project site due to construction activities for this project. 1. Prevent windblown soil from leaving the project site. 2. Prevent tracking of mud onto public roads outside site. 3. Prevent mud and sediment from flowing onto sidewalks and pavements. 4. If erosion occurs due to non-compliance with these requirements, restore eroded areas at no

cost to Owner. I. Sedimentation of Waterways On Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways on the project site,

including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner;

remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. If sediment basins are used as temporary preventive measures, pump dry and remove

deposited sediment after each storm. J. Sedimentation of Waterways Off Site: Prevent sedimentation of waterways off the project site,

including rivers, streams, lakes, ponds, open drainage ways, storm sewers, and sanitary sewers. 1. If sedimentation occurs, install or correct preventive measures immediately at no cost to Owner;

remove deposited sediments; comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. K. Open Water: Prevent standing water that could become stagnant. L. Maintenance: Maintain temporary preventive measures until permanent measures have been

established.


1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan:

1. Submit within 2 weeks after Notice to Proceed. 2. Include:

a. Site plan identifying soils and vegetation, existing erosion problems, and areas vulnerable to erosion due to topography, soils, vegetation, or drainage.

b. Site plan showing grading; new improvements; temporary roads, traffic accesses, and other temporary construction; and proposed preventive measures.

c. Where extensive areas of soil will be disturbed, include storm water flow and volume calculations, soil loss predictions, and proposed preventive measures.

d. Schedule of temporary preventive measures, in relation to ground disturbing activities. e. Other information required by law. f. Format required by law is acceptable, provided any additional information specified is

also included. 3. Obtain the approval of the Plan by authorities having jurisdiction. 4. Obtain the approval of the Plan by Owner.

C. Certificate: Mill certificate for silt fence fabric attesting that fabric and factory seams comply with specified requirements, signed by legally authorized official of manufacturer; indicate actual minimum average roll values; identify fabric by roll identification numbers.

D. Inspection Reports: Submit report of each inspection; identify each preventive measure, indicate condition, and specify maintenance or repair required and accomplished.

E. Maintenance Instructions: Provide instructions covering inspection and maintenance for temporary measures that must remain after Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Grass Seed For Temporary Cover: Select a species appropriate to climate, planting season, and

intended purpose. If same area will later be planted with permanent vegetation, do not use species known to be excessively competitive or prone to volunteer in subsequent seasons.

B. Bales: Air dry, rectangular straw bales. 1. Cross Section: 14 by 18 inches, minimum. 2. Bindings: Wire or string, around long dimension.

C. Bale Stakes: One of the following, minimum 3 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot. 2. Wood, 2 by 2 inches in cross section.

D. Silt Fence Fabric: Polypropylene geotextile resistant to common soil chemicals, mildew, and insects; non-biodegradable; in longest lengths possible; fabric including seams with the following minimum average roll lengths: 1. Average Opening Size: 30 U.S. Std. Sieve, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM

D4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.05 sec^-1, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4491. 3. Ultraviolet Resistance: Retaining at least 70 percent of tensile strength, when tested in

accordance with ASTM D4355 after 500 hours exposure. 4. Tensile Strength: 100 lb-f, minimum, in cross-machine direction; 124 lb-f, minimum, in machine

direction; when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 5. Elongation: 15 to 30 percent, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4632. 6. Tear Strength: 55 lb-f, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D4533. 7. Color: Manufacturer's standard , with embedment and fastener lines preprinted.

E. Silt Fence Posts: One of the following, minimum 5 feet long: 1. Steel U- or T-section, with minimum mass of 1.33 lb per linear foot.

F. Gravel: See Section 321123 for aggregate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine site and identify existing features that contribute to erosion resistance; maintain such existing

features to greatest extent possible.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Schedule work so that soil surfaces are left exposed for the minimum amount of time.


3.3 SCOPE OF PREVENTIVE MEASURES A. In all cases, if permanent erosion resistant measures have been installed temporary preventive

measures are not required. B. Construction Entrances: Traffic-bearing aggregate surface.

1. Width: As required; 20 feet, minimum. 2. Length: 50 feet, minimum. 3. Provide at each construction entrance from public right-of-way. 4. Where necessary to prevent tracking of mud onto right-of-way, provide wheel washing area out

of direct traffic lane, with drain into sediment trap or basin. C. Linear Sediment Barriers: Made of silt fences.

1. Provide linear sediment barriers: a. Along downhill perimeter edge of disturbed areas, including soil stockpiles.

2. Space sediment barriers with the following maximum slope length upslope from barrier: a. Slope of Less Than 2 Percent: 100 feet.. b. Slope Between 2 and 5 Percent: 75 feet. c. Slope Between 5 and 10 Percent: 50 feet. d. Slope Between 10 and 20 Percent: 25 feet. e. Slope Over 20 Percent: 15 feet.

D. Storm Drain Curb Inlet Sediment Trap: Protect each curb inlet using one of the following measures: 1. Filter fabric wrapped around hollow concrete blocks blocking entire inlet face area; use one

piece of fabric wrapped at least 1-1/2 times around concrete blocks and secured to prevent dislodging; orient cores of blocks so runoff passes into inlet.

2. Straw bale row blocking entire inlet face area; anchor into pavement. E. Storm Drain Drop Inlet Sediment Traps: As detailed on drawings. F. Temporary Splash Pads: Stone aggregate over filter fabric; size to suit application; provide at

downspout outlets and storm water outlets. G. Soil Stockpiles: Protect using one of the following measures:

1. Cover with polyethylene film, secured by placing soil on outer edges. 2. Cover with mulch at least 4 inches thickness of pine needles, sawdust, bark, wood chips, or

shredded leaves, or 6 inches of straw or hay. H. Mulching: Use only for areas that may be subjected to erosion for less than 6 months. I. Temporary Seeding: Use where temporary vegetated cover is required.

3.4 INSTALLATION A. Traffic-Bearing Aggregate Surface:

1. Excavate minimum of 6 inches. 2. Place geotextile fabric full width and length, with minimum 12 inch overlap at joints. 3. Place and compact at least 6 inches of 1.5 to 3.5 inch diameter stone.

B. Silt Fences: 1. Store and handle fabric in accordance with ASTM D4873. 2. Where slope gradient is less than 3:1 or barriers will be in place less than 6 months, use

nominal 16 inch high barriers with minimum 36 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 4 inches in ground.

3. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 or barriers will be in place over 6 months, use nominal 28 inch high barriers, minimum 48 inch long posts spaced at 6 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.

4. Where slope gradient is steeper than 3:1 and vertical height of slope between barriers is more than 20 feet, use nominal 32 inch high barriers with woven wire reinforcement and steel posts spaced at 4 feet maximum, with fabric embedded at least 6 inches in ground.

5. Install with top of fabric at nominal height and embedment as specified. 6. Do not splice fabric width; minimize splices in fabric length; splice at post only, overlapping at

least 18 inches, with extra post. 7. Fasten fabric to steel posts using wire, nylon cord, or integral pockets. 8. Wherever runoff will flow around end of barrier or over the top, provide temporary splash pad or

other outlet protection; at such outlets in the run of the barrier, make barrier not more than 12 inches high with post spacing not more than 4 feet.

C. Straw Bale Rows: 1. Install bales in continuous rows with ends butting tightly, with one bale at each end of row

turned uphill. 2. Install bales so that bindings are not in contact with the ground. 3. Embed bales at least 4 inches in the ground.


4. Anchor bales with at least two stakes per bale, driven at least 18 inches into the ground; drive first stake in each bale toward the previously placed bale to force bales together.

5. Fill gaps between ends of bales with loose straw wedged tightly. 6. Place soil excavated for trench against bales on the upslope side of the row, compacted.

D. Temporary Seeding: 1. When hydraulic seeder is used, seedbed preparation is not required. 2. When surface soil has been sealed by rainfall or consists of smooth undisturbed cut slopes, and

conventional or manual seeding is to be used, prepare seedbed by scarifying sufficiently to allow seed to lodge and germinate.

3. If temporary mulching was used on planting area but not removed, apply nitrogen fertilizer at 1 pound per 1000 sq ft.

4. On soils of very low fertility, apply 10-10-10 fertilizer at rate of 12 to 16 pounds per 1000 sq ft. 5. Incorporate fertilizer into soil before seeding. 6. Apply seed uniformly; if using drill or cultipacker seeders place seed 1/2 to 1 inch deep deep. 7. Irrigate as required to thoroughly wet soil to depth that will ensure germination, without causing

runoff or erosion. 8. Repeat irrigation as required until grass is established.

3.5 MAINTENANCE A. Inspect preventive measures weekly, within 24 hours after the end of any storm that produces 0.5

inches or more rainfall at the project site, and daily during prolonged rainfall. B. Repair deficiencies immediately. C. Silt Fences:

1. Promptly replace fabric that deteriorates unless need for fence has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-third of the height of the fence. 3. Repair fences that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other

causes. D. Straw Bale Rows:

1. Promptly replace bales that fall apart or otherwise deteriorate unless need has passed. 2. Remove silt deposits that exceed one-half of the height of the bales. 3. Repair bale rows that are undercut by runoff or otherwise damaged, whether by runoff or other

causes. E. Clean out temporary sediment control structures weekly and relocate soil on site. F. Place sediment in appropriate locations on site; do not remove from site.

3.6 CLEAN UP A. Remove temporary measures after permanent measures have been installed, unless permitted to

remain by Owner. B. Clean out temporary sediment control structures that are to remain as permanent measures. C. Where removal of temporary measures would leave exposed soil, shape surface to an acceptable

grade and finish to match adjacent ground surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 016000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 016000

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. General product requirements. B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection. C. Product option requirements. D. Substitution limitations and procedures. E. Maintenance materials, including extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Products List: Submit list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer,

trade name, and model number of each product. 1. Submit within 15 days after date of Agreement. 2. For products specified only by reference standards, list applicable reference standards.

B. Product Data Submittals: Submit manufacturer's standard published data. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information specific to this Project.

C. Shop Drawing Submittals: Prepared specifically for this Project; indicate utility and electrical characteristics, utility connection requirements, and location of utility outlets for service for functional equipment and appliances.

D. Sample Submittals: Illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. 1. For selection from standard finishes, submit samples of the full range of the manufacturer's

standard colors, textures, and patterns.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NEW PRODUCTS A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents. B. Do not use products having any of the following characteristics:

1. Made outside the United States, its territories, Canada, or Mexico. 2. Made using or containing CFC's or HCFC's. 3. Made of wood from newly cut old growth timber.

C. Where all other criteria are met, Contractor shall give preference to products that: 1. Are extracted, harvested, and/or manufactured closer to the location of the project. 2. Have longer documented life span under normal use. 3. Result in less construction waste. 4. Are made of vegetable materials that are rapidly renewable.

D. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacture for components being replaced. E. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and

materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. F. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to

electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections.

2.2 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those

standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers

named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a

request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

2.3 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials, spare parts, tools, and software of types and in quantities specified in

individual specification sections. B. Deliver to Project site; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 016000 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES A. Instructions to Bidders specify time restrictions for submitting requests for substitutions during the

bidding period. Comply with requirements specified in this section. B. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date of Agreement. C. Substitutions will not be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the

Contractor. D. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with

Contract Documents. E. A request for substitution constitutes a representation that the submitter:

1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product.

2. Will provide the same warranty for the substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work that may be required for the Work

to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension that may subsequently become apparent.

F. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

G. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit three copies of request for substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one

proposed substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product

equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject request.

3.2 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Coordinate schedule of product delivery to designated prepared areas in order to minimize site storage

time and potential damage to stored materials. B. Transport and handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Transport materials in covered trucks to prevent contamination of product and littering of surrounding

areas. D. Promptly inspect shipments to ensure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct,

and products are undamaged. E. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or

damage. F. Arrange for the return of packing materials, such as wood pallets, where economically feasible.

3.3 STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to

installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible. D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to

product. E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground. F. Provide bonded off-site storage and protection when site does not permit on-site storage or protection. G. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent

condensation and degradation of products. H. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign

matter. I. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining. J. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or

damage. K. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are

undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 017000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 017000

EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Examination, preparation, and general installation procedures. B. Pre-installation meetings. C. Cutting and patching. D. Surveying for laying out the work. E. Cleaning and protection. F. Starting of systems and equipment. G. Demonstration and instruction of Owner personnel. H. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures. I. General requirements for maintenance service.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Survey work: Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work.

1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing signed by the Land Surveyor, that the elevations and locations of

the work are in conformance with Contract Documents. 3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration that affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Effect on work of Owner or separate Contractor. f. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. g. Date and time work will be executed.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.

1.3 QUALIFICATIONS A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and

acceptable to Architect. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

B. For field engineering, employ a professional engineer of the discipline required for specific service on Project, licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

C. For design of temporary shoring and bracing, employ a Professional Engineer experienced in design of this type of work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Use of explosives is not permitted. B. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping

equipment. C. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil

erosion. D. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation

of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. E. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations.

Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere and over adjacent property.


F. Erosion and Sediment Control: Plan and execute work by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. 1. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. 2. Provide temporary measures such as berms, dikes, and drains, to prevent water flow. 3. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. 4. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply

corrective measures. G. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction

operations. H. Pest and Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from

damaging the work. I. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and

atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations. Comply with federal, state, and local regulations.

1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure

efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements , with provisions for accommodating items installed later.

B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements. C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with

building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work that are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections. G. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective work and

work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PATCHING MATERIALS A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and

extending work. B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where

necessary, referring to existing work as a standard. C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described

in Section 016000.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of

work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied

or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste

due to over-ordering or misfabrication. E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations. F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to

damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.


C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

3.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at the site prior to

commencing work of the section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section. C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting:

1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.4 LAYING OUT THE WORK A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work. B. Promptly notify Architect of any discrepancies discovered. C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points. D. Control datum for survey is that established by Owner provided survey. E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during

construction. F. Promptly report to Architect the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required

because of changes in grades or other reasons. G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without

prior written notice to Architect. H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices. I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points.

Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents. J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and similar appropriate

means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement; utility

locations, slopes, invert elevations, and items requested by Owner . 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, and ground floor elevations .

K. Periodically verify layouts by same means. L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. M. On completion of foundation walls and major site improvements, prepare a certified survey illustrating

dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.

3.5 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement. B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated. C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines,

unless otherwise indicated. D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated. E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Whenever possible, execute the work by methods that avoid cutting or patching. B. Perform whatever cutting and patching is necessary to:

1. Complete the work. 2. Fit products together to integrate with other work. 3. Provide openings for penetration of mechanical, electrical, and other services. 4. Match work that has been cut to adjacent work. 5. Repair areas adjacent to cuts to required condition. 6. Repair new work damaged by subsequent work. 7. Remove samples of installed work for testing when requested. 8. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

C. Execute work by methods that avoid damage to other work and that will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.


D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval. F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with

fire rated material in accordance with Section 078400, to full thickness of the penetrated element. I. Patching:

1. Finish patched surfaces to match finish that existed prior to patching. On continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

2. Match color, texture, and appearance. 3. Repair patched surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections

due to patching work. If defects are due to condition of substrate, repair substrate prior to repairing finish.

3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly

condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or

remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to

eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site periodically and dispose off-

site; do not burn or bury.

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations. B. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. C. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work

area to prevent damage. D. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. E. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of

heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain

recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.9 SYSTEM STARTUP A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation,

belt tension, control sequence, and for conditions that may cause damage. C. Verify tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the

equipment or system manufacturer. D. Verify that wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. E. Execute start-up under supervision of applicable Contractor personnel and manufacturer's

representative in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. F. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized

representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

G. Submit a written report that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTION A. See Section 017900 - Demonstration and Training.

3.11 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.


3.12 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final project assessment.

1. Clean areas to be occupied by Owner prior to final completion before Owner occupancy. B. Use cleaning materials that are nonhazardous. C. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and

foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. D. Remove all labels that are not permanent. Do not paint or otherwise cover fire test labels or

nameplates on mechanical and electrical equipment. E. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition with cleaning materials appropriate to the surface

and material being cleaned. F. Clean filters of operating equipment. G. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. H. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. I. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in

legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.13 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

1. Provide copies to Architect and Owner. B. Accompany Project Coordinator on preliminary inspection to determine items to be listed for

completion or correction in Contractor's Notice of Substantial Completion. C. Notify Architect when work is considered ready for Substantial Completion. D. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, work has been inspected,

and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's review. E. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion and comply with

requirements for access to Owner-occupied areas. F. Notify Architect and Owner’s Representative when work is considered finally complete and ready for

Multistage Unit and Project Review with Owner’s Representative. G. Complete items of work determined by Owner’s Representative's final inspection.

3.14 MAINTENANCE A. Provide service and maintenance of components indicated in specification sections. B. Maintenance Period: As indicated in specification sections or, if not indicated, not less than one year

from the Date of Substantial Completion or the length of the specified warranty, whichever is longer. C. Examine system components at a frequency consistent with reliable operation. Clean, adjust, and

lubricate as required. D. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of components. Repair or replace parts

whenever required. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original component. E. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior

written consent of the Owner.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 017823 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 017823

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance

manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification

sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and

field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically-indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name.

Include a complete electronically-linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. One paper copy. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return.

C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect [and Commissioning Agent] will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable.

D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect [and Commissioning Agent] will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's [and Commissioning Agent's] comments.

Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's [and Commissioning Agent's] comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.


E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system

and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems

contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data,

include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,

subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning

of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based upon file names.

Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel upon opening file.

F. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, [loose-leaf] [post-type] binders, in thickness

necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in

each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, [and] subject matter of contents [, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine]. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.


5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as

foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled

envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual

Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment

indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract

Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures.


5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source

information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source

information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.


E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly,

semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION AND DELIVERY A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an

organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by

emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and

maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data

indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each

system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual

for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets

pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the

information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of

component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project

Record Documents." G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and

maintenance documentation. H. Include transmittal with all deliveries to Owner. Request receipt confirmation.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 017839 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 017839

PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL


other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the

following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: Submit one paper copy and PDF electronic files of marked-up record prints

and one set(s) of plots from corrected record digital data files. Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy and PDF electronic files of marked-up record prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

c. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy and PDF electronic files of marked-up record prints, one set(s) of record digital data files, and three set(s) of record digital data file plots. Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy and one PDF copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy and one PDF copy of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit

duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping

requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit one paper copy of each submittal.

E. Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated in Project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to

identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.


c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. j. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original

Contract Drawings. 2. Format: DWG [ DXF] [DGN], Version [Insert designation], operating in Microsoft Windows Apple

Macintosh operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,

redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect through Construction Manager for resolution.

C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an

alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect and Construction Manager for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations

required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets.

Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that

correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from

that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be

readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment

furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.


3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file paper copy scanned PDF

electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies

substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be

readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's

written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file paper copy scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and title,

electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record

keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file paper copy scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section number and

title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record

document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's and Construction Manager's reference during normal working hours.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 017900 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 017900

DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Demonstration of products and systems where indicated in specific specification sections. B. Training of Owner personnel in operation and maintenance is required for:

1. All software-operated systems. 2. HVAC systems and equipment. 3. Plumbing equipment. 4. Electrical systems and equipment. 5. Conveying systems. 6. Items specified in individual product Sections.

C. Training of Owner personnel in care, cleaning, maintenance, and repair is required for: 1. Roofing, waterproofing, and other weather-exposed or moisture protection products. 2. Finishes, including flooring, wall finishes, ceiling finishes. 3. Fixtures and fittings. 4. Items specified in individual product Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Training Plan: Owner will designate personnel to be trained; tailor training to needs and skill-level of

attendees. 1. Submit to Owner. 2. Submit not less than four weeks prior to start of training. 3. Revise and resubmit until acceptable. 4. Provide an overall schedule showing all training sessions. 5. Include at least the following for each training session:

a. Identification, date, time, and duration. b. Description of products and/or systems to be covered. c. Name of firm and person conducting training; include qualifications. d. Intended audience, such as job description. e. Objectives of training and suggested methods of ensuring adequate training. f. Methods to be used, such as classroom lecture, live demonstrations, hands-on, etc. g. Media to be used, such a slides, hand-outs, etc. h. Training equipment required, such as projector, projection screen, etc., to be provided

by Contractor. C. Training Manuals: Provide training manual for each attendee; allow for minimum of two attendees per

training session. 1. Include applicable portion of O&M manuals. 2. Include copies of all hand-outs, slides, overheads, video presentations, etc., that are not

included in O&M manuals. 3. Provide one extra copy of each training manual to be included with operation and maintenance

data. D. Training Reports:

1. Identification of each training session, date, time, and duration. 2. Sign-in sheet showing names and job titles of attendees. 3. List of attendee questions and written answers given, including copies of and references to

supporting documentation required for clarification; include answers to questions that could not be answered in original training session.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Instructor Qualifications: Familiar with design, operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of the

relevant products and systems. 1. Provide as instructors the most qualified trainer of those contractors and/or installers who

actually supplied and installed the systems and equipment. 2. Where a single person is not familiar with all aspects, provide specialists with necessary

qualifications.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 017900 - 2 14 December 2015


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 DEMONSTRATION - GENERAL A. Demonstrations conducted during system start-up do not qualify as demonstrations for the purposes of

this section, unless approved in advance by Owner. B. Demonstration may be combined with Owner personnel training if applicable. C. Operating Equipment and Systems: Demonstrate operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-

down, seasonal changeover, emergency conditions, and troubleshooting, and maintenance procedures, including scheduled and preventive maintenance. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other

season within six months. D. Non-Operating Products: Demonstrate cleaning, scheduled and preventive maintenance, and repair

procedures. 1. Perform demonstrations not less than two weeks prior to Substantial Completion.

3.2 TRAINING - GENERAL A. Conduct training on-site unless otherwise indicated. B. Contractor will provide classroom and seating at no cost to Owner. C. Provide training in minimum two hour segments. D. Training schedule will be subject to availability of Owner's personnel to be trained; re-schedule training

sessions as required by Owner; once schedule has been approved by Owner failure to conduct sessions according to schedule will be cause for Owner to charge Contractor for personnel "show-up" time.

E. Review of Facility Policy on Operation and Maintenance Data: During training discuss: 1. The location of the O&M manuals and procedures for use and preservation; backup copies. 2. Typical contents and organization of all manuals, including explanatory information, system

narratives, and product specific information. 3. Typical uses of the O&M manuals.

F. Product- and System-Specific Training: 1. Review the applicable O&M manuals. 2. For systems, provide an overview of system operation, design parameters and constraints, and

operational strategies. 3. Review instructions for proper operation in all modes, including start-up, shut-down, seasonal

changeover and emergency procedures, and for maintenance, including preventative maintenance.

4. Provide hands-on training on all operational modes possible and preventive maintenance. 5. Emphasize safe and proper operating requirements; discuss relevant health and safety issues

and emergency procedures. 6. Discuss common troubleshooting problems and solutions. 7. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Discuss warranties and guarantees, including procedures necessary to avoid voiding coverage. 9. Review recommended tools and spare parts inventory suggestions of manufacturers. 10. Review spare parts and tools required to be furnished by Contractor. 11. Review spare parts suppliers and sources and procurement procedures.

G. Be prepared to answer questions raised by training attendees; if unable to answer during training session, provide written response within three days.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas CAST UNDERLAYMENT Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 035400 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 035400

CAST UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Liquid-applied self-leveling floor underlayment.

1. Use gypsum-based type at areas requiring acoustical remediation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data sheets documenting physical characteristics and product

limitations of underlayment materials. Include information on surface preparation, environmental limitations, and installation instructions.

C. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and approved by

manufacturer. B. Provide installation in accordance to maintain continuity of product and with manufacturer’s approved

terminations. C. Protect adjacent materials, including gypsum board.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Keep dry and protect from direct sun exposure, freezing, and ambient temperature greater than 105

degrees F.

1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for combustibility or flame spread requirements.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underlayment until floor penetrations and peripheral work are complete. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperatures of 50 degrees F 24 hours before, during and 72 hours after

installation of underlayment. C. During the curing process, ventilate spaces to remove excess moisture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Gypsum Underlayment:

1. ARDEX Engineered Cements; ARDEX GS-4: www.ardexamericas.com. 2. Maxxon Corporation ; Product Gyp-Crete: www.maxxon.com 3. USG; Levelrock: www.usg.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Gypsum-Based Underlayment: Gypsum based mix, that when mixed with water in accordance with

manufacturer's directions will produce self-leveling underlayment with the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 2500 psi, tested per ASTM C472. 2. Density: Maximum 115 lb/cu ft. 3. Final Set Time: 1 to 2 hours, maximum. 4. Thickness: 1 inch. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 0/0 in accordance

with ASTM E84. B. Acoustical Matting Beneath Gypsum Underlayment at Hard Surfaced Floors: Equal to Acoustimat II by

Maxxon. C. Aggregate: Dry, well graded, washed silica aggregate, approximately 1/8 inch in size and acceptable to

underlayment manufacturer. D. Water: Potable and not detrimental to underlayment mix materials.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas CAST UNDERLAYMENT Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 035400 - 2 14 December 2015

E. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended type. F. Joint and Crack Filler: Latex based filler, as recommended by manufacturer.

2.3 MIXING A. Site mix materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Add aggregate for areas where thickness will exceed 1/2 inch. Mix underlayment and water for at least

two minutes before adding aggregate, and continue mixing to assure that aggregate has been thoroughly coated.

C. Mix to self-leveling consistency without over-watering.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, do not contain petroleum bi-products, or other

compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Concrete: Mechanically prepare steel troweled concrete to create a textured surface necessary to

achieve the best bond; acceptable methods include bead blasting and scarifying. Do not use acid etching.

B. Remove substrate surface irregularities. Fill voids and deck joints with filler. Finish smooth. C. Vacuum clean surfaces. D. Prime substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Allow to dry. E. Close floor openings.

3.3 APPLICATION A. Install underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Pump or pour material onto substrate. Do not retemper or add water.

1. Pump, move, and screed while the material is still highly flowable. 2. Be careful not to create cold joints. 3. Wear spiked shoes while working in the wet material to avoid leaving marks.

C. Place to indicated thickness, with top surface level to 1/8 inch in 10 ft. D. Where additional aggregate has been used in the mix, add a top layer of neat mix (without aggregate),

if needed to level and smooth the surface.

3.4 CURING A. Once underlayment starts to set, prohibit foot traffic until final set has been reached. B. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect against direct sunlight, heat, and wind; prevent rapid drying to avoid shrinkage and cracking. B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor underlayment surfaces.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL (GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT) A. During each day's product application,

a. Mold and test one set of 3 test cubes of gypsum concrete in accordance with ASTM C472, and other procedures as recommended by manufacturer. Furnish report on dry density and compressive strength to Architect and Owner upon request.

b. Perform one slump test with a 2 inch diameter x 4 inch tall cylinder. Acceptable range of patty after cylinder is removed is 8 inch diameter (+/- 1 inch).

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 054000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 054000

COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with work of other sections that is to be installed in or adjacent to the metal framing system,

including but not limited to structural anchors, cladding anchors, utilities, insulation, and firestopping.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product

criteria, and limitations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framed openings, bearing, anchorage, loading, welds,

and type and location of fasteners, and accessories or items required of related work. 1. Indicate stud and ceiling joist layout. 2. Describe method for securing studs to tracks and for bolted framing connections. 3. Provide design engineer's stamp on shop drawings.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention

E. Provide submittal indicating proper deflection criteria when wall is supporting a tile or special finish material with greater tolerance requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design framing system under direct supervision of a Professional Structural

Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in

this section, and with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5

years of experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC : www.clarkdietrich.com. 2. Marino : www.marinoware.com. 3. The Steel Network, Inc : www.SteelNetwork.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings,

reinforcement, and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. B. Design Criteria: Provide completed framing system having the following characteristics:

1. Design: Calculate structural characteristics of cold-formed steel framing members according to AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. Structural Performance: Design, engineer, fabricate, and erect to withstand specified design loads for project conditions within required limits.

3. Design Loads: In accordance with applicable codes. 4. Live load deflection meeting the following, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Exterior Walls: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/600 of span for masonry backup, 1/360 of span for Portland cement plaster, and 1/240 of span for siding and metal panels.

b. Roof Joists and Purlins: Maximum horizontal deflection under wind load of 1/360 of span.


5. Able to tolerate movement of components without damage, failure of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners, or other detrimental effects when subject to seasonal or cyclic day/night temperature ranges.

6. Able to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings.

C. Shop fabricate framing system to the greatest extent possible. D. Deliver to site in largest practical sections.

2.3 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C955; studs formed to channel, "C", or "Sigma" shape with punched web; U-

shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels. 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M G90/Z275 coating. 3. Provide components fabricated from ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS steel.

B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from either ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation SS, or ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation SS steel sheet, shop painted. 1. Gage and depth: As required to meet specified performance levels. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, rust-inhibitive paint.

C. Framing Connectors: Factory-made formed steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating and factory punched holes. 1. Structural Performance: Maintain load and movement capacity required by applicable code,

when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members; minimum 16 gage, 0.06 inch thickness.

2. Movement Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate movement using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, while maintaining structural performance of framing. Provide movement connections where indicated on drawings. a. Where continuous studs bypass elevated floor slab, connect stud to slab in manner

allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch.

b. Where top of stud wall terminates below structural floor or roof, connect studs to structure in manner allowing vertical and horizontal movement of slab without affecting studs; allow for minimum movement of 1/2 inch.

c. Provide top track preassembled with connection devices spaced to fit stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet.

3. Provide non-movement connections for tie-down to foundation, floor-to-floor tie-down, roof-to-wall tie-down, joist hangers, gusset plates, and stiffeners.

2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing, Furring, Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered;

finish to match framing components. B. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having

jurisdiction. C. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC

limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.5 FASTENERS A. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM

A153/A153M. B. Anchorage Devices: Powder actuated. C. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. D. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C1007 requirements. B. Align floor and ceiling tracks; locate to wall layout. Secure in place with fasteners at maximum 24

inches on center. Coordinate installation of sealant with floor and ceiling tracks.


C. Place studs at 16 inches on center; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls and at each side of openings. Connect studs to tracks using clip and tie method.

D. Construct corners using minimum of three studs. Install double studs at wall openings, door and window jambs.

E. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. F. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design

requirements. G. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after erection. H. Install intermediate studs above and below openings to align with wall stud spacing. I. Provide deflection allowance in stud track, directly below horizontal building framing at non-load

bearing framing. J. Attach cross studs to studs for attachment of fixtures anchored to walls. K. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items, and to prevent stud

rotation. L. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Place joists at 16 inches o.c.; not more than 2 inches from abutting walls. Connect joists to supports

using fastener method. D. Set floor and ceiling joists parallel and level, with lateral bracing and bridging. E. Locate joist end bearing directly over load bearing studs or provide load distributing member to top of

stud track.

3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Variation of any Member from Plane: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas METAL FABRICATIONS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 055000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type

of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths. C. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS

qualification within the previous 12 months. D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited

under IAS AC172.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this

Work and licensed in the State in which the Project is located. B. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International

Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS - STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A36. B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing. C. Plates: ASTM A283. D. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, black finish. E. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325, Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A153 where connecting

galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having

jurisdiction. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC

limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 FABRICATION A. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. B. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. C. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight,

flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. D. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components

of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

2.3 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Ladders: Steel; in compliance with ANSI A14.3; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint

finish. 1. Side Rails: 1/2 x 2-1/2 inches members spaced at 20 inches. 2. Rungs: 3/4 inch diameter solid round bar spaced 12 inches on center. 3. Space rungs 5 inches from wall surface.

B. Door Frames for Overhead Door Openings: Channel sections; prime paint finish. C. Elevator Hoistway Divider Beams: Beam sections; prime paint finish.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas METAL FABRICATIONS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 055000 - 2 14 December 2015

2.4 FINISHES - STEEL A. Prime paint all steel items.

1. Exceptions: Galvanize items to be embedded in concrete, items to be imbedded in masonry, and items exposed to the elements.

2. Exceptions: Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete, where field welding is required, and items to be covered with sprayed fireproofing.

B. Prepare surfaces to be primed in accordance with SSPC-SP2. C. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. D. Prime Painting: One coat. E. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A123 requirements.

2.5 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. B. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete or

embedded in masonry.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until

completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions , and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized , except surfaces

to be in contact with concrete.

3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas METAL STAIRS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 055100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 055100

METAL STAIRS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stairs with concrete treads. B. Structural steel stair framing and supports.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type

of fasteners, and accessories. 1. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld

lengths. 2. Include the design engineer's stamp or seal on each sheet of shop drawings.

C. Delegated Design Data: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Fabricator's Qualification Statement: Provide documentation showing steel fabricator is accredited

under IAS AC172.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Designer Qualifications: Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this work

and licensed in the State in which the Project is located, or personnel under direct supervision of such an engineer.

B. Welder Qualifications: Show certification of welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A qualified steel fabricator that is accredited by the International Accreditation Service (IAS) Fabricator Inspection Program for Structural Steel (AC172).

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL STAIRS - GENERAL A. Metal Stairs: Provide stairs of the design specified, complete with landing platforms, vertical and

horizontal supports in conjunction with those supports designed by another Engineer, railings, and guards, fabricated accurately for anchorage to each other and to building structure. 1. Regulatory Requirements: Provide stairs and railings complying with the most stringent

requirements of local, state, and federal regulations; where requirements of the contract documents exceed those of regulations, comply with the contract documents.

2. Structural Design: Provide complete stair and railing assemblies complying with the applicable local code in conjunction with those supports designed by another Engineer

3. Dimensions: As indicated on drawings. 4. Shop assemble components; disassemble into largest practical sections suitable for transport

and access to site. 5. No sharp or rough areas on exposed travel surfaces and surfaces accessible to touch. 6. Separate dissimilar metals using paint or permanent tape.

B. Metal Jointing and Finish Quality Levels: 1. Commercial: Exposed joints as inconspicuous as possible, whether welded or mechanical;

underside of stair not covered by soffit IS considered exposed to view. a. Welded Joints: Intermittently welded on back side, filled with body putty, and sanded

smooth and flush. b. Welds Exposed to View: Ground smooth and flush. c. Mechanical Joints: Butted tight, flush, and hairline. d. Bolts Exposed to View: Countersunk flat or oval head bolts; no exposed nuts. e. Exposed Edges and Corners: Eased to small uniform radius. f. Metal Surfaces to be Painted: Sanded or ground smooth, suitable for satin or matte

finish. C. Fasteners: Same material or compatible with materials being fastened; type consistent with design

and specified quality level. D. Anchors and Related Components: Same material and finish as item to be anchored, except where

specifically indicated otherwise; provide all anchors and fasteners required.


2.2 METAL STAIRS WITH CONCRETE TREADS A. Jointing and Finish Quality Level: Commercial, as defined above. B. Risers: Closed. C. Precast Concrete Treads:

1. Concrete Strength: 5,000 psi at 28 days, minimum. 2. Air Content: 4 to 6 percent. 3. Cement Color: Natural gray. 4. Concrete Reinforcement: As required to resist live loading. 5. Concrete Finish: Broom.

D. Concrete Filled Metal Pan Treads: Metal pan with field-installed concrete fill. 1. Concrete Depth: 1-1/2 inches, minimum. 2. Tread Pan Material: Steel sheet. 3. Tread Pan Thickness: As required by design; 14 gage, 0.075 inch minimum. 4. Pan Anchorage to Stringers: Welded or bolted to carrier angles welded or bolted to stringers. 5. Concrete Reinforcement: None. 6. Concrete Strength: 5,000 psi at 28 days, minimum. 7. Air Content: 4 to 6 percent. 8. Cement Color: Natural gray. 9. Anchorage to Tread Pan: Epoxy adhesive. 10. Concrete Reinforcement: As required to resist live loading. 11. Concrete Finish: Broom finish.

E. Risers: Same material and thickness as tread pans. 1. Riser/Nosing Profile: Sloped riser with rounded nosing of minimum radius. 2. Nosing Depth: Not more than 1-1/2 inch overhang. 3. Nosing Return: Flush with top of concrete fill, not more than 1/2 inch wide.

F. Stringers: Rolled steel channels, including those decigned by another Engineer. G. Landings: Cast in place concrete, supported and reinforced as required to achieve design load

capacity. H. Railings: Steel pipe railings. I. Finish: Shop- or factory-prime painted.

2.3 MATERIALS A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Plates: ASTM A6/A6M or ASTM A283/A283M. C. Steel Sheet: Hot- or cold-rolled, except use cold-rolled where finished work will be exposed to view.

1. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1011/A1011M, Designation CS (commercial steel). 2. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A1008/A1008M, Designation CS (commercial steel).

D. Concrete Fill: Portland cement Type I, 3000 psi 28 day strength, 2 to 3 inch slump. E. Steel Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 (ASTM A325M), Type 1 , and galvanized to ASTM

A153/A153M where connecting galvanized components. F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. G. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having

jurisdiction.

2.4 SHOP FINISHING A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. B. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. C. Prime Painting: Use specified shop- and touch-up primer.

1. Preparation of Steel: In accordance with SSPC-SP 2, Hand Tool Cleaning. 2. Number of Coats: One.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.2 PREPARATION A. When field welding is required, clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide anchors, plates, angles, hangers, and struts required for connecting stairs to structure. C. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion

of erection and installation of permanent attachments. D. Provide welded field joints where specifically indicated on drawings. Perform field welding in

accordance with AWS D1.1. E. Other field joints may be either welded or bolted provided the result complies with the limitations

specified for jointing quality levels. F. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or creating adjustments not scheduled. G. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to

be in contact with concrete.

3.4 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story, non-cumulative. B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 055213 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 055213

PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Wall mounted handrails.

B. Stair railings and guardrails.

C. Balcony railings and guardrails.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.2 RAILINGS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Design, fabricate, and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E985 and applicable local code.

B. Distributed Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist distributed force of 75 pounds per linear foot applied to the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.

C. Concentrated Loads: Design railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist a concentrated force of 200 pounds applied at any point on the top of the assembly and in any direction, without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E 935.

D. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members.

E. Dimensions: See drawings for configurations and heights.

F. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners.

1. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for bolting anchors.

2. For anchorage to masonry, provide brackets to be embedded in masonry, for bolting anchors.

3. For anchorage to stud walls, provide backing plates, for bolting anchors.

4. Posts: Provide adjustable flanged brackets.

G. Provide slip-on non-weld mechanical fittings to join lengths, seal open ends, and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons, and wall brackets.

2.3 STEEL RAILING SYSTEM

A. Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, Grade B cold-formed structural tubing.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, black finish.

C. Non-Weld Mechanical Fittings: Slip-on, galvanized malleable iron castings, for Schedule 40 pipe, with flush setscrews for tightening by standard hex wrench, no bolts or screw fasteners.

D. Welding Fittings: Factory- or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded; joints and seams ground smooth.

E. Exposed Fasteners: No exposed bolts or screws.

F. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 055213 - 2 14 December 2015

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection to building structure.

B. Fit and shop assemble components in largest practical sizes for delivery to site.

C. Fabricate components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Provide spigots and sleeves to accommodate site assembly and installation.

D. Welded Joints:

1. Exterior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion.

2. Interior Components: Continuously seal joined pieces by intermittent welds and plastic filler.

3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required.

B. Supply items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates, for installation as work of other sections.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects, with tight joints.

C. Anchor railings securely to structure.

D. Conceal anchor bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings.

3.4 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per floor level, non-cumulative.

B. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1/4 inch.

C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 057300 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 057300

DECORATIVE METAL RAILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL


Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Post-supported railings with glass infill. B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section, “Alternates.”

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Railings: Guards, handrails, and similar devices used for protection of occupants at open-sided floor

areas, pedestrian guidance and support, visual separation, or wall protection.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural capacities: Handrails, guardrails, and their supports must be designed for 50 lbs per linear foot,

applied in any direction at the top of the top rail, and a concentrated load of 200 lbs applied in any direction at any location along the top of the top rail

C. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable design working stresses of railing materials based on the following: 1. Aluminum: The lesser of minimum yield strength divided by 1.65 or minimum ultimate tensile

strength divided by 1.95. 2. Stainless Steel: 60 percent of minimum yield strength. 3. Glass: 25 percent of mean modulus of rupture (50 percent probability of breakage), as listed in

"Mechanical Properties" in AAMA's Aluminum Curtain Wall Series No. 12, "Structural Properties of Glass."

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Manufacturer's product lines of railings assembled from standard components. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

1. Sections of each distinctly different linear railing member, including handrails, top rails, posts, and balusters.

2. Each type of glass required. 3. Fittings and brackets. 4. Welded connections. 5. Assembled Samples of railing systems, made from full-size components, including top rail, post,

handrail, and infill. Show method of finishing members at intersections. Samples need not be full height.

D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

E. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer .


1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer. B. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's

aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including structural analysis, preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance. 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's

approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of railings and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product Requirements." 1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's

approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

D. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."

E. Safety Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark glass with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction . Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups as shown on Drawings. If not indicated on drawings follow requirements below. 2. Build mockups for each form and finish of railing consisting of two posts, top rail, infill area, and

anchorage system components that are full height and are not less than 24 inches in length.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with railings by

field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and

coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support railings temporarily by any means that do not suit structural performance requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller marks,

rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes. B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Same metal and finish as supported rails unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide cast-metal brackets with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Provide either formed- or cast-metal brackets with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage. 3. Provide formed-steel brackets with predrilled hole for bolted anchorage and with snap-on cover that

matches rail finish and conceals bracket base and bolt head. 4. Provide extruded-aluminum brackets with interlocking pieces that conceal anchorage. Locate set

screws on bottom of bracket.


2.2 ALUMINUM A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type

of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes[, Including Extruded Tubing]: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52. C. Extruded Structural [Pipe] [and] [Round Tubing]: ASTM B 429/B 429M, Alloy 6063-T6.

1. Provide Standard Weight (Schedule 40) pipe unless otherwise indicated. D. Drawn Seamless Tubing: ASTM B 210, Alloy 6063-T832.

2.3 STAINLESS STEEL A. Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. B. Pipe: ASTM A 312/A 312M, Grade TP 304. C. Castings: ASTM A 743/A 743M, Grade CF 8 or CF 20. D. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar: ASTM A 666, Type 304. E. Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304.

2.4 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated), Type 1 (transparent

flat glass), Quality-Q3. Provide products that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials. 1. Glass Color: Clear. 2. Thickness for Structural Glass Balusters: As required by structural loads, but not less than 12.0

mm. 3. Thickness for Glass Infill Panels: As required by structural loads, but not less than 6.0 mm. 4. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Glazing Gaskets for Glass Infill Panels: Glazing gaskets and related accessories recommended or supplied by railing manufacturer for installing glass infill panels in post-supported railings.

2.5 FASTENERS A. Fastener Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following:

1. Aluminum Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 2. Stainless-Steel Components: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners. 3. Dissimilar Metals: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.

B. Fasteners for Anchoring to Other Construction: Select fasteners of type, grade, and class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of construction indicated.

C. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching railings to other work unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable. 1. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

E. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors. 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633

or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1stainless-steel

bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

1. For aluminum railings, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. C. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.


2.7 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions, member sizes

and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage. B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly.

Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces. E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes

where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations. F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items. G. Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections unless otherwise indicated. H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for

this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings. 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance

of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish

Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint. I. Welded Connections for Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate railings to interconnect members with concealed

internal welds that eliminate surface grinding, using manufacturer's standard system of sleeve and socket fittings.

J. Mechanical Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings. Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints. 1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is

manufacturer's standard splicing method. K. Form changes in direction as follows:

1. By bending. L. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section

of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.

M. Close exposed ends of hollow railing members with prefabricated end fittings. N. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns,

unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch or less. O. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and

anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated. 1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crush-resistant

fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.

P. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

Q. For railing posts set in concrete, provide [steel] [stainless-steel] sleeves not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch greater than outside dimensions of post, with metal plate forming bottom closure.

2.8 GLAZING PANEL FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate to sizes and shapes required; provide for proper edge clearance and bite on glazing

panels. 1. Clean-cut or flat-grind edges at butt-glazed sealant joints to produce square edges with slight

chamfers at junctions of edges and faces 2. Grind smooth exposed edges, including those at open joints, to produce square edges with slight

chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. B. Infill Panels: Provide tempered laminated, heat-strengthened glass panels[ for both straight and curved

sections].


2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations

for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipment. C. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of railings.

2.10 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for

designating aluminum finishes. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

2.11 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish. B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches. C. Directional Satin Finish: No. 4. D. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave

surfaces chemically clean.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify that

locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints. B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in location,

alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. 1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or finished after

fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or other means without further cutting or fitting.

2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet. 3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel with rake of

steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet. C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout, concrete,

masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. E. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing

railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.

3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS A. Non-welded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing

components. Use wood blocks and padding to prevent damage to railing members and fittings. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored to match finish of railings.

B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components. Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is performed in the shop or in the field.


3.4 ANCHORING POSTS A. Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been

inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with non-shrink, non-metallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with [non-shrink, non-metallic grout] [or] [anchoring cement], mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Cover anchorage joint with flange of same metal as post, welded to post after placing anchoring material. D. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface. E. Anchor posts to metal surfaces with flanges, angle type, or floor type as required by conditions, connected

to posts and to metal supporting members as follows: 1. For aluminum railings, attach posts as indicated using fittings designed and engineered for this

purpose. 2. For stainless-steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces. 3. For steel railings, weld flanges to posts and bolt to metal-supporting surfaces.

3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS A. Anchor railing ends to concrete and masonry with brackets on underside of rails connected to railing ends

and anchored to wall construction with anchors and bolts. B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to railing ends. C. Attach handrails to walls with wall brackets [ except where end flanges are used]. Provide brackets with

1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. 1. Use type of bracket with flange tapped for concealed anchorage to threaded hanger bolt. 2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.

D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag

bolts. 2. For steel-framed partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into [ fire-retardant-treated] wood backing

between studs. Coordinate with stud installation to locate backing members.

3.6 INSTALLING GLASS PANELS A. Post-Supported Glass Railings: Install assembly to comply with railing manufacturer's written instructions

and with requirements in other Part 3 articles. Erect posts and other metal railing components, then set factory-cut glass panels. Do not cut, drill, or alter glass panels in field. Protect edges from damage.

3.7 CLEANING A. Clean aluminum and stainless steel by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with clean

water, and wiping dry. B. Clean and polish glass as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Wash both exposed surfaces in

each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion.

C. Clean by wiping with a damp cloth and then wiping dry. D. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings

approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion. B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction

work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit, or provide new units.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas DECORATIVE FORMED METAL Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 057500 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 057500

DECORATIVE FORMED METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Column covers.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design exterior decorative formed metal items, including comprehensive engineering

analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance: Decorative formed metal items, including anchors and connections, shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without exceeding the allowable design working stress of materials involved and without exhibiting permanent deformation in any components: 1. Wind Loads on Exterior Items: 20 lbf/sq. ft.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include finishing materials. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for decorative formed metal.

1. Include plans, elevations, component details, and attachments to other work. 2. Indicate materials and profiles of each decorative formed metal member, fittings, joinery, finishes,

fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design, including

mechanical finishes. D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on 6-inch- 150-mm- square

Samples of metal of same thickness and material indicated for the Work. E. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator professional engineer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing decorative formed metal similar to that indicated

for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

B. Organic-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying organic coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.

C. Anodic Finisher Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying anodic finishes of type indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.

D. Powder-Coating Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in successfully applying powder coatings of type indicated to metals of types indicated and that employs competent control personnel to conduct continuing, effective quality-control program to ensure compliance with requirements.

E. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." 3. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel." 4. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."


F. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups for the following types of decorative formed metal:

a. [Insert, in separate subparagraphs, description of each decorative metal type including mockup size].

2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver decorative formed metal products wrapped in protective coverings and strapped together in

suitable packs or in heavy-duty cartons. Remove protective coverings before they stain or bond to finished surfaces.

B. Store products on elevated platforms in a dry location.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls, columns, beams, and other construction contiguous

with decorative formed metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative formed metal items. Furnish setting drawings,

templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate installation of decorative formed metal with adjacent construction to ensure that wall assemblies, flashings, trim, and joint sealants, are protected against damage from the effects of weather, age, corrosion, and other causes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METAL A. General: Provide sheet metal without pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other

imperfections where exposed to view on finished units. B. Aluminum Sheet: Flat sheet complying with ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum

producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with not less than strength and durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use

classifications required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.

B. Sealants, Interior: Non-sag, paintable, non-staining, latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834; of type and grade required to seal joints in decorative formed metal; and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer. 1. Use sealant that has a VOC content of not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40

CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Filler Metal and Electrodes: Provide type and alloy of filler metal and electrodes as recommended by

producer of metal to be welded or brazed and as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items. 1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined and will not cause discoloration.

D. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are incompatible with materials joined. 1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting decorative formed metal items and for attaching

them to other work unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide Phillips flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

E. Structural Anchors: For applications indicated to comply with certain design loads, provide torque-controlled expansion anchors with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

F. Anchor Materials: 1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633

or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.


2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel Is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593, and nuts, ASTM F 594.

G. Sound-Deadening Materials: 1. Insulation: Unfaced, mineral-fiber blanket insulation complying with ASTM C 665, Type I, and

passing ASTM E 136 test.

2.3 PAINTS AND COATINGS A. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25. B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible

with paints specified to be used over it.

2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Shop Assembly: Pre-assemble decorative formed metal items in shop to greatest extent possible to

minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordinated installation.

B. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods of decorative formed metal items with those of adjoining construction to produce integrated assemblies with closely fitting joints and with edges and surfaces aligned unless otherwise indicated.

C. Form metal to profiles indicated, in maximum lengths to minimize joints. Produce flat, flush surfaces without cracking or grain separation at bends. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners.

D. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness equivalent to stretcher-leveled standard of flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use. 1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in

flush alignment. E. Build in straps, plates, and brackets as needed to support and anchor fabricated items to adjoining

construction. Reinforce decorative formed metal items as needed to attach and support other construction.

F. Provide support framing, mounting and attachment clips, splice sleeves, fasteners, and accessories needed to install decorative formed metal items.

G. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed. 1. Use welding and brazing procedures that will blend with and not cause discoloration of metal being

joined.

2.5 COLUMN COVERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Alcan Composites USA Inc. 2. Alcoa Inc. 3. ALPOLIC, Division of Mitsubishi Chemical America, Inc. 4. CENTRIA Architectural Systems.

B. Snap-Together Type: Factory-formed and -assembled, metal-faced composite wall panels fabricated from two metal facings bonded, using no glues or adhesives, to solid, extruded thermoplastic core; formed into column covers. Return vertical edges and bend to form hook that will engage continuous mounting clips. 1. Form returns at vertical joints to provide hairline V-joints. 2. Fabricate column covers with horizontal butt joints, tightly fitted and backed with a sleeve for field

splicing with adhesive. 3. Fabricate with calk stop/stiffener ring. 4. Apply manufacturer's recommended sound-deadening [insulation] [mastic] to backs of column

covers.

2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations

for applying and designating finishes. B. Complete mechanical finishes of flat sheet metal surfaces before fabrication where possible. After

fabrication, finish all joints, bends, abrasions, and other surface blemishes to match sheet finish. C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping. D. Apply organic and anodic finishes to formed metal after fabrication unless otherwise indicated. E. Finish items indicated on Drawings after assembly.


2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for

designating aluminum finishes. B. High-Performance Organic Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2604 and

containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of decorative formed metal. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent

construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal. 1. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with

such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.

B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where needed to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection.

C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.

D. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, sealants, and flashings, as the Work progresses, to make exterior decorative formed metal items weatherproof.

E. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, sealants, and insulation, as the Work progresses, to make interior decorative formed metal items soundproof or lightproof as applicable to type of fabrication indicated.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Unless otherwise indicated, clean metals by washing thoroughly with clean water and soap, rinsing with

clean water, and drying with soft cloths. B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of

shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.

C. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect finishes of decorative formed metal items from damage during construction period. Remove

temporary protective coverings at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ROUGH CARPENTRY – NON STRUCTURAL Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 061001 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 061001

ROUGH CARPENTRY – NON STRUCTURAL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-structural dimension lumber framing. B. Engineered panels. C. Roof-mounted curbs. D. Roofing nailers. E. Preservative treated wood materials. F. Fire retardant treated wood materials. G. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. H. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. I. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports. J. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application instructions. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent

deformation and to allow air circulation. B. Fire Retardant Treated Wood: Prevent exposure to precipitation during shipping, storage, or

installation.

1.4 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies.

1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

B. Lumber fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FOR CONCEALED APPLICATIONS A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Stud Framing ( 2 by 2 through 2 by 6 ):

1. Species: Any allowed under referenced grading rules. 2. Grade: No. 2.

D. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds, and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 2 or Standard Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3.

2.3 CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density

fiberboard; 3/4 inch thick; flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.


2.4 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors:

1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere.

2. Anchors: Toggle bolt type for anchorage to hollow masonry. B. Sill Flashing: As specified in Section 076200.

2.5 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for

wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating

compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-

accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Manufacturers:

a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc : www.wolmanizedwood.com. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc : www.frtw.com. c. Osmose, Inc : www.osmose.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Interior Type A: AWPA U1, Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H, low temperature (low hygroscopic) type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, with no evidence of significant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. a. Kiln dry wood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber

and 15 percent for plywood. b. Treat rough carpentry items as indicated . c. Do not use treated wood in applications exposed to weather or where the wood may

become wet. C. Preservative Treatment:

1. Manufacturers: a. Arch Wood Protection, Inc : www.wolmanizedwood.com. b. Viance, LLC : www.treatedwood.com. c. Osmose, Inc : www.osmose.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber Above Grade: AWPA U1, Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft retention. a. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent. b. Treat lumber in contact with roofing, flashing, or waterproofing. c. Treat lumber in contact with masonry or concrete. d. Treat lumber in other locations as indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Where wood framing bears on cementitious foundations, install full width sill flashing continuous over

top of foundation, lap ends of flashing minimum of 4 inches and seal. B. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.2 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory

components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. C. Where treated wood is used on interior, provide temporary ventilation during and immediately after

installation sufficient to remove indoor air contaminants.


3.3 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS A. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures,

specialty items, and trim. B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of

frames, securely attached to stud framing. C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item

can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling,

unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. E. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:

1. Cabinets and shelf supports. 2. Wall brackets. 3. Handrails. 4. Grab bars. 5. Towel and bath accessories. 6. Wall-mounted door stops. 7. Chalkboards and marker boards. 8. Wall paneling and trim. 9. Joints of rigid wall coverings that occur between studs.

3.4 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and

roofing assembly installation. B. Provide wood curb at all roof openings except where specifically indicated otherwise. Form corners by

alternating lapping side members.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over

firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into studs in field of board. 1. At fire-rated walls, install board over wall board indicated as part of the fire-rated assembly. 2. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel

to studs. 3. Install adjacent boards without gaps.

3.6 TOLERANCES A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch from true position, maximum. B. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet

maximum.

3.7 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: Comply with the requirements of Section 017419.

1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA, or ACA to co-generation facilities

or “waste-to-energy” facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas COMPOSITE LUMBER Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 061120 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 061120

COMPOSITE LUMBER

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 -

General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Composite wood decking as façade cladding. B. Fasteners. C. Related accessories.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products without damage in accordance with Section 012500. B. Store products above ground, on platforms or skids, and covered with appropriate coverings. Provide for

adequate air circulation. C. Do not store seasoned materials in damp or wet locations. D. Support products in such a way as to prevent warping and distortion.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Product Data:

1. Submit product data indicating physical properties and performance criteria for molded materials and related components.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating materials, dimensions, full size details, jointing methods, anchorages, and attachment provisions.

D. Submit following Informational Submittals: 1. Certifications specified in Quality Assurance article. 2. Qualification Data: Fabricator's and installer's qualification data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Composite Lumber:

1. Description: Manufactured composite material consisting of approximately 50% wood fibers and 50% thermoplastic polymer material.

2. Dimensions: Lumber dimensions are nominal; Provide sizes as detailed. 3. Moisture content: 19% maximum moisture content after treatments for fire retardant and

preservative treated woods. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Trex Company. b. Geolam.

B. Fasteners 1. Provide fasteners in sizes, spacings, and locations to suit applications and as indicated on the

Drawings. Use either galvanize or stainless steel for all fasteners. 2. Bolts: FS FF-B-575, FF-B-584 or ASTM A307. 3. Nuts: FS FF-N-836. 4. Expansion shields, lag screws, and bolts: FS FF-B-561. 5. Toggle bolts: FS FF-B-588. 6. Screws: FS FF-S-111. 7. Note: Fastening by nailing is not acceptable. Deck and supporting structure must be capable of

being easily removed to allow for access below deck level. Fasten deck to substructure only with only with course wood screws.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas COMPOSITE LUMBER Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 061120 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify General Contractor of

any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. General

1. Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

2. Set carpentry work accurately to required levels and lines, with members plumb and true and accurately cut and fitted. Scribe and cope as required.

3. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required by codes, the Drawings, as indicated herein, and as otherwise required to draw members into place and securely hold same unless otherwise indicated. Use washers under all bolt heads and nuts.

4. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.

5. Make tight connections between members (except plywood) to develop full strength of members. 6. Install fasteners without splitting of wood. If wood is split, replace damaged member. 7. Predrill as necessary. 8. Comply with APA E30a requirements for plywood unless more stringent requirements for nailing

are indicated on the Drawings. 9. Install fastener types and at spacings recommended by NFPA National Design Specifications for

Stress Grade Lumber and Its Fastening - 1973 for lumber and APA Guide E30e for Plywood, unless more restrictive code requirements dictate tighter spacing or heavier fasteners, or unless otherwise indicated herein or on the Drawings.

10. Locate members as indicated on the drawings. Size, spacing or spans shall not be changed without specific approval of Architect and Owner. Take care to place proper grades and species of members where indicated in accordance with the lumber schedule herein.

11. Bolting: a. Drill holes 1/16" larger in diameter than the bolts being used. b. Drill holes straight and true from one side only. c. Do not bear bolt threads on wood; use washers under heads where they bear on wood and

under all nuts.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Framing members: 1/4 inch maximum from true position. B. Surface flatness of floors/roofs: 1/4 inch in 10 feet maximum.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect products from moisture absorption and subsequent warping or deterioration until subsequent

construction can proceed.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WOOD DECKING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 061500 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 061500

WOOD DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Solid-sawn wood decking for soffits.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For preservative-treated wood products, include chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, installing, and finishing treated material.

B. Research/Evaluation Reports: For glued-laminated wood decking indicated to be of diaphragm design and construction, from [Insert applicable model code organization].

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standard for Solid-Sawn Wood Decking: Comply with AITC 112. B. Forest Certification: Provide wood decking produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-

accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Schedule delivery of wood decking to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying the Work. B. Store materials under cover and protected from weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Provide

for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings. Stack wood decking with surfaces that are to be exposed in the final Work protected from exposure to sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD DECKING, GENERAL A. General: Comply with DOC PS 20 and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by

ALSC's Board of Review. B. Moisture Content: Provide wood decking with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

2.2 SOLID-SAWN WOOD DECKING A. Decking Species: Cypress or cedar, as selected by Architect. B. Decking Grade: Dense Select Decking. C. Grade Stamps: Factory mark each item with grade stamp of grading agency. Apply grade stamp to

surfaces that will not be exposed to view. D. Face Surface: Smooth. E. Face Size: 1 by 6 inches nominal F. Edge Pattern: Tongue-in-groove.

2.3 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Solid-Sawn Decking: Provide fastener size and type complying with decking standard for

thickness of deck used. B. Fastener Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel. C. Penetrating Sealer: Clear sanding sealer complying with Division 09 Section "Staining and Transparent

Finishing" and compatible with topcoats specified for use over it. D. Framing: Preservative treated No. 2 or better SPF, size and spacing as indicated.

2.4 FABRICATION A. Pre-drill decking for lateral spiking to adjacent units to comply with referenced decking standard.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WOOD DECKING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 061500 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine walls and support framing in areas to receive wood decking for compliance with installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of wood decking. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install solid-sawn wood decking to comply with referenced decking standard.

1. Locate end joints for blind fastening.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace damaged decking if repairs are

not approved by Architect.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Provide temporary waterproof covering as the Work progresses to protect roof decking until roofing is

applied.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHEATHING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 061600 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 061600

SHEATHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Wall sheathing. 2. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and

dimensions and include construction and application details.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-

treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect

sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and

construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."

2.2 WALL SHEATHING A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc. b. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold. c. Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlass d. United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Size: 48 by 108 inches.

2.3 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834,

compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20

threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHEATHING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 061600 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with

minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members.

B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting construction unless otherwise indicated.

C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."

D. Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.

E. Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed assembly.

F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements.

G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

3.2 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 2. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 3. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain

moisture, to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing. C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board

with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and

ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if

overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed.

D. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant

to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 2. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel

silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FINISH CARPENTRY Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 062000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 062000

FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items. B. Wood casings and moldings. C. Hardware and attachment accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, accessories,

to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Custom grade

at clubhouse and Economy grade elsewhere. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with

minimum three years of documented experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect work from moisture damage.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Sequence the installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner. B. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent

components.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. MDF: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

2.2 FASTENERS A. Fasteners: Of size and type to suit application; brushed chrome finish in exposed locations.

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking: Softwood lumber of Southern Pine species. B. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer.

2.4 INTERIOR LUMBER TRIM A. Material: MDF, primed. B. Finger joint trim where exposed to moisture in bathrooms or corridors and at all door frames.

2.5 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble work for delivery to site, permitting passage through building openings. B. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for

scribing and site cutting.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FINISH CARPENTRY Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 062000 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to

receive this work.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. B. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use additional

overlay trim to conceal larger gaps.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 062013 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 062013

EXTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Lumber siding.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials,

dimensions, profiles, textures, and colors and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and

certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. Include chemical-treatment manufacturer's written instructions for finishing treated material.

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

3. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced before shipment to Project site to levels specified.

4. Include copies of warranties from chemical-treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product involving selection of colors, profiles, or textures.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Compliance Certificates: 1. For lumber that is not marked with grade stamp.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.

Protect materials from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecast weather conditions permit

work to be performed and at least one coat of specified finish can be applied without exposure to rain, snow, or dampness.

B. Do not install finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,

sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy

surface contamination and discoloration.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and the following grading rules: 1. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority, "Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber." 2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau, Standard No. 17, "Grading Rules for West Coast

Lumber." 3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association, "Western Lumber Grading Rules."

B. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of inspection agency indicating grade, species, moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. 1. For exposed lumber, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece, or omit grade stamp and

provide certificates of grade compliance issued by inspection agency.

2.2 LUMBER SIDING A. Species and Grade: Clear VG (Vertical Grain) Heart western red cedar; NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA. B. Pattern: 5/4 by 8 inch nominal siding, S4S, 19 percent moisture content.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws, in sufficient length to penetrate not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into wood substrate. 1. Material: Stainless steel.

B. Flashing: Comply with requirements in Section 076200 "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing materials installed in exterior finish carpentry. 1. Horizontal Joint Flashing for Panel Siding: Preformed, galvanized-steel, Z-shaped flashing.

C. Sealants: Latex, complying with ASTM C 834 Type OP, Grade NF and with applicable requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants," recommended by sealant manufacturer and manufacturer of substrates for intended application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600. d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM 8200. f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Back out or kerf backs of standing and running trim wider than 5 inches (125 mm), except members with ends exposed in finished work.

B. Ease edges of lumber less than 1 inch (25 mm) in nominal thickness to 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber 1 inch (25 mm) or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch (3-mm) radius.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine finish carpentry materials before installation. Reject materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=5544&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456826216&mf=&src=wd







3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Do not use materials that are unsound, warped, improperly treated or finished, inadequately seasoned, or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces, sizes, or patterns.

B. Install exterior finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims where necessary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut exterior finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as

recommended by manufacturer. 2. Install to tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2438 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining

exterior finish carpentry with 1/32-inch (0.8-mm) maximum offset for flush installation and 1/16-inch (1.5-mm) maximum offset for reveal installation.

3. Coordinate exterior finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate exterior finish carpentry.

3.4 SIDING INSTALLATION

A. Install siding to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Horizontal Lumber Siding: Apply starter strip along bottom edge of sheathing or sill. Install first course of

siding with lower edge at least 1/8 inch (3 mm) below starter strip and subsequent courses lapped 1 inch (25 mm) over course below. Nail at each stud. Do not allow nails to penetrate more than one thickness of siding. 1. Leave 1/8-inch (3-mm) gap at trim and corners unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer,

and apply sealant. 2. Butt joints only over framing or blocking, nailing top and bottom on each side and staggering joints

in subsequent courses. 3. Install prefabricated outside corners as recommended by manufacturer of siding materials.

C. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated on Drawings and as recommended by siding manufacturer. D. Finish: Apply finish within two weeks of installation.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Replace exterior finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Exterior finish carpentry may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

3.6 CLEANING A. Clean exterior finish carpentry on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes

to restore damaged or soiled areas.

3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather and other causes during construction. B. Remove and replace finish carpentry materials that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

1. Indications that materials are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that materials are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 064100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 064100

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated cabinet units. B. Cabinet hardware. C. Factory finishing.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting not less than one week before starting

work of this section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, and

accessories. 1. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 2. Include certification program label.

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. D. Samples: Submit actual samples of architectural cabinet construction, minimum 12 inches square,

illustrating proposed cabinet and shelf unit substrate and finish. E. Samples: Submit actual sample items of proposed pulls, hinges, shelf standards, and locksets,

demonstrating hardware design, quality, and finish.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section

with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Accredited participant in the specified certification program prior to the commencement of

fabrication and throughout the duration of the project. B. Quality Certification: Provide AWI Quality Certification Program inspection report and quality

certification of completed work. 1. Provide labels or certificates indicating that the work complies with requirements of AWS Grade

or Grades specified. 2. Prior to delivery to the site provide shop drawings with certification labels. 3. Provide labels on each product when required by certification program. 4. Upon completion of installation provide certificate certifying that the installation and products

meet the specified requirements. 5. Arrange and pay for inspections required for certification. 6. Replace, repair, or rework all work for which certification is refused.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect units from moisture damage.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditions in

building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CABINETS A. Quality Grade: Unless otherwise indicated provide products of quality specified by AWI//AWMAC/WI

Architectural Woodwork Standards for Premium Grade. B. Wood Veneer Faced Cabinets: Premium grade.

1. Exposed Surfaces: Grade AA, species as indicated, plain sliced, slip-matched. 2. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Grade A, species as indicated, rotary cut, random-matched. 3. Concealed Surfaces: Grade B, species as indicated, rotary cut, random-matched.

C. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.


2.2 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.3 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Basis-of-Design Products: As scheduled. B. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specific

applications.

2.4 COUNTERTOPS A. See Section 123600.

2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by fabricator to suit application. B. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serrated tongue; of

width to match component thickness. C. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; galvanized or

chrome-plated finish in concealed locations and stainless steel or chrome-plated finish in exposed locations.

E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. F. Grommets: Standard plastic, painted metal, or rubber grommets for cut-outs, in color to match

adjacent surface.

2.6 HARDWARE A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified. B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelf standards or

multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish, for nominal 1 inch spacing adjustments.

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: As scheduled. D. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys per lock, master keyed, steel with chrome finish. E. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Full extension. 2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade. 3. Mounting: Side mounted. 4. Stops: Integral type. 5. Features: Provide self-closing/stay-closed type.

F. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, BHMA No. A156.9, B01602, steel with polished finish.

2.7 SHOP TREATMENT OF WOOD MATERIALS A. Provide UL approved identification on fire retardant treated material. B. Deliver fire retardant treated materials cut to required sizes. Minimize field cutting.

2.8 FABRICATION A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage

through building openings. B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more than one

piece for any single length. C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting.

Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting. D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs.

E. Matching Wood Grain: Comply with requirements of quality standard for specified Grade and as follows: 1. Provide sequence matching across each elevation. 2. Carry figure of cabinet fronts to toe kicks.

F. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops with steel brackets at 16 inches on center. G. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint

cut edges.


2.9 SHOP FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Finish work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards, Section 5 -

Finishing for Grade specified and as follows: 1. Transparent:

a. System - 11, Polyurethane, Catalyzed. b. Stain: As selected by Architect. c. Sheen: Flat.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. B. Verify location and sizes of utility rough-in associated with work of this section.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level. B. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. C. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Do not use

additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Secure cabinets to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. F. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with solid wood plugs of species to

match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PLASTIC PANELING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 066400 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 066400

PLASTIC PANELING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes glass-fiber reinforced plastic (FRP) wall paneling and trim accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For plastic paneling and trim accessories. C. Samples for Verification: For plastic paneling and trim accessories, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic paneling and trim accessories from single manufacturer. B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by

a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 3. Testing Agency: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install plastic paneling until spaces are enclosed and

weathertight and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PLASTIC SHEET PANELING (Drawings Designation, FRP) A. General: Gelcoat-finished, glass-fiber reinforced plastic panels complying with ASTM D 5319.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Crane, Kemlite Company Inc. b. Marlite. c. Nudo Products, Inc.

2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.09 inch. 3. Surface Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Color: As scheduled.

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trim Accessories: Manufacturer's standard one-piece vinyl extrusions designed to retain and cover edges

of panels. Provide division bars, inside corners, outside corners, and caps as needed to conceal edges. 1. Color: Match panels.

B. Exposed Fasteners: Nylon drive rivets recommended by panel manufacturer. C. Concealed Mounting Splines: Continuous, H-shaped aluminum extrusions designed to fit into grooves

routed in edges of factory-laminated panels and to be fastened to substrate. D. Adhesive: As recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer.

1. VOC Content: 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

E. Sealant: Single-component, mildew-resistant, neutral-curing silicone sealant recommended by plastic paneling manufacturer and complying with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA

Method 24).

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PLASTIC PANELING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 066400 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove wallpaper, vinyl wall covering, loose or soluble paint, and other materials that might interfere with

adhesive bond. B. Prepare substrate by sanding high spots and filling low spots as needed to provide flat, even surface for

panel installation. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of adhesive, including oil, grease, dirt, and dust. D. Condition panels by unpacking and placing in installation space before installation according to

manufacturer's written recommendations. E. Lay out paneling before installing. Locate panel joints to provide equal panels at ends of walls not less

than half the width of full panels. 1. Mark plumb lines on substrate at trim accessory locations for accurate installation. 2. Locate trim accessories to allow clearance at panel edges according to manufacturer's written

instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install plastic paneling according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install panels in a full spread of adhesive. C. Install panels with fasteners. Layout fastener locations and mark on face of panels so that fasteners are

accurately aligned. 1. Drill oversized fastener holes in panels and center fasteners in holes. 2. Apply sealant to fastener holes before installing fasteners.

D. Install factory-laminated panels using concealed mounting splines in panel joints. E. Install trim accessories with adhesive. F. Fill grooves in trim accessories with sealant before installing panels and bed inside corner trim in a bead of

sealant. G. Maintain uniform space between panels and wall fixtures. Fill space with sealant. H. Maintain uniform space between adjacent panels and between panels and floors, ceilings, and fixtures.

Fill space with sealant. I. Remove excess sealant and smears as paneling is installed. Clean with solvent recommended by sealant

manufacturer and then wipe with clean dry cloths until no residue remains.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHEET WATERPROOFING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 071300 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 071300

SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sheet membrane waterproofing for use at:

1. Occupied areas of building where earth occurs on opposite side of wall. 2. Beneath concrete topping slabs at balconies, breezeways, and stairway access corridors. 3. Elsewhere as indicated on Drawings.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual. B. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with

three years experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three years of experience. D. Source Limitations: Provide waterproofing membrane and flashing and accessory materials by same

manufacturer.

1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and

until liquid or mastic accessories have cured.

1.4 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion;

remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no extra cost to Owner. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for waterproofing failing to resist penetration of water , except

where such failures are the result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature change or shrinkage is not considered a structural failure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WATERPROOFING APPLICATIONS A. Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing.

2.2 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Self-Adhered Modified Bituminous Membrane:

1. Thickness: 60 mil (0.060 inch). 2. Tensile Strength:

a. Film: 5000 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM D882 and at grip-separation rate of 2 inches per minute.

b. Membrane: 325 pounds per square inch, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412 Method A, using die C and at spindle-separation rate of 2 inches per minute.

3. Elongation at Break: 300 percent, minimum, measured according to ASTM D412. 4. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perm, maximum, measured in accordance with ASTM

E96/E96M. 5. Low Temperature Flexibility: Unaffected when tested according to ASTM D1970 at minus 20

degrees F, 180 degree bend on 1 inch mandrel. 6. Peel Strength: 9 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D903. 7. Lap Adhesion Strength: 4 pounds per inch, minimum, when tested according to ASTM D1876. 8. Puncture Resistance: 50 pounds, minimum, measured in accordance with ASTM E154. 9. Water Absorption: 0.1 percent increase in weight, maximum, measured in accordance with

ASTM D570, 24 hour immersion. 10. Hydrostatic Resistance: Resists the weight of 200 feet when tested according to ASTM D5385. 11. Adhesives, Sealants, Tapes, and Accessories: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. 12. Manufacturers:

a. Grace Construction Products ; Product Bituthene 3000: www.na.graceconstruction.com.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHEET WATERPROOFING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 071300 - 2 14 December 2015

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Flexible Flashings: Type recommended by membrane manufacturer. B. Protection Board: Type as recommended by manufacturer for application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are durable; free of matter detrimental to adhesion or application of

waterproofing system. C. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to membrane manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using depth to width ratio as recommended by sealant

manufacturer. E. Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer.

Protect conditioner from rain or frost until dry. F. Concrete Surfaces for Adhesive Bonding: Prepare concrete substrate according to ASTM D5295.

1. Remove substances that inhibit adhesion including form release agents, curing compounds admixtures, laitance, moisture, dust, dirt, grease and oil.

2. Repair surface defects including honeycombs, fins, tie holes, bug holes, sharp offsets, rutted cracks, ragged corners, deviations in surface plane, spalling and delaminations, as described in the reference standard.

3. Remove and replace areas of defective concrete as specified in Section 033000. 4. Prepare concrete for adhesive bonded waterproofing using mechanical or chemical methods

described in the referenced standard. 5. Test concrete surfaces as described in the referenced standards. Verify surfaces are ready to

receive adhesive bonded waterproofing membrane system.

3.3 INSTALLATION - MEMBRANE A. Install membrane waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Roll out membrane. Minimize wrinkles and bubbles. C. Self-Adhering Membrane: Remove release paper layer. Roll out on substrate with a mechanical roller

to encourage full contact bond. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal by method recommended by manufacturer, minimum 3 inches. Seal

permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. Reinforce membrane with multiple thickness of membrane material over joints, whether joints are static

or dynamic. F. Weather lap joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. Seal joints and seams. G. Install flexible flashings. Seal items penetrating through membrane with flexible flashings. Seal

watertight to membrane.

H. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install counterflashing over all exposed edges.

I. Install protection board in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. On completion of horizontal membrane installation, dam installation area in preparation for flood

testing. B. Flood to minimum depth of 1 inch with clean water. After 48 hours, inspect for leaks. C. If leaking is found, remove water, repair leaking areas with new waterproofing materials as directed by

Architect; repeat flood test. Repair damage to building. D. When area is proven watertight, drain water and remove dam.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ELEVATOR PIT WATERPROOFING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 071400 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 071400

ELEVATOR PIT WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following applications for use at elevator pits:

1. HDPE sheet waterproofing below elevator pit slab on grade. 2. Cold fluid applied waterproofing at elevator pit walls. 3. Molded-sheet drainage panels.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate,

technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. B. Sustainable Submittals:

1. VOC content for all sealants, paints, and coatings inside the building envelope. C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and

cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. E. Submit evidence that Installer’s existing company has minimum of 5 years continuous experience in

application of specified materials. Submit list of at least five completed projects of similar scope and size, including: 1. Project name. 2. Owner’s name. 3. Owner’s Representative name, address, and telephone number. 4. Description of work. 5. Self-adhering sheet materials used. 6. Project supervisor. 7. Total cost of waterproofing work and total cost of project. 8. Completion date

F. Sample Warranties: Copies of waterproofing manufacturer’s warranty, Installer’s warranty, and General Contractor’s warranty, all stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions. Submitted with Bid.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of

waterproofing required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials molded-sheet drainage panels through one source

from a single manufacturer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with

manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. B. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist. C. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.


1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or

replace waterproofing that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Installer’s Warranty: 1. Written warranty on form at end of Section, signed by Installer and Contractor, including

a. Repair or replace waterproofing or sheet flashings that do not comply with requirements; that do not remain watertight; that fail in adhesion, cohesion, or general durability; or that deteriorate in manner not clearly specified by submitted waterproofing manufacturer’s data as inherent quality of material for application indicated.

b. Removal and reinstallation of protection board and drainage panels Warranty includes replacing materials as necessary.

c. Repair or replacement, to satisfaction of Owner, of other work or items which may have been displaced or damaged as consequence of defective work.

d. Make immediate emergency repairs within 48 hours of notice of leakage. e. Warranty does not include removal or reinstallation of plantings, soil overburden, or backfill

in planters; or concrete or asphalt toppings. f. Warranty Period: 5 years after Substantial Completion date.

C. Contractor Warranty: 1. Written warranty signed by Contractor, including

a. Removal and reinstallation of plantings, soil overburden, and backfill in planters; and concrete and asphalt toppings. Provide new materials to replace materials that are not suitable for reuse, in opinion of Architect/Engineer.

b. Repair or replacement, to satisfaction of Owner, other work or items which may have been displaced or damaged as consequence of defective work.

c. Make immediate emergency repairs within 48 hours of notice of leakage. d. Warranty Period: 5 years after Substantial Completion date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ELEVATOR PIT SHEET WATERPROOFING (Positive side, horizontal slab application) A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. WR Grace, Preprufe 300R.

B. HDPE Sheet Waterproofing: 1. Physical Properties: As follows, measured per standard test methods referenced:

a. Tensile Strength, Film: 4000 psi minimum; ASTM D 412. b. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 10 deg F; ASTM D 1970. c. Peel Adhesion to Concrete: 5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 903, modified. d. Lap Adhesion: 2.5 lbf/in.; ASTM D 1876, modified. e. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 231 ft.; ASTM D 5385, modified. f. Vapor Permeance: 0.01 perms; ASTM E 96, Water Method. g. Water Absorption: 0.5 percent; ASTM D 570.

2.2 ELEVATOR PIT FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING (Positive side, vertical wall application) A. Two component, synthetic rubber, cold vulcanized, fluid applied waterproofing membrane: Comply with

ASTM C 836 and with manufacturer's written physical requirements. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-525. b. CETCO; LDC 60. c. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Sealtight Meadow-Pruf Seamless d. Neogard, Div. of Jones-Blair; Neogard 7401. e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremproof 60.

2. Basis of Design: WR Grace; Procor 75 Spray Grade.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and

compatible with sheet waterproofing. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Penetration and Terminations: Preprufe Tape


2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Non-woven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Manufactured composite subsurface

drainage panels consisting of a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 100 sieve laminated to 1 side with a polymeric film bonded to the other side of a 3-dimensional, non-biodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core, with a vertical flow rate of at least 15 gpm per ft. 1. Basis of Design: Grace Hydroduct 220 Drainage Composite

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and

other conditions affecting performance. 1. Do not proceed with installation until after the minimum concrete curing period recommended by

waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet

method according to ASTM D 4263. 3. Notify Architect in writing of anticipated problems using waterproofing over substrate. 4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-

free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating

contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and

other voids. D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks

according to ASTM D 4258. E. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through

waterproofing and at drains and protrusions.

3.3 PREPARATION AT TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at

expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 898 and ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Prime substrate unless otherwise instructed by waterproofing manufacturer. C. On vertical surfaces, apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip

in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. Provide sealant cants around penetrations and at inside corners of deck-to-wall butt joints when

recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT AT FLUID APPLIED SYSTEMS A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM C 898 and ASTM C 1471 and

waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks, complying with ASTM D 4258, before coating surfaces. 1. Comply with ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation. 2. Apply bond breaker between sealant and preparation strip. 3. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of preparation strip extending a minimum of 3 inches

75 mm along each side of joint. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat.

4. Rout and fill joints and cracks in substrate. Before filling, remove dust and dirt according to ASTM D 4258.

B. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where indicated or required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions. Extend sheet flashings onto perpendicular surfaces and other work penetrating substrate according to ASTM C 898.

3.5 FLUID APPLIED WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Apply waterproofing according to ASTM C 898 and ASTM C 1471 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Start installing waterproofing in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. C. Apply primer (pre-treatment) over prepared substrate per manufacturer’s recommendations.


D. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications: Mix materials and apply waterproofing by spray, roller, notched squeegee, trowel, or other application method suitable to slope of substrate. 1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases,

with dry film thickness of 60 mils Apply waterproofing to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces.

2. Verify wet film thickness of waterproofing every 100 sq. ft..

3.6 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate,

according to manufacturer's written instructions. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed panels during subsequent construction.

3.7 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Protect installed from damage due to UV light, harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other

causes. Provide temporary coverings where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING –ELEVATED DECKS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 071413 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 071413

FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING –ELEVATED DECKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fluid applied membrane waterproofing at plaza decks. B. Plaza deck pavers. C. Cant strips and other accessories. D. Drainage panels and protection boards.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for membrane. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other

materials. D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and

registered with manufacturer.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual for fluid-applied system. B. Membrane Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in waterproofing sheet membranes with

three years experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 3 years

experience.

1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 degrees F for 24 hours before and during application and until

cured.

1.5 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a 10 year period after Date of Substantial Completion;

remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no cost to Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. American Hydrotech; Product MM6125. B. Other Acceptable Rubberized Asphalt Manufacturers:

1. Barrett Company: www.barrettroofs.com. 2. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc: www.carlisle-ccw.com 3. Bakor Inc., www.bakor.com 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. Fluid-Applied Waterproofing - General: Rubberized asphalt fluid-applied membrane. B. Rubberized Asphalt Membrane: Elasticized rubberized asphaltic compound, hot poured, quick setting.

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Surface Conditioner: type, compatible with membrane compound; as recommended by membrane

manufacturer. B. Protection Board: 1/8 inch thick biodegradable hardboard; with integral drainage channels; type as

recommended by manufacturer. C. Cant Strips: Premolded composition material.


2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Prefabricated, composite drainage panels, manufactured with a

permeable geotextile facing laminated to a molded-plastic-sheet drainage core. 1. Drainage Core: Three-dimensional, non-biodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet material designed to

effectively drain water under backfill pressure; complying with the following properties determined according to tests indicated: a. Compressive Strength: 10,000 lbf/sf. ft.479 kPa , minimum; ASTM D 1621. (Provide higher

compressive strength, 18,000 and up, in areas where waterproofing system is exposed to vehicle traffic.

b. Flow Rate: 2.8 gpm per ft.35 L/min. per m(5.5 gpm per ft), minimum, at hydraulic gradient of 1.0 and compressive stress of 25 psi172 kPa; ASTM D 4716.

2. Geotextile: Non-woven needle-punched geotextile, manufactured for subsurface drainage, made from polyolefins or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with the following properties determined according to AASHTO M 288: a. Survivability: Class 2. b. Apparent Opening Size: No. 400.43-mm sieve, maximum.

3. Film Backing: Polymeric film bonded to drainage core surface.

2.5 PLAZA DECK PAVERS A. Plaza Deck Pavers: Heavyweight, hydraulically pressed, concrete units, square edged, manufactured for

use as plaza deck pavers; minimum compressive strength 6500 psi45 MPa, ASTM C 140; absorption

not greater than 5 percent, ASTM C 140; no breakage and maximum 1 percent mass loss when tested for freeze-thaw resistance, ASTM C 67; and as follows: 1. Size: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Colors and Textures: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Hanover Architectural Products, Inc. b. Hastings Pavement Co., Inc. c. Wausau Tile, Inc.; Terra-Paving Div.

B. Paver Supports: Paver manufacturer's standard SBR rubber, high-density polyethylene, or polyurethane paver support assembly, including adjustable or stackable pedestals, shims, and spacer tabs for joint

spacing of 3/16 inch5 mm.

1. Concrete Fill: ACI 301, compressive strength of 5000 psi 34 MPa at 28 days and air content of

6 percent.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of frozen matter, dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections,

penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system. C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact

bond of waterproofing materials. D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing. B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

Vacuum substrate clean. C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer. D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by sealant manufacturer. E. Install cant strips at inside corners.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to NRCA Waterproofing and Dampproofing Manual drawing details as noted: B. Apply surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Protect conditioner from rain or frost

until dry. C. At joints and cracks less than 1/2 inch in width including joints between horizontal and vertical surfaces,

apply 12 inch wide strip of joint cover sheet. D. At joints from 1/2 to 1 inch in width, loop joint cover sheet down into joint between 1-1/4 and 1-3/4 inch.

Extend sheet 6 inches on either side of expansion joint.


E. Center joint cover sheet over joints. Roll sheet into 1/8 inch coating of waterproofing material. Apply second coat over sheet extending minimum of 6 inches beyond sheet edges.

F. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to specified minimum thickness. G. Extend membrane over cants and up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum 6 inches. H. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, and angles. I. Install flexible flashings and seal into waterproofing material. Seal items penetrating through membrane

with flexible flashings. J. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install

counterflashing over all exposed edges.

3.4 INSTALLATION - DRAINAGE PANEL and PROTECTION BOARD A. Immediately after cooling, dust membrane with tack-reducing surfacing at rate of approximately 10 lbs/100

sq ft. B. After membrane has cooled, but before it becomes dusty, apply separation sheet. Lap joints to ensure

complete coverage. C. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels to substrate according to manufacturer's written

instructions. Use adhesives that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.

3.5 PLAZA DECK PAVER INSTALLATION A. Install concrete pavers and paver supports in locations indicated according to manufacturer's written

instructions. B. Accurately install [fixed] [adjustable]-height pedestals and other accessories to elevations required. Adjust

for final level and slope with shims. 1. Fill pedestal with concrete mix, strike smooth with top of pedestal, and cure according to ACI 301.

C. Loosely lay pavers on pedestals, maintaining a uniform open joint width. Tightly seat pavers against spacers to eliminate lateral movement or drift of paving assembly. Align joint patterns parallel in each direction. 1. Lay out pavers to avoid less-than-half-width pavers at perimeter or other terminations.

D. Install pavers to not vary more than 1/16 inch 1.6 mm in elevation between adjacent pavers or more

than 1/16 inch 1.6 mm from surface plane elevation of individual paver.

E. Maintain tolerances of paving installation within [1/4 inch in 10 feet1:48] [Insert another surface

tolerance] of surface plane in any direction.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TRAFFIC COATINGS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 071800 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 071800

TRAFFIC COATINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes traffic coatings for the following applications:

1. Pedestrian raffic over exposed non-conditioned corridor surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Traffic-coating manufacturer’s literature including written instructions for evaluating,

preparing, and treating substrate; technical data including tested physical and performance properties; and application instructions. 1. Traffic-coating manufacturer’s color chart.

B. Shop Drawings: Show extent of each traffic coating. Include details for treating substrate joints and cracks, flashings, deck penetrations, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of traffic coating required, provide stepped samples (8 inch square) on rigid backing large enough to illustrate build-up of traffic coatings, of same thickness and material indicated for Work.

D. Warranty: Copies of traffic-coating manufacturer’s warranty and Applicator’s warranty, both stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by traffic-coating

manufacturer to apply traffic coating and that is eligible to receive traffic-coating manufacturer’s warranty. Must have installations of specified materials in local area in use for minimum of five years. 1. Employ foreman trained by traffic-coating manufacturer and with minimum of 5-years experience as

foreman on similar projects, , to be on site at all times during Work. B. Source Limitations:

1. Obtain traffic coatings from a single manufacturer. 2. Obtain primary traffic coating materials, including primers, from traffic coating manufacturer. Obtain

secondary materials including aggregates, sheet flashings, joint sealants, and substrate repair materials of type and from source recommended in writing by primary material manufacturer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers with seals unbroken labeled with traffic-coating

manufacturer’s name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, lot number, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store materials in original, undamaged containers in clean, dry, protected location on raised platforms with weather-protective, vented coverings, within temperature range required by traffic-coating manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight. Traffic-coating manufacturer’s standard packaging and covering is not considered adequate weather protection.

C. Limit stored materials on structures to safe loading of structure at time materials are stored, and to avoid permanent deck deflection.

D. Handle materials to avoid damage. E. Conspicuously mark damaged or opened containers or containers with contaminated materials, and

remove from site as soon as possible. F. Remove and replace materials that cannot be applied within stated shelf life.


1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify existing dimensions and details prior to installation of materials. Notify Architect/ Engineer of

conditions found to be different than those indicated in Contract Documents. Architect/Engineer will review situation and inform Contractor and Applicator of changes.

B. Comply with Owner’s limitations and restrictions for site use and accessibility. C. Environmental Limitations: Apply traffic coating when existing and forecast weather conditions permit

traffic coating to be installed according to traffic-coating manufacturer’s written instructions and warranty requirements. Do not apply traffic coating under following conditions, unless otherwise recommended by traffic-coating manufacturer and approved by Architect/Engineer. 1. Do not apply when substrate temperature is below 50 degrees F or less than 5 degrees F above

dew point, or outside of range recommended by traffic-coating manufacturer. 2. Do not apply when ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F or outside of range recommended

by traffic-coating manufacturer. 3. Do not apply to damp or wet substrate; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; in snow, rain,

fog, or mist; or when snow, rain, fog, or mist is forecast during application or curing period. Apply only to frost-free substrate.

D. Install materials in strict accordance with safety requirements required by traffic-coating manufacturer, Material Safety Data Sheets, and local, state, and federal rules and regulations.

E. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of traffic-coating materials. Notify Owner’s Representative at least 1 week in advance of Work with materials with noxious vapors. Review application schedule and venting precautions with Owner’s Representative prior to beginning application.

F. Do not install traffic coating until items that will penetrate membrane have been installed.

1.7 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty:

1. Written warranty, signed by traffic-coating manufacturer, including a. Repair or replace traffic coating that does not comply with requirements; that does not

remain watertight; that fails in adhesion, cohesion, or general durability; that experiences abrasion or tearing failure not due to misuse; that experiences surface crazing, fading or chalking; or that deteriorates in manner not clearly specified by submitted traffic-coating manufacturer’s data as inherent quality of material for application indicated. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of traffic coating due to failure of substrate prepared according to requirements, formation of new substrate cracks exceeding 1/16 inch in width, fire, vandalism, or snowplow abuse.

b. Provide access to warranty repair and replacement areas. 2. Warranty Period: 10 years after Substantial Completion date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Traffic Coatings: Complying with ASTM C 957. B. Material Compatibility: Provide primers; base, intermediate, and topcoats; and miscellaneous materials

that are compatible with one another and with substrate under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain materials through one source from single traffic-coating manufacturer. Provide materials not available from traffic-coating manufacturer from sources approved by traffic-coating manufacturer. Provide new materials.

D. VOC Content: Provide traffic coatings[ and pavement marking paints], for use inside the weatherproofing system, with VOC content of 150 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

2.2 TRAFFIC COATING A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the

Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Peda-Gard Pedestrian Traffic-Bearing Waterproofing, manufactured by Neogard, Dallas, TX,

consisting of 18 dry mils of base coat, 14 dry mils of wearing surface coat, and 10 pounds of aggregate per 100 square feet.

2. Sonoguard Pedestrian System, manufactured by Sonneborn, consisting of 20 dry mils of base coat, 15 dry mils of finish coat, and 10 pounds of aggregate per 100 square feet.

3. Vulkem 350, manufactured by Tremco, consisting of 40 mils of wet base coat, 100-150 s.f. per gallon topcoat, and up to 50 pounds of aggregate per 100 square feet.


B. Primer: Traffic-coating manufacturer’s standard, factory-formulated primer recommended for substrate under conditions of service and application.

C. Top Coat Color: Selected from manufacturers full range. D. Aggregate: Uniformly graded, washed silicon carbide sand of particle sizes, shape, and minimum

hardness recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. 1. Spreading Rate: As recommended by manufacturer for substrate and service conditions indicated,

but not less than the following: a. Intermediate Coat: 8 to 10 lb/100 sq. ft. b. Topcoat: As required to achieve slip-resistant finish.

2.3 ISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." B. Sheet Flashing: Non-staining.

1. Minimum Thickness: 60 mils. 2. Material: Sheet material recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.

C. Adhesive: Contact adhesive recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer. D. Reinforcing Strip: Fiberglass mesh recommended in writing by traffic coating manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer and traffic-coating manufacturer’s representative present, for

compliance with requirements and for other conditions affecting performance of traffic coatings. 1. Applicator and traffic-coating manufacturer’s representative shall examine substrate to ensure that

it is properly prepared and ready to receive traffic coating. Traffic-coating manufacturer’s representative shall report in writing to Applicator and Architect/Engineer conditions which will adversely affect traffic-coating system installation or performance.

B. Ensure that the Work done by other trades is complete and ready to receive traffic coating. C. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates. D. Begin coating application only after minimum concrete curing and drying period recommended by traffic

coating manufacturer has passed, after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected, and after surfaces are dry.

E. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and traffic coating manufacturer's written

recommendations to produce clean, dust-free, dry substrate for traffic coating application. B. Mask adjoining surfaces not receiving traffic coatings, deck drains, and other deck substrate penetrations

to prevent spillage, leaking, and migration of coatings. C. Close off deck drains (temporarily) and other deck penetrations to prevent spillage and migration of traffic-

coating fluids. Re-open deck drains at the end of each work day or when rain is imminent. D. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically abrade concrete surfaces to a uniform profile according to ASTM D

4259. Do not acid etch. 1. Remove grease, oil, paints, and other penetrating contaminants from concrete. 2. Remove concrete fins, ridges, and other projections. 3. Remove laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, concrete hardeners, form-release

agents, and other incompatible materials that might affect coating adhesion. 4. Remove remaining loose material to provide a sound surface, and clean surfaces according to

ASTM D 4258. 5. Properly patch substrate defects such as delaminations, spalls, voids, form tie holes,

honeycombing, and cracks, with latex-modified concrete or another material acceptable to traffic-coating manufacturer and Architect/Engineer.

6. Verify that concrete curbs, expansion joints, and transitions from one surface plane to another (inside and outside corners) are cleanly formed and free of broken edges and excess concrete.

7. Verify that substrate is sound and is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.

8. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by traffic-coating manufacturer. Test for moisture content by method recommended in writing by manufacturer.


3.3 TERMINATIONS AND PENETRATIONS A. Prepare vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through traffic coatings and at

expansion joints, drains, and sleeves according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Provide sealant cants at penetrations and at reinforced and non-reinforced, deck-to-wall butt joints. C. Terminate edges of deck-to-deck expansion joints with preparatory base-coat strip. D. Install sheet flashings at deck-to-wall expansion and dynamic joints, and bond to deck and wall substrates

according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.4 JOINT AND CRACK TREATMENT A. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrates according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's

written recommendations. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for joint-sealant installation.

3.5 TRAFFIC COATING APPLICATION A. Apply traffic coating material according to ASTM C 1127 and manufacturer's written recommendations.

1. Start traffic coating application in presence of manufacturer's technical representative. 2. Verify that wet film thickness of each component coat complies with requirements every 100 sq. ft.. 3. Install joint reinforcement, centered on joints and horizontal edges of sheet-metal flashing and

pans, in detail coat. 4. Wipe detail coat to remove dust and contamination. 5. Apply traffic coatings to prepared wall terminations and vertical surfaces to height indicated, and

omit aggregate on vertical surfaces. 6. Apply each coat in one uniform application, broadcast aggregate if required, and backroll for even

coverage. Allow each coat to cure before apply next coat. Sweep or vacuum off excess aggregate. 7. Apply at least 4 inches up sides of columns, walls, and other vertical surfaces, and up curb faces

and across top curb surfaces. 8. Omit aggregate on vertical surfaces. 9. If pinholes occur in base coat, apply additional base coat material using flat squeegee or other tool

approved by traffic-coating manufacturer, to fill holes before proceeding with subsequent coats. 10. Prevent contamination or damage during application and curing. 11. Cure traffic coatings according to manufacturer's written recommendations. Prevent contamination

and damage during application and curing stages.

3.6 PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect traffic coatings from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Clean spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by

manufacturer of affected construction. C. Replace Work or materials damaged beyond repair, in opinion of Architect/Engineer, at no cost to Owner.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas THERMAL INSULATION Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 072100

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at cavity wall construction and at foundations in cold climates. B. Batt insulation in exterior wall and ceiling construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions

required for installation and installation techniques. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to

successful installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Insulation:

1. Owens Corning. 2. Certainteed. 3. USG. 4. Johns Manville. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation Over Metal or Wood Framed Walls, Continuous: Extruded polystyrene or polyisocyanurate

board. B. Insulation in Metal or Wood Framed Walls: Batt insulation with no vapor retarder (typical) and with

vapor retarder in cold climates.

2.3 FOAM BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C578, Type X; Extruded polystyrene board with either

natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 4. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inches. 5. Board Edges: Square. 6. Thermal Conductivity (k factor) at 25 degrees F: 0.18. 7. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi. 8. Board Density: 1.3 lb/cu ft. 9. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.3 percent, volume.


B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289; Type II, Class 1, cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 1. 1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Compressive Strength: 16 psi 4. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 5. Board Thickness: 1 inch. 6. Board Edges: Square. 7. Manufacturers:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation : www.atlasroofing.com. b. Dow Chemical Co: www.dow.com. c. GAF Materials Corporation: www.gaf.com. d. Rmax Inc. : www.rmax.com.

8. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.4 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665; friction fit.

1. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136 , except for

facing, if any. 4. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 5. Thermal Resistance: As follow, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings.

a. Exterior Walls: R-3. b. Ceilings with Attic Spaces: R-38. c. Ceilings Without Attic Spaces: R-30.

6. Thickness: a. For exterior envelope: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than R-19 at exterior

walls. b. 4 inches for acoustical purposes.

7. Facing: a. Unfaced (typical) b. With FSK foil facing at metal stud walls in cold climates. c. With reinforced kraft facing at wood studs in cold climates.

8. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. c. Knauf Insulation GmbH: www.knaufinsulation.us. d. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready

to receive insulation and adhesive. B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or substances that

may impede adhesive bond.

3.2 BOARD INSTALLATION AT CAVITY WALLS A. Secure impale fasteners to substrate at a frequency as follows:

1. 6 per insulation board. B. Install boards to fit snugly between wall ties. C. Install boards horizontally on walls.

1. Install in running bond pattern. 2. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. 3. Place impale fastener locking discs.

D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.


3.3 RIGID BOARD INSTALLATION – FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Apply adhesive adhesive in three continuous beads per board length. B. Install boards on foundation [wall] [grade beam] perimeter, [vertically.] [horizontally.] Place boards in a

method to maximize contact bedding. Stagger [side] [end] joints. Butt edges and ends tight to adjacent board and to protrusions.

C. Extend boards over control and expansion joints, unbonded to foundation 6 inches either side of joint.

3.4 BATT INSTALLATION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within

the plane of the insulation. E. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 072500.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072119 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 072119

FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following:

1. Spray-applied insulation in crawl space. 2. Vapor retarder coating on cured spray-applied insulation.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Material Compatibility: Provide insulation, coating, and miscellaneous related materials that are compatible

with one another and able to bond to substrate under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by insulation manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of insulation indicated. Include manufacturer's written instructions for

evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Samples for Verification: 24-inch-by-24-inch samples on rigid backing, showing foam insulation of thickness required and stepped coating system in colors required to illustrate build-up of coating system on insulation.

C. Certification: Insurance manufacturer’s verification of acceptability of specified vapor retarder. D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing

agency, for coated foamed insulation. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: For coated foamed insulation. F. Warranty: Specimen copy of coated foamed insulation manufacturer's special warranty stating obligations,

remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who is approved, authorized, or licensed by insulation and

coating manufacturers for installation of manufacturers’ products for designated applications. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having

jurisdiction, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain foam insulation materials from one producer and coating products from a single manufacturer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's

name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, shelf life, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

C. Remove and replace material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations:

1. Apply foam insulation and coatings within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures and humidity levels recommended by insulation and coating manufacturers.

2. Do not install insulation within 2 inches of heat emitting devices where temperature is in excess of 200 degrees F.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FOAMED-IN-PLACE INSULATION Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072119 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Foam Insulation: a. Icynene Inc. b. Demelac Inc.

2. Substitutions in accordance with Section 012500.

2.2 FOAM INSULATION A. Foamed-in-Place Insulation: Hydrophobic, low-density, open-cell modified polyicynene spray insulation;

conforming to following. 1. Thermal Resistance (R-Value/inch), ASTM C 518: 3.6 hr/sq. ft./degree F/BTU.In. 2. Air Permeance (for 5.25 inches of material), ASTM E 283: 0.0049 1/m2/second. 3. Water Vapor Transmission (for 5 inches of material), ASTM E 96: 10 perms. 4. Corrosion: No significant corrosion when in contact with steel under 85 percent relative humidity. 5. Bacterial or Fungal Growth: No growth; no material deterioration. 6. Flame Spread, Smoke Developed Rating, and Fuel Contribution, ASTM E 84: Less than 20, less

than 400 respectively, and 0 respectively.

2.3 PRIMER A. Primer: As recommended by coating manufacturer for substrate material.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions under which foamed insulation will be applied, with Installer(s)

present, for compliance with requirements. 1. Proceed with installation only after minimum concrete curing period recommended by foamed

insulation manufacturer. 2. Verify that other work on and within spaces to be insulated is complete prior to application. 3. Begin installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and substrates are dry.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean and prepare substrate according to foamed insulation manufacturer's written instructions. Provide

clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for insulation application. B. Remove grease, oil, form-release agents, curing compounds, and other contaminants from substrate. C. Cover and mask adjoining surfaces not receiving foamed insulation to prevent overspray affecting other

construction. 1. Remove masking after foam application and re-mask adjoining substrates before coating.

D. Fill, cover, or tape joints and cracks in substrate that exceed a width of 1/4 inch. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks before applying foam.

E. Apply primer if recommended by manufacturer for substrate encountered.

3.3 FOAM APPLICATION A. Mix and apply foam in accordance with foamed insulation manufacturer's written instructions. B. Uniformly apply total thickness of foam without voids to a surface tolerance in accordance with

manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Total R-Value: R-[___] (approximately [___] inches thick).

C. Apply foam to penetrations, terminations, and vertical surfaces as indicated. D. Trim excess foam in accordance with insulation manufacturer’s written instructions. Provide finished

surface of foam in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and suitable for specified coating application.

E. Remove and replace foam not complying with minimum surface-texture limitations.

3.4 CURING, PROTECTING, AND CLEANING A. Cure coatings in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, taking care to prevent contamination

and damage during application stages and curing. B. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures

recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas BLOWN INSULATION Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072126 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 072126

BLOWN INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Loose insulation pneumatically placed and poured into joist spaces through access holes.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of This Section: Provide continuity of thermal barrier at building enclosure elements, in

conjunction with Section 072100.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedure for preparation and installation. D. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Blown Insulation:

1. CertainTeed Corporation : www.certainteed.com. 2. GreenFiber : www.greenfiber.com 3. Johns Manville Corporation : www.jm.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Loose Fill Insulation: Provide one of the following:

1. ASTM C739, cellulose fiber type, nodulated for pour and bulk for pneumatic placement. 2. ASTM C 764, glass fiber type, nodulated for pour and bulk for pneumatic placement.

B. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 BTU in/(hr sq ft deg F). C. Installed Thickness: As indicated on drawings, but not less than R-38 in attic spaces. D. Ventilation Baffles: Formed plastic.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation are dry and ready to receive insulation.

B. Verify that light fixtures have thermal cut-out device to restrict over-heating in soffit or ceiling spaces.

C. Verify spaces are unobstructed to allow placement of insulation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install insulation and ventilation baffle in accordance with ASTM C1015 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Place insulation pneumatically to completely fill stud, joist, and rafter spaces.

C. Place insulation against baffles. Do not impede natural attic ventilation to soffit.

D. Place against and behind mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation.

E. Completely fill intended spaces. Leave no gaps or voids.

F. Repair and reseal insulation access ports. Refinish to match disturbed work.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SPRAY-APPLIED INSULATION Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072129 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 072129

SPRAY-APPLIED INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Spayed-on cellulose fiber insulation on under side of podium concrete slab where occupied space occurs above.

2. Protective Coating.

1.2 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Furnish manufacturer’s complete color selection showing full range of colors

and finish characteristics. D. Samples for Verification: Furnish materials to be used with labels indicating colors, finish characteristics,

and locations of the Work. Samples will be reviewed for color and appearance only. Furnish the following. 1. 12" x 12” sample in color selected.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing

agency for insulation products. B. Sustainable Submittals:

1. Product data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by SFRM

manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements. A manufacturer's willingness to sell its SFRM to Contractor or to an installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with all applicable requirements of the laws, codes, ordinances and regulations of Federal, State and Municipal authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from all such authorities.

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain materials from a single manufacturer for the complete system.

1.5 DELIVER, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in original, unopened packages with intact and legible manufacturers'

labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, and shelf life if applicable. B. Store materials inside, under cover, and aboveground; keep dry until ready for use. Remove from Project

site and discard wet or deteriorated materials. Do not open packaging nor remove labels until time of installation.

C. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and other sources. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of spray-applied insulation material.

Use natural means or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation until insulation dries thoroughly.

1.7 COORDINATION A. Sequence and coordinate application of spray-applied insulation with other related work specified in other

Sections to comply with the following requirements: 1. Provide temporary enclosure as required to confine spraying operations and protect the

environment. 2. Provide temporary enclosures for applications to prevent deterioration of insulation due to exposure

to weather and to unfavorable ambient conditions for humidity, temperature, and ventilation.


3. Avoid unnecessary exposure of insulation to abrasion and other damage likely to occur during construction operations subsequent to its application.

B. Do not apply insulation to metal roof deck substrates until concrete topping, if any, has been completed. For metal roof decks without concrete topping, do not apply insulation to metal roof deck substrates until roofing has been completed; prohibit roof traffic during application and drying of insulation.

C. Do not apply insulation to metal floor deck substrates until concrete topping has been completed. D. Do not begin applying insulation until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fire

protection are in place. E. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying insulation until application

of insulation is completed. F. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after insulation has been applied, inspected, and

corrections have been made to defective applications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Spayed-on Cellulose Fiber Insulation: ASTM E 1042, Type II, chemically treated recycled natural fibers

bound together with special adhesives. 1. Thickness: As required to achieve R value. 2. R value: R-38. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full available options. 4. Bond Strength: ASTM E 736, 400 lbs / sq. ft. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

a. Flame Spread: 5 b. Smoke Developed: 5

6. Bond Deflection: ASTM E 759 7. Basis of Design Product: International Cellulose Corporation “K-13 Spray-On System”

B. Protective Coating: Water based vinyl acrylic emulsion with fibers. 1. Color: White. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.

a. Flame Spread: 5 b. Smoke Developed: 5

3. Basis of Design Product: International Cellulose Corporation “Pro Tek-13 – Abrasion Resistant Sprayed Protective Coating”

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Primer: Type as recommended by spray-applied insulation manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of Sections in

which substrates and related work are specified and for other conditions affecting performance. B. A substrate is in satisfactory condition if it complies with the following:

1. Substrates comply with requirements in the Section where the substrate and related materials and construction are specified.

2. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, incompatible paints, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of insulation with substrates under conditions of normal use or exposure.

3. Objects penetrating insulation, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates.

4. Substrates are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, and other suspended construction that will interfere with applying material.

C. Verify that concrete work on steel deck has been completed, if applicable. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate installation of work to be installed under and penetrating insulation prior to application of

insulation. B. Protection: Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fire-resistive materials during

application. Provide masking, drop cloths or other covering for materials and surfaces which are not to receive insulation.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of insulation, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, and incompatible primers, and paints.

D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by SFRM manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive SFRM.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install system in accordance with manufacturer’s printed installation instructions, submittals,

applicable industry standards, and governing regulatory requirements for the Work. B. Coat substrates with bonding adhesive before applying insulation materials to achieve proper adhesion or

as may be otherwise recommended by insulation manufacturer for material and application indicated. C. Extend insulation in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be insulated. D. Install with insulation manufacturer-recommended equipment. E. Install in thickness indicated as measured by ASTM E 605. F. Apply protective coating to all exposed surfaces. Protective coating need not be applied to insulation

surfaces concealed behind gypsum board.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove

material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Coordinate application of insulation with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove completed applications. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect insulation and patch any damaged or removed areas.

C. Protect the Work so it will not deteriorate or be damaged.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WEATHER BARRIERS - SHEET Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072500 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 072500

WEATHER BARRIERS - SHEET

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air/Moisture Barriers: Materials to stop passage of air through exterior walls, joints between exterior walls

and roof, and joints around frames of openings in exterior walls.

1.2 DEFINITIONS A. Air/Moisture Barrier: Assemblies that form water-resistive and air barrier.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the materials manufacturers before, during and after

installation.

1.5 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer’s standard 10 year water-tightness warranty covering material and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR BARRIER MATERIALS (WATER VAPOR PERMEABLE AND WATER-RESISTIVE) A. Air Barrier Sheet, Mechanically Fastened:

1. Air Permeance: 0.004 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178.

2. Water Vapor Permeance: 20 perms, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E 96M Procedure A (desiccant method).

3. Water Penetration Resistance: Withstand a water head of 21 inches, minimum, for minimum of 5 hours, when tested in accordance with AATCC 127.

4. Ultraviolet and Weathering Resistance: Approved in writing by manufacturer for minimum of 4 months weather exposure.

5. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 50 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

6. Manufacturers: a. DuPont Tyvek CommercialWrap and StucoWrap; www.dupont.com. b. Pactiv Corporation; GreenGuard C2000 Building Wrap: greenguard.pactiv.com. c. VaproShield, LLC; WrapShield: www.vaproshield.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

7. Acceptable Products: a. Behind siding:

1) Tyvek Commerical Wrap, by E.I. Dupont. b. Behind cement plaster:

1) Tyvek Stucco Wrap, by E.I. Dupont, and having the following performance c. Self-Adhering Flexible flashing tape, DuPont™ FlexWrap™. and Self Adhering Straight

flashing tape, DuPont™ StraightFlash ™.

2.2 SEALANTS A. Silicone Sealant: Type S-GP as specified in Section 079005.

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Self-Adhesive Sheet Flashing: ASTM D 1970. B. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by material manufacturer. C. Attachment Devices: Galvanized steel nails with weather resistant plastic caps.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WEATHER BARRIERS - SHEET Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072500 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners, and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper

installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Water-Resistive/Air Barriers: Install continuous barrier over surfaces indicated, with sheets lapped to shed

water but with seams not sealed. C. Mechanically Fastened Sheets - On Exterior:

1. Install sheets shingle-fashion to shed water, with seams generally horizontal. 2. Overlap seams as recommended by manufacturer but at least 6 inches. 3. Overlap at outside and inside corners as recommended by manufacturer but at least 12 inches. 4. Attach to framed construction with fasteners extending through sheathing into framing. Space

fasteners at 12 to 18 inches on center along each framing member supporting sheathing. 5. For applications specified to be air-tight, seal seams, laps, penetrations, tears, and cuts with self-

adhesive tape; use only large-headed, gasketed fasteners recommended by the manufacturer. 6. Install air barrier UNDER jamb flashings. 7. Install head flashings under weather barrier. 8. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, wrap excess sheet into opening; at

head, seal sheet over flange and flashing. D. Openings and Penetrations in Exterior Weather Barriers:

1. Install self-adhesive flashing over sills, covering entire sill frame member, extending at least 5 inches onto weather barrier and at least 6 inches up jambs; mechanically fasten stretched edges.

2. At openings to be filled with frames having nailing flanges, seal head and jamb flanges using a continuous bead of sealant compressed by flange and cover flanges with self-adhesive flashing at least 4 inches wide; do not seal sill flange.

3. At openings to be filled with non-flanged frames, seal weather barrier to all sides of opening framing, using self-adhesive flashing at least 9 inches wide, covering entire depth of framing.

4. At head of openings, install self-adhesive flashing under weather barrier extending at least 2 inches beyond face of jambs; seal weather barrier to flashing.

5. At interior face of openings, seal gap between window/door frame and rough framing, using joint sealant over backer rod.

6. Service and Other Penetrations: Form self-adhesive flashing around penetrating item and seal to weather barrier surface.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Do not cover installed weather barriers until required inspections have been completed. B. Obtain approval of installation procedures by the weather barrier manufacturer based on a mock-up

installed in place, prior to proceeding with remainder of installation. C. Provide inspections as required by weather barrier manufacturer as required to secure warranty indicated.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072600 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 072600

UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes:

1. Sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion through concrete slabs-on-grade.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Written certification from the manufacturer that the materials and their application as noted in this

Specification and on the Drawings is appropriate and approved for this project. B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s product data, specifications, and installation instructions. Include vapor

barrier manufacturer’s requirements for placement, seaming and pipe book installation. C. Sample Warranties: Copies of waterproofing manufacturer’s warranty, Installer’s warranty, and General

Contractor’s warranty, all stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions. Submitted with Bid. D. Test Reports: Manufacturer’s independent laboratory test reports showing compliance with ASTM and ACI

Standards. E. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements. F. Submit evidence that Installer’s existing company has minimum of 5-years continuous experience in

application of specified materials.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer, who has

completed applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Source Limitations: Vapor Barrier and components to be from one source from a single manufacturer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labels

indicating brand name and directions for storage and application. B. Store materials in a clean dry location in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects. C. Stack membrane on elevated wood platform to eliminate warping. D. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrate

temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting materials performance. Do not apply on frozen ground.

B. Close areas to traffic during application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of sheet vapor barrier with Division 03 sections. B. Coordinate placement of sealer and hardener with Division 03 sections and with requirements of finish

flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072600 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Sheet Vapor Barrier:

1. Type: 15 mil polyolefin film meeting requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class A. 2. Water Vapor Transmittance (After mandatory condition per ASTM E154 sections 8,11,12,13):

Maximum perm rating of 0.01 as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1745 Section 7. 3. Strength: ASTM E 1745: Class A.

B. Acceptable Products: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, LLC, 15 mils. b. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with provisions of Section 016000, “Product

Requirements.” C. Accessories:

1. Bonding Agent: Manufacturer’s approved or recommended vapor barrier bonding agent. 2. Sealing and Seaming Tape: High density polyethylene tape a minimum of 4 inches in width,

compatible with vapor barrier membrane, and manufactured by or recommended by vapor barrier membrane manufacturer. Tape for joints shall have at least the same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified.

3. Vapor Proofing Mastic: Manufacturer’s approved or recommended vapor proofing mastic with the same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified.

4. Pipe Boot: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin

surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Level or tamp or roll aggregate, sand or granular base.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Vapor Barrier:

1. Place, protect, and repair vapor barrier sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete pour. 3. Install vapor barrier without tears, voids, and holes. Lap ends and edges as recommended by

manufacturer, but not less than 6 inches over adjacent sheets. Seal laps with tape. 4. Turn up sheets at perimeter, at footings and vertical walls, and against penetrations, and seal joints

with tape. 5. Seal joints, tears, holes, perimeter, and penetrations through vapor with tape in accordance with

manufacturer’s recommendations. 6. Point exposed edges with pointing mastic to prevent water from traveling under membrane. 7. Adhere membrane to vertical surfaces with adhesive.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect complete membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or

damage and repair as required to maintain vapor barrier integrity.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 072726 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 072726

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-permeable membrane air barriers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air. B. Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity. C. Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to an opaque

wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.

B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies. 1. Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks,

counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

2. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier.

1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by the

Installer, who work on Project. B. Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessory

materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier. C. Product Test Reports: For each air-barrier assembly, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer. 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall

employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project. B. Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution and for preconstruction

testing. 1. Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly , 150 sq. ft. (14 sq. m), incorporating backup

wall construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties and other penetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrier assembly. a. Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of air

barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed. b. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall

intersection. c. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and

apply air barrier until mockups are approved.


2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.8 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Mockup Testing: Air-barrier assemblies shall comply with performance requirements indicated, as

evidenced by reports based on mockup testing by a qualified testing agency. 1. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Mockups will be tested for evidence of air leakage according to

ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers. 2. Adhesion Testing: Mockups will be tested for minimum air-barrier adhesion of 30 lbf/sq. in. (207

kPa) according to ASTM D 4541. 3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be tested.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life. B. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air-barrier manufacturer. 1. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance. 2. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single source from single manufacturer.

B. VOC Content: 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24) and complying with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Low-Emitting Materials: Air barriers shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor- permeable air barrier and as a

liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (0.2 L/s x sq. m of surface area at 75 Pa), when tested according to ASTM E 283.

2.3 VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous or synthetic

polymer membrane. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane: 1) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LMP. 2) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 220R.

b. Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier VP. 2) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31. 3) Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230. 4) Dupont Building Innovations; Tyvek® Fluid Applied WB System

2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. (0.02 L/s x

sq. m of surface area at 75-Pa) pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms (580 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96/E 96M. c. Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=9141&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456830666&mf=04&src=wd







2.4 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier

assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material. B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer. C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32

mils (0.8 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil- (0.2-mm-) thick, cross-laminated polyethylene film with release liner backing.

D. Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 30 to 40 mils (0.76 to 1.0 mm) thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing.

E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air-barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape. F. Substrate-Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler. G. Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape. H. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 24 gage thick, and Series 300 stainless-steel

fasteners. I. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam

sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft (24- to 32-kg/cu. m) density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

J. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Vapor-permeable, 17-mil- (0.43-mm-) thick, self-adhering strip consisting of an adhesive coating over a permeable laminate with a permeance value of 37 perms (2145 ng/Pa x s x sq. m).

K. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, minimum 50- to 65-mil- (1.3- to 1.6-mm-) thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer-recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with stainless-steel termination bars and fasteners.

L. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulus silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50 (low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal. b. Momentive Performance Materials Inc.; US11000 UltraSpan. c. Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span. d. Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal.

M. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

N. Termination Mastic: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard cold fluid-applied elastomeric liquid; trowel grade.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air-barrier

manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet

method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.







3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean,

dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other

construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating

contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and

other voids in concrete with substrate-patching membrane. E. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions. F. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to

form a smooth transition from one plane to another. G. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with

stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.3 JOINT TREATMENT A. Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to

ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks complying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces. 1. Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's recommended

preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) along each side of joints and cracks. Apply a double thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.

B. Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch (6 mm) with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air-barrier material at joints. Tape joints with joint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air-barrier material over joint reinforcing strip.

3.4 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION A. General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's

written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to

ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install butyl strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of

coverage is achieved over each substrate. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by

fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve

required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. C. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete

below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air-barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm) of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches (75 mm) of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch (25 mm) of full contact. 1. Adhesive-Coated Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. 2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install flashing

sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches (150 mm) o.c. Apply lap sealant over exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.

3. Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame, and air-barrier material.


G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.

H. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide, counterflashing strip.

I. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.5 FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a

continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid air-barrier material within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. 1. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. 2. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas

exposed for more than 24 hours. 3. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve

required bond, with adequate drying time between coats. B. Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates according to the

following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by

manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil (1.0-mm) dry film thickness, applied in one or more equal coats.

C. Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch (25 mm) onto cured air-barrier material or strip and transition strip over cured air-barrier material overlapping 3 inches (75 mm) onto each surface according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency. E. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and

reapply air-barrier components.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for compliance

with requirements. Inspections may include the following: 1. Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps

or holes. 2. Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided. 3. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar

droppings. 4. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained. 5. Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded. 6. Surfaces have been primed, if applicable. 7. Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been

shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with no fishmouths.

8. Termination mastic has been applied on cut edges. 9. Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate. 10. Compatible materials have been used. 11. Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided. 12. Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for

cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal. 13. All penetrations have been sealed.

C. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests: 1. Qualitative Air-Leakage Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage

according to ASTM E 1186, smoke pencil with pressurization or depressurization. 2. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for minimum air-barrier adhesion of 30

lbf/sq. in. (207 kPa) according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. (56 sq. m) of installed air barrier or part thereof.

D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where

inspection results indicate insufficient thickness. 2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.


3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by

manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air barrier or install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing the overexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ASPHALT SHINGLES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 073110 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 073110

ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 - General

Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphalt shingle roofing with moisture shedding underlayment, eaves, valley, and ridge protection, and

associated protective flashings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings of metal flashings and product data under provisions of Section 013000. B. Indicate general construction, configurations, jointing methods and locations, fastening methods and

locations, and installation details. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 013000.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROOFING MATERIALS A. Asphalt Shingles:

1. Fiberglass base, mineral granule surfaced type; Class A, minimum 240 pounds per square; self-sealing, 30 year guarantee type. Specific product and color as selected by Architect.

2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of the following:

a. GAF/Elk Roofing Products. b. Celotex Corp. c. Georgia Pacific. d. Tamko.

B. Underlayment: No. 30 unperforated asphalt saturated felts as recommended for use in construction of built-up roofs.

C. Elastomeric Underlayment (at valleys, hips, ridges, and eaves): Rubberized asphaltic sheet laminated to a polypropylene film, 40 mil minimum total thickness, 36 inch width, equal to Ice and Water Shield by W.R. Grace. Provide with appropriate primers as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Fasteners: Standard round wire shingle type nails of hot-dipped zinc-coated steel; minimum 13/64 inch head diameter and 0.080 inch shank diameter; of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing. Staples may be used if appropriate size and pattern used as approved by Owner.

E. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type with mineral fiber components, as recommended for sealing and coating flashings in buildings; free of toxic solvents; capable of setting within 24 hours at temperatures of approximately 75 degrees F and 50 percent RH.

F. Lap Cement: Fibrated cutback asphaltic type, as recommended for use as an adhesive in the cold application of asphalt roofing or underlayment; free of toxic solvents.

G. Shingle Over Vent: Refer to Section 077210.

2.2 FLASHING MATERIALS A. Sheet Flashings: Refer to section 076200. B. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color. C. Nails: Standard round wire roofing type of hot-dipped zinc-coated steel; minimum 19/64 inch head

diameter and 0.104 inch shank diameter; of sufficient length to penetrate through roof sheathing.

2.3 FLASHING FABRICATION A. Form flashings to profiles indicated on Drawings, and to protect roof assembly and shed water. Form

sections square, true, and accurate to profile, in maximum possible lengths, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

B. Hem exposed edges of flashings minimum 1/4 inch on underside.

C. Apply bituminous paint on concealed surfaces of flashings if required to prevent electrolysis.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ASPHALT SHINGLES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 073110 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install asphalt shingle roofing over dry surfaces, free of ridges, warps, and voids. B. Coordinate installation of roof mounted components or work projecting through roof. Verify roof

openings are framed, sized, and located prior to installing work of this Section. C. Completed installation to provide weathertight service.

3.2 EAVES PROTECTION INSTALLATION A. Place eave edge drip flashing tight with fascia boards. Weather lap joints 2 inches. Secure deck

flange with nails. B. Starting from eave edge, lay 36 inch wide strip of underlayment to produce a one ply membrane.

Weather lap plies minimum 19 inches and nail in place. Lap ends minimum 6 inches. Stagger end joints of each consecutive ply.

C. In climates where ice dams are likely to form in winter months, place a layer of elastomeric underlayment in lieu of felt underlayment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Extend from the eave edge to a point at least 24 inches beyond the inside wall.

3.3 PROTECTIVE UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Place 1 ply of underlayment over area not protected by eave membrane with ends and edges

weatherlapped minimum 4 inches. Stagger end laps of each consecutive layer. Nail protective underlayment to hold in place.

B. Install protective underlayment perpendicular to slope of roof. C. Weather lap underlayment minimum 4 inches over eaves membrane. D. Weather lap and seal items projecting through or mounted on roof with plastic cement.

3.4 VALLEY PROTECTION INSTALLATION A. Place 1 layer of rubberized asphalt valley flashing, minimum 36 inches wide, centered over closed

valleys. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches. B. Lace composition shingles in valleys over valley flashing in a weaved, interlaced pattern per applicable

industry or assocation standards, unless open valley is shown on Drawings.

3.5 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. Weather lap joints minimum 2 inches in weathertight manner. Secure in place with nails, spaced at

manufacturer's recommended intervals. Conceal fastenings. B. Flash and seal work projecting through roofing with sealant. Provide weathertight installation.

3.6 ASPHALT SHINGLES INSTALLATION A. Place asphalt shingles in straight coursing pattern with 5-5/8 inch weather exposure to produce triple

thickness over entire roof area. B. Provide triple course of shingles at eaves. Project first course of shingles 3/4 inch beyond face of

fascia boards. C. Extend shingles 1/2 inch beyond face of gable edge fascia boards. D. Nail shingles in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install ridge vents in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations. F. Cap hips and ridges with individual shingles, maintaining 5-5/8 inch weather exposure. Place to avoid

exposed nails.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND SOFFITS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 074646 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 074646

FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND SOFFITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wood-fiber cement siding, soffits, and trim.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Manufacturer's requirements for related materials to be installed by others. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Installation methods, including nail patterns.

C. Warranty: Submit copy of manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, showing that it has been registered with manufacturer.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing work of the type specified in this section with

minimum 3 years of experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products under waterproof cover and elevated above grade, on a flat surface.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SIDING A. Lap Siding: Individual horizontal boards made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure

with integral surface texture, complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Style:

a. Lap style. 2. Texture: As scheduled. 3. Length: 12 ft, nominal. 4. Width (Height): As indicated on Drawings. 5. Thickness: 5/8 inch, nominal. 6. Finish: Factory applied primer or prefinished as scheduled. 7. Warranty: 50 year limited; transferable. 8. Acceptable Products:

a. James Hardie Building Products: HardiPlank Lap Siding, Smooth. B. Fiber Reinforced Cement Sheet Siding: Cement fiber reinforced lap siding, finish as selected by Architect;

4 x 8 x 5/16 inch thick; having the following ASTM E 84 fire test performance: Flame Spread 0, Fuel Contribution 0, Smoke Development 5. 1. Texture: Smooth and vertically patterned as indicated. 2. Sizes: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Acceptable Products:

a. James Hardie Building Products; Hardipanel Vertical Siding. C. Soffit Panels: Panels made of cement and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure with integral surface

texture, complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II; with machined edges, for nail attachment. 1. Texture: Simulated cedar grain. 2. Length: 96 inches, nominal. 3. Width: 48 inches. 4. Thickness: 5/16 inch, nominal. 5. Finish: Factory applied primer. 6. Manufacturer: Same as siding. 7. Perforations: Manufacturer’s standard for attic ventilation. 8. Acceptable Products:

a. James Hardie Building Products; HardiSoffit.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FIBER CEMENT SIDING AND SOFFITS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 074646 - 2 14 December 2015

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Trim: Same material and texture as siding and soffit, 3/4 inch thickness

1. Acceptable Product: Harditrim by James Hardie Building Products. B. Fasteners: Galvanized or corrosion resistant; length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch. C. Joint Sealer: As specified in Section 079005. D. Finish Paint: Latex house paint acceptable to siding manufacturer; primer recommended by paint

manufacturer. E. Furring Strips For Use Behind Sheet Siding: 3/8 inch thick x 1-1/2 inch wide polypropylene furring strips,

attached vertically over air/moisture barrier at face of each supporting stud, to create capillary break between face of air/moisture barrier and back of siding, equal to Cor-A-Vent Sturdi-Strip with SV-3 continuous at top and bottom, by Cor-A-Vent Inc.

F. Soffit Vents: Refer to Section 077210.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION A. Examine substrate and clean and repair as required to eliminate conditions that would be detrimental to

proper installation. B. Verify that water-resistive barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. C. Do not begin until unacceptable conditions have been corrected. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Install sheet metal flashing:

1. Above door and window trim and casings. 2. Above horizontal trim in field of siding.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

1. Read warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in model code evaluation report applicable to location of

project. 3. Use trim details indicated on drawings. 4. Touch up all field-cut edges before installing. 5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.

B. Over Wood and Gypsum or Wood-Composite Sheathing: Fasten siding through sheathing into studs. C. Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement; seal joint

between panel and trim with exterior grade sealant. D. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints are inevitable stagger

joints between successive courses. E. Do not install siding less than 6 inches from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch to roofs, patios,

porches, and other surfaces where water may collect. F. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all

exposed cut edges. G. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 099000.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 075400 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 075400

THERMOPLASTIC MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Adhered system with thermoplastic roofing membrane. B. Insulation, flat and tapered. C. Deck sheathing. D. Flashings. E. Roofing stack boots and walkway pads.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as

Sheathing; 2008. B. ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation

Board ; 2012. C. ASTM D6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing ; 2011a. D. ASTM E1980 - Standard Practice for Calculating Solar Reflectance Index of Horizontal and Low-

Sloped Opaque Surfaces ; 2011. E. FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007. F. NRCA ML104 - The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors

Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1. Review preparation and installation procedures and coordinating and scheduling required with related work.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, surfacing,

and fasteners. C. Specimen Warranty: For approval. D. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions, conditions of interface with other

materials, and paver layout. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter

conditions requiring special attention. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures, humidity, wind

velocity during application, and supplementary instructions given. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name

and registered with manufacturer.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section:

1. With minimum three years documented experience. 2. Approved by membrane manufacturer.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight.


1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace material that

shows manufacturing defects within 5 years after installation. C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace roofing that

leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes. 1. Warranty Term: 20 years. 2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Thermoplastic Polyolefin Membrane Materials:

1. Carlisle SynTec : www.carlisle-syntec.com. 2. Firestone Building Products Co : www.firestonebpco.com. 3. GAF Materials Corporation; : www.gaf.com. 4. GenFlex Roofing Systems : www.genflex.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Insulation: 1. Atlas Roofing Corporation: www.atlasroofing.com. 2. Carlisle SynTec : www.carlisle-syntec.com. 3. GAF Materials Corporation; : www.gaf.com. 4. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 ROOFING A. Thermoplastic Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered , over insulation. B. Roofing Assembly Requirements:

1. Insulation Thermal Value (R), minimum: R-38. C. Acceptable Insulation Types - Constant Thickness Application:

1. Minimum 2 layers of polyisocyanurate board. D. Acceptable Insulation Types - Tapered Application:

1. Tapered polyisocyanurate board,

2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane:

1. Material: Thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) complying with ASTM D6878. 2. Reinforcing: Internal fabric. 3. Thickness: 0.060 inch, minimum. 4. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible. 5. Solar Reflectance: 0.70, minimum, initial, and 0.65, minimum, 3-year, certified by Cool Roof

Rating Council. 6. Thermal Emissivity: 0.75, minimum, initial, and 0.79, minimum, 3-year, certified by Cool Roof

Rating Council. 7. Color: White.

B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane.

2.4 DECK SHEATHING A. Deck Sheathing: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C1177/C1177M, fire resistant type, 1/4 inch

thick. 1. Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific DensDeck, DensDeck Prime, or DensDeck DuraGuard: www.densdeck.com.

b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


2.5 INSULATION A. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C1289, Type II, Class 1,

cellulose felt or glass fiber mat both faces; Grade 1 and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 16 psi 2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 3. Board Thickness: 1-1/2 inch. 4. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; fabricate of fewest layers possible.

2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Insulation Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2

inch (13 mm) 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick, factory primed. 1. Products:

a. Georgia-Pacific DensDeck Prime: www.gp.com/build. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same material as membrane.

C. Sheathing Adhesive: Non-combustible type, for adhering gypsum sheathing to metal deck. D. Sheathing Joint Tape: Manufacturer's standard width, self adhering. E. Insulation Joint Tape: Glass fiber reinforced type as recommended by insulation manufacturer,

compatible with roofing materials; 6 inches wide; self adhering. F. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. G. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. H. Insulation Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer. I. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel, maximum possible lengths per location, with attachment

flanges. J. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. K. Walkway Pads: Suitable for maintenance traffic, contrasting color or otherwise visually distinctive from

roof membrane. 1. Composition: Type as recommended by membrane manufacturer; size as indicated. 2. Surface Color: White or yellow.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's

instructions. B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range

recommended by manufacturer. D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or

occurring. E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be

weatherproofed the same day. F. Coordinate the work with installation of associated counterflashings installed by other sections as the

work of this section proceeds.

3.2 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and

suitable for installation of roof system. D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set in place.

3.3 INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE A. Attachment of Insulation: Embed insulation in adhesive in full contact, in accordance with roofing and

insulation manufacturers' instructions. B. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of preceding

layer. C. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. On metal deck, place boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes.


E. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof.

F. Tape joints of insulation in accordance with roofing and insulation manufacturers' instructions. G. At roof drains, use factory-tapered boards to slope down to roof drains over a distance of 18 inches. H. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day.

3.4 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate and membrane at rate per manufacturer's

instructions. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls.

D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by heat welding, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge.

E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere TPO flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips not less than 8 inches above

roof surface. 3. Secure flashing to sheathing with butyl sealant and with termination bar fastened at 8 inches on

center and seal with polyurehthane sealant 4. Insert flashing into reglets and secure.

F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with TPO flashing. G. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings.

3.5 FINISHING UNBALLASTED SURFACES A. Install walkway pads. Space pad joints to permit drainage.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for general requirements for field quality control and

inspection. B. Require site attendance of roofing and insulation material manufacturers daily during installation of the

Work.

3.7 CLEANING A. Remove adhesive markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces

for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.

3.8 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 076200 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 076200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, and other items indicated in

Schedule. B. Reglets and accessories.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week before starting work of this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile, jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, flashings,

terminations, and installation details.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and

standard details, except as otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in sheet metal work with three years of

documented experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal

sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining.

1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide two year water tightness warranty against leaks through sheet metal flashing and at

terminations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET MATERIALS A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch

thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating. 1. PVDF (Polyvinylidene Fluoride) Coating: Superior Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2605;

multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. B. Pre-Finished Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) ; 0.032 inch thick; plain finish shop pre-coated

with modified silicone coating. 1. Modified Silicone Polyester Coating: Pigmented Organic Coating System, AAMA 2603; baked

enamel finish system. 2. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat,

thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system. 3. Color: To match approved sample.

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel , with soft neoprene washers. B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, organic roofing felt, Type I ("No. 15"). C. Primer: Zinc chromate type. D. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. E. Sealant: Type S-GP specified in Section 079005. F. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586, Type I. G. Reglets: Surface mounted type, galvanized steel .

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 076200 - 2 14 December 2015

2.3 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed

lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing gravel. Return and brake edges.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set, reglets in

place, and nailing strips located. B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Install surface mounted reglets true to lines and levels. Seal top of reglets with sealant. C. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of

15 mil.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Conform to drawing details. B. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. C. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. D. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and lines

accurate to profiles. E. Seal metal joints watertight.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for field inspection requirements. B. Inspection will involve surveillance of work during installation to ascertain compliance with specified

requirements.

3.5 SCHEDULE A. Counterflashings at Roofing Terminations (over roofing base flashings). B. Counterflashings at Curb-Mounted Roof Items , including skylights and roof hatches. C. Roofing Penetration Flashings, for Pipes, Structural Steel, and Equipment Supports. D. Gutters and Downspouts.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FLEXIBLE FLASHING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 076210 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 076210

FLEXIBLE FLASHING

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Formed Products: Concealed flashing within wall assemblies where indicated or otherwise where required to protect and shed incidental water to the exterior.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand structural movement, thermally

induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not store flashing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other

surface damage. Store flashing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high

humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FLEXIBLE FLASHING A. Self-Adhesive flexible flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound,

bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not less than 40 mils. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Strip-N-Flash. b. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705 Air & Vapor Barrier Strips. c. Grace Construction Products; Perm-A-Barrier Detail Membrane. d. Henry; Blueskin SA

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FLEXIBLE FLASHING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 076210 - 2 14 December 2015

2.2 HIGH TEMPERATURE FLASHING A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting

polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as

required for complete metal flashing installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions

and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.


3.2 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install as indicated on Drawings and per Manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing: Install self-adhering sheet flashing, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by

flashing manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of flashing manufacturer for installation. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover flashing with subsequent construction within 14 days.

C. Location: 1. Flexible Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all exterior windows, doors or other penetrations

where high temperature flashing is not required. 2. High Temperature Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all locations where flashing will be in

contact with metal coping or metal panels where high temperatures exist.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ROOF SPECIALTIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 077100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 077100

ROOF SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manufactured roof specialties, including copings. B. Roof control and expansion joint covers.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 077200 - Roof Accessories: Manufactured curbs, roof hatches. B. Section 079005 - Joint Sealers.

1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High

Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels, 2010. B. SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association, 2003. C. SPRI ES-1 - Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems; Single

Ply Roofing Industry, 2003. (ANSI/SPRI ES-1)

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on shape of components, materials and finishes, anchor types and

locations. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate configuration and dimension of components, adjacent construction, required

clearances and tolerances, and other affected work. D. Samples: Submit two appropriately sized samples of coping and expansion joint cover. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring

special attention.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual details.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Copings:

1. Architectural Products Co: www.archprod.com. 2. W.P. Hickman Company: www.wph.com. 3. Metal-Era Inc: www.metalera.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS A. Copings: Factory fabricated to sizes required; mitered, welded corners; concealed fasteners.

1. Configuration: Concealed continuous hold down cleat at both legs; internal splice piece at joints of same material, thickness and finish as cap; concealed stainless steel fasteners.

2. Pull-Off Resistance: Tested in accordance with SPRI ES-1 RE-3 to positive and negative design wind pressure as defined by applicable code.

3. Material: Formed steel sheet, galvanized, 24 gage, 0.024 inch thick, minimum. 4. Finish: 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride. 5. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

B. Control and Expansion Joint Covers: Composite construction of flexible TPO flashing of white color with closed cell urethane foam backing, each edge seamed to aluminum sheet metal flanges, designed for nominal joint width of 1 inch. Include special formed corners, tees, intersections, and wall flashings, each sealed watertight.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ROOF SPECIALTIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 077100 - 2 14 December 2015

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sealant: As specified in Section 079005

2.4 FINISHES A. Fluoropolymer Coating: High Performance Organic Finish, AAMA 2604; multiple coat, thermally cured

fluoropolymer finish system; color as scheduled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that deck, curbs, roof membrane, base flashing, and other items affecting work of this Section

are in place and positioned correctly.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Conform to SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual drawing details as noted: C. Coordinate installation of components of this section with installation of roofing membrane and base

flashings. D. Coordinate installation of sealants and roofing cement with work of this section to ensure water

tightness. E. Coordinate installation of flashing flanges into reglets.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ROOF ACCESSORIES – STEEP SLOPE Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 077210 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 077210

ROOF ACCESSORIES – STEEP SLOPE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established in General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 - General

Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and soffit ventilators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items under provisions of Section 013000. B. Product Data: Indicating performance and physical characteristics of roof ridge ventilators and

accessories proposed for use. C. Color Charts: Manufacturer's standard pre-finished product charts showing actual physical coating. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Printed manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Warranty: Two copies of watertightness warranty, and finish coating warranty on pre-finished products. F. Submit samples under provisions of Section 013000.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in roofing work with 3 years minimum experience in similar

sized installations.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products under provisions of Section 016000. B. Stack pre-formed material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasions, and to provide ventilation. C. Prevent contact with materials which may cause discoloration or staining. D. Ship pre-coated products with strippable covering.

1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide warranties under provisions of Section 017800. B. Provide 2 year watertightness guarantee beginning at substantial completion including repair or

replacement of defective materials and workmanship.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW PROFILE ROOF VENT (provide where indicated) A. Plastic (polypropylene), low profile.

1. Net Free Area: 65 square inches, minimum. 2. Acceptable Product: Ross Manufacturing, LLC; 65 Slant Back Vent.

2.2 POLYESTER COMPOSITE RIDGE VENT A. Material: Single layer, non-fabric covered, modified polyester, non-woven, non-wicking, fiber-based

matting of three-dimensional construction. B. Net Free Area: 18 square inches per linear foot. C. Size: 9 inches wide by 0.75 inches thick; coil length 20 feet. D. Acceptable Product:

1. Cobra Ridge Vent 3 as manufactured by GAF Materials Corporation.

2.3 CONTINUOUS SOFFIT VENTS A. Soffit Vents: Molded plastic louvered vents, 2 inches wide.

1. Acceptable Product: Tamlyn; Snapvent 2”.

2.4 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, free from distortion and defects, to profiles indicated

in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ROOF ACCESSORIES – STEEP SLOPE Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 077210 - 2 14 December 2015

B. Form pieces in longest practical lengths. C. Hem exposed flashings on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form materials which are typically concealed from view by the public with lap seams. E. Fabricate corners from one place with minimum 18 inch long legs; solder for rigidity or seal with sealant if

approved by Owner. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/8 inch and hemmed to form drip. G. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend minimum 2 inches over wall surfaces. H. Fabricate as much as possible in shop with machinery to eliminate as much hand tooling on the job as

possible. Shop fabricate to allow for adjustments in the field for proper anchoring and joining.

2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners

1. Nails: AISI Series 300 for stainless and galvanized steel; aluminum for aluminum sheets. Use annular ring shank type, No. 12 gage or larger to suit application, of sufficient length to penetrate backing material at least 7/8 inch.

2. Screws and Bolts: AISI Series 300 for stainless and galvanized steel; and aluminum for aluminum sheets; of sufficient size and length to sustain imposed stresses.

B. Protective Back Paint: Zinc chromate alkyd. C. Sealants: One component polyurethane, non-sagging, sealant as specified in Section 079000. D. Plastic Cement: FS SS-C-153, Bituminous plastic cement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this section. Notify General Contractor of

any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Field measure site conditions prior to fabricating work.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction and recommendations. B. Conform to drawing details included in manuals published by AA and NRCA. C. Provide electrolytic separation between dissimilar metals with protective back paint. D. On soldered metal joints, make watertight for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean

with neutralizing solution and rinse with water.

3.4 CLEANING A. Perform final cleaning under provisions of Section 017800.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation under provisions of Section 015000.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FIRESTOPPING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 078400 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 078400

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Firestopping systems. B. Firestopping of all joints and penetrations in fire-resistance rated and smoke-resistant assemblies ,

whether indicated on drawings or not , and other openings indicated.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the penetrated assembly, and

firestopping test or design number. C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Certificate from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of materials used. G. Qualification statements for installing mechanics.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs that provide the scheduled fire ratings when

tested in accordance with methods indicated. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL, FM, or ITS (Warnock

Hersey) will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Valid evaluation report published by ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (ICC-ES) at www.icc-es.org

will be considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 3. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none of the above

substantiation exists. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section and:

1. Approved by Factory Mutual Research under FM Standard 4991, Approval of Firestop Contractors, or meeting any two of the following requirements:

a. With minimum 3 years documented experience installing work of this type. b. Able to show at least 5 satisfactorily completed projects of comparable size and

type. c. Licensed by authority having jurisdiction.

1.4 MOCK-UP A. Install one firestopping assembly representative of each fire rating design required on project.

1. Where one design may be used for different penetrating items or in different wall constructions, install one assembly for each different combination.

B. If accepted, mock-up will represent minimum standard for the Work. C. If accepted, mock-up may remain as part of the Work. Remove and replace mock-ups not accepted.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and

after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested

assembly design.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements.

2.3 MATERIALS A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content

than required by South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168. B. Elastomeric Silicone Firestopping: Single component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible

silicone sealant. 1. Manufacturers:

a. A/DFire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

C. Foam Firestoppping: Single component silicone foam compound. 1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. c. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

D. Fibered Compound Firestopping: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non-asbestos fibers. 1. Manufacturers:

a. A/DFire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. USG: www.usg.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

E. Fiber Firestopping: Mineral fiber insulation used in conjunction with elastomeric surface sealer forming airtight bond to opening. 1. Manufacturers:

a. A/DFire Protection Systems Inc: www.adfire.com. b. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. c. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

F. Firestop Devices - Wrap Type: Mechanical device with incombustible filler and sheet stainless steel jacket, intended to be installed after penetrating item has been installed. 1. Manufacturers:

a. RectorSeal: www.rectorseal.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

G. Intumescent Putty: Compound that expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 1. Manufacturers:

a. RectorSeal: www.rectorseal.com. b. 3M Fire Protection Products: www.3m.com/firestop. c. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

H. Reusable Firestopping: Removable intumescent compressible shapes, pillows, or blocks specifically tested in removable configuration. 1. Manufacturers:

a. RectorSeal: www.rectorseal.com. b. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com. c. Nelson FireStop Products: www.nelsonfirestop.com. d. Specified Technologies, Inc: www.stifirestop.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


I. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter that could adversely

affect bond of firestopping material. B. Remove incompatible materials that could adversely affect bond. C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions, completely closing openings. B. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having jurisdiction. C. Install labeling required by code.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas JOINT SEALERS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 079005 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 079005

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Sealants and joint backing. B. Pre-compressed foam sealers.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with other sections referencing this section.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics. C. Samples: Submit two samples, in size illustrating sealant colors for selection. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three years’ experience. C. Do not apply sealants if ambient or substrate temperatures are below 40 degrees and rising.

1.5 MOCK-UP A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window under provisions of Section 014000. B. Construct mock-up with specified sealant types and with other components noted. C. Locate where directed. D. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after

installation.

1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective workmanship within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Correct defective materials for 5 years for urethane sealants and 20 years for silicone sealants. D. Warranty: Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal,

exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Silicone Sealants:

1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 5. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 6. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

C. Acrylic Sealants (ASTM C920): 1. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


D. Acrylic Emulsion Latex Sealants: 1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 3. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

E. Preformed Compressible Foam Sealers: 1. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd: www.emseal.com. 2. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.sandellmfg.com. 3. Dayton Superior Corporation: www.daytonsuperior.com. 4. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 SEALANTS A. Type AL-A - Acoustical Sealant: Butyl or acrylic sealant; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses

M and A; single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. 1. Product: BA-98 manufactured by Pecora.

B. Type AL - Acrylic Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses NT, M, A, O; single component, solvent curing, non-staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: Sonolac manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 12-1/2 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -13 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 25 to 50. 6. Applications: Use for:

C. Type U-MC – Non-sag Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, I, M, A, G, O; single component, chemical curing, non-staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, non-sagging type. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: NP-2 manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35.

D. Type U-SL - Self-Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T, I, M, A, O; single component, chemical curing, non staining, non bleeding, capable of continuous water immersion, self-leveling type. 1. Color: Color as selected. 2. Product: SL-2 manufactured by Sonneborn. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -40 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 20 to 35.

E. Type S-GP - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses NT, A, G, M, O; single component, solvent curing, non-sagging, non-staining, fungus resistant, non-bleeding. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: 795 manufactured by Dow Corning. 3. Movement Capability: Plus and minus 25 percent. 4. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 5. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.

F. Type S-S - Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grane NS, Class 25, Uses NG, A, G, M, O; single component, non-sagging, non-staining, sanitary. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: 786 manufactured by Dow Corning. 3. Service Temperature Range: -65 to 180 degrees F. 4. Shore A Hardness Range: 15 to 35.

G. Pre-Formed Elastomeric Foam Seal (PF): Protectowrap Triple Guard energy Sill Sealer.

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; oversized 30

to 50 percent larger than joint width . C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant. B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and

material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193. C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C919. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and

surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer , except where specific dimensions are indicated. E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when

sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. H. Tool joints concave. I. Pre-compressed Foam Sealant: Do not stretch; avoid joints except at corners, ends, and intersections;

install with face 1/8 to 1/4 inch below adjoining surface.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect sealants until cured.

3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints for Which No Other Sealant Type is Indicated: Type S-GP. B. Control and Expansion Joints in Paving: Type U-SL. C. Interior Wall Expansion Joints: Type U-NS. D. Exterior Wall Expansion Joints: Type S-GP. E. Joints Between Concrete Panels and Between Panels and Adjacent Work: Type S-SP. F. Control, Expansion, and Soft Joints in Masonry, and Between Masonry and Adjacent Work: Type S-

GP. G. Lap Joints in Exterior Sheet Metal Work: Type S-GP. H. Joints Between Exterior Metal Frames and Adjacent Work: Type S-GP. I. Under Exterior Door Thresholds: Type G-GP. J. Interior Joints for Which No Other Sealant is Indicated: Type AL. K. Control and Expansion Joints in Interior Concrete Slabs and Floors: Type U-SL. L. Joints Between Plumbing Fixtures and Walls and Floors, and Between Countertops and Walls: Type

S-S. M. In STC-Rated Walls, Between Metal Stud Track/Runner and Adjacent Construction: Type AL-A. N. Beneath Exterior Stud Walls at Foundations: Type PF.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 081113 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 081113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non-fire-rated steel doors and frames. B. Steel frames for wood doors. C. Fire-rated steel doors and frames. D. Thermally insulated steel doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type

and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard.

C. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any.

D. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of all reference standards dealing with installation.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames:

1. Assa Abloy Ceco, Curries, or Fleming: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Republic Doors: www.republicdoor.com. 3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames:

1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges. 3. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 4. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 5. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side; sizes and configurations as indicated

on drawings. 6. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with BHMA A156.115, with reinforcement welded in

place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 7. Galvanizing for Units in Wet Areas: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 8. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing.

B. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.


2.3 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors :

1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 3, physical performance Level A, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polystyrene foam. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance

with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 4. Insulating Value: U-value of 0.50, when tested in accordance with ASTM C1363. 5. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 087100.

B. Interior Doors , Non-Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 1, physical performance Level C, Model 1, full flush. 2. Core: Cardboard honeycomb. 3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

C. Interior Doors , Fire-Rated: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 1, full flush. 2. Fire Rating: As indicated on Door and Frame Schedule, tested in accordance with UL 10C

("positive pressure"). a. Provide units listed and labeled by UL. b. Attach fire rating label to each fire rated unit.

3. Core: Mineral fiberboard. D. Interior Smoke and Draft Control Doors : Same construction as fire-rated doors with indicated fire

rating, plus: 1. Gasketing: No added gasketing or seals allowed. 2. Label: UL "S" label.

2.4 STEEL FRAMES A. General:

1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door, except: a. ANSI A250.8 Level 1 Doors: 16 gage frames. b. Frames for Wood Doors: Comply with frame requirements specified in ANSI A250.8 for

Level 1, 18 gage 2. Finish: Same as for door. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be installed in masonry or to be

grouted. 4. Frames Wider than 48 Inches: Reinforce with steel channel fitted tightly into frame head, flush

with top. 5. Frames Installed Back-to-Back: Reinforce with steel channels anchored to floor and overhead

structure. B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled.

1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness.

2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 087100. C. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire-Rated: Knock-down type. D. Interior Door Frames, Fire-Rated: Knock-down type.

1. Fire Rating: Same as door, labeled.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Louvers: Roll formed steel with overlapping frame; ; factory-installed.

1. In Fire-Rated Doors: UL-listed fusible link louver, same rating as door. B. Glazing: As specified in Section 088000 , factory installed. C. Astragals for Double Doors: Specified in Section 087100.

1. Fire-Rated Doors: Steel, shape as required to accomplish fire rating. D. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner

pumpable grout is prohibited. E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of

pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. F. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory- or shop-assembled frames.

2.6 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10 , door manufacturer's standard. B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating, prior to

installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA

840. B. In addition, install fire rated units in accordance with NFPA 80. C. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. D. Grout frames in masonry construction, using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of

grout before setting will not deform frames. E. Coordinate installation of hardware. F. Coordinate installation of glazing. G. Coordinate installation of electrical connections to electrical hardware items.

3.4 TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PREASSEMBLED WOOD DOOR AND FRAME UNITS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 081413 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 081413

PREASSEMBLED WOOD DOOR AND FRAME UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Stile and rail solid wood doors. B. Solid core wood doors. C. Hollow core doors. D. Wood frames and hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 013000. B. Provide product data indicating door core materials and construction, veneer species, type and

characteristics. C. Provide shop drawings showing each door type in elevation and section, including hardware reinforcement

locations.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI Quality Standard Section 9, custom grade at clubhouse and

economy grade elsewhere.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Sections 016000. B. Package, deliver, store, and protect doors in accordance with AWI Section 1300. Do not store in damp or

wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on-site to permit ventilation.

C. Store doors as recommended by manufacturer.

1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.6 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 017800 to the following term:

1. Interior Doors: Two (2) years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Weyerhaeuser Company. B. Crown Doors. C. Masonite Corporation. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000.

2.2 DOOR TYPES A. Stile and Rail Doors (at clubhouse): AWI Section 1400, 1-3/4 inches thick; solid lumber construction; AWI

Custom quality; Alder species wood, for opaque finish. Provide fully tempered clear glazing for all lights. B. Hollow Core Doors: AWI Section 1300, ANSI A135.4, Class 2 - Standard, Type S2S hardboard, 1/8 inch

face thickness; 1-3/8 inch total thickness; paint finish. 1. Type SHC - Standard; interior grade; Type II adhesive; panel design as scheduled on Drawings.

C. Solid Core Doors: AWI Section 1300, type PC - (particleboard core); flush design, with masonite hardboard face at opaque finish doors and stained hardwood of species and cut as selected by Architect where indicated.

D. Provide all doors pre-hung in opaque grade wood frame with casing to match adjacent base.

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Facing Adhesive: Type II - water resistant for interior; Type I - waterproof for exterior. B. Glazing Stops: Wood of same species as door facing.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PREASSEMBLED WOOD DOOR AND FRAME UNITS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 081413 - 2 14 December 2015

2.4 FABRICATION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with AWI Custom Quality Standards requirements. B. Vertical Exposed Edge of Stiles: Of same species as veneer facing for wood doors. C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing. D. Bond edge banding to cores. E. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions. Do

not machine for surface hardware. F. Factory pre-fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings.

2.5 FINISH A. Finish in accordance with the requirements of Section 099000.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Trim door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Conform to AWI requirements for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to

corner, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top to bottom,

over an imaginary 36 by 84 inch surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge,

over an imaginary 36 by 84 inch surface area.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 017800. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FLUSH WOOD DOORS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 081416 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 081416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Flush wood doors; flush configuration; fire rated and non-rated.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics. C. Specimen warranty. D. Shop Drawings: Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, special beveling, special

blocking for hardware, factory machining criteria, factory finishing criteria, identify cutouts for glazing. E. Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 X 12 inch in size cut from top corner of door. F. Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 X 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain and pattern. G. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions. H. Warranty, executed in Owner's name.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of the specified door quality standard on site for review during installation and finishing. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section

with minimum three years of documented experience. C. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package, deliver and store doors in accordance with specified quality standard. B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect doors with resilient packaging sealed with heat shrunk plastic. Do not store in damp or wet areas;

or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.

1.5 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements. B. Interior Doors: Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation. C. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective

materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Wood Veneer Faced Doors:

1. Graham Wood Doors: www.grahamdoors.com. 2. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com. 3. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com. 4. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc: www.marshfielddoors.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


2.2 DOORS AND PANELS A. All Doors: See drawings for locations and additional requirements.

1. Quality Level: Custom Grade, Extra Heavy Duty performance, in accordance with WDMA I.S.1-A. 2. Wood Veneer Faced Doors: 5-ply unless otherwise indicated.

B. Interior Doors: 1-3/4 inches thick unless otherwise indicated; flush construction. 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance with NFPA 252, UL 10B,

or UBC Standard 7-2-94 ("neutral pressure"); UL or WH (ITS) labeled without any visible seals when door is open.

3. Smoke and Draft Control Doors: In addition to required fire rating, provide door assemblies tested in accordance with UL 1784 with maximum air leakage of 3.0cfm per sq ft of door opening at 0.10 inch w.g. pressure at both ambient and elevated temperatures; with "S" label; if necessary, provide additional gasketing or edge sealing.

2.3 DOOR AND PANEL CORES A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type particleboard core (PC), plies and faces as

indicated above. B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as

required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.

2.4 DOOR FACINGS A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: Species, cut, and finish as indicated in Finish Legend,

veneer grade as specified by quality standard, book veneer match, running assembly match; unless otherwise indicated. 1. Vertical Edges: Any option allowed by quality standard for grade. 2. Pairs: Pair match each pair; set match pairs within 10 feet of each other when doors are closed. 3. Finish and Species: Refer to Drawings.

2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel channel shape, butted corners; prepared for countersink style screws. B. Astragals for Non-Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge. C. Astragals for Fire Rated Double Doors: Steel, T shaped, overlapping and recessed at face edge,

specifically for double doors.

2.6 DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified. B. Cores Constructed with stiles and rails:

1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge for hardware reinforcement. 2. Provide solid blocking for other through-bolted hardware.

C. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

D. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors to be field finished.

E. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI Quality Standards Illustrated Section 1700.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING - WOOD VENEER DOORS A. Factory finish doors in accordance with specified quality standard:

1. Transparent Finish: Transparent catalyzed polyurethane, Premium quality, satin sheen.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard.

1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements. B. Factory-Finished Doors: Do not field cut or trim; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door. C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware. D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware. E. Coordinate installation of glazing. F. Install door louvers plumb and level.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances. B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion. C. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, corner to

corner, over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. D. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, top to bottom,

over an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area. E. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1/8 inch measured with straight edge or taut string, edge to edge, over

an imaginary 36 by 84 inches surface area.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Adjust closers for full closure.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas INSULATED STEEL DOOR AND FRAME UNITS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 081550 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 081550

INSULATED STEEL DOOR AND FRAME UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED A. Pre-finished, steel faced, insulated, door and frame units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 013000. B. Indicate door elevations, stile and rail reinforcement, and internal blocking for hardware attachment. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 013000.

1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Protect products under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with resilient packaging.

1.4 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 017800.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of

the following: 1. Entergy by Ceco Corp. 2. Americana by Fenestra Corp. 3. Permadoor by American Standard. 4. Benchmark. 5. Stanley. 6. Pease Industries. 7. Therma-tru.

B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 016000.

2.2 DOOR TYPES AND CONSTRUCTION A. Insulated Steel Exterior Doors: Minimum 24 gage galvanized steel pre-finished face panels, 18 gage

channel perimeter and hinge reinforcement, 1-3/4 inch thick with high density urethane foam core. Provide complete in wood frame (metal frame required at fire rated doors) with magnetic or compressible weatherstripping, lipped water-tight threshold, 1-1/2 pair of butt hinges (US4 finish), double bore for 2-3/8 inch backset, and door sweep. Provide in the following styles: 1. Metal clad insulated multi-panel door at each unit entry and between unit and garage. Refer to

Drawings for number of panels. 2. Metal clad insulated full glass (with simulated divided lights) at balconies. 3. Flush panel at utility areas (storage closets, etc). 4. Refer to drawings for details.

B. Minimum R value of 10.0.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Prepare doors to receive hardware. Machine cut relief for hinges, closers, and coring for handsets and

cylinders. B. Fire rated doors are to have label attached to door and frame and to have smoke seal gaskets as

approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2.4 FINISH A. Prime paint facing and edges. B. Finish: Prime painted for field finishing.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas INSULATED STEEL DOOR AND FRAME UNITS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 081550 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. C. Prepare doors to receive finish hardware. D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for fit tolerances. F. Set door threshold in bed of mastic.

3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner.

3.3 ADJUSTING/CLEANING/REPAIR/REPLACEMENT A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. B. Do not install doors with dents or scratches. C. Clean doors prior to field painting.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 083100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 083100

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall access door and frame units. B. Ceiling access door and frame units.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide sizes, types, finishes, hardware, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining

work. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of all access units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL AND CEILING UNITS A. Manufacturers:

1. Acudor Products Inc : www.acudor.com. 2. Karp Associates, Inc : www.karpinc.com. 3. Milcor by Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc : www.milcorinc.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Access Doors: Factory fabricated door and frame units, fully assembled units with corner joints welded, filled, and ground flush; square and without rack or warp; coordinate requirements with assemblies units are to be installed in. 1. Material: Steel. 2. Door Style: Single thickness with rolled or turned in edges. 3. Frames and flanges: 0.058 inch steel. 4. Door panels: 0.070 inch single thickness steel sheet. 5. Units in Fire Rated Assemblies: Fire rating as required by applicable code for the fire rated

assembly in which they are to be installed. a. Provide products listed and labeled by UL or ITS (Warnock Hersey) as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated. b. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of

fire rated doors. 6. Steel Finish: Primed. 7. Primed Finish: Polyester powder coat; manufacturer's standard color. 8. Size(s): As indicated. 9. Hardware:

a. Hardware for Fire Rated Units: As required for listing. b. Hinges for Non-Fire-Rated Units: Concealed, constant force closure spring type. c. Hinge: Non-Fire-Rated Units: 175 degree steel hinges with removable pin. d. Latch/Lock: Screw driver slot for quarter turn cam latch.

10. Galvanized, hot dipped finish. 11. Stainless steel at wet locations.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that rough openings are correctly sized and located.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install frames plumb and level in openings. Secure rigidly in place. C. Position units to provide convenient access to the concealed work requiring access.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 084313 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 084313

ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum-framed storefront, with vision glass. B. Infill panels of glass. C. Aluminum doors and frames. D. Weatherstripping. E. Door hardware. F. Perimeter sealant.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure. B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this

section; require attendance by all affected installers.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly, anchorage and

fasteners, glass and infill, door hardware, internal drainage details . C. Shop Drawings: Provide Engineered, sealed shop drawings indicating system dimensions, framed

opening requirements and tolerances, affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineering calculations, dimensional limitations.

E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for each door, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specified requirements.

G. Report of field testing for water leakage. H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name


1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a

Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10. B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings

that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum

temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units, including

interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units. D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish. Include

provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. YKK AP America Inc : www.ykkap.com. 2. Kawneer North America : www.kawneer.com. 3. United States Aluminum Corp : www.usalum.com. 4. Oldcastle Building Envelope : www.oldcastlebe.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 STOREFRONT A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with

infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kawneer; Trifab 451UT. 2. Construction: Thermally broken. 3. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing. 4. Glazing Position: Center-set. 5. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep. 6. Water Leakage Test Pressure Differential: 2.86 lbf/sq ft. 7. Air Infiltration Test Pressure Differential: 1.57 psf. 8. Condensation Resistance Factor: 68 minimum 9. Overall U-Value Including Glazing: 0.32, maximum. 10. Finish: 70% fluorpolymer, color as selected by Architect.

B. Performance Requirements: 1. Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirements without damage or

permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, using loads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load. a. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,

with full recovery of glazing materials. 2. Movement: Accommodate movement between storefront and perimeter framing and deflection

of lintel, without damage to components or deterioration of seals. 3. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area,

measured at specified differential pressure across assembly in accordance with ASTM E283. 4. Condensation Resistance Factor: Measure in accordance with AAMA 1503 with 1 inch

insulating glass installed. 5. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any

water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

6. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system components caused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other building elements.

2.3 COMPONENTS A. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections , thermally broken with interior section

insulated from exterior, drainage holes and internal weep drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken. 2. Glazing stops: Flush. 3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of structural

steel member. 4. Subsills: Provide manufacturer's standard subsills for all storefront framing.

B. Doors: Glazed aluminum, heavy duty (1/8 inch wall thickness; with fully welded internal joints). 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kawneer; AA 250 Narrow Stile Thermal Entrance. 2. Thickness: 2-1/4 inches. 3. Top Rail: 2-1/2 inches wide. 4. Vertical Stiles: 3-1/2 inches wide. 5. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide. 6. Glazing Stops: Square. 7. Finish: Same as storefront.


2.4 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M). B. Fasteners: Stainless steel. C. Concealed Flashings: 0.018 inch thick galvanized steel. D. Perimeter Sealant: Type S-GP specified in Section 07 9005. E. Glass: As specified in Section 088000. F. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements. G. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 088000. H. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.

2.5 FINISHES A. High-Performance Organic Finish: 2-coat fluoropolymer finish complying with AAMA 2605 and

containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color and Gloss: To match operable windows.

B. Touch-Up Materials: As recommended by coating manufacturer for field application.

2.6 HARDWARE A. Door Hardware: Refer Drawings. B. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors. C. Sill Sweep Strips: Resilient seal type, retracting, of neoprene; provide on all doors.

2.7 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet

enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. B. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline , and weatherproof. C. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Fabricate anchors. D. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or dissimilar metals

with bituminous paint. E. Arrange fasteners and attachments to conceal from view. F. Reinforce components internally for door hardware . G. Reinforce framing members for imposed loads. H. Finishing: Apply factory finish to all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.

1. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in completed assemblies, including joint edges.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work. B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this

section.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other

irregularities. C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances,

aligning with adjacent work. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form watertight dam. G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads to sill

flashing. H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. I. Fill shim spaces with low rise urethane foam sealant at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of

thermal barrier. J. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure. K. Install hardware using templates provided. L. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 088000, using glazing method required to

achieve performance criteria. M. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be satisfactorily

repaired.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,

whichever is less. B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/32 inch.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for independent testing and inspection requirements.

Inspection will monitor quality of installation and glazing. B. Test installed storefront for water leakage in accordance with AAMA 501.2.

3.5 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating hardware and sash for smooth operation.

3.6 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping

cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.7 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas VINYL WINDOWS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 085313 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 085313

VINYL WINDOWS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Factory fabricated tubular extruded plastic windows. B. Factory glazed including infill panels. C. Operating hardware. D. Insect screens. E. Perimeter sealant.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Performance Requirements: As specified in PART 2, with the following additional requirements: B. Forced Entry Resistance: Conform to ASTM F 588 requirements for performance level 10 for window type

A. C. System Design: Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and

suction of wind acting normal to plane of window. 1. Calculate design pressures in accordance with applicable code 2. Measure performance of units by testing in accordance with ASTM E 330, using test pressure

equal to 1.5 times the design wind pressure and 10 second duration of maximum load. D. Deflection: Limit member deflection to 1/200 of the longer dimension with full recovery of glazing

materials. E. Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement

between window and perimeter framing, deflection of lintel. F. Air Infiltration: Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, measured at a

reference differential pressure across assembly of 1.57 psf as measured in accordance with ASTM E 283. G. Vapor Seal: No vapor seal failure at interior static pressure of 1 inch, 72 degrees F, and 40 percent

relative humidity. H. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or

migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. I. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in

line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound. Position thermal insulation on exterior surface of air barrier and vapor retarder.

J. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction of plastic to suit glass, infill, and perimeter opening construction.

K. Provide windows with U value, SHGC, and SC values as required to meet energy code requirements, but not less than 0.40 for U factor and 0.25 for SHGC.

L. Glass from windows shall provide a minimum STC rating of 36, and 100 Hz-250 Hz.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, anchorage and fasteners, glass, internal drainage details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening dimensions, framed opening tolerances, affected related work,

installation requirements. D. Samples: Submit two illustrating window frame section. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name


1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section,

with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three

years of experience.


1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect finished surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond when

exposed to sunlight or weather. B. Jig, brace, and box the window frame assemblies for transport to minimize flexing of members or joints.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of sealants.

1.7 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion. C. Provide 10 year manufacturer warranty for insulated glass units from seal failure, interpane dusting or

misting, and replacement of same. Include coverage for degradation of color finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Tubular Plastic Windows:

1. SI, Inc.

2. Silent Guard. 3. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS - WINDOWS A. Windows: Extruded, hollow, tubular, ultra-violet resistant polyvinyl chloride (PVC) with integral color;

factory fabricated; with vision glass, related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Performance Requirements: AAMA DP-35. 2. Configuration: Fixed, non-operable and double hung sash. 3. Color: Color as selected.

B. Sills: extruded aluminum; sloped for positive wash; fit under sash to 1/2 inch beyond wall face; one piece full width of opening.

C. Insect Screen Frame: Rolled aluminum frame of rectangular sections; fit with adjustable hardware; nominal size similar to operable glazed unit.

D. Operable Sash Weather Stripping: Wool pile; permanently resilient, profiled to effect weather seal. E. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

2.3 GLASS AND GLAZING MATERIALS A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Clear glass, meeting ASTM C1036, glazing select quality, thickness as

standard with manufacturer for spans encountered; insulated double pane construction. Provide with low "E" coating. Provide fully tempered where required by code.

2.4 SEALANT MATERIALS A. Perimeter Sealant and Backing Materials: S-GP Type as specified in Section 079005.

2.5 HARDWARE A. Double Hung Sash: Metal and nylon spiral friction slide cylinder, each sash, each jamb.

B. Fall Protection (for windows above the ground floor level): Opening of all windows beyond 4 inches must require 2 simultaneous motions.


2.6 FABRICATION A. Fabricate framing, mullions and sash members with fusion welded corners and joints, in a rigid jig.

Supplement frame sections with internal reinforcement where required for structural rigidity. B. Form sills and stools in one piece. Slope sills for wash. C. Form snap-in glass stops, closure molds, weather stops, and flashings of extruded PVC for tight fit into

window frame section. D. Form weather stop flange to perimeter of unit. E. Fabricate components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet

enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. F. Arrange fasteners to be concealed from view. G. Permit internal drainage weep holes and channels to migrate moisture to exterior. Provide internal

drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through weep holes. H. Assemble insect screen frame, miter and reinforced frame corners. Fit mesh taut into frame and secure.

Fit frame with four spring loaded steel pin retainers. I. Double weatherstrip operable units. J. Factory glaze window units.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this Section.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install window units in accordance with manufacturers instructions. B. Attach window frame and shims to perimeter opening to accommodate construction tolerances and other

irregularities. C. Align window plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances and alignment with

adjacent work. D. Install sill. E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous

insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. G. Install perimeter sealant and backing materials in accordance with Section 079005.

3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Level or Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 0.5 inches per 100 ft,

whichever is less.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust hardware for smooth operation and secure weathertight closure.

3.5 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from pre-finished surfaces. B. Wash surfaces by method recommended and acceptable to sealant and window manufacturer; rinse and

wipe surfaces clean. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas DOOR HARDWARE

Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 087100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 087100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Provide all items of finish hardware required to adequately trim, hang, and operate all

doors, as is hereinafter specified and listed in the Hardware Schedule.

1. Provide hardware for doors and frames of unusual profile or shape or other special conditions.

2. Provide all necessary standard and special fasteners, screws, bolts, expansion shields or anchors

to properly secure hardware to its intended door, frame, or other surface.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Section 081113.

2. Flush Wood Doors: Section 081416.

3. Aluminum Storefront: Section 084113.

4. Access Control: Section 281300.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The following reference standards and model code documents shall be used in estimating and detailing

door hardware, and shall considered as a standard of quality, function, and performance, as applicable:

1. I.B.C. International Building Code 2012 Edition.

2. NFPA-80 Fire Doors & Windows (current year adopted).

3. NFPA-101 Life Safety Code (current year adopted).

4. NFPA-105 Smoke Control Door Assembly. (current year adopted)

5. ANSI-117.1 Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People (current

year adopted).

6. A.D.A.A.G Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines.

7. T.A.S. Texas Accessibility Standards.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Section 013300.

B. Product Data: Provide a catalog cut sheet, clearly marked and identified, illustrating and describing each

product included in the Hardware Schedule.

1. Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components and profiles, and finishes.

2. Formulate catalog cut sheets into sets and include a set with each copy of the Hardware Schedule

submitted.

C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Architectural Hardware Consultant,

detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the

final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,

hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for

the Hardware Schedule."

2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete

designations of every item required for each door or opening.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item.

b. Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening including name and

manufacturer.

c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.

d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and

in door and frame schedule. Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same

door numbers and hardware set numbers as in the Contract Documents.

e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

f. Mounting locations for door hardware.

g. Door and frame sizes and materials.



h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of

operation, and interface with other building control systems.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date,

particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other

Work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop

Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the

coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule.

D. Wiring Diagrams: For electrified hardware items specified for this Project, Provide complete wiring

diagrams along with riser drawings and elevations, showing locations where such material is to be

installed. Wiring Diagrams shall be submitted with Hardware Schedule. Verify and coordinate with the

electrical systems installer. Integration shall take effect into central system as specified by Owner.

1. Operation Narrative: Describe the operation of doors controlled by electrified door hardware.

2. Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following

situations:

a. authorized person wants to enter;

b. authorized person wants to exit;

c. unauthorized person wants to enter;

d. unauthorized person wants to exit.

E. Samples for Verification: If so requested by the Architect, provide a sample of any product or item

requested, properly marked and tagged, for the opening for which it is intended.

F. Keying: Provide a keying schedule, listing the levels of keying, (GGMK, GKD, MKD or KA) as well as an

explanation of the key system’s function, the key symbols used and the numbers of the doors controlled.

Provide in conjunction with the Door Index/Keying Schedule (which lists the door number, schedule

heading, lock type and individual key symbol and remarks or special instructions) mentioned in above.

Project shall be Masterkeyed and/or Grand Masterkeyed and provide two (2) keys per lockset or cylinder.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals.

Provide latest, revised and updated schedule of finish hardware, complete with catalog cuts and keying

schedule. In addition, furnish one (1) copy of maintenance and parts manuals for those items for which

they are readily available and normally provided.

1. Submit in accordance with provisions of Section 017823.


A. Substitutions: Request for substitutions for alternative hardware items will not be accepted on this Project

unless specifically indicated. Specification indicates one (1) specified product, listed hereinafter in the

Hardware Schedule, and two (2) acceptable alternative manufacturers for that product. If any specified

product is listed as a “No Substitution” product, only that specified product shall be provided as indicated.

B. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material,

design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a

record of successful in-service performance.

C. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is

or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to

consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. The hardware supplier shall be engaged regularly in the furnishing, delivery and servicing of

contract builder's hardware and must be experienced and knowledgeable in all phases of

estimating, detailing, scheduling, masterkeying, shipping and installation practices.

2. When electro-mechanical or electronic hardware is supplied, a qualified individual with a minimum

five- (5) year’s experience shall be available for assistance.

D. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and

Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing

consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to

that indicated for this Project.

E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless

otherwise indicated.

F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:

1. Provide hardware that complies with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility

Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," and ANSI A117.1.



G. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are

listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire

ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

H. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency

acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

I. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01

Section "Project Management and Coordination." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final

keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for

future expansion.

2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.

3. Requirements for key control system.

4. Address for delivery of keys.

5. Location of Key Cabinet.


A. Marking and Packaging: All items of hardware shall be delivered to the site in manufacturer’s original

cartons or boxes. Each item of hardware shall be marked with the abbreviation set forth on the Shop

Drawings to ensure that the product reaches its installation destination without needing specific hardware

product number knowledge.

B. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

C. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and

include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work

specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to

confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with

indicated requirements.

B. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with

connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, security

system, and building control system, as applicable.

1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance

instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of

door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: If there are any products listed hereinafter that normally require a maintenance or

service contract, provide the Owner and Architect with details and costs of standard maintenance or

service contract.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of

each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Hardware Schedule" Article. Products are identified

by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for each door

hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers'

names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Hardware Schedule" Article.

B. Product manufacturers listed with an asterisk (*) denote the specified manufacturers listed in the

Hardware Schedule. The remaining two (2) listed manufacturers will be acceptable substitutions. If only

one manufacturer is listed this shall be considered a “No Substitution” specification as set forth in “Quality

Assurance” Article, for that particular item.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Screws and Fasteners: Provide all screws and fasteners of the proper size and type to properly anchor or

attach the item of hardware scheduled. Provide all fasteners with Phillips heads, unless security type

screws (spanner-head or torx-head) are hereinafter specified.



B. Hinges: Provide as follows:

1. On doors to exterior openings and main corridor doors, and other doors of high frequency use,

provide a continuous, gear type hinge of appropriate weight.

2. Where regular ball bearing hinges are listed for other doors, provide one hinge for each 30-inch of

door height.

3. The width of the hinges shall be sufficient to clear all trim that is mounted to the doorframe.

4. Acceptable Manufacturers:

a. Ives*

b. Stanley.

c. Hager.

C. Continuous Hinges: Continuous hinges shall consist of three (3)-interlocking extrusions in a pinless

assembly applied to the full height of the door. All continuous geared hinges shall be manufactured to

template screw locations and be non-handed. All mortise hinges and half mortise hinges shall cover and

wrap the door edge completely. Doorframe heads shall be extended for clearance on full or half mortise

hinges versus downsizing doors for ease of repair and replacement. All frames shall be properly

reinforced per manufacturer's standards.

1. Standard warranty shall be for the life of opening.


a. Ives*

b. Select.

c. Pemko.

D. Locks: All locks shall incorporate a six pin tumbler system and be keyed to a GRANDMASTER SYSTEM

as not to breach security of system in place. Keying system must be guaranteed of no duplication of

existing change keys, master keys or grandmaster keys located in this Project. All keying shall be

coordinated with Owner. Locks shall be Grade 1 or 2 cylindrical as hereinafter listed in the Hardware

Schedule.


a. Schlage*

b. Falcon.

c. Hager.

E. Lock Trim: Cylindrical locks are to be furnished with lever handle trim, as is hereinafter listed in the

Hardware Schedule.

F. Electronic Interconnected Lock: Electronic Interconnected Lock shall be a computer-managed, stand-

alone locking system for key management and access control for residential applications. Interconnected

lock shall combine key-in-cylinder 5-pin design with motorized, programmable, stand-alone electronics for

security access control, which require no external wiring with one motion unlock. Entry shall be by

iButton.


a. Schlage Commercial Electronics*

b. No substitution.

G. Flush Bolts: Manual flush bolts to have 12-inch rods for doors 7’-6”. Doors over 7’-6” high shall have

bolts with top rods of 18 inch or 24 inch to allow ease of access to bolt lever. Furnish dust proof strikes

for all bottom bolts.


a. Ives*

b. Trimco.

c. Rockwood.

H. Power Supply: Power supply shall integrate with selected switching for maintained switching with an

emergency interface relay wired into the fire alarm system to insure fail secure application. Battery

backup shall be included to produce backup power at full load during power failure.



b. Corbin-Russwin.



I. Exit Devices: Exit Devices shall be rim, mortise or vertical rod type as called for in the Hardware

Schedule. Devices shall be of the touch-pad type as is hereinafter specified in the Hardware Schedule.

Exit devices shall be constructed to allow cylinder to be removed and rekeyed without removing the

device from the door either by removable core cylinders or construction of exit device. Exit devices shall

be constructed to allow the conversion from one function to another simply within lock stile case and

selecting proper outside trim as specified hereinafter in the Hardware Schedule. Devices shall be

furnished with outside trim lever handles matching locks.


a. Von Duprin*

b. Corbin-Russwin.

c. Falcon.

J. Exit Device : Electric latch retraction, exit devices shall provide remote unlocking ability. A control switch

or wiring schematic as specified shall allow an “exit” only or latched door to push-pull operation by a

continuous duty motor retracting the latch bolt.


a. Von Duprin*

b. Corbin-Russwin.

c. Falcon.

K. Card Reader/Controller: Access credential reader shall be capable of reading keypad/credential codes to

insure flexibility of control and management.


a. Related Section*

L. Door Closers: Door closers shall be of cast iron or aluminum and rectangular design, furnished with a full

cover. Provide complete with backcheck, delayed action and hold-open as indicated. Closers shall be

mounted out of the line of sight wherever possible (i.e., room side of corridor doors, etc.) with parallel arm

mounting on out-swinging doors. Mount closers to jamb or on brackets and/or drop plates, where special

conditions require.


a. LCN*

b. Norton.

c. Falcon.

M. Push Plates: Push plates are to be .050 brass, bronze or stainless steel with four (4) beveled edges,

drilled and countersunk for screws, as is hereinafter specified in the Hardware Schedule.


a. Ives*

b. Trimco.

c. Rockwood.

N. Door Pulls: Door pulls shall be ADA compliant with a 2 1/2 inch projection from back of pull to face of

door. All door pulls shall be thru-bolted or back-to-back mounted.


a. Ives*

b. Trimco.

c. Rockwood.

O. Protective Plates: Protective plates shall be mop (6”), kick (10”) or armor (34”) and shall be minimum .050

thick brass, bronze, or stainless steel, with three (3) beveled edges, drilled and countersunk for screws.

Plates shall be mounted to avoid louvers and/or glass kits.


a. Ives*

b. Trimco.

c. Rockwood.

P. Door Stops and Holders: Where a door strikes a wall at approximately 90 degrees, a suitable door stop

shall be provided, either a wall bumper or floor stop. Where doors are undercut, provide floor stops with

adequate height to properly stop the door. If door would not otherwise strike a wall, an overhead stop

shall be provided. In-wall blocking for wall bumpers at stud walls shall be provided in accordance with

Section 06 10 53. Provide reinforcing in frame and door for overhead stops.


a. Ives*

b. Trimco.

c. Rockwood.



d. Glynn-Johnson*

Q. Thresholds and Weatherstrip: Weatherstripping to have aluminum housing, specified insert, and

elongated mounting holes. Door sweeps shall be surface mounted, of aluminum/stainless steel housing

with specified insert. Overhead drip caps to be of aluminum, have a 2 1/2-inch projection and be 4 inches

wider than the door opening. Thresholds shall be of saddle type with no more than 1/2 inch rise.

Weatherstripping and smoke seals shall be surface-mounted on doorstop and have 1/4" adjustment slots.


a. NGP*

b. Zero.

c. Pemko.

R. Wall Magnets: Magnets shall be fail safe and hold until the current is interrupted. Current input shall be

factory selected to be 24V AC/DC or 120V AC and be protected against voltage surges up to 600 volts. If

voltage less than 120 VAC is indicated, provide transformers as required to accommodate power supply

on specified magnets. Maximum holding force shall be forty (40) pounds. Magnet covers shall be of

metal composite. Plastic covers will not be accepted.


a. LCN*

b. ABH.

c. Dorma.

S. Push Button Switch: Push button switch assembly shall be a momentary action switch used as a

redundant means of egress. Mount in single gang electrical box.



T. Electromagnetic Locks (Access Control): Electromagnetic lock shall have a 1500 lb. holding force

containing a separate infrared (PIR) sensor to energize the magnetic lock when a person enters its field of

view. Lock shall contain a built-in lighted emergency exit button as a redundant means of de-energizing

lock. An access control system shall be integral to the lock with keypads/readers easily wired directly to

the lock.



U. Smoke Gasket: Smoke gasket shall comply with door and frame manufacturers for positive pressure

tests for fire and smoke. (UBC 7-2, Parts 1 & 2/UL10C).


a. NGP*

b. Zero.

c. Pemko.

2.3 FINISHES

A. Hardware finishes shall match and be maintained to BHMA symbols, as indicated in the Hardware

Schedule. Strict adherence to base metals and finish is required.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary

protective covering before shipping.

2.4 KEYING

A. Keying of locks and cylinders throughout project shall be scheduled through a key meeting with Architect,

Owner, and hardware supplier. Key schedule shall be prepared and submitted to the Owner for approval.

Copies of final key schedule with the bitting instructions shall be submitted as part of the Project Record

Documents.

2.5 KEY CONTROL

A. Provide key cabinet(s) manufactured by of sufficient capacity to handle all keys, plus 50 percent

expansion. Provide key control cross-reference chart and accountability (sign-out) tags.


a. Telkee*

b. Lund.

c. Key Control Systems.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions

affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before

electrified door hardware installation.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107 or

ANSI A250.6, whichever is more stringent.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Installation shall be by a qualified installer with a minimum five (5) year’s experience in the installation of

commercial grade hardware. Manufacturer’s instructions shall dictate templating and installation.

B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications,

unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for

Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush

Doors.”

C. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and

fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in

another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing

work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been

completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment

substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.

2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners

and anchors according to industry standards.

D. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by

final keying schedule.

E. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings.

Verify location with Architect prior to installation.

F. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with

requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants.”

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform final inspection with hardware installer and hardware supplier present to ensure correct

installation and operation, and check for any damaged or defective items. Observe and inspect that all

hardware has been installed to its correct destination in proper working order.

B. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner reserves the right to engage a qualified

independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform a separate independent inspection and to

prepare an inspection report.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure

proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended.

1. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment

and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take

at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading

edge of the door.



B. At completion of the installation and prior to Substantial Completion, make final adjustments to door

closures and other items of hardware. Leave all hardware clean and fully operable. Should any item be

found to be defective, it shall be repaired or replaced as directed.

C. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately three months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer's

Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each

item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door

hardware.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or

deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust,

operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01 Section

"Demonstration and Training.”

3.8 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 0.01 - CR-GATE

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):

PROVIDE EACH SGL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:

INGRESS BY READER. EGRESS BY EXIT REX SENSOR.

SPECIFIED IN RELATED SECTION.

119A 127A 133C

QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR

1 SET ACCESS CONTROL RELATED SECTION FBO UNK

1 EA BALANCE OF

HARDWARE

RELATED SECTION FBO UNK

1 EA READER RELATED SECTION FBO UNK

1 EA POWER SUPPLY BY SECURITY CONTR. FBO UNK



HARDWARE GROUP NO. 1.01 - KF

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


HARDWARE GROUP NO. 1.02

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


U1


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA ELEC ENTRANCE LOCK FE210NF NEP CAM 626 SCH

1 EA ONE-SIDED DEADBOLT B80 626 SCH

1 EA CLOSER 1461 REG/PA AS REQ 689 LCN

1 EA HINGE/BASE STOP 69 OR 061 AS REQUIRED. 652 IVE

1 SET SMOKE GASKET 5050B (HEAD & JAMBS) BRN NGP

1 EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 522NA 628 NGP

1 EA DOOR VIEWER U698 626 IVE

151A 151B


4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA OFFICE LOCK S51PD NEP 626 SCH

1 EA WALL STOP WS406/407CCV 630 IVE

151


4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA OFFICE LOCK S51PD NEP 626 SCH

1 EA OH STOP 410S 630 GLY



HARDWARE GROUP NO. 2.01 - DPS

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


DOOR POSITION SWITCH TO INTERFACE WITH SECURITY SYSTEM.


FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


153E


4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA STOREROOM LOCK S80PD NEP 626 SCH

1 EA CLOSER/STOP 1461 CUSH 689 LCN

1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10" X 2"LDW) 630 IVE


1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

679-05 BLK SCE

101B 128B 137A 151D


4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE


1 EA CLOSER/STOP 1461 SCUSH 689 LCN

1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP

1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 156 (HEAD & JAMBS) 628 NGP

1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NA 628 NGP

1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP

102A 111A 152A


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE








FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


INGRESS BY READER OR KEY OVERIDE. EGRESS BY LOCKSET/REX.



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


INGRESS BY READER OR KEY OVERIDE. EGRESS BY LOCKSET.

153


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 TW8 652 IVE

1 EA EU STOREROOM LOCK ND80PEU-REX SPA 626 SCH





1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

679-05 BLK SCE


133A 133B







1 SET WEATHERSTRIP 170NA (HEAD & JAMBS) 628 NGP

1 EA DOOR SWEEP 200NA 628 NGP

1 EA THRESHOLD 425E MS/LA 628 NGP






FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


101A 108A 124A 128A 153C 155B

155C 201A 208A 224A 228A 243A

301A 308A 324A 328A 343A 401A

408A 424A 428A 428B 433B 434A


4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE





143A 250 443A


4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE









FOR USE ON DOOR(S):

PROVIDE EACH PR DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:


FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


153B 411A



1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE


1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE


2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 (10 X 1"LDW) 630 IVE


1 EA ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK

111



1 SET AUTO FLUSH BOLT FB31P 630 IVE

1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 626 IVE


1 EA COORDINATOR COR X FL 628 IVE





1 EA ASTRAGAL BY DOOR MFR. FBO UNK




FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


INGRESS BY READER. EGRESS BY LOCKSET/REX.



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


INGRESS BY READER. EGRESS BY LOCKSET/REX.


150 433 434


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE








1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

679-05 BLK SCE


137 152 155 155A


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE







1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

679-05 BLK SCE





FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


U9


3 EA HINGE HINGES BY PREHING DOOR MFR. 652 IVE



U3 U3A U4 U4A



1 EA PRIVACY LOCK S40D NEP 626 SCH


151C


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE








FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


153D 433A


4 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE






154


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 630 IVE






1 EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 522NA 628 NGP

U6 U7B



2 EA ROLLER LATCH RL1152 626 IVE

2 EA SINGLE DUMMY TRIM S170 NEP 626 SCH





FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


HARDWARE GROUP NO. 4.03 - DB

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


U10 U10A U5 U5A U7A U7C



1 EA PASSAGE SET S10D NEP 626 SCH


U2 U2A



1 EA PASSAGE SET S10D NEP 626 SCH

1 EA ONE-SIDED DEADBOLT B80 626 SCH


1 SET WEATHERSTRIP PKG. RELATED SECTION FBO UNK

111B 153A


3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE

1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK S70PD NEP 626 SCH




HARDWARE GROUP NO. 7.01 - MHO-BE

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


WALL MAGNET TO INTERFACE WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 7.03 - MHO

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):

PROVIDE EACH DE DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:

WALL MAGNETS TO INTERFACE WITH FIRE ALARM SYSTEM.

S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S201

S202 S203 S204 S205 S301 S302

S303 S304 S305 S401 S402 S403

S404 S405


1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD 628 IVE

1 EA EXIT DEVICE 99-L-BE-F-17 626 VON

1 EA CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 689 LCN


1 EA WALL MAGNET SEM7850 689 LCN


100 100A 100B 100C 100D 100E

100F 100G 153F 155D 200A 200B

200C 200D 200E 200F 200G 300A

300B 300C 300D 300E 300F 300G

400A 400B 400C 400D 400E 400F

400G S106 S206 S306 S406



2 EA EXIT DEVICE 9947-EO-F 626 VON

2 EA CLOSER 4040XP REG OR PA AS REQ 689 LCN


2 EA WALL MAGNET SEM7850 689 LCN




HARDWARE GROUP NO. 7.04 - KF-DUMMY

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


INGRESS BY READER OR KEY OVERIDE. EGRESS BY PUSH BAR/REX.

HARDWARE GROUP NO. 7.04A - KF

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


INGRESS BY READER OR KEY OVERIDE. EGRESS BY EXIT DEVICE/REX.


101


1 EA CONT. HINGE 224HD W/EPT PREP 628 IVE

1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 CON 689 VON

1 EA ELEC DUMMY PUSH

BAR

RX-330-CON 626 VON

1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 626 SCH

1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK M490 628 SCE

1 EA OFFSET PULL 8190HD-12" 630 IVE


1 SET WEATHERSTRIP RELATED SECTION FBO UNK

1 EA DOOR BOTTOM RELATED SECTION FBO UNK

1 EA THRESHOLD 413 MS/LA 628 NGP



111C S101A S102A S103A S104A S105A

S106A




1 EA E-TRIM EXIT DEVICE RX99-L-E996-17-CON 626 VON

1 EA CLOSER/STOP 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN


1 EA DRIP CAP 16A 628 NGP


1 EA DOOR SWEEP/DRIP 101VA 628 NGP

1 EA THRESHOLD 896SA MS/LA 628 NGP


1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

679-05 BLK SCE





FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


INGRESS BY READER. EGRESS BY EXIT DEVICE/REX.


HARDWARE GROUP NO. 8.01 - DL-DPS

FOR USE ON DOOR(S):



137B




1 EA E-TRIM EXIT DEVICE RX33A-L-BE-E360-17-CON 626 VON






1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

679-05 BLK SCE


150A



1 EA DEADLATCH/PADDLE 4900 X 4590 628 ADA

1 EA MORTISE CYLINDER 20-013 626 SCH

1 SET PUSH/PULL BAR 9190HD-12" 630 IVE





1 EA DOOR POSITION

SWITCH

679-05 BLK SCE




FOR USE ON DOOR(S):

PROVIDE EACH SL DOOR(S) WITH THE FOLLOWING:


FOR USE ON DOOR(S):


END OF SECTION

102


1 SET TRACK W/HDWRE H100 628 HEN

4 EA DOOR PULL 8102HD-8" W/BTB MOUNT 630 IVE

434B



1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 (4" X 16") 630 IVE

1 EA PULL PLATE 8302-10" (4" X 16") 630 IVE



Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas GLAZING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 088000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 088000

GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass. B. Glazing compounds and accessories.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this


1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Glass Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size

limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics,

limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors. D. Samples: Submit two samples 12 by 12 inch in size of glass units. E. Certificates: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified

requirements.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and FGMA Sealant Manual for glazing

installation methods. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum

three years documented experience.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.

1.6 WARRANTY A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a five (5) year warranty to include coverage for seal failure,

interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GLAZING TYPES A. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Vision glazing, low-E.

1. Basis-of-Design: PPG Glass; Solarban 70XL 2. Application(s): All exterior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 3. Performance:

a. Maximum Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC): 0.27. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

a. Other products of the basis of design manufacturer and products of other manufacturers will be considered provided the overall performance is within the specified range(s) and the overall appearance is not significantly different from that of the specified product.

5. Between-lite space filled with air. 6. Outboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick , minimum.

a. Tint and Coating: Clear and tinted to match Architect's samples, Low-E coating on No. 2 surface.

7. Inboard Lite: Annealed float glass, 1/4 inch thick. a. Tint: None (clear).

8. Total Thickness: 1 inch.


B. Single Vision Glazing: 1. Applications: All interior glazing unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: Heat-strengthened float glass. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

C. Fire-Rated Safety Glazing: 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:

a. Glazed lites in fire doors. b. Sidelights, borrow lites, and other glazed openings in partitions indicated as having an

hourly fire rating. 2. Fire Rating: 45 minutes. 3. Type: Fire-resistant tempered glass. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

D. Single Safety Glazing: Non-fire-rated. 1. Applications: Provide this type of glazing in the following locations:

a. Glazed lites in doors, except fire doors. b. Glazed sidelights to doors, except in fire-rated walls and partitions. c. Other locations required by applicable federal, state, and local codes and regulations. d. Other locations indicated on the drawings.

2. Type: Fully tempered float glass as specified. 3. Tint: Clear. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch.

2.2 EXTERIOR GLAZING ASSEMBLIES A. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting

normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with local code. 1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full recovery of

glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

2.3 GLASS MATERIALS A. Float Glass Manufacturers:

1. AGC Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.na.agc-flatglass.com. 2. Guardian Industries Corp: www.sunguardglass.com. 3. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com/na. 4. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppgideascapes.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Float Glass: All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated. 1. Annealed Type: ASTM C1036, Type I, transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q3 (glazing

select). 2. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM C1048. 3. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. 4. Thicknesses: As indicated; for exterior glazing comply with specified requirements for wind

load design regardless of specified thickness. C. Glass-Ceramic Safety Glazing: UL- or WH-listed as fire-protection-rated glazing and complying with 16

CFR 1201 test requirements for Category II without the use of a surface-applied film.

2.4 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS A. Manufacturers:

1. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.com. 2. Guardian Industries Corporation: www.guardian.com. 3. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Types as indicated. 1. Locations: Exterior, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Durability: Certified by an independent testing agency to comply with ASTM E2190. 3. Edge Spacers: Aluminum, bent and soldered corners. 4. Edge Seal: Glass to elastomer with supplementary silicone sealant. 5. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air.


2.5 GLAZING COMPOUNDS A. Manufacturers:

1. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com. 2. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com. 3. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. 4. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.buildingsystems.basf.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Butyl Sealant : Single component; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A; Shore A hardness of 10 to 20; black color; non-skinning.

C. Silicone Sealant : Single component; neutral curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non-bleeding, non-staining; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, A, and G; cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25; Architect-approved matching color.

2.6 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C864 Option I. Length of 0.1

inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.

B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I. Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application , self adhesive on one face.

C. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 to 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; black color. 1. Manufacturers:

a. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com. b. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com. c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

D. Glazing Gaskets: Resilient silicone extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; ASTM C864 Option I; color as selected.

E. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions that may impede

moisture movement, weeps are clear, and ready to receive glazing.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. D. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM C1193 and FGMA Sealant Manual. E. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - EXTERIOR/INTERIOR DRY METHOD (GASKET GLAZING) A. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. B. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure on gasket to attain

full contact. C. Install removable stops without displacing glazing gasket; exert pressure for full continuous contact.

3.4 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) A. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above sight

line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. E. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. F. Knife trim protruding tape.


3.5 INSTALLATION - INTERIOR WET/DRY METHOD (TAPE AND SEALANT) A. Cut glazing tape to length and install against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) above

sight line. B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape to ensure full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. D. Install removable stops, spacer shims inserted between glazing and applied stops at 24 inch intervals,

1/4 inch below sight line. E. Fill gaps between pane and applied stop with sealant to depth equal to bite on glazing, to uniform and

level line. F. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.6 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after Work is complete. C. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.7 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste ; do not mark heat

absorbing or reflective glass units.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas MIRRORS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 088300 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 088300

MIRRORS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass mirrors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data on Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size

limitations, special handling or installation requirements. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that mirrors, meets or exceeds specified requirements. D. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual for glazing installation methods. B. Fabricate, store, transport, receive, install, and clean mirrors in accordance with recommendations of

GANA (TIPS) "Mirrors Handle with Extreme Care: Tips For the Professional on the Care and Handling of Mirrors."

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install mirrors when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing

compounds.

1.5 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for reflective coating on mirrors and replacement of same.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Mirrors:

1. Binswanger Mirror/ACI Distribution: www.binswangerglass.com. 2. Lenoir Mirror Co: www.lenoirmirror.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Mirror Glass - General: Select materials and/or provide supports as required to limit mirrored glass

deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. B. Mirror Glass : ASTM C1036, Type 1 transparent flat, Class 1 clear, Quality Q1 (mirror select);

silvering, protective coating and physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503; 6 mm minimum thick. 1. Sizes noted on Drawings.

2.3 GLAZING ACCESSORIES A. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. B. Mirror Attachment Accessories: Stainless steel clips. C. Mirror Adhesive: Chemically compatible with mirror coating and wall substrate.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas MIRRORS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 088300 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for mirrored glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to

receive mirrors.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces

scheduled to receive sealant. C. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 for solvent release sealants. Install sealant in

accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install mirrors in accordance with GANA recommendations. B. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion. C. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including countertops or

backsplashes. D. Installation in Frames:

1. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1/16 inch above sight line.

2. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. 3. Rest mirrors on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. 4. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of mirrors in same manner described above. 5. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous

contact. 6. Knife-trim protruding tape.

E. Frameless Mirrors: Set mirrors with clips. Anchor rigidly to wall construction.

3.4 CLEANING A. Remove wet glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean mirrors and adjacent surfaces.

3.5 PROTECTION A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas LOUVERS AND VENTS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 089000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 089000

LOUVERS AND VENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL




1. Fixed, extruded-aluminum louvers associated with mechanical systems.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Louver Terminology: Definitions of terms for metal louvers contained in AMCA 501 apply to this Section

unless otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. B. Horizontal Louver: Louver with horizontal blades; i.e., the axes of the blades are horizontal. C. Drainable-Blade Louver: Louver with blades having gutters that collect water and drain it to channels in

jambs and mullions, which carry it to bottom of unit and away from opening.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design louvers, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified

professional engineer, using structural performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance: Louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and

stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components, noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. Wind pressures shall be considered to act normal to the face of the building. 1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on a uniform pressure as indicated on Drawings.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes, without buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, or other detrimental effects. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

D. Louver Performance Ratings: Provide louvers complying with requirements specified, as demonstrated by testing manufacturer's stock units identical to those provided, except for length and width according to AMCA 500-L.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For louvers specified to bear AMCA seal, include printed catalog pages showing specified models with appropriate AMCA Certified Ratings Seals.

B. Shop Drawings: For louvers and accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Show frame profiles and blade profiles, angles, and spacing. 1. Show weep paths, gaskets, flashing, sealant, and other means of preventing water intrusion. 2. Show mullion profiles and locations.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For louvers indicated to comply with structural performance requirements

and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain louvers and vents from single source from a single manufacturer where

indicated to be of same type, design, or factory-applied color finish. B. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum." C. SMACNA Standard: Comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" for

fabrication, construction details, and installation procedures.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.


1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace

aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:

a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5, T-52, or T6. B. Fasteners: Use types and sizes to suit unit installation conditions.

1. Use Phillips flat-head screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 3. For fastening galvanized steel, use hot-dip-galvanized steel or 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 4. For fastening stainless steel, use 300 series stainless-steel fasteners. 5. For color-finished louvers, use fasteners with heads that match color of louvers.

C. Post-installed Fasteners for Concrete and Masonry: Torque-controlled expansion anchors, made from stainless-steel components, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 4 times the loads imposed, for concrete, or 6 times the load imposed, for masonry, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

2.2 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Assemble louvers in factory to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units as necessary for

shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. B. Maintain equal louver blade spacing, including separation between blades and frames at head and sill, to

produce uniform appearance. C. Fabricate frames, including integral sills, to fit in openings of sizes indicated, with allowances made for

fabrication and installation tolerances, adjoining material tolerances, and perimeter sealant joints. 1. Frame Type: Channel unless otherwise indicated.

D. Include supports, anchorages, and accessories required for complete assembly. E. Provide subsills made of same material as louvers for recessed louvers. F. Join frame members to each other and to fixed louver blades with fillet welds, threaded fasteners, or both,

as standard with louver manufacturer unless otherwise indicated or size of louver assembly makes bolted connections between frame members necessary.

2.3 FIXED, EXTRUDED-ALUMINUM LOUVERS A. Horizontal, Continuous-Line, Drainable-Blade Louver: Drainable-blade louver with blade gutters (drains) in

rear two-thirds of blades only and with semi-recessed mullions capable of collecting and draining water from blades. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Airolite Company, LLC (The). b. Arrow United Industries; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Construction Specialties, Inc. d. Greenheck Fan Corporation. e. Ruskin Company; Tomkins PLC.

2. Louver Depth: 4 inches. 3. Frame and Blade Nominal Thickness: Not less than 0.080 inch. 4. Louver Performance Ratings: IN accordance with MEP requirements.

2.4 LOUVER SCREENS A. General: Provide screen at each exterior louver.

1. Screen Location for Fixed Louvers: Interior face. 2. Screening Type: Bird screening.

B. Secure screen frames to louver frames with machine screws with heads finished to match louver, spaced a maximum of 6 inches from each corner and at 12 inches o.c.

C. Louver Screen Frames: Fabricate with mitered corners to louver sizes indicated. 1. Metal: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 2. Finish: Same finish as louver frames to which louver screens are attached.


3. Type: Rewirable frames with a driven spline or insert. D. Louver Screening for Aluminum Louvers:

1. Bird Screening: Aluminum, 1/2-inch- square mesh, 0.063-inch wire.

2.5 FINISHES, GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations

for applying and designating finishes.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Finish louvers after assembly. B. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of

anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louvers and vents level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where

required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. E. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering, and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence

remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory, make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

F. Protect unpainted galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals from corrosion and galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint or by separating surfaces with waterproof gaskets or nonmetallic flashing.

G. Install concealed gaskets, flashings, joint fillers, and insulation as louver installation progresses, where weathertight louver joints are required. Comply with Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealants applied during louver installation.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of louvers and vents that are not protected by temporary covering, to remove

fingerprints and soil during construction period. Do not let soil accumulate during construction period. B. Before final inspection, clean exposed surfaces with water and a mild soap or detergent not harmful to

finishes. Thoroughly rinse surfaces and dry. C. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction so no evidence remains of

corrective work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as determined by Architect, remove damaged units and replace with new units. 1. Touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of, and is

compatible with, factory-applied finish coating.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 092116 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 092116

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following:

1. Shaft-wall enclosures. 2. Chase enclosures. 3. Stair enclosures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-

resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested

according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of

manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's

written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. At Contractor’s

request, Owner and Architect may consider use of moisture and mold resistant gypsum board panel products without additional cost to Owner.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,

sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface

contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


1. American Gypsum Company. 2. G-P Gypsum. 3. National Gypsum Company. 4. Temple-Inland Forest Products Corporation. 5. USG Corporation.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies

indicated. 1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's

written recommendations.


2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer

recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 25 percent by weight.

B. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442. 1. Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture-resistant paper faces.

a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel.

2. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273. a. Core: 1 inch thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel.

C. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." D. Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."

2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Recycled Content: Provide steel sheet with average recycled content such that postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653, G40, hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's

written recommendations. B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division

09 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.

C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board." D. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering

gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction. 1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. F. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions

imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded. 1. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain,

without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

2. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that postconsumer

recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 30 percent by weight.

H. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES A. Basis-of-Design Product: As indicated on Drawings by design designation of a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated on Drawings. C. STC Rating: As indicated on Drawings, but not less than 51, minimum. D. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-

resistance-rated assembly indicated. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.


E. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches long and in depth matching studs. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: Matching steel studs.

F. Jamb Struts: Manufacturer's standard J-profile strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, in depth matching studs, and not less than 0.0329 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present,

including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: Coordinate with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies so both elements

of Work remain complete and undamaged. Patch or replace sprayed fire-resistive materials removed or damaged during installation of shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements specified in Division 07 Section "Applied Fireproofing." 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runner

tracks to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.

B. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove only to extent necessary for installation of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies and without reducing the fire-resistive material thickness below that which is required to obtain fire-resistance rating indicated. Protect remaining fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire-resistance-rated

assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following: 1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.

B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft-wall assembly framing. 1. At elevator hoistway entrance door frames, provide jamb struts on each side of door frame. 2. Where handrails directly attach to gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies, provide galvanized steel

reinforcing strip with 0.0312-inch minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal, accurately positioned and secured behind at least 1 gypsum board face-layer panel.

D. Integrate stair hanger rods with gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies by locating cavity of assemblies where required to enclose rods.

E. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.

F. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

G. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.

H. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.


I. In elevator shafts where gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies cannot be positioned within 4 inches of the shaft face of structural beams, floor edges, and similar projections into shaft, install 1/2- or 5/8-inch- thick, gypsum board cants covering tops of projections. No recesses allowed (at steel beams especially). 1. Slope cant panels at least 75 degrees from horizontal. Set base edge of panels in adhesive and

secure top edges to shaft walls at 24 inches o.c. with screws fastened to shaft-wall framing. 2. Where steel framing is required to support gypsum board cants, install framing at 24 inches o.c.

and extend studs from the projection to shaft-wall framing. J. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch

from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and

other causes during remainder of the construction period. B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 092216 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 092216

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Performance criteria for gypsum board assemblies.

B. Metal stud wall framing.

C. Gypsum wallboard.

D. Joint treatment and accessories.

E. Textured finish system.


A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing gypsum board application and finishing , with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013000. B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape and joint compound. C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for each product proposed for use.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

B. Interior Partitions Indicated as Acoustic: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 45-49 calculated in accordance with ASTM E413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E90.

C. Shaft Walls at HVAC Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Sustained loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240.


D. Shaft Walls at Elevator Shafts: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 5 lbf/sq ft with maximum mid-span deflection of L/240.


E. Fire Rated Assemblies: Provide completed assemblies with the following characteristics:

1. UL Assembly Numbers: Provide construction equivalent to that listed for the particular assembly in the current UL Fire Resistance Directory.

2.2 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Metal Framing, Connectors, and Accessories:

1. Clarkwestern Dietrich Building Systems LLC : www.clarkdietrich.com.

2. Marino : www.marinoware.com.

3. Phillips Manufacturing Company : www.phillipsmfg.com.


B. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing of L/240 at 5 psf.

1. Studs: "C" shaped with flat or formed webs with knurled faces.

2. Runners: U shaped, sized to match studs.

3. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch.

C. Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C754 and specified performance requirements.

1. Manufacturers - Shaft Wall Studs and Accessories:

a. Same manufacturer as other framing materials.

b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


D. Partition Head to Structure Connections: Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition.

1. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical movement capacity required by applicable code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

2. Material: ASTM A653/A653M steel sheet, SS Grade 50/340, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating.

2.3 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum : www.americangypsum.com.

2. American Gypsum: www.americangypsum.com.

3. CertainTeed Corporation : www.certainteed.com.

4. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum : www.gpgypsum.com.

5. National Gypsum Company : www.nationalgypsum.com.

6. Temple-Inland Inc: www.templeinland.com.

7. USG Corporation : www.usg.com.


B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. At Assemblies Indicated with Fire-Rating: Use type required by indicated tested assembly; if no tested assembly is indicated, use Type X board, UL or WH listed.

3. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Paper-Faced Products:

a. American Gypsum; EagleRoc Regular Gypsum Wallboard and FireBloc Type X Gypsum Wallboard.

b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Gypsum Board.

c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock, ToughRock Fireguard, and ToughRock FireGuard C Gypsum Wallboard.

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Gypsum Wallboard.

e. Temple-Inland Inc; Gypsumboard and Gypsum Board Fire Resistant Panels Type X and Type TGC.

f. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Panels.

g. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

C. Backing Board For Wet Areas: One of the following products:

1. Application: Surfaces behind tile in wet areas including tub and shower surrounds and shower ceilings.

2. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

3. Glass-Mat-Faced Board: Coated glass mat water-resistant gypsum backing panel as defined in ASTM C1178.

a. Fire-Resistant Type: Type X core, thickness as indicated on Drawings.

b. Products:

1) Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer.

2) National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e2XP Tile Backer.

3) Temple-Inland Inc; GreenGlass Tile Backer.

D. Backing Board For Non-Wet Areas: Water-resistant gypsum backing board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimum joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Vertical surfaces behind thinset tile, except in wet areas.

2. Type: Type X, in locations indicated.

3. Type X Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Edges: Tapered.

5. Products:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Moisture & Mold Resistant Gypsum Board.

b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock Mold-Guard Gypsum Board ("Greenboard").

c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; DensShield Tile Backer.

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand XP Gypsum Board.

e. Temple-Inland Inc; ComfortGuard WR.

f. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough Gypsum Panels.


E. Ceiling Board: Special sag-resistant gypsum ceiling board as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Edges: Tapered.

4. Products:

a. American Gypsum; Interior Ceiling Board.

b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Interior Ceiling.

c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ToughRock CD Ceiling Board.

d. National Gypsum Company; High Strength Brand Ceiling Board.

e. Temple-Inland Inc; Span24 Ceiling Board.

f. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Sag-Resistant Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board.

g. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

F. Shaftwall and Coreboard: Type X; 1 inch thick by 24 inches wide, beveled long edges, ends square cut.

1. Paper Faced Type: Gypsum shaftliner board or gypsum coreboard as defined ASTM C1396/C1396M; water-resistant faces.

2. Products:

a. American Gypsum; Shaft Liner.

b. CertainTeed Corporation; ProRoc Brand Shaftliner Type X.

c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner.

d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand 1" Fire-Shield Shaftliner XP (mold-resistant).

e. Pacific Coast Building Products, Inc; PABCORE Gypsum Shaftliner Board type X.

f. Temple-Inland Inc; SilentGuard Gypsum Shaftliner.

g. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels.

h. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Gypsum Liner Panels--Enhanced (mold-resistant).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Finishing Accessories: ASTM C1047, galvanized steel or rolled zinc, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Types: As detailed or required for finished appearance.

B. Joint Materials: ASTM C475 and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for project conditions.

1. Tape: 2 inch wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners , except as otherwise indicated.

2. Tape: 2 inch wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners , except as otherwise indicated.

3. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

4. Powder-type vinyl-based joint compound.

5. Chemical hardening type compound.

C. High Build Drywall Surfacer: Vinyl acrylic latex-based coating for spray application, designed to take the place of skim coating and separate paint primer in achieving Level 5 finish.

D. Textured Finish Materials: Non-aggregate-based finish.

1. Premixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.

a. Textures: Provide where indicated:

1) Orange peel (light texture)

2) Spatter (medium texture).

E. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members Less Than 0.03 inch In Thickness, to Wood Members, and to Gypsum Board: ASTM C1002; self-piercing tapping type ; cadmium-plated for exterior locations.

F. Screws for Attachment to Steel Members From 0.033 to 0.112 inch in Thickness: ASTM C954; steel drill screws for application of gypsum board to loadbearing steel studs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.2 SHAFT WALL INSTALLATION

A. Shaft Wall Framing: Install in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

1. Install studs at spacing required to meet performance requirements.

B. Shaft Wall Liner: Cut panels to accurate dimension and install sequentially between special friction studs.

1. On walls over sixteen feet high, screw-attach studs to runners top and bottom.

2. Seal perimeter of shaft wall and penetrations with acoustical sealant.


3.3 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Metal Framing: Install in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions.

B. Studs: Space studs as permitted by standard.

1. Extend partition framing to structure where indicated and to ceiling in other locations.

2. Partitions Terminating at Ceiling: Attach ceiling runner securely to ceiling track in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3. Partitions Terminating at Structure: Attach top runner to structure, maintain clearance between top of studs and structure, and connect studs to track using specified mechanical devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions; verify free movement of top of stud connections; do not leave studs unattached to track.

C. Standard Wall Furring: Install at concrete walls scheduled to receive gypsum board, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center.

1. Orientation: Horizontal.

2. Spacing: As indicated.

D. Furring for Fire Ratings: Install as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and to GA-600 requirements.

E. Blocking: Install wood blocking for support of:

1. Framed openings.

2. Wall mounted cabinets.

3. Plumbing fixtures.

4. Toilet partitions.

5. Toilet accessories.

6. Wall mounted door hardware.

3.4 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES INSTALLATION

A. Acoustic Insulation: Place tightly within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions.

B. Acoustic Sealant: Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt end joints, especially in highly visible locations.

B. Single-Layer Non-Rated: Install gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.

1. Exception: Tapered edges to receive joint treatment at right angles to framing.

C. Fire-Rated Construction: Install gypsum board in strict compliance with requirements of assembly listing.

D. Exterior Soffit Board: Install perpendicular to framing, with staggered end joints over framing members or other solid backing.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

1. Not more than 30 feet apart on walls and ceilings over 50 feet long.

2. At exterior soffits, not more than 30 feet apart in both directions.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

C. Exterior Soffit Vents: Install according to manufacturer's written instructions and in locations shown on the drawings. Provide vent area specified.


3.7 JOINT TREATMENT D. Glass Mat Faced Gypsum Board: Use fiberglass joint tape, bedded and finished with chemical

hardening type joint compound. E. Paper Faced Gypsum Board: Use paper joint tape, bedded with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint

compound and finished with ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound. F. Finish gypsum board in scheduled areas in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C 840.

1. Above Finished Ceilings Concealed From View: Level 1. 2. Utility Areas and Areas Behind Cabinetry: Level 2. 3. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Flat or Eggshell Paint Finish: Level 4. 4. Walls and Ceilings to Receive Semi-Gloss or Gloss Paint Finish: Level 5.

G. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready to receive finishes. 1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 2. Taping, filling, and sanding is not required at surfaces behind adhesive applied ceramic tile and

fixed cabinetry. 3. Taping, filling and sanding is not required at base layer of double layer applications.

H. Where Level 5 finish is indicated, spray apply high build drywall surfacer over entire surface after joints have been properly treated; achieve a flat and tool mark-free finish.

I. Fill and finish joints and corners of cementitious backing board as recommended by manufacturer.

3.8 TEXTURE FINISH

A. Apply finish texture coating by means of spraying apparatus in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and to match approved samples.

3.9 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 092423 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 092423

PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER

PART 1 - GENERAL


Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Refer to Section 072500 for air/moisture barrier behind cement plaster.


1. Portland cement plaster on metal lath.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans,

elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work. C. Provide calculations demonstrating code required wind uplift resistance is being met.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those

of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another

qualified testing agency. B. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate

aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated. 2. For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct

sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements. B. Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 40 deg F for at least 48 hours before

plaster application, and continuously during and after application. 1. Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly;

prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster. 2. Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating

plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster application and until plaster is dry.

C. Exterior Plasterwork: 1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required

by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.

2. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F. 3. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred.

D. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmental conditions for applying finishes.

1.7 WARRANTY A. Comply with provisions of Section 017800. B. Warrant acrylic top coat for not less than 5 years to be free from defects in material or labor,

including cracks, adhesive or bonding failure, finish degradation, and color retention.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL LATH A. Metal Lath (Contractor option):

1. 2.5 lb/sq. yd., self-furring, diamond-mesh lath complying with ASTM C 847. Fabricate from structural-quality, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60.

2. Megalath 17 gage galvanized, self furring, welded wire lath, by Structa Wire Corporation, Vancouver BC.

3. Provide both options above with asphalt impregnated asphalt paper. As an alternative, a separate layer of type D building paper may be applied prior to lathing.

B. Corner Mesh: Formed galvanized sheet steel; minimum 26 gage thick; expanded flanges shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2 inch size, or as approved by Architect and Owner.

C. Strip Mesh: Expanded galvanized metal lath, minimum 26 gage thick; 2 inch wide x 24 inch long. D. Felt Paper Slip Sheet Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable, 15 lb paper.

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses and

number of plaster coats required. B. Metal Accessories:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company. b. CEMCO. c. Clark Western Building Systems. d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company. e. MarinoWARE. f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.

2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from zinc coated (galvanized) sheet steel. 3. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-

dip galvanized zinc coating. 4. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.

a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated. b. Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners. c. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use on

columns and for finishing masonry corners. d. Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locations

indicated on Drawings. 5. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with expanded

flanges. Provide holes in base of casing bead to provide for drainage from behind plaster. 6. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded pair of

unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.

7. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.

C. Polystyrene Insulation and Accessories for Ornamentation: 1. ASTM C578; tested in accordance with ASTM E84 with flame-spread of less than 25. 2. Insulation board must be aged. If air dried, provide board aged for not less than 6 weeks in block

form prior to cutting and shipping. 3. Water Absorption: In accordance with ANSI/ASTM D2842, 4% by volume. 4. Variations in tolerances in dimensions of insulation board shall be minimized to +/- 1/16" in all

dimensions. 5. Label each insulation board to provide information required by applicable codes, and to include

manufacturer's quality control number. 6. Density: 1.0 PCF. 7. Size: As required for shapes and sizes indicated. 8. Thickness: Minimum 1" with greater thickness as detailed to maintain profiles at built-up areas. 9. Edges: All edges to be square, except top edges that are exposed to the weather shall slope per

recommendations of finish coat manufacturer. 10. Insulating Value: R = 3.7. 11. Manufacturer: Approved by coating system manufacturer. 12. Ornamentation Adhesive and Mesh Adhesive: Acrylic based, compatible with the insulation board

substrate, and reinforcing fabric; free of iron containing compounds.


13. Reinforcing Fabric: Balanced open mesh glass fiber fabric, minimum 4.5 oz/s.y., properly treated for compatibility with other materials of the system and supplied by coating system manufacturer. Provide impact resistant mesh as described in EIMA-101.86 in addition to standard fabric wherever foam ornamentation occurs within 6 feet of an adjacent grade or paving, and at parapet caps.

14. Base Coat: Compatible with the insulation board and reinforcing fabric.

2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster,

lath, or accessories. B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants,

manufactured for use in portland cement plaster. C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932. D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thickness

of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads.

E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063. F. Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch diameter, unless

otherwise indicated.

2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.

1. Color for Finish Coats: Gray. C. Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to

match Architect's sample. D. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.

1. Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: In color matching Architect's sample. E. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfast

mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Include manufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dryvit Systems, Inc.; Dryvit TAFS. b. Finestone, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; PebbleTex. c. LaHabra/Omega, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Acrylic Finish. d. Pleko Group LLC Products, Inc.; Pleko Structure Finishes. e. Senergy, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Senerflex. f. Sto Corp.; Powerwall Finish. g. Surewall, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Acrylic Finish. h. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; StuccoTex Finish.

2. Color: As scheduled.

2.5 PLASTER MIXES A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.

1. Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes. Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed 1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials.

B. Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows: 1. Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:

a. Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.

b. Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonry cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less than volume of aggregate used in scratch coat.

C. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For ready-mixed finish-coat plasters acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's written instructions.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in

anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused by

plastering. B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required to

bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.

3.3 INSTALLING METAL FELT PAPER AND LATH A. Install felt paper backing in accordiance with manufacturer’s instruction. B. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.

1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 3. Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath. 4. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.

3.4 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings. B. Reinforcement for External Corners:

1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations. 2. Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.

C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings or in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect as follows: 1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft.. b. Horizontal and other Non-vertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft..

2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c. 3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater

than 2-1/2:1. 4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster. 5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and

to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.

3.5 FOAM ORNAMENTATION INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with system manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Adhere foam ornamentation to vertical surfaces in locations indicated C. Precut board as required to fit openings, projections, etc., stagger vertical joints and corners. D. Adhesive:

1. Apply mixed adhesive to the entire surface of the insulation board with a notched trowel in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

2. Apply pressure over entire surface of board to ensure uniform contact and high initial grab. Abut joints tightly. Rasp flush irregularities in insulation board exceeding 1/16 inch.

E. Base Coat and Standard Reinforcing Fabric: 1. Using stainless steel trowel, apply base coat mixture to a uniform thickness of 1/16 inch. 2. Immediately place reinforcing fabric against the wet base coating, trowel from center to edges,

embedding fabric into the coating. 3. Use reinforcing fabric continuous at corners and lapped not less than 2-1/2 inches at fabric edges.

Provide an additional layer of reinforcing fabric at exterior corners. 4. Install additional reinforcing fabric at diagonally at corners of openings. 5. Avoid wrinkles while embedding the reinforcing fabric. 6. Back wrap insulation board at base. 7. Verify base coating surface is dry and hard before proceeding to finish application.


F. Base Coat and Reinforcing Mesh for Impact-Resistance Areas 1. Using stainless steel trowel, apply impact adhesive to entire surface of board to a uniform thickness

of 3/32 inch. 2. Immediately embed first layer of reinforcing mesh into wet base coat using trowel. Smooth until

mesh is fully embedded. Butt ends of mesh pieces tightly. Do not lap ends. 3. Allow 24 hours for base coat to form a positive bond. Protect from damage and weather while

curing. 4. Apply a second layer of standard reinforcing mesh and adhesive mixture over first layer of

reinforcing fabric as specified above.

3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926.

1. Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.

2. Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metal frame, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctures with metal.

3. Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated. B. Bonding Compound: Apply on unit masonry and concrete plaster bases. C. Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork; ½

inch thickness. 1. Portland and masonry cement mixes.

D. Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork; 1/2 inch thick. 1. Portland and masonry cement mixes.

E. Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhered finishes, omit finish coat.

3.7 PLASTER REPAIRS A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs,

efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.

3.8 PROTECTION A. Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames,

windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TILING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 093000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 093000

TILING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Tile for floor applications. B. Tile for wall applications. C. Stone thresholds. D. Ceramic trim. E. Non-ceramic trim.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this


1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' data sheets on tile, mortar, grout, and accessories. Include

instructions for using grouts and adhesives. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junctions with

dissimilar materials, control and expansion joints, thresholds, ceramic accessories, and setting details. D. Samples: Mount tile and apply grout on two plywood panels, minimum 18 x 18 inches in size

illustrating pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations. E. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Tile: 1 percent of each size, color, and surface finish combination , but not less than 1

box of each type.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Maintain one copy of The Tile Council of North America Handbook and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series

on site. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in

this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum of 5 years of

documented experience.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install solvent-based products in an unventilated environment. B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F during installation of mortar materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TILE A. Manufacturers: All products by the same manufacturer. B. Glazed Wall Tile : ANSI A137.1 , and as follows:

1. Acceptable Products: Refer to Finish Legend. 2. Moisture Absorption: 3.0 to 7.0 percent. 3. Size and Shape: Refer to Finish Legend. 4. Edges: Cushioned. 5. Surface Finish: Refer to Finish Legend. 6. Colors: As scheduled.

C. Porcelain Wall Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows: 1. Acceptable Products: Refer to Finish Legend. 2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 3. Face: Refer to Finish Legend. 4. Edges: Cushioned. 5. Size and Shape: Refer to Finish Legend.


6. Colors and Surface Finish: As scheduled. D. Porcelain Floor Tile: ANSI A137.1, and as follows:

1. Acceptable Products: Refer to Finish Legend. 2. Moisture Absorption: 0 to 0.5 percent. 3. Face: Refer to Finish Legend. 4. Edges: Cushioned. 5. Thickness: 3/8 inch. 6. Size and Shape: Refer to Finish Legend. 7. Colors and Surface Finish: As scheduled.

2.2 TRIM AND ACCESSORIES A. Ceramic Trim: Refer to Finish Legend.

1. Manufacturer: Same as for tile. B. Non-Ceramic Trim: Satin brass anodized extruded aluminum, style and dimensions to suit application,

for setting using tile mortar or adhesive. 1. Manufacturer:

a. Schluter-Systems: www.schluter.com. b. Genesis APS International: www.genesis-aps.com.

C. Thresholds: Refer to Finish Legend. 1. Applications: Provide at the following locations:

a. At doorways where tile terminates.

2.3 SETTING MATERIALS A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI A118.4.

1. Application(s): Use this type of bond coat where indicated and where no other type of bond coat is indicated.

2. Products: a. Custom Building Products; MegaLite: www.custombuildingproducts.com. b. LATICRETE International, Inc ; LATICRETE 254 Platinum: www.laticrete.com. c. ProSpec, an Oldcastle brand ; Permalastic System: www.prospec.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.4 GROUTS A. Manufacturers:

1. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 2. LATICRETE International, Inc: www.laticrete.com. 3. MAPEI Corporation: www.mapei.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Standard Grout: ANSI A118.6 standard cement grout. 1. Applications: Use this type of grout where indicated and where no other type of grout is

indicated. 2. Use sanded grout for joints 1/8 inch wide and larger; use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8

inch wide. 3. Color(s): As scheduled.

2.5 THICK-BED MATERIALS A. Mortar Bed Materials: Portland cement, sand , latex additive, and water.

1. Products: a. LATICRETE International, Inc ; LATICRETE 3701 Fortified Mortar Bed:

www.laticrete.com.

2.6 THIN-SET ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Concrete Floor Slab Crack Isolation Membrane: Material complying with ANSI A118.12.

1. Thickness: 20 mils, maximum. 2. Crack Resistance: No failure at 1/16 inch gap, minimum.

B. Waterproofing Membrane at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Type: Mortar-bonded sheet. 2. Material: PVC sheet membrane, 40 mils, thick, minimum. 3. Products:

a. Compotite Corporation; Composeal Gold: www.compotite.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.


C. Waterproofing Membrane at Showers and Tiled Tubs: Specifically designed for bonding to cementitious substrate under thick mortar bed or thin-set tile; complying with ANSI A118.10. 1. Type: Mortar-bonded sheet. 2. Material: PVC sheet membrane, 40 mils, thick, minimum. 3. Products:

a. Compotite Corporation; Composeal Blue Shower Pan: www.compotite.com. b. Parex USA, Inc.; Merkrete Hydro Guard 2000: www.merkrete.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

D. Underlayment at Floors: Specifically designed for bonding to thin-set setting mortar; not primarily a waterproofing material and having the following characteristics: 1. Crack Isolation: Comply with ANSI A118.12. 2. Uncoupling Function: Allow for separation between membrane and the mortar adhering tile to

the membrane when subjected to excessive substrate movement. 3. Do Not Use: Gypsum or cementitious based self-leveling underlayment. 4. Products:

a. Custom Building Products; SpiderWeb Uncoupling Mat: www.custombuildingproducts.com.

b. LATICRETE International, Inc ; LATICRETE Hydro Ban: www.laticrete.com. c. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work

and are ready to receive tile. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are

dust-free, and are ready to receive tile. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of setting

materials to sub-floor surfaces. D. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for tile installation by testing for moisture emission

rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by tile manufacturer and setting materials manufacturer.

E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Protect surrounding work from damage. B. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. C. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to acceptable flatness

tolerances. D. Install backer board in accordance with ANSI A108.11 and board manufacturer's instructions. Tape

joints and corners, cover with skim coat of setting material to a feather edge. E. Prepare substrate surfaces for adhesive installation in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's

instructions.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Install tile, thresholds, and stair treads and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI

A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and The Tile Council of North America Handbook recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings. C. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form corners and bases neatly.

Align floor joints. D. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make grout joints

without voids, cracks, excess mortar or excess grout, or too little grout. E. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed. F. Install non-ceramic trim in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. G. Install thresholds where indicated. H. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units. I. Keep expansion joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints. J. Prior to grouting, allow installation to completely cure; minimum of 48 hours. K. Grout tile joints. Use standard grout unless otherwise indicated. L. Apply sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials and junction of dissimilar planes.


3.4 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - THIN-SET METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America

Handbook Method F113, dry-set or latex-Portland cement bond coat, with standard grout , unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use uncoupling membrane under all tile unless other underlayment is indicated. 2. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, install in accordance with The Tile Council of

North America Handbook Method F122, with latex-Portland cement grout. 3. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with The Tile Council of

North America Handbook Method F131. 4. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in accordance

with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F115.

3.5 INSTALLATION - FLOORS - MORTAR BED METHODS A. Over interior concrete substrates, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America

Handbook Method F111, with cleavage membrane , unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where waterproofing membrane is indicated, with standard grout or no mention of grout type,

install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F121. 2. Where epoxy bond coat and grout are indicated, install in accordance with The Tile Council of

North America Handbook Method F132, bonded. 3. Where epoxy or furan grout is indicated, but not epoxy or furan bond coat, install in accordance

with The Tile Council of North America Handbook Method F114, with cleavage membrane. B. Cleavage Membrane: Lap edges and ends. C. Waterproofing Membrane: Install as recommended by manufacturer and as specified in the section in

which the product is specified. D. Mortar Bed Thickness: 5/8 inch , unless otherwise indicated.

3.6 INSTALLATION - SHOWERS AND BATHTUB WALLS A. At tiled shower receptors install in accordance with The Tile Council of North America Handbook

Method B415, mortar bed floor, and W244, thin-set over cementitious backer unit walls. B. Grout with standard grout as specified above. C. Seal joints between tile work and other work with sealant Type S-GP specified in Section 07 9005.

3.7 INSTALLATION - WALL TILE A. Over coated glass mat backer board on studs, install in accordance with The Tile Council of North

America Handbook Method W245.

3.8 CLEANING A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.

3.9 PROTECTION A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas CARPETING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 096800 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 096800

CARPETING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Carpet, stretched-in, with cushion underlay. B. Accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet pile and pattern,

location of edge moldings and edge bindings. C. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. D. Samples: Submit two samples in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified. E. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and

suggested schedule for cleaning.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum

three years documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years

experience.

1.4 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after

installation. C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET A. Carpet:

1. Acceptable Products: Refer to Finish Legend.

2.2 CUSHION A. Cushion Underlay: FS- LC-1369; 72 inches wide rolls; re-bonded polyurethane foam; particle size not

to exceed 1/2 inch; density of 6.0 pcf plus or minus 5 percent; thickness of 1/2 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch;

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer. B. Tackless Strip: Carpet gripper, of type recommended by carpet manufacturer to suit application, with

attachment devices. C. Moldings and Edge Strips: Resilient rubber; refer to Section 096500. D. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer. E. Contact Adhesive: Compatible with carpet material.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas CARPETING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 096800 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work

and are ready to receive carpet. B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are

dust-free, and are ready to receive carpet. C. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances that could impair bonding of

adhesives to sub floor surfaces. D. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for flooring

installation by testing for moisture and pH. 1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710. 2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by flooring material

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer. E. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers. B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other

defects with sub-floor filler. C. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Clean substrate.

3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL A. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions. B. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI Carpet Installation

Standard. C. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. D. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings:

1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction on adjacent

pieces. 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

E. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.

3.4 STRETCHED-IN CARPET A. Install tackless strips with pins facing the wall around entire perimeter, except across door openings.

Use edge strip where carpet terminates at other floor coverings. B. Space tackless strips slightly less than carpet thickness away from vertical surfaces, but not more than

3/8 inch. C. Install cushion in maximum size pieces using spot adhesive to adhere to sub-floor. D. Lay out cushion so that seams will be perpendicular to, or offset from, minimum 6 inches from carpet

seams. E. Butt cushion edges together and tape seams. F. Trim cushion tight to edge of tackless strip and around projections and contours. G. Double cut carpet seams , with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply

seam adhesive to all cut edges immediately. H. Join seams by hand sewing. Form seams straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. I. Following seaming, hook carpet onto tackless strip at one edge, power stretch, and hook firmly at other

edges. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for method and amount of stretch. J. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions. Tuck edges into space between tackless strip

and wall. K. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. Bind cut edges where not concealed

by edge strips.

3.5 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TILE CARPETING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 096813 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 096813

TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes modular, fusion-bonded tufted carpet tile.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. 2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are

required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- long Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified

Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level. B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested

for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic

effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed

Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with CRI 104.


1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight,

wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tiles, install carpet tiles before installing these items.

1.9 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile

installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of

substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs,

dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE A. Basis of Design Product: As scheduled.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation

provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and

subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for

maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that

may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile

manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written

installation instructions. B. Installation Method: Glue down; install every tile with full-spread, releasable, pressure-sensitive adhesive. C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area. D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including

cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, non-staining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. H. Stagger joints of carpet tiles so carpet tile grid is offset from access flooring panel grid. Do not fill seams of

access flooring panels with carpet adhesive; keep seams free of adhesive.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures

during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WALL COVERINGS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 097200 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 097200

WALL COVERINGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Wall covering.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on wall covering and adhesive.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in

this section with minimum three years of documented experience. B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section

with minimum three years of experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inspect roll materials at arrival on site, to verify acceptability. B. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. C. Do not store roll goods on end.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges

required by the adhesive or wall covering product manufacturer. B. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive and wall covering. C. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Requirements for All Wall Coverings:

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Wall Covering Products: Refer Finish Legend. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application to substrate. D. Termination Trim: Extruded plastic, color as selected. E. Substrate Filler: As recommended by adhesive and wall covering manufacturers; compatible with

substrate.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are prime painted and ready to receive work, and conform to

requirements of the wall covering manufacturer. B. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply wall coverings

if moisture content of substrate exceeds level recommended by wall covering manufacturer. C. Verify flatness tolerance of surfaces does not vary more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet nor vary at a rate

greater than 1/16 inch/ft. D. Confirm Level 5 finish on substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks in substrate and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. B. Wash impervious surfaces with tetra-sodium phosphate, rinse and neutralize; wipe dry. C. Surface Appurtenances: Remove or mask electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons,

and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WALL COVERINGS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 097200 - 2 14 December 2015

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Razor trim edges on flat work table. Do not razor cut on gypsum board surfaces. C. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full

bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tightly. D. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. E. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within 6 inches of external corners. F. Install wall covering before installation of bases and items attached to or spaced slightly from wall

surface. G. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. H. Cover spaces above and below windows, above doors, in pattern sequence from roll. I. Where wall covering tucks into reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply with contact

adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. J. Install termination trim. K. Remove excess adhesive while wet from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe

clean with dry cloth.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B. Reinstall wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this section.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not permit construction activities at or near finished wall covering areas.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SOUND CONTROL MATTING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 098521 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 098521

SOUND CONTROL MATTING (BENEATH THIN SET HARD SURFACED FLOORING AT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE SLABS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes a sound control material for achieving an STC and IIC rating in excess of 50. B. This work shall consist of furnishing and installation of sound control system, including matting, isolation

barrier, acoustical caulk and related work in accordance with these specifications and shall include all necessary materials, labor, supervision and equipment for installation of a complete sound control system for flooring.

C. Related Sections: 1. Cast in place concrete: Refer to Division 03 2. Gypsum wall board Refer to Division 09 3. Flooring Refer to Division 09 4. Mechanical/Electrical Refer to Divisions 23/26

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide sound control flooring system which has been manufactured and

installed to achieve STC and IIC performance levels that exceed code requirements of not less than 50 for both ratings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare, review, approve and submit specified submittals in accordance with “Conditions of the

Contract” and Division 1 Submittals Sections. Product data, shop drawings, samples and similar submittals are defined in “Conditions of the Contract.”

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data with independent testing of actual floor assembly and laboratory results of sound control system. Provide report of tested STC level and IIC level.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including accessories for sound control system and termination of system.

D. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Certificates (Qualification Data): Submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying

materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical requirements, showing full time quality control. Sound Control system is supplied by single-source manufacturer.

E. Close out Submittals: 1. Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified herein.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications:

1. Installer Qualifications: Installer experienced (as determined by contractor) to perform work of this section, who has specialized in the installation of work similar to that required for this project, who can comply with manufacturer’s warranty requirements, and who is an approved applicator as determined by sound control system manufacturer.

2. Manufacturers Qualifications: Manufacturer capable of providing job service during construction, approving an acceptable installer, recommending appropriate application methods and conducting a final inspection of the sound control system.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid

construction delays. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened,

undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at

temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SOUND CONTROL MATTING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 098521 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Acoustical Matting: Acceptable products:

1. Regupol Sonus by Regupol Amercia. 2. Soundguard by Custom Building Products. 3. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500.

2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Acoustical Sealant: A permanently resilient, non-shrinking latex-based sealant. B. Adhesive: As recommended by system manufacturer.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain all sound proofing materials from single source for required warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE CONDITION A. Sub floor shall be structurally sound. Deflection shall not exceed L/360 of the span, including live and

dead loads. B. Sub floor shall be dry and free of debris.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in strict accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas PAINTING AND COATING Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 099000 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 099000

PAINTING AND COATING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. C. Scope: Finish all interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and

unless otherwise indicated, including the following: 1. Both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telecom equipment before

installing equipment. 2. Elevator pit ladders. 3. Exposed surfaces of steel lintels and ledge angles. 4. Surfaces inside cabinets. 5. Prime surfaces to receive wall coverings. 6. Mechanical and Electrical:

a. In finished areas, paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment, unless otherwise indicated.

b. In finished areas, paint shop-primed items. c. On the roof and outdoors, paint all equipment that is exposed to weather or to view,

including that which is factory-finished. D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:

1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically so indicated; materials and products having factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.

2. Items indicated to receive other finishes. 3. Items indicated to remain unfinished. 4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, and operating parts of

equipment. 5. Stainless steel, anodized aluminum, bronze, terne, and lead items. 6. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on all finishing products, including VOC content. C. Samples: Submit two paper chip samples in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for

each surface finishing product scheduled. D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified, with

minimum three years documented experience. B. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified with minimum

three years experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code,

coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges

required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of

substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations. C. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity

ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. D. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for

exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid-height at substrate surface.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide all paint and coating products used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no

exceptions. B. Paints:

1. Base Manufacturer: Sherwin-Williams. 2. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com. 3. Frazee Paint, a Comex Group Company: www.frazee.com. 4. Glidden Professional: www.gliddenprofessional.com. 5. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 6. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.

C. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed coating.

1. Provide paints and coatings of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

2. Supply each coating material in quantity required to complete entire project's work from a single production run.

3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute coatings or add materials to coatings unless such procedure is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.

B. Primers: Where the manufacturer offers options on primers for a particular substrate, use primer categorized as "best" by the manufacturer.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified in the following:

a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D--National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings.

2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Flammability: Comply with applicable code for surface burning characteristics. E. Colors: As indicated on drawings

1. In finished areas, finish pipes, ducts, conduit, and equipment the same color as the wall/ceiling they are mounted on/under.

2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Ferrous Metal Items:

1. Touch up shop primer as required. 2. First Coat: Sherwin-Williams, DTM Acrylic B66W1. 3. Second Coat: Same as first.

B. Galvanized Metal Items: 1. Primer: Sherwin-Williams, Galvite Paint No. B50W3. 2. Second Coat: Sherwin-Williams, DTM Acrylic B66W1. 3. Third Coat: Same as second.

C. Concrete, Concrete Masonry Units, Stucco, and Brick - Flat 1. One coat Heavy Duty Block Filler 10.0 mils DFT (At Block Masonry Only). 2. Two coats A-100 Latex Flat Exterior A6 series, 1.4 mils DFT.


D. Wood-Painted - Satin Finish 1. One coat A-100 Alkyd Exterior Wood Primer, 2.2 mils DFT. 2. One coat to cover A-100 Satin Latex House and Trim A8 Series, 1.5 mils DFT.

2.4 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR A. Wood - Painted Eggshell

1. One coat: Sand-N-Go Waterborne Wood Primer, 1.3 mils DFT. 2. One coat to cover: Pro-Mar 400 Acrylic Semi-gloss, 1.4 mils DFT/coat.

B. Wood - Clear 1. Two coats: Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, 1.0 DFT/coat.

C. Wood - Semi-Transparent - Stained 1. One coat: Minwax Wood Finish. 2. Two coats: Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, 1.0 DFT/coat.

D. Gypsum Board - Flat 1. One coat texture as approved by Architect. 2. One coat: ProMar 400 Primer, 1.3 mils DFT. 3. One coat to cover: ProMar 400 Latex Flat, 1.7 mils DFT/coat.

E. Gypsum Board - Eggshell 1. One coat: texture as approved by Architect. 2. One coat: ProMar 400 Primer, 1.3 mils DFT. 3. One coat to cover: Promar 400 Latex Eggshell, 1.4 mils DFT/coat.

F. Gypsum Board - Semi-gloss 1. One coat: texture as approved by Architect. 2. One coat: ProMar 400Primer, 1.3 mils DFT. 3. One coat: to cover: Promar 400, Latex Semigloss, 1.4 mils DFT/coat.

G. Ferrous Metal Items - Eggshell (including hollow metal doors, frames, access doors/frames, handrails, etc): 1. One coat: Pro-Cryl Universal Water Based Primer, 2-4 mils DFT. 2. One coat to cover: Promar 400 Acrylic Semi-Gloss Enamel, 1.4 mils DFT/coat. 3. Miscellaneous Items Exposed to View and Not Otherwise Scheduled: Finish with compatible

paint to match adjacent surface finish and color.

2.5 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Provide all primers, sealers, cleaning agents, cleaning cloths, sanding materials,

and clean-up materials required to achieve the finishes specified whether specifically indicated or not; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin application of coatings until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. C. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that

may potentially affect proper application. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding. E. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. F. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless

moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. 3. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442.


3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to coating application. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result

for the substrate under the project conditions. C. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim,

escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. D. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat. E. Remove mildew from impervious surfaces by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and

bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. F. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces to be Painted: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali

powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.

G. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

H. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer.

I. Uncorroded Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand or power tool wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.

J. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

K. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.3 APPLICATION A. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical

components and paint separately. B. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is

applied. D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to

applying next coat. G. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to

finishing.

3.4 CLEANING A. Collect waste material that could constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove

daily from site.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect finished coatings until completion of project. B. Touch-up damaged coatings after Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 099450 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 099450

DECORATIVE EXTERIOR FINISH SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field application of elastomeric decorative exterior finish

system (DEFS) to the following: 1. Exterior concrete walls to match adjacent acrylic finish coat on cement plaster work.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Factory Mutual Class I Rating. B. ASTM E 84 Flame spread classification 0 to 10.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS A. Installer: Minimum of 5 years experience and manufacturer’s written approval on manufacturer’s company

letterhead. B. Manufacturer:

1. Minimum of 5 years experience producing component materials for system installed in this country. 2. Member of Exterior Insulation Manufacturers Association (EIMA).

C. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain approved DEFS materials from a single manufacturer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate project specific details identifying transitions to dissimilar materials and other representations to evaluate the proposed system installation requirements.

B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer’s product data sheets and printed installation instructions for each product proposed for use in accordance with Section 01300.

C. Samples: Submit three 1’-0” by 1’-0” samples of selected finish color and texture for approval by Architect. D. Maintenance Kit: Supply maintenance kit, with unopened containers to repair a minimum of 20 square foot

area. E. Test reports certifying entire system has passed ASTM E 84 and ASTM E 108, modified for vertical walls

for Class A.

1.6 MOCK-UP A. Provide under provisions of Section 014000. B. Construct one field sample panel, of size required to illustrate color and texture of the final coating.

1. Obtain Architect’s acceptance of mock-up’s visual qualities before start of final work.

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver and store products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer’s identification, in

accordance with Section 016000. B. Store products in a cool (not less than 40 degrees F) dry place out of direct sunlight, protected from the

elements and from damage, in accordance with Section 016000.

1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Weather and Environmental Conditions

1. Application of the system shall not take place during inclement weather unless appropriate protection is employed.

2. Installation of wet materials in temperatures less than 40 degrees F shall take place only if supplementary heat is provided and is maintained for a minimum of 24 hours after application of the wet materials.

B. Protection 1. Protect surrounding areas and surfaces during application of wall system.


1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide 5 year labor and material warranty. B. Installer: Provide 2 year warranty on workmanship related to DEFS application. C. Warranty to cover:

1. Material defects including but not limited to, peeling, cracking, delamination, flaking, finish degradation or similar failures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one of

the following: 1. Dryvit Systems, Inc., West Warwick, RI. 2. Finestone, Adrian, MI. 3. Parex Inc., Redan, GA 4. Pleko Products, Astoria, NY 5. Senergy Methods, Cranston, RI. 6. STO Industries, Atlanta, GA. 7. TEIFS Wall Systems, San Antonio, TX

B. Acceptable Products: 1. Weatherlastic by Dryvit or as otherwise required to match other acrylic finish coat over cement

plaster. C. Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Finish Coat: Factory mixed, 100 percent acrylic with elastomeric binder with texture. Integral color and

texture to match existing hospital EIFS. B. Skim Coat: Fiber reinforced 100 percent acrylic-based providing a high-build leveling coat.

1. Acceptable Product: Dryvit Genesis. C. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, as approved by DEFS system manufacturer. D. Primers: As required by the DEFS manufacturer. E. Water: Clean and potable.

2.3 MIXING AND PREPARATION A. Perform according to manufacturer’s recommendations. B. Finish Coat: Thoroughly mix factory-prepared finish material with the manufacturer’s recommended mixer

until a uniform workable consistency is attained. 1. A small amount of clean, potable water may be added to adjust workability. 2. Use no additives such as rapid binders, antifreeze, or accelerators. 3. Finish Coating: Use immediately after mixing. Keep containers closed when not in use.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for the installation of materials. If unsatisfactory conditions exist,

report them in writing to the Architect and do not commence any installation until such conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine surfaces to receive the system for: 1. Concrete Masonry Surfaces: Ensure joints are struck flush. 2. Substrates contrary to recommendations of the system manufacturer. 3. Defects such as coatings on the substrate that will adversely affect the execution and quality of

work. 4. Deviations beyond allowable tolerances for installation of substrate material. The substrate shall

have no plan or irregularities greater than 1/8 inch over 10 foot dimension. 5. Confirm manufacturer’s current requirements for control joint placement.


3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install in accordance with system manufacturer’s printed instructions. B. Skim Coat: Apply at rate and in manner recommended by system manufacturer. C. Finish:

1. Using clean stainless steel trowel, apply light coat of finish material directly to the skim coat. a. Apply and level during the same operation to the minimum attainable thickness consistent

with uniform coverage. b. Apply and texture finish continually over an entire surface. c. Work to corners or joints, and do not allow the material to set up within a distinct wall area. d. Furnish sufficient staging and workmen to accomplish a uniform appearance.

2. Achieve final texture after veneer finish has jelled so that it does not stick to the trowel. 3. Final Texture: Match EIFS balance of project. 4. Final Thickness: Not greater than diameter of largest aggregate of finish material.

3.3 TOUCH-UP A. After installation, touch-up areas where finish coat has been damaged with manufacturer’s recommended

primer compatible with finish coat. B. Touch-up so that repair is not obvious.

3.4 COMPLETION A. Exposed surfaces shall be clean and free from scratches, dents, tool marks, stains, discoloration, and

other defects and damage.

3.5 CLEANUP A. Remove extra materials and debris from job site. B. Clean adjacent materials and surfaces and the work area of foreign materials resulting from the Work.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SIGNAGE Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 101400 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 101400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior code required signage. B. Room and door signs. C. Handicapped parking signs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles,

font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign. C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,

including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. 1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the drawing

room number on schedule. 2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from Owner

through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication. D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,

illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.


section with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation. B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building. C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Signs:

1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com. 2. InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com. 3. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com. 4. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.

2.2 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONS A. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible Design

and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specific requirements.

B. Room and Door Signs: Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not, not including corridors, lobbies, and similar open areas. 1. Sign Type: Flat signs with engraved panel media as specified. 2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille. 3. Character Height: 1 inch. 4. Sign Height: 2 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", room numbers to be

determined later, and braille.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SIGNAGE Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 101400 - 2 14 December 2015

2.3 SIGN TYPES A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.

1. Edges: Square. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font. 2. Character Case: Upper case only. 3. Background Color: As scheduled. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color.

2.4 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIA A. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as background

color: 1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.

2.5 HANDICAPPED PARKING SIGNS A. Screen printed, 18 gage bonderized steel with blue baked enamel finish and white screen printed copy. B. Size: 12 inches by 18 inches and 12 inches by 6 inches. C. Copy:

1. "Handicapped Parking Only". 2. "Van Accessible".

D. Acceptable Products: Handicapped Parking: Best Traffic Signs No. SS04 with SS52 as required. E. Post: Galvanized pipe column minimum 9 feet long.

2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level. C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60 inches above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions. D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 102800 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 102800

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Accessories for toilet rooms, residential bathrooms, and utility rooms. B. Grab bars.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and

reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, attachment

methods. C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special

attention.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Toilet Accessories:

1. A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2. American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com. 3. Bobrick: www.bobrick.com. 4. Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. 5. Substitutions: Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MATERIALS A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with

anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide 2 keys for each accessory to Owner ; master key all lockable accessories. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666 , Type 304. D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, Type 304 or 316. E. Mirror Glass: Float glass, ASTM C1036 Type I, Class 1, Quality Q2, with silvering, protective and

physical characteristics complying with ASTM C1503. F. Adhesive: Two component epoxy type, waterproof. G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized , tamper-proof , security type. H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component

and substrate.

2.3 FINISHES A. As scheduled.

2.4 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, chrome-plated zinc alloy brackets ,

spindleless type for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll. B. Combination Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: Recessed flush with wall, stainless steel; seamless

wall flanges, continuous piano hinges , tumbler locks on upper and lower doors. 1. Waste receptacle liner: Reusable, heavy-duty vinyl. 2. Towel dispenser capacity: 400 C-fold. 3. Waste receptacle capacity: 4 gallons.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 102800 - 2 14 December 2015

C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, deck-mounted on vanity, with polyethylene container concealed below deck; piston and 4 inch spout of stainless steel with bright polished finish; chrome-plated deck escutcheon. 1. Minimum Capacity: 16 ounces.

D. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, 1-1/4 inches outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch wall thickness, nonslip grasping surface finish, concealed flange mounting; 1-1/2 inches clearance between wall and inside of grab bar.

2.5 SHOWER AND TUB ACCESSORIES A. Shower Curtain Rod: Stainless steel tube, 1 inch outside diameter, 0.04 inch wall thickness, satin-

finished, with 3 inch outside diameter, minimum 0.04 inch thick satin-finished stainless steel flanges, for installation with exposed fasteners.

B. Folding Shower Seat: Wall-mounted recessed; welded tubular seat frame, structural support members, hinges and mechanical fasteners of Type 304 stainless steel, L-shaped, right hand and L-shaped, left-hand seat. 1. Seat: Phenolic or polymeric composite one-piece seat or seat slats, of color as selected. 2. Size: ADA compliant.

C. Wall-Mounted Soap Dish: Heavy duty, seamless stainless steel, surface-mounted with drain holes, without grab bar, satin finish; with concealed mechanical fastening suitable for substrate and backplate.

D. Towel Bars: Stainless steel Type 304, 3/4 inch square tubular bar; rectangular brackets, concealed attachment, satin finish. 1. Length: 24 inches.

E. Towel Ring: Stainless steel, 2-1/2 inch extension from wall, with 1/4 inch diameter trapezoidal shaped ring, rectangular-shaped bracket and backplate for concealed attachment, satin finish.

2.6 UTILITY ROOM ACCESSORIES A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop and Broom Holder: 0.05 inch thick stainless steel, Type 304, with 1/2

inch returned edges, 0.06 inch steel wall brackets. 1. Drying rod: Stainless steel, 1/4 inch diameter. 2. Hooks: 2, 0.06 inch stainless steel rag hooks at shelf front. 3. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front. 4. Length: Manufacturer's standard length for number of holders/hooks.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation. C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation. B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate. C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations and as indicated on drawings

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 104400 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 104400

FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguisher cabinets. C. Accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate cabinet physical dimensions, rough-in measurements for recessed cabinets,

and wall bracket mounted measurements. C. Product Data: Provide extinguisher operational features and anchorage details. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination

requirements. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

1.3 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperature may cause freezing of extinguisher ingredients.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire

Extinguishers." B. Additional Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:

1. IBC 2012 with Austin Amendments. 2. IFC 2012 with Austin Amendments.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers:

1. Ansul, Inc : www.ansul.com. 2. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com. 3. Pyro-Chem : www.pyrochem.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets and Accessories: 1. JL Industries, Inc : www.jlindustries.com. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co : www.larsensmfg.com. 3. Potter-Roemer : www.potterroemer.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable codes,

whichever is more stringent. 1. Provide extinguishers labeled by UL for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gage. 1. Class: A:B:C. 2. Size: 10 pound. 3. Finish: Baked polyester powder coat, color as selected.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 104400 - 2 14 December 2015

2.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS A. Metal: Formed prefinished sheet steel, 0.036 inch (0.9mm) thick. B. Cabinet Configuration: Semi-recessed type.

1. Sized to accommodate accessories. 2. Trim: Returned to wall surface, with 2-1/2 inch projection.

C. Door: 0.036 inch thick, reinforced for flatness and rigidity; latch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinge. Provide nylon catch.

D. Door Glazing: Glass, clear, 1/8 inch thick float. Set in resilient channel gasket glazing. E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. Pre-drill for anchors. F. Weld, fill, and grind components smooth. G. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: Baked enamel, color as selected. H. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White enamel.

2.5 ACCESSORIES A. Extinguisher Brackets: Formed steel, galvanized and enamel finished.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install cabinets plumb and level in wall openings, from finished floor to height as needed to meet

accessiblity requirements. C. Secure rigidly in place. D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets.

3.3 SCHEDULE A. R-2 occupancy: Class A Ordinary Hazard. 2-A 10B:C, 10lb fire extinguisher in semi-recessed fire

extinguisher cabinet similar to Larsen Occult Series B. S-2 occupancy: Class A Ordinary Hazard. 2-A 10B:C, 10lb fire extinguisher in surface mounted fire

extinguisher cabinet similar to Larsen Occult Series

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas MAIL BOXES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 105523 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 105523

MAIL BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Multiple mail boxes with hinged and locked doors.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for components. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations, construction and anchorage details, dimensions, rough-in openings

sizes, quantity and arrangement of box sizes. 1. Show field measurements on shop drawings.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include installation procedures, special considerations, and maintenance information.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


with not less than three years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Mail Boxes:

1. Auth-Florence Manufacturing Company: www.authflorence.com. 2. Bommer Industries, Inc: www.bommer.com. 3. Salsbury Industries: www.mailboxes.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 MAIL BOXES SERVED BY U.S. POSTAL SERVICE A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide the following as manufactured by Auth-Florence:

1. 4CIT2-9 2. 4CIT8-18 3. 4CDT2-5

B. Comply with U.S. Postal Service Standard 4C. C. Box Quantities: As indicated on drawings.

2.3 COMPONENTS A. Front Loading Panel Frame:

1. Aluminum with mill finish. 2. Edges beveled, piano hinged jamb, prepared for Post Office lock cylinder.

B. Box Door: 1. Plastic label installed to rear face. 2. Edges beveled, piano hinged jamb, prepared for lock cylinder.

C. Box Construction: Sheet steel, zinc coated, 22 gage thick, fabricated into modular stackable units, baked enamel flat black finish. Pre-punch bolt holes in box for stack bolting to each other and anchoring to adjacent construction; label plates for identifying each box.

D. Box Sizes: Configured as indicated on Drawings. E. Postal Box Locks: Five pin tumbler lock cylinder, two keys per box, cylinders master keyed to group

with two master keys. F. "Out-Going Mail" Lock Box: Face plate to match front loading panel frame, box of galvanized steel

construction, lockable with cylinder provided by Post Office, with bag hooks for rear unloading.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas MAIL BOXES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 105523 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Verify that prepared openings are ready to receive work.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and U.S. Postal Service regulations. B. Install and secure boxes in position, neatly, and accurately stacked. C. Install doors and adjust to operate smoothly.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHOWER ENCLOSURES – FRAMELESS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 108251 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 108251

SHOWER ENCLOSURES – FRAMELESS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. Related Section: Section 079200 - Joint Sealants: Related perimeter sealants.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 013300. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive product literature and specifications for each product

and material. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of doors and enclosures complete with dimensions and details showing

surrounding perimeter adjacent construction. D. Informational Submittal: Submit manufacturer's instructions packaged separately from other submittals.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Glazing Materials: Conform with ANSI Z97.1 or local code if more stringent. 2. Obtain safety glazing products marked with certification label of the Safety Glazing Certification

Council or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of Section 016000.

1. Provide protective wrappings for components during shipping and storage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. CR Laurence. 2. Artistcraft. 3. Accepted Substitute in accordance with Section 012500.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Glass: 1. Sizes: Fabricate glass to sizes required for openings, with edge clearances and tolerances

required. 2. Thickness: As required by design, but not less than 3/8 inch. 3. Clear Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048. Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I

(transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select), kind as indicated below: a. Kind FT (fully tempered).

B. Hardware: 1. Hinges:

a. Wall Mount: Stainless steel equal to CRL Pinnacle model V1E037BN (2 per door). 2. Pull: Stainless steel back to back mounting, equal to CRL model BM8x6BN. 3. Glazing Channel: Stainless steel equal to CRL model SDCD38BN. 4. Glass Clamps: Stainless steel, equal to CRL Cirro series. 5. Polycarbonate Sweep: Equal to CRL model PCC10. 6. Bottom Wipe with Drip Rail: Equal to CRL model P990WS. 7. 135 Degree Header Corner: Equal to CRL model BHC135.

C. Miscellaneous: 1. Cleaners, Primers and Sealers: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. 2. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing

sealants, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness. 3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM or silicone blocks as required for compatibility with glazing sealant,

of size and hardness required to limit lateral movement (side-walking) of glass. 4. Sealant: Clear mildew resistant silicone designed for use in showers.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas SHOWER ENCLOSURES – FRAMELESS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 108251 - 2 14 December 2015

2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Glazing and Sealing Compounds Between System Components: Type as recommended by

manufacturer. B. Joint Sealants Between System Components and Adjacent Finish Surfaces: Sanitary silicone sealant

specified in Section 079200.

2.4 FINISH A. Stainless Steel Frame: No. 4 Stainless Steel Finish: In accordance with Section 050510.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work in accordance with Section 017300.

1. Verify proper location of blocking and bracing in walls. 2. Do not begin Work until adequate support construction is in place and adjacent finish materials are

complete.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Shower Doors: Install in accordance with Section 017300 and approved Shop Drawings.

1. Install plumb, level and square, and free from warp or twist while maintaining dimensional tolerances and alignment with surrounding construction.

2. Joint Sealants: Provide continuous sealant between shower enclosures and adjacent construction and tooled smooth.

3. Joint Sealants: See Section 079200 for sealing joints between system components and adjacent finishes.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust door operation for smooth, quiet movement. B. Remove excessive sealants, glazing compounds, and labels. Clean and polish products upon completion

of Work.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 109900 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 109900

MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Provisions established within the Owner Contractor Agreement, Instruction to Bidders, Supplemental

Conditions, Division 01 - General Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section Includes: Miscellaneous specialty items as listed herein.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit following items in accordance with Section 01 3300. B. Product Data: Including all pertinent performance characteristics and criteria. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, construction, sizes, quantities, finishes, and installation details. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: For installation, maintenance, and repair.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, handle, and protect products in accordance with Section 016000.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS A. Fire Control Key Box: Provide recessed fire department key control box, equal to model 3200 by Knox

Box. B. Provide Knox Locks as required by local fire department.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to receive work of this Section. B. Notify Architect of any existing conditions which will adversely affect execution. C. Beginning of execution will constitute acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by manufacturer.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install using skilled workmen in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and

recommendations.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust and fit items to be flush with adjacent construction. B. Fasten or adhere for tight connections and joints.

3.5 CLEANING A. Perform final cleaning in accordance with Division 01 Section “Closeout Procedures”.

3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation in accordance with Division 01 Section “Product Requirements”.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 113100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 113100

RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen appliances. B. Laundry appliances.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. UL (EAUED) - Electrical Appliance and Utilization Equipment Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.,

current edition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data indicating dimensions, capacity, and operating features of each

piece of residential equipment specified. C. Copies of Warranties: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


with not less than three years of documented experience. B. Electric Appliances: Listed and labeled by UL and complying with NEMA standards.

1.5 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five (5) year manufacturer warranty on refrigeration system of refrigerators. C. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on magnetron tube of microwave ovens. D. Provide ten (10) year manufacturer warranty on tub and door liner of dishwashers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 APPLIANCES A. As scheduled in Interior Design Specifications.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify utility rough-ins are present and correctly located.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Anchor built-in equipment in place.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating equipment to efficient operation.

3.4 CLEANING A. Remove packing materials from equipment. B. Wash and clean equipment.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas RETRACTABLE STAIRS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 113300 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 113300

RETRACTABLE STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual disappearing stairways.

1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI A14.9: Safety Requirements for Ceiling Mounted Disappearing Climbing Systems.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 013300. B. Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Shop Drawings for Stairs: 1. Plan and section of stair installation. 2. Indicate rough opening dimensions for ceiling and/or roof openings.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store stairway until installation inside under cover in manufacturer's unopened packaging. If stored

outside, under a tarp or suitable cover.

1.5 WARRANTY A. Limited Warranty: One year against defective material and workmanship, covering parts only. Defective

parts, as deemed by the manufacturer, will be replaced at no charge, freight excluded, upon inspection at manufacturer's plant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Precision Ladders, LLC, P. O. Box 2279; Morristown, TN 37816-2279; Tel: 423-

586-2265; Fax: 423-586-2091; www.PrecisionLadders.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.

2.2 MANUAL DISAPPEARING STAIRWAY. A. Manual Disappearing Stairway.

1. Standard Model: Super Simplex Disappearing Stairway as manufactured by Precision Ladders LLC. Stairs for ceiling heights 7’-0” – 12’-0”: Model 1000 (ceiling height in inches).

B. Performance Standard: Unit shall comply with ANSI A14.9, Commercial Type, for rough openings between 27 inches to 39 inches. Residential Type for rough openings between 22-1/2” and 27”. Stairway capacity shall be rated at 500 lbs.

C. Fire Rating: 1-hour, minimum. D. Accessories:

1. Steel pole to aid opening and closing stairways. 2. Stairs for ceiling heights 9’ -10” – 12’ -0” shall be equipped with a patented Precision Fold Assist to

aid in folding and unfolding of sections. Precision Fold-Assist is optional on stairways for ceiling heights of 9’ 9” and below.

3. Keyed lock for door (standard on fire-rated models). E. Components:

1. Ceiling Opening a. Ceiling height of 9’ 9” or less requires an opening of 30” x 54” b. Ceiling heights from 9’ 10” – 12’ 0” require opening of 30” x 64”

2. Stairway Stringer: 6005-T5 Extruded aluminum channel 5” x 1” x 1/8”; tri-fold design; steel blade type hinges; adjustable feet with plastic Mar-guard. Pitch shall be 63°.

3. Stairway Tread: 6005-T5 extruded aluminum channel 5 3/16 inches by 1 1/4 inches by 1/8 inch. Depth is 5 3/16 inches. Deeply serrated top surface. Riser Height: 9-1/2 inches. Clear Tread Width for Standard Width: 18 inches.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas RETRACTABLE STAIRS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 113300 - 2 14 December 2015

4. Railing: Aluminum bar handrail riveted to stringers, upper section only. 5. Frame:

a. If ceiling to floor (or roof deck) above is under 12”, frame shall be 1/8” steel formed channel, box.

b. When ceiling to floor (or roof deck) above is 12” or greater, the frame shall be 1/8” steel, 63° (with built-in steps) on the hinge end, 90° on the other end, custom depth to fill distance from ceiling to floor above. This custom frame will require a longer opening in the floor above than is required at the ceiling level.

6. Door Panel a. On fire-rated models, the door panel shall be constructed of 20 gauge steel and have a 2

hour fire rating for use in fire-rated ceiling assemblies as issued by Warnock-Hersey or other appropriate independent testing/licensing agency.

7. Hardware: a. Steel blade type hinge connecting stringer sections. Zinc plated and chromate sealed. b. Steel operating arms, both sides. Zinc coat with clear trivalent chromate. c. Double acting steel springs and cable, both sides. d. Rivets rated at 1100 lb (499 kg) shear strength each. e. Steel section alignment clips at stringer section joints. f. Molded rubber guards at corners of aluminum door panel.

8. Finishes: Mill finish on aluminum stairway components. Prime coat on frame.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Completely fabricate ladder ready for installation before shipment to the site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until rough opening and structural support have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding. C. Examine materials upon arrival at site. Notify the carrier and manufacturer of any damage.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WASTE COMPACTORS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 118227 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 118227

WASTE COMPACTORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Packaged waste compactor with integral container.

B. Packaged waste compactor for separate container.

C. Discharge containers.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide unit capacities, physical dimensions, utility requirements and locations, point loads.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate machine location, rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances, clearances required.

D. Test Reports: Indicate WASTEC (SCRG) ratings accompanied with certified test results.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation requirements.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

G. Operation Data: Include description of system operation, adjusting and testing required.

H. Maintenance Data: Identify system maintenance requirements, servicing cycles, lubrication types required and local spare part sources.

I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS

A. Discharge Containers.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Waste Compactors:

1. Marathon Equipment Co; Product RJ-250SC: www.marathonequipment.com.


2.3 APPLICATIONS

A. Compactor at Residences: Apartment type, chute and side intakes.

1. Service Conditions: Interior.

2. Container Size: 34 cubic yard capacity.

3. Discharge containers to be furnished by Owner.

2.4 COMPACTORS - GENERAL

A. Motors: NEMA MG 1.

B. Control Panels and Remote Equipment Enclosures: NEMA 250 Type 4 enclosures; factory finished; wall-mounted unless otherwise indicated.

C. Discharge Containers: Heavy duty steel; factory-finished for outdoor use; manufacturer's standard type unless otherwise indicated.

D. Anchors and Fasteners: Galvanized steel; where embedded in concrete, provide to concrete installer for installation.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas WASTE COMPACTORS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 118227 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that anchors are correctly positioned.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install unit and inlet hopper in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and with standards required by authority having jurisdiction.

B. Coordinate with waste chute discharge.

C. Anchor unit securely in place.

D. Touch-up minor damaged surfaces caused during installation. Replace damaged components as directed by Architect.

E. Adjust unit mechanism to achieve specified requirements.

3.3 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Demonstrate and instruct Owner on unit operation. Describe unit limitations.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 122113 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 122113

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, tolerances required, method of attachment, clearances, and op-

eration.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Horizontal Louver Blinds:

1. Hunter Douglas: www.hunterdouglas.com. 2. Levolor Contract: www.levolorcontract.com. 3. Graber, division of Springs Window Fashions: www.graberblinds.com. 4. Bali Blinds. 5. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 BLINDS AND BLIND COMPONENTS A. Blinds: Horizontal slat louvers hung from full-width headrail with full-width bottom rail; manual control of

raising and lowering by cord with full range locking; blade angle adjustable by control wand; complying with WCMA A100.1.

B. Plastic Slats: PVC foam, radiused slat corners. 1. Width: 2 inch. 2. Color: As selected by interior designer. 3. Texture: Smooth.

C. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene cord, ladder configuration. D. Head Rail: Pre-finished, formed aluminum box, with end caps; internally fitted with hardware, pulleys, and

bearings for operation; same depth as width of slats E. Bottom Rail: Pre-finished, formed PVC with top side shaped to match slat curvature; with end caps. Col-

or: Same as headrail. F. Lift Cord: Braided nylon; continuous loop. G. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic; hexagonal shape. H. Headrail Attachment: Wall brackets. I. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Determine sizes by field measurement. B. Fabricate blinds to fit within openings with uniform edge clearance of 1/8 inch.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 122113 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Ensure structural blocking and supports are correctly placed.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with flush countersunk fasteners.

3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch.

3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation.

3.5 CLEANING A. Clean blind surfaces just prior to occupancy.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 123530 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 123530

RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Kitchen cabinets. B. Vanity cabinets. C. Casework hardware.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI/KCMA A161.1 - Performance and Construction Standard for Kitchen and Vanity Cabinets;

Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association ; 2000 (R2006). B. KCMA (DIR) - Directory of Certified Cabinet Manufacturers; Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers

Association ; current edition, online.

1.3 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions and construction details. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate casework locations, large scale plans, elevations, clearances required,

rough-in and anchor placement dimensions and tolerances . D. Samples: Submit two samples illustrating each color and finish.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Products: Complying with KCMA A161.1 and KCMA Certified. B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section,

with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.5 MOCK-UP A. Provide full size mock-up of casework base unit and upper cabinet. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Residential Casework:

1. Kraftmaid Cabinetry, Inc. 2. Wellborn Cabinet, Inc 3. Armstong. 4. Triangle Pacific. 5. Republic Cabinets. 6. Leedo Manufacturing. 7. Master Wood Craft. 8. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

2.2 COMPONENTS A. Cabinet Construction: Softwood lumber framing and particle board, tempered hardboard gables. B. Countertops: As specified in Section 123600. C. Door and Drawer Fronts: Solid wood. D. Bolts, Nuts, Washers and Screws: Of size and type to suit application. E. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. F. Acceptable Products: As selected by Architect.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas RESIDENTIAL CASEWORK Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 123530 - 2 14 December 2015

2.3 HARDWARE A. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard. B. Hinges: Self closing, concealed style, manufacturer's standard. C. Drawer Guides: Side mounted, epoxy coated, 75 pound capacity. D. Pulls: Back of door and drawer edging routed for finger pull on top of drawers and base cabinet doors,

and bottom of wall cabinet doors.

2.4 FABRICATION A. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through

building openings. B. Fabricate corners and joints without gaps or inaccessible spaces or areas where dirt or moisture could

accumulate. C. Fabricate each unit to be rigid and not dependent on building structure for rigidity. D. Form smooth edges. Form material for facing, shelves, and drain boards from continuous sheets.

2.5 FINISHES A. Exposed To View Surfaces: Stain, seal, and finish of color as selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify adequacy of support framing.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install casework, components and accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Use anchoring devices to suit conditions and substrate materials encountered. C. Set casework items plumb and square, securely anchored to building structure. D. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1/32 inch. Use filler

strips; not additional overlay trim for this purpose. E. Close ends of units, back splashes, shelves and bases.

3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, fixtures, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean casework, countertops, shelves, and hardware.

3.5 PROTECTION A. Do not permit finished casework to be exposed to continued construction activity.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas COUNTERTOPS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 123600 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 123600

COUNTERTOPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Countertops for architectural cabinetwork. B. Countertops for manufactured casework.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Specimen warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation; combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

G. Maintenance Data: Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for maintenance and repair of countertop surfaces.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: Same fabricator as for cabinets on which tops are to be installed. B. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in

accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by

manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COUNTERTOP ASSEMBLIES A. Quartz Surfacing Material: Nonporous, sound, hard, durable, heat resistant engineered stone meeting the

following criteria: 1. Stain Resistance (ASTM D 2299, NEMA LD3): No effect. 2. Izod Impact Strength (ASTM D 256): Average 0.361 ft.lbs/inch of notch. 3. Impact Strength (2 lb. Ball from 8’-0”): Passed. 4. Liquid Absorption (ASTM C 97): 0.022 percent. 5. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84):

a. Flame Spread: 10. 6. Thermal Shock (ASTM C 484): Passed 5 cycles. 7. Thickness: As scheduled. 8. Appearance, Color, and Sheen: Refer to Finish Legend.

B. Natural Stone Countertops: Stone slabs bonded to substrate; use as large pieces as possible with inconspicuous adhesive joints. 1. Stone: Granite without cracks, voids, or pin holes; filling with matching epoxy resin is acceptable. 2. Stone Thickness: 2 and 3 cm. Refer to Drawings for locations. 3. Surface Finish: Polished. 4. Exposed Edge Treatment: Refer to Drawings. 5. Back and End Splashes: Same material, same thickness; for field attachment.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas COUNTERTOPS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 123600 - 2 14 December 2015

2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Wood-Based Components: B. Plywood for Supporting Substrate (stone): PS 1 Exterior Grade, A-C veneer grade, minimum 5-ply;

minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines. C. Particleboard for Supporting Substrate (plastic laminate and solid surfacing): ANSI A208.1 Grade 2-M-2,

45 pcf minimum density; minimum 3/4 inch thick; join lengths using metal splines. D. Adhesives: Chemical resistant waterproof adhesive as recommended by manufacturer of materials being

joined. E. Cove Molding for Top of Splashes: Rubber with semi-gloss finish and T-spline to fit between splash and

wall; 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch. F. Joint Sealant: Mildew-resistant silicone sealant, white.

2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate tops and splashes in the largest sections practicable, with top surface of joints flush.

1. Join lengths of tops using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate to overhang fronts and ends of cabinets 1 inch except where top butts against cabinet or

wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly dimensioned or unnecessary

cutouts or fixture holes. B. Provide back/end splash wherever counter edge abuts vertical surface unless otherwise indicated.

1. Secure to countertop with concealed fasteners and with contact surfaces set in waterproof glue. 2. Height: 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Quartz Surfacing: Fabricate tops up to 144 inches long in one piece; join pieces with adhesive sealant in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory

preparation before proceeding. C. Verify that wall surfaces have been finished and mechanical and electrical services and outlets are

installed in proper locations.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for

the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 INSTALLATION A. Securely attach countertops to cabinets using concealed fasteners. Make flat surfaces level; shim where

required. B. Seal joint between back/end splashes and vertical surfaces.

1. Where indicated use rubber cove molding. 2. Where applied cove molding is not indicated use specified sealant.

3.4 CLEANING A. Clean countertops surfaces thoroughly.


END OF SECTION

Keesee Farmhouse Multifamily – GMP Set 233-15-01AMF 12/15/2015

PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER SITE FURNISHINGS 12 93 00 - 1

SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Seating. 2. Bicycle racks. 3. Trash receptacles. 4. Bollards.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing pipe sleeves cast, installing anchor bolts cast in concrete footings.

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. LEED Submittals:

1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content. Include statement indicating cost for each product having recycled content.

2. Certificates for Credit MR 6, Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates indicating that wood components of site furnishings comply with forest certification requirements. Include documentation that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Material Certificates: For site furnishings.



1. Wood Preservative Treatment: Include certification by treating plant stating type of preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and compliance with applicable standards.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.

1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: Five full-size units for each size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEATING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: product must be submitted to and approved by the landscape architect.

1. Forms+Surfaces. 2. Kingsley~Bate, Ltd. 3. Landscape Forms. 4. Maglin Site Furniture Inc. 5. Urban Accessories, Inc.

2.2 BICYCLE RACKS


1. DuMor Inc. 2. FairWeather Site Furnishings; Division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc. 3. Madrax; Division of Trilary, Inc. 4. Victor Stanley, Inc.

2.3 TRASH AND RECEPTACLES




1. Landscape Forms. 2. Forms+Surfaces. 3. DuMor Inc. 4. FairWeather Site Furnishings; Division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc. 5. Victor Stanley, Inc.

2.4 BOLLARDS


1. Calpipe Industries. 2. Canterbury International. 3. Maglin Site Furniture Inc.

2.5 MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated; free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Rolled or Cold-Finished Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Structural Pipe and Tube: ASTM B 429/B 429M. 4. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 5. Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M.

B. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electric-

resistance-welded pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M. 3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M. 4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing

complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally.

5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 6. Perforated Metal: From steel sheet not less than 0.120-inch (3.0-mm) nominal thickness;

manufacturer's standard perforation pattern. 7. Expanded Metal: Carbon-steel sheets, deburred after expansion, and complying with

ASTM F 1267. 8. Malleable-Iron Castings: ASTM A 47/A 47M, grade as recommended by fabricator for

type of use intended. 9. Gray-Iron Castings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, Class 200.

C. Stainless Steel: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:

1. Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666. 2. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312/A 312M. 3. Tubing: ASTM A 554.



D. Wood: Surfaced smooth on four sides with eased edges; kiln dried, free of knots, solid stock of species indicated.

1. Wood Species: Manufacturer's standard.

2. Certified Wood: Fabricate site furnishings with components produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard transparent wood preservative treatment and sealer.

E. Fiberglass: Multiple laminations of glass-fiber-reinforced polyester resin with UV-light stable, colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain-resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and with manufacturer's standard finish.

F. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.

1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin.

G. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-coated or noncorrodible materials appropriate for the types of materials that it abuts; commercial quality, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant, concealed, recessed, and capped or plugged.

1. Angle Anchors: For inconspicuously bolting legs of site furnishings to on and below - grade substrate; per manufacturer’s recommendation. Extend fasteners through pavers from concrete base when installed in a paver (brick, concrete, stone, etc.) surface.

H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

I. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications.

J. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective zinc coating applied to components after fabrication: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or

ASTM A 924/A 924M.

2.6 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment: Pressure-treat wood according to AWPA U1 and the following:

1. Use preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Use chemical formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

2. Kiln-dry lumber and plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content, respectively, of 19 and 15 percent. Do not use materials that are warped or do not comply with requirements for untreated materials.



2.7 FABRICATION

A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.

B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length, full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.

C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.

D. Preservative-Treated Wood Components: Complete fabrication of treated items before treatment if possible. If cut after treatment, apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces.

E. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs, barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.

F. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.

2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.9 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation, including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

2.10 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES


B. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-light stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, matte-textured, dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added; complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.



2.11 IRON FINISHES


2.12 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.

B. Polished Finishes: Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.


3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been completed.

C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on Drawings.

D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.

E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch (19 mm) larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.

F. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed water.



END OF SECTION 129300

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 142100 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 142100

ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes machine room-less electric traction passenger elevators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Definitions in ASME A17.1 apply to work of this Section. B. Defective Elevator Work: Operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions;

performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar

information. Include product data for the following: 1. Car enclosures and hoistway entrances. 2. Operation, control, and signal systems.

B. Shop Drawings: Show plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment and signals. Include large-scale layout of car control station and standby power operation control panel. Indicate variations from specified requirements, maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection. D. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine

room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include

diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel.

F. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

G. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Service agreement specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained

and approved for installation of units required for this Project. B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevators, [including hydraulic passenger elevators specified in another

Division 14 Section], through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. Provide major elevator components, including driving machines, controllers, signal fixtures, door

operators, car frames, cabs, and entrances, manufactured by a single manufacturer. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 4.10 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers

Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)."

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components, and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. B. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location. Handle

according to manufacturer's written recommendations to prevent damage, deterioration, or soiling.


1.7 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items

that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate sequence of elevator installation with other work to avoid delaying the Work. C. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to electric traction elevators including pit

ladders, sumps, and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; machine beams; and electrical service, electrical outlets, lights, and switches in pits and machine rooms.

1.8 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair,

restore, or replace defective elevator work within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide one year's full maintenance

service by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 1. Perform maintenance, including emergency callback service, during normal working hours. 2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service.

a. Response Time: Two hours or less. B. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner,

in the form of a standard one-year maintenance agreement, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded. State services, obligations, conditions, and terms for agreement period and for future renewal options.

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Provide a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, "Draft of Elevator Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


1. KONE Inc. 2. Otis Elevator Co. 3. Schindler Elevator Corp. 4. ThyssenKrupp Elevator.

2.2 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Where components are not otherwise

indicated, provide standard components published by manufacturer as included in standard pre-engineered elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Elevator Machines: At manufacturer's option, provide either variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type or variable-voltage, dc-type hoisting machines. Provide solid-state power converters. 1. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519. 2. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating on standby

power. 3. Provide line filters or chokes to prevent electrical peaks or spikes from feeding back into building

power system. C. Fluid for Oil Buffers: If oil buffers are used, use only fire-resistant hydraulic fluid containing antioxidant,

anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives. 1. Available Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, a product that may be incorporated

into the Work includes, but is not limited to, "Hydro Safe (FR)" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc. D. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide

rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work where installation of devices is specified in another Section.

E. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for materials and fabrication.

F. Car Frame and Platform: Welded steel units.


G. Guides: Provide roller guides or polymer-coated, non-lubricated sliding guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.

2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system for each elevator for each

group of elevators as required to provide type of operation system indicated. B. Group Automatic Operation with Demand-Based Dispatching: Provide reprogrammable group automatic

system that assigns cars to hall calls based on a dispatching program designed to minimize passenger waiting time. System automatically adjusts to changes in demand for different traffic conditions including heavy incoming, heavy two-way, heavy outgoing, and light off-hours as variations of normal two-way traffic. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. KONE Inc.; KCM 831. b. Otis Elevator Co.; Elevonic. c. Schindler Elevator Corp.; Miconic TX. d. ThyssenKrupp Elevator; Traflomatic.

C. Single-Car Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated: 2. Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails and car is at a floor, it remains at that floor, opens its

doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to the next floor below, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.

D. Group Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators and elevator groups where indicated: 1. Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open their

doors, and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered one at a time to the next floor below, open their doors, and shut down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system.

2. Independent Service: Keyswitch in car control station removes car from group operation and allows it to respond only to car calls. Key cannot be removed from keyswitch when car is in independent service. When in independent service, doors close only in response to door close button.

E. Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car control stations to authorize calls.

Security system determines which landings and at what times calls require authorization by card reader. Provide required conductors in traveling cable and panel in machine room for interconnecting card readers, other security access system equipment, and elevator controllers. Provide stripe-swipe card reader integral with each car control station. a. Security access system equipment is specified in Division 28 Section "Access Control." b. Security access system equipment is not in the Contract.

2. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches at car control stations. Key is removable only in deactivated position.

3. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by keyswitch at main lobby, that causes car all cars in a group to return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by keyswitch, calls registered before keyswitch activation are completed and normal operation is resumed.

2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening devices with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-

controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more of the light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.

2.5 FINISH MATERIALS A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors,

hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated. B. Stainless-Steel Bars: ASTM A 276, Type 304. C. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304. D. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063. E. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500 or No. C77600.


2.6 CAR ENCLOSURES A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with removable car

roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1. 2. Provide finished car including materials and finishes specified below.

B. Materials and Finishes: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Subfloor: Underlayment grade, exterior plywood, 5/8-inch nominal thickness. 2. Floor Finish: Specified in a Division 09 Section. 3. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 4. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front wall of car. 5. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 6. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 7. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.

2.7 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances

complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Provide frame size and profile to coordinate with hoistway wall construction. 1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, provide self-supporting frames with reinforced

head sections. B. Materials and Fabrication: Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors and Transoms: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated . 3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 4. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 5. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout

complying with ASTM C 1107.

2.8 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been

fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs. B. Car Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed or semirecessed car control stations.

Mount in return panel adjacent to car door, unless otherwise indicated. C. Swing-Return Car Control Stations: Provide car control stations mounted on rear of hinged return panel

adjacent to car door and with buttons, switches, controls, and indicator lights projecting through return panel but substantially flush with face of return panel. 1. Mark buttons and switches with standard identification for required use or function that complies

with ASME A17.1. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car control station, either integral with car control station or

mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Emergency Communication System: Provide system that complies with ASME A17.1 and the U.S.

Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)." On activation, system dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and identifies elevator location to monitoring station. System provides two-way voice communication without using a handset and provides visible signals that indicate when system has been activated and when monitoring station has responded. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.

E. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."

F. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car control station. Also provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. 1. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car control station.

G. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing for each single elevator or group of elevators, but not less than one station for each four elevators in a group.

H. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units. 2. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 3. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating desired direction of travel.


4. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating direction of travel or destination as required by system. Provide a signaling system to verify floor selection, where destination registration is required, and to direct passengers to appropriate car. a. Provide a means for passengers to indicate that they have disabilities so control system can

allow extra room in assigned car. b. Provide for connecting units that require destination registration to building security access

system so a card reader can be used to register calls. 5. Provide telephone jack in each unit for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service

specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm." I. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings.

1. Manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames. J. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of

travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on each car.

K. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated, digital-display-type position indicators, located above each hoistway entrance at ground floor. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 1. Integrate ground-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators.

M. Fire Command Center Annunciator Panel: Provide panel containing illuminated position indicators for each elevator, clearly labeled with elevator designation; include illuminated signal that indicates when elevator is operational and when it is at the designated emergency return level with doors open. Provide standby power elevator selector switch(es), as required by ASME A17.1, adjacent to position indicators. Provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed.

N. Corridor Call Station Pictograph Signs: Provide signs matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated.

2.9 ELEVATORS A. Elevator Description:

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Schindler; 3300 MRL. 2. Type: Geared traction. 2. Machine Location: Hoistway; no machine room is provided. 3. Rated Load:

a. Passenger Elevators: 2,500 lbs. b. Service Elevator: 3,500 lbs.

6. Rated Speed: 150 fpm. 7. Openings: Front, all in line. 8. Operation System: Selective collective automatic operation. 9. Auxiliary Operations:

d. Independent service. 10. Security Features: Card-reader operation Keyswitch operation. 11. Dual Car Control Stations: Provide two car control stations in each elevator; equip only one with

required keyswitches if any. 12. Car Enclosures:

a. Inside Height: 94 inches to underside of ceiling. b. Front Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 brushed finish. c. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. d. Side and Rear Wall Panels: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 brushed finish. e. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. g. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. h. Ceiling: Silver metallic baked enamel. i. Handrails: Brushed aluminum. j. Floor Finish: T-4; Refer to Finish Legend. k. Entrance Options: Stainless steel.

13. Hoistway Entrances: As follows: a. Width: 42 inches. b. Height: 84 inches or as otherwise indicated on Drawings. c. Type: Single-speed side slide. d. Frames: No. 4 finish satin stainless steel. e. Doors: No. 4 finish satin stainless steel. f. Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.


14. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 15. Additional Requirements:

a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

b. Provide blanket hooks in all cars and one complete set(s) of full-height protective blankets. c. Provide battery powered lowering.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation

tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Examine hoistways, hoistway openings, pits, and machine rooms as constructed; verify critical dimensions; and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed. 1. For the record, prepare a written report, endorsed by Installer, listing dimensional discrepancies

and conditions detrimental to performance or indicating that dimensions and conditions were found to be satisfactory.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections

are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS standards for workmanship and for qualifications of welding operators.

C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts designed to minimize transmission of vibrations to structure and thereby minimize structure-borne noise from elevator system.

D. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers. E. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for

accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay final adjustment of sills and doors until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.

F. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and direction of travel. G. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink,

nonmetallic grout. H. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated:

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.

2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance. 3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches above finished floor.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting use (either temporary

or permanent) of elevators, perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Operating Test: Load each elevator one elevator of each type, capacity, speed, and travel distance to rated capacity and operate continuously for 30 minutes over full travel distance, stopping at each level and proceeding immediately to the next. Record temperature rise of elevator machine during 30-minute test period. Record failure to perform as required.

C. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times tests are to be performed on elevators.


3.4 PROTECTION A. Temporary Use: Limit temporary use for construction purposes to one elevator. Comply with the

following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to

protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect

elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance,

repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate,

adjust, and maintain elevator(s). Refer to Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training." B. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present and before date of Substantial

Completion. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly. C. Check operation of each elevator with Owner's personnel present not more than one month before end of

warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 22 05 00-1 Common Work Results For Plumbing

SECTION 22 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

2. Sleeves.

3. Mechanical sleeve seals.

4. Formed steel channel.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for piping and equipment identification list of wording, symbols, letter

size, and color coding for pipe identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag

number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

B. Product Data for Pipe and Equipment Identification: Submit for mechanical identification

manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.


A. Perform Work in accordance with national and local codes and standards.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

A. Furnish materials in accordance with national and local codes and standards

B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and

printed markings. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1.

C. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape,

minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

2.2 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:

Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 22 05 00-2 Common Work Results For Plumbing

C. Sealant: Acrylic; refer to Section 07 90 00.

2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.

2. Substitutions: Owner approved equal.

B. Furnish materials in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

2.4 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL

A. Manufacturers:

1. Unistrut Corp.


B. Furnish materials in accordance with national and local codes and standards.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with adhesive.

3.3 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for

continuous insulation wrapping.

D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct

and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal

collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

F. Install chrome plated stainless steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 22 07 00-1 Plumbing Insulation

SECTION 22 07 00

PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories.

2. Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and

thickness for each service, and location.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating

proper installation procedures.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed

index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84

B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.

C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.

D. Perform Work in accordance per manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,

including product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by

storing in original wrapping.


1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products:

1. Owens-Corning.


B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products:

1. Aeroflex. Aerocell.


C. Manufacturers for Polyisocyanurate Foam Insulation Products:

1. Dow Chemical Company.


D. Manufacturers for Extruded Polystyrene Insulation Products:

1. Dow Chemical Company.


2.2 PIPE INSULATION

A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.

1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F.

2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F.

B. TYPE P-2: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.


2. Maximum Service Temperature: 300 degrees F.


C. TYPE P-3: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, nonhalogen, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.


2. Maximum Service Temperature: 250 degrees F.



2.3 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS

A. Vapor Retarder Jacket:

1. [ASTM C921,] white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film.

2. Water vapor transmission: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perm-inches.

B. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket:

1. Product Description: [ASTM D1785,] One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet

material, off-white color.

2. Thickness: 10 mil.

3. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive or pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape.

C. Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System:

1. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:

a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.

b. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

2.4 PIPE INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Vapor Retarder Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

B. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.

C. Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter and smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-

69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness.

D. Piping 2 inches diameter and larger: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: not less

than 6 inches long, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation.

E. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum single piece

construction with self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation.

F. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

G. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.


3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible

locations.

B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having

fire resistance rating of one hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing

insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section

07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than one hour.

C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature:

1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible

connections and expansion joints.

2. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory-applied

jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure

field-applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with

vapor retarder mastic.

3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as

adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

D. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F:

1. Do not insulate unions and flanges at equipment, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at

such locations.

E. Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F:

1. Furnish factory-applied or field-applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch

expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory-applied jacket

and butt strips or both.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining

pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

3. Insulate flanges and unions at equipment.

F. Inserts and Shields:

1. Piping 1-1/2 inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe

hanger and insulation.

2. Piping 2 inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and

under finish jacket.

a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching

adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated.

b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned

temperature range and service.

G. Insulation Terminating Points:

1. Condensate Piping: Insulate entire piping system and components to prevent condensation.

H. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation:

1. Push insulation on to piping.

2. Miter joints at elbows.

3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer’s recommended adhesive.


4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered.

5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 22 10 00-1 Plumbing Piping and Pumps

SECTION 22 10 00

PLUMBING PIPING AND PUMPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Pipe hangers and supports.

2. Pipe and pipe fittings.

3. Valves.

4. Piping specialties.

5. Plumbing drainage specialties.

6. Plumbing supply specialties.

7. Plumbing pumps.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Submit manufacturers catalog data including load carrying

capacity.

2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each

service.

3. Plumbing drainage specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes,

capacities, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

4. Plumbing supply specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information with sizes,

capacities, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

5. Pumps: Include capacities, pump curves, equipment performance, and electrical

characteristics.

B. Pipe Hangers and Supports: Design data, indicate pipe sizes, load carrying capacity of trapeze,

multiple pipe, and riser support hangers.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and

equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts lists and maintenance procedures.


A. Perform Work in accordance with national and local codes and ordinances.

B. Maintain one copy of each document on site.


1.5 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for pumps.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Furnish materials in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 inch [Malleable iron] [Carbon steel], adjustable swivel, split

ring.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook.

E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

F. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

2.2 PIPES AND TUBES

A. Sanitary Sewer Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building and Sanitary Sewer Piping, above

Grade:

1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034 SDR 26, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.

a. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.

b. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2. Water Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building:

3. Copper Tubing: ASTM B42, Tempered O61 annealed without fittings.

B. Water Piping, above Grade:

1. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846/D2846M with CPVC fittings and solvent weld joints.

C. Storm Water Piping, Buried Within 5 Feet of Building and Storm Water Piping, above Grade:

1. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034 SDR 26, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material.

a. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.

b. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

D. Equipment Drains and Overflows:

1. PVC Pipe: SDR 26, PVC fittings, solvent weld joints.

E. Flue

1. Type “B” or “C” Double Wall Flue

2.3 VALVES

A. Manufacturers:


1. NIBCO

2. Or owner approved equal

B. For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61.

C. Relief Valves:

1. Bronze body, Teflon seat, stainless steel stem and springs, automatic, direct pressure

actuated capacities ASME certified and labeled.

2.4 PIPING SPECIALTIES

2.5 PLUMBING DRAINAGE SPECIALTIES

A. Roof Drains:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Wade

2. Roof Drains: Lacquered cast iron body with sump:

a. Strainer: Removable metal dome.

b. Accessories: Coordinate with roofing type:

1) Membrane flange and membrane clamp with integral gravel stop.

2) Adjustable under deck clamp.

3) Roof sump receiver.

4) Waterproofing flange.

5) Controlled flow weir.

6) Leveling frame.

7) Adjustable extension sleeve for roof insulation.

8) Perforated or slotted ballast guard extension for inverted roof.

9) Perforated stainless steel ballast guard extension.

3. Roof Overflow Drains: Lacquered cast iron body and clamp collar and bottom clamp ring;

pipe extended above flood elevation.

B. Floor Drains:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Wade

2. Floor Drain: Lacquered cast iron two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes,

reversible clamping collar, and square, adjustable nickel-bronze strainer.

C. Floor Sinks:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Wade

2. Floor Sink (FS-1): Galvanized cast iron body with dome strainer and seepage flange.

D. Cleanouts:


1. Manufacturers:

a. IOSAM

b. Tyler Pipe

c. Wade

d. Substitutions: Owner approved equal.

2. Furnish materials in accordance with local codes.

2.6 PLUMBING SUPPLY SPECIALTIES

A. Backflow Preventers:

1. Manufacturers:

a. WATTS

b. Or owner approved equal.

c. Substitutions: Owner approved equal.

2. Furnish materials in accordance with local codes and ordinances.

3. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1013; bronze body with bronze internal parts

and stainless steel springs; two independently operating, spring loaded check valves;

pressure relief valve located between check valves; third check valve opens under back

pressure in case of diaphragm failure; non-threaded vent outlet; assembled with two gate

valves, strainer, and four test cocks.

B. Hose Bibbs/Hydrants:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Woodford

b. Or owner approved equal

2. Wall Hydrant: Non-freeze, self-draining type with chrome plated wall plate hose thread

spout, removable key and vacuum breaker.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavate.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside piping before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.


3.3 INSTALLATION - INSERTS

A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms.

B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced

concrete beams.

C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with

recessed square steel plate and nut flush with top of slab.

3.4 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

B. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

C. Route piping parallel to building structure and maintain gradient.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom. Group piping to conserve space. Group piping whenever

practical at common elevations.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation

and access to valves and fittings.

G. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.

H. Install piping system allowing clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and

fittings.

I. Install identification on piping systems including underground piping. Refer to Section 22 05 00.

J. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections

of the work, and isolating parts of completed system.

3.5 INSTALLATION - VALVES

A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

B. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

C. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.


D. Provide lug end butterfly valves adjacent to equipment when functioning to isolate equipment.

E. Install spring loaded check valves on discharge of pumps.

3.6 INSTALLATION - PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install pressure gages with pulsation dampers. Provide needle valve or ball valve to isolate each

gage. Extend nipples and siphons to allow clearance from insulation.

B. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than

2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation.

C. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating

level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical.

D. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate to zero.

E. Provide drain and hose connection with valve on strainer blow down connection.

F. Test backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE 5013.

3.7 INSTALLATION - PLUMBING SUPPLY PIPING

A. Install water piping in accordance with ASME B31.9.

B. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 31 20 00.

C. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to obtain not less than 24 inches of

cover.

D. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

E. Install piping from relief valves, back-flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain.

F. Disinfecting of Domestic Water Systems:

1. Prior to starting, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

2. Verify pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda) or

acid (hydrochloric).

3. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder and tablet or gas form, throughout system

to obtain residual from 50 to 80 mg/L.

4. Bleed water from outlets to obtain distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum

15 percent of outlets.

5. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

6. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

7. Flush disinfectant from system until residual concentration is equal to incoming water or 1.0

mg/L.

8. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from

water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.


3.8 INSTALLATION - PLUMBING DRAINAGE PIPING

A. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture

of graphite and linseed oil. Install with clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system.

B. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade.

C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor.

D. Establish elevations of buried piping outside building to provide not less than 36 inches of cover.

E. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly.

F. Excavate and backfill in accordance with Section 31 20 00.

G. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1/4 inch per foot, 1/8 inch per foot minimum.

Maintain gradients.

H. Test drainage piping in accordance with local code requirements.

3.9 INSTALLATION - PUMPS

A. Install line size shut-off valve and strainer on pump suction. Install line size check valve, shut-off

valve, and balancing valve on pump discharge.

B. Install pumps with shaft length allowing sump pumps to be located minimum 24 inches below

lowest invert into sump pit and minimum 6 inches clearance from bottom of sump pit.

3.10 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. Verify pH of water to be

treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali caustic soda or soda ash or acid hydrochloric.

B. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain

50 to 80 mg/L residual. Bleed water from outlets to accomplish distribution.

C. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. When final disinfectant residual tests less than 25

mg/L, repeat treatment.

D. Flush disinfectant from system. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, and analyze

in accordance with AWWA C601.

3.11 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to plans for all equipment schedules.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 22 40 00-1 Plumbing Fixtures

SECTION 22 40 00

PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Water closets.

2. Urinals.

3. Lavatories.

4. Sinks.

5. Bathtubs.

6. Electric water coolers.

7. Service sinks.

8. Dishwashers.

9. Clothes washers (laundry room).

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature for plumbing fixtures.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit literature and parts list.


A. Provide plumbing fixture fittings in accordance with ASME A112.18.1 that prevent backflow

from fixture into water distribution system.

B. Maintain one approved copy of each document on site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Furnish 5 year manufacturer warranties for electric water cooler compressor.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TANK TYPE WATER CLOSETS

A. Manufacturers: (for Club only)

1. Kohler Toilet Model No. K-3999-0 with Cachet Elongated Toilet Seat Model No. K-4636-0.

2. Flush volume 1.28 gal.



B. Manufactures;(for Units)

1. Mansfield, alto with elongated bowl


2.2 WALL HUNG URINALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Kohler Model K-5016-ER-0


B. Urinal: ASME A112.19.2M or ANSI Z124.9, vitreous china, wall hung urinal with shields,

integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud, steel supporting hanger; maximum 0.5 gallon flush volume.

C. Flush Valve: Exposed chrome plated, diaphragm type with oscillating handle, escutcheon,

integral screwdriver stop, vacuum breaker.

2.3 LAVATORIES


1. Kohler Model Verticyl K-2882-0

2. Faucet, Kallista Model No. P24401-CR with 1.5 gpm flow rate.


B. Vitreous China Counter Undermount Lavatory.

C. Manufacturers: (for Units)

1. Mansfield 237 MS Oval


2.4 SINKS


1. Kitchen: Elkay USA Model No. ELUHAD281655PD

2. Breakroom: Elkay USA Model No. GECR3321

3. Faucet, Kohler Model No. K-7547-4-BL with 1.8 gpm flow rate.

4. Reception Bar Sink: Kohler Model No. K-5287-NA

5. Faucet, Brizo Model No. 3970LF-BLST with 1.8 gpm flow rate.


B. Manufacturers: (for Units)

1. Dayton Kingsford



2.5 ELECTRIC WATER COOLERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Elkay.

2. Substutions: Owner approved equal.

B. Fountain: ARI 1010; surface mounted electric water cooler with stainless steel top, vinyl on steel

body, elevated anti-squirt bubbler with stream guard, automatic stream regulator, mounting

bracket, refrigerated with integral air cooled condenser.

C. Capacity: 8gpm of 50 degree F water with inlet at 80 degree F and room temperature of 90 degree

F 120 volt compressor.

2.6 SERVICE SINKS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Kohler.


B. Bowl: 22 x 18 x 12 inch deep, porcelain enameled inside only cast iron roll-rim sink, with 12 inch

high back, concealed hanger, chrome plated strainer, cast iron P-trap with adjustable floor flange.

C. Trim: Per schedule.

2.7 DISHWASHER

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric.


2.8 CLOTHES WASHER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Maytag


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adjacent construction is ready to receive rough-in work of this section.

B. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and openings before rough

in and installation.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install each fixture with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies with screwdriver stops, reducers,

and escutcheons.

B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or

overflow.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 05 00-1 Common Work Results for HVAC

SECTION 23 05 00

COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Identification for HVAC Equipment.

2. Sleeves.

3. Mechanical sleeve seals.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Submit for piping and equipment identification list of wording, symbols, letter

size, and color coding for pipe identification and valve chart and schedule, including valve tag

number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

B. Product Data for Pipe and Equipment Identification: Submit for mechanical identification

manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.



B. Maintain one approved copy of each document on site.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT

A. Manufacturers:

1. Goodman.


2.2 SLEEVES

A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non-fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors:

Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel.

C. Sleeves for Round Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

D. Sleeves for Rectangular Ductwork: Galvanized steel.

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 05 00-2 Common Work Results for HVAC

E. Sealant: Acrylic.

2.3 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Thunderline Link-Seal, Inc.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify openings are ready to receive sleeves.

3.2 INSTALLATION - PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with adhesive.

B. Install plastic tags with corrosion resistant metal chain.

3.3 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES

A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves.

C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for

continuous insulation wrapping.

D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves.

E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct

and adjacent work with firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal

collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration.

F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 05 93-1 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

SECTION 23 05 93

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Draft Reports: Submit for review prior to final acceptance of Project.

B. Test Reports: Submit prior to final acceptance of Project and for inclusion in operating and

maintenance manuals. Assemble in soft cover, letter size, 3-ring binder, with table of contents

page and tabs, and cover identification. Include reduced scale drawings with air outlets and

equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations.



B. Report Forms: AABC MN-1 National Standards for Total System Balance forms, Forms prepared

following NEBB forms.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Mechanical contractor shall provide all testing and balancing in accordance with the local codes

and requirements of the city.

B. Before starting work, verify systems are complete and operable.

C. Report defects, deficiencies, or abnormal conditions in mechanical systems preventing system

balance.

D. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 05 93-2 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC

3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and

plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.3 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to deliver design supply, return, and exhaust air

quantities within previously stated tolerances.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct in

common area HVAC systems.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent those adjustments do not

create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Change volume using dampers mounted in ducts.

E. Adjust outside air, return air, and exhaust air dampers for design conditions.

F. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions.

G. All testing and balancing procedures shall conform and be in accordance with the local codes and

requirements of the city.


A. Verify recorded data represents actually measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices. Set and lock

memory stops.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 07 00-1 HVAC Insulation

SECTION 23 07 00

HVAC INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. HVAC piping insulation, jackets and accessories.

2. HVAC ductwork insulation, jackets, and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product description, thermal characteristics and list of materials and

thickness for each service, and location.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturers published literature indicating

proper installation procedures.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Test pipe insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed

index of not exceeding 50 in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Pipe insulation manufactured in accordance with ASTM C585 for inner and outer diameters.

C. Factory fabricated fitting covers manufactured in accordance with ASTM C450.

D. Maintain 1 copy of each document on site.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,


B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by

storing in original wrapping.


A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range

recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.


1.6 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for man made fiber.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products:

1. Owens-Corning.

B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products:

1. Aeroflex. Aerocell.


2.2 PIPE INSULATION

A. TYPE P-5: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular.



B. TYPE P-11: ASTM C533; Type I, hydrous calcium silicate pipe insulation, rigid molded white;

asbestos free.


2. Operating Temperature Range: 140 to 1200 degrees F.

2.3 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS

A. Field Applied Glass Fiber Fabric Jacket System:

1. Indoor Vapor Retarder Finish:

a. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.

2.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Lagging Adhesive: Fire retardant type with maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed

index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

B. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage self-adhesive pad.

C. Adhesives: Compatible with insulation.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT

A. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate.

3.3 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK SYSTEMS

A. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are finished inside dimensions.

B. Duct and Plenum Liner:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 100 percent coverage.

2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Comply with SMACNA Standards for

spacing.

3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.

4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

5. Cut insulation for tight overlapped corner joints. Support top pieces of liner at edges with

side pieces.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 11 23-1 Facility Natural-Gas Piping

SECTION 23 11 23

FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Natural gas piping buried within 5 feet of building. 2. Natural gas piping above grade.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.33 - Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems Up

to 125 psig (sizes 1/2 - 2). 2. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 3. ASME Section IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel

and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers.

C. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.

1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non-conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems.

B. Provide flanges, unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Use unions, flanges, or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections to valves, equipment.

C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9.

D. Use plug valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:


1. Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. Submit manufacturers catalog information.

2. Valves: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service.


A. Perform natural gas Work in accordance with NFPA 54.

B. Perform work in accordance with applicable and local gas company requirements.

C. Furnish shutoff valves complying with ANSI Z21.15.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.9, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene

tape.

2.2 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller; welded for pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type K or L ASTM B280, drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.26 cast bronze, compression type. 2. Joints: Flared.

C. Corrugated Stainless Steel Tubing: ANSI LC 1.

2.3 REGULATOR VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Indoors: Same as natural gas piping, above grade.

B. Outdoors: PVC pipe, tubing, and fittings, UL 651.

2.4 UNIONS AND FLANGES

A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with [soldered] [brazed joints]. 3. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solder

end, water impervious isolation barrier.


B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, forged steel, slip-on flanges. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, slip-on bronze flanges. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets.

2.5 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54.

B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

D. Where required, bend pipe with pipe bending tools in accordance with procedures intended for that purpose.

E. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

F. Size and install gas piping to provide sufficient gas to supply maximum appliance demand at pressure higher than appliance minimum inlet pressure.

G. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

H. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment.

I. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors.

J. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping.

K. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

L. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

M. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility company.

N. Install vent piping from gas pressure reducing valves to outdoors and terminate in weatherproof hood. Protect vent against entry of insects and foreign material. 1. Minimum Vent Size: Connection size at regulator vent connection. 2. Run individual vent line from each relief device, independent of breather vents.

O. Breather vents may be manifolded together with piping sized for combined appliance vent requirements.

P. Install identification on piping systems including underground piping.

Q. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.


R. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

S. Install gas pressure regulator with independent vent full size opening on regulator and terminate outdoors.

T. Install Work in accordance with national and local codes and ordinances.


A. Inspect, test and purge gas piping in accordance with national and local codes and ordinances.

B. Where new branch piping is extended from existing system, pressure test new branch piping only. Leak test joint between new and existing piping with noncorrosive leak detection fluid or other approved method.

C. When pressure tests do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace and retest.

D. Immediately after gas is applied to a new system, or a system has been restored after gas service interruption, check pipe for leakage. 1. Where leakage is detected, shut off gas supply until necessary repairs are complete.

E. Do not place appliances in service until leak testing and repairs are complete.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 30 00-1 HVAC Air Distribution

SECTION 23 30 00

HVAC AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Ductwork.

2. Ductwork accessories.

3. Fans.

4. Terminal units.

5. Air Outlets.

6. Filters.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings - Duct Fabrication Drawings: Not required.

B. Product Data: Not required.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Not required.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Not required.

E. Field Quality Control Reports.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Not required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK

A. Duct Materials:

1. Galvanized Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel sheet, lock-forming quality.

B. Ductwork Fabrication:

1. Fabricate and support rectangular ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct

material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

2. Fabricate and support round ducts with longitudinal seams in accordance with SMACNA

HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible (Round Duct Construction

Standards), and as indicated on Drawings. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and

sealing for operating pressures indicated.


3. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with minimum radius 1-1/2 times centerline duct width.

Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide airfoil turning vanes.

Where acoustical lining is indicated, furnish turning vanes of perforated metal with glass

fiber insulation.

4. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible;

maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence

downstream.

5. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct

gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Minimum 4 inch (100 mm) cemented slip joint,

brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.

6. Provide standard 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs. When space does not allow 45-degree

lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections.

2.2 DUCT ACCESSORIES

A. Volume Control Dampers:

1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings.

2. Fabricate splitter dampers of material matching duct gage to 24 inches size in each direction,

and two gages heavier for larger sizes. Secure with continuous hinge or rod. Operate with

minimum 1/4 inch diameter rod.

3. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 12 x 30 inch.

4. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72

inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame

with suitable hardware.

5. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings.

6. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. Where

width exceeds 30 inches, furnish regulator at both ends.

B. Turning Devices and Extractors:

1. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel or aluminum construction;

with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps.

2. Multi-blade device with radius blades attached to pivoting frame and bracket, steel or

aluminum construction, with push-pull operator strap.

C. Flexible Duct Connections:

1. UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A.

D. Duct Access Doors:

1. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible.

2. Access doors smaller than 12 inches square secured with sash locks. Access doors with sheet

metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.

2.3 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Metal-Aire



B. Grilles: White, stamped metal face.

2.4 FILTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. American Air Filter: MERV-7 or equal.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Metal Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible.

B. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.

C. Fiberglass Ducts: Install in accordance with SMACNA Fibrous Glass Duct Construction

Standards.

D. Install flexible connections immediately adjacent to fans and motorized equipment. Install

flexible connections specified between fan inlet and discharge ductwork. Prevent flexible

connectors being in tension while running.

E. Install back-draft dampers on discharge of exhaust fans.

F. Install duct insulation specified in Section 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation.

G. Install fire dampers with perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections,

corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

H. Inaccessible fire dampers.

I. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for

shoulder access. Install 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only.

J. Install fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and smoke dampers with perimeter

mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings,

bushings and hinges.

K. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92A.

L. Install balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers and grilles and registers, regardless of

whether dampers are specified as part of diffuser, or grille and register assembly. In clubhouse

only.


M. Do not operate fans until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated, and fan has

been test run under observation.

N. Install sheaves required for final air balance.

3.2 TESTING

A. For ductwork designed for 3 inches w.c. above ambient, pressure test minimum 25 percent of

ductwork after duct cleaning, but before duct insulation is applied or ductwork is concealed.

1. Test in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

2. Maximum Allowable Leakage: In accordance with ICC IECC.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to plans for all schedules.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 23 81 26-1 Split-System Air Conditioners

SECTION 23 81 26

SPLIT-SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONERS (VRF)

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Air handling unit.

2. Condensing unit.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit data indicating:

1. Cooling and heating capacities.

2. Dimensions.

3. Weights.

4. Rough-in connections and connection requirements.

5. Duct connections.

6. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

7. Controls.

8. Accessories.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection

requirements, and include start-up instructions.

C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.

D. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating

instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data.


A. Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by

ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator coils when tested in

accordance with ARI 210/240.

B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 210/240.

C. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270.


D. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A.

E. Perform Work in accordance with national and local codes.

F. Maintain one copy of each document on site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for compressors.

1.6 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Furnish service and maintenance of equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.

Include maintenance items as shown in manufacturer's operating and maintenance data, including

filter replacements, fan belt replacement, and controls checkout and adjustments.

B. Furnish 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions for this maintenance period.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (VRF)

A. Manufacturers:

1. LG Multi V (VRF).


B. Furnish materials in accordance with national and local codes.

C. Product Description: Split system consisting of air handling unit and condensing unit including

cabinet, evaporator fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser,

electric heating coil, air filters, controls, air handling unit accessories, condensing unit

accessories, and refrigeration specialties.

2.2 AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Cabinet:

1. Panels: Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish. Access Panels: Located on

both sides of unit. Furnish with duct collars on inlets and outlets.

2. Insulation: Factory applied to each surface to insulate entire cabinet.

C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with high efficiency motor

complying with NEMA MG1, Type 1. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal

overload protection.


D. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested

under water. Removable, PVC construction, double-sloped drain pan with piping connections on

both sides.

E. Refrigeration System: Single refrigeration circuits controlled by factory installed thermal

expansion valve.

F. Electric Heating Coil: Helical nickel-chrome resistance wire coil heating elements with refractory

ceramic support bushings easily accessible with automatic reset thermal cut-out, built-in

contactors, galvanized steel frame, control circuit transformer and fuse, load fuses.

G. Air Filters: Washable resin or Plasma.

H. Air Handling Unit Accessories:

1. Return Air Grille: mounted in return air opening of aluminum construction and fixed

louvers.

2. Mounting Sub base with construction and finish matching unit casing.

2.3 CONDENSING UNIT

A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units, consisting of casing,

compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls.

B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's

standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather

protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required access

to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives.

C. Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with semi-hermetic reciprocating type compressors,

resiliently mounted, with positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection.

D. Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum, factory leak

and pressure tested.

E. Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts. Control

transformer. Furnish magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors.

F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced.

Wired to operate with compressor. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in

thermal overload protection.

G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories:

1. Controls to provide low ambient cooling to 0 degrees F.

2. Time delay relay.

3. Anti-short cycle timer.

4. Disconnect switch.

5. Vibration isolators.


6. Condenser Coil Guard: Condenser fan openings furnished with PVC coated steel wire safety

guards.

7. Suction and discharge pressure gauges.

H. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following:

1. Charge of compressor oil.

2. Holding charge of refrigerant.

3. Replaceable core type filter drier.

4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator.

5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping.

6. Liquid line solenoid valve.

7. Charging valve.

8. Oil level sight glass.

9. Crankcase heater.

10. Hot gas muffler.

11. Pressure relief device.

2.4 CONTROLS

A. Thermostat: Remote space thermostat with two stage heating and single stage cooling with

manual changeover. Furnish system selector switch heat-off-cool.

B. Thermostat: 7 day programmable electronic space thermostat with two stage heating and single

stage cooling with manual changeover and heating setback and cooling setup capability. Furnish

system selector switch heat-off-cool and fan control switch, auto-on.

2.5 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS

A. Disconnect Switch: Factory mounted, non-fused type, interlocked with access door, accessible

from outside unit, with power lockout capability.

B. 120/240 volts, single phase operation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify concrete pad for condensing unit is ready for unit installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT

A. Install air handling units on vibration isolators.

B. Connect air handling units to supply and return ductwork with flexible connections.

C. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to condensate drainage system.

D. Install components furnished loose for field mounting.


E. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Section 26 05 03.

F. Install Work in accordance with national and local codes.

3.3 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT

A. Install units on concrete foundations. Refer to Section 03 30 00.

B. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties furnished

with unit.

C. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant.

D. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting.

E. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories.

F. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 16.

3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing

and checkout.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet.

B. Install temporary filters during construction period. Replace with permanent filters at Substantial

Completion.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate air handling unit operation and maintenance.

B. Demonstrate starting, maintenance, and operation of condensing unit including low ambient

temperature operation.

3.7 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Do not operate air handling units until ductwork is clean, filters are in place, bearings lubricated,

and fan has been test run under observation.

3.8 SCHEDULES

A. Refer to plans for schedules.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 05 00-1 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

SECTION 26 05 00

BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes grounding electrodes and conductors; bonding methods and materials; conduit

and equipment supports, anchors and fasteners; and nameplates and wire markers.


A. Grounding systems use metal underground pipe and driven ground rod as grounding electrodes.

Grounding system connections use mechanical fasteners.

B. All grounding shall be done in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC and local code

requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog data for grounding electrodes and connections; for

fastening components; and nameplates, labels, and markers.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Manufacturers:

1. ERICO.


B. Product Description: Copper or copper-clad steel, 1/2 inch diameter rod electrode, 10 feet in

length.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Product Description: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic nameplate, black letters on white

background.

B. Letter Size:

1. 1/4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 05 00-2 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated.

B. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members.

C. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws

or rivets.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 05 03-1 Equipment Wiring Connections

SECTION 26 05 03

EQUIPMENT WIRING CONNECTIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electrical connections to equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions,

configurations, and construction.

C. Manufacturer's installation instructions.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Submittal procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, sizes, and configurations of equipment

connections.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer’s wiring diagrams, and

manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections.

C. Determine connection locations and requirements.

D. Sequence rough-in of electrical connections to coordinate with installation of equipment.

E. Sequence electrical connections to coordinate with start-up of equipment.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CORD AND PLUGS

A. Attachment Plug Construction: Conform to NEMA WD 1.

B. Configuration: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet furnished for equipment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify equipment is ready for electrical connection, for wiring, and to be energized.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Make electrical connections.

B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit

with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations.

C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures

encountered.

D. Install receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug.

E. Install cord and cap for field-supplied attachment plug.

F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and

equipment connection boxes.

G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete

equipment wiring requirements.

H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements.

I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment

wiring requirements.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Cooperate with utilization equipment installers and field service personnel during checkout and

starting of equipment to allow testing and balancing and other startup operations. Provide


personnel to operate electrical system and checkout wiring connection components and

configurations.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 05 26-1 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Rod electrodes.

2. Active electrodes.

3. Wire.

4. Grounding well components.

5. Mechanical connectors.


A. Grounding systems use the following elements as grounding electrodes:

1. Metal underground water pipe.

2. Metal building frame.

3. Concrete-encased electrode.

4. Ground ring.

5. Rod electrode.

1.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. System to be as required by the City of Austin and NEC 250.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Grounding System Resistance: 5 ohms maximum.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Not required.

B. Test Reports: Required.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Not required.


A. Project Record Documents: Required.


A. Provide grounding materials conforming to requirements of NEC, IEEE 142, and UL

labeled.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 ROD ELECTRODES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Erico, Inc.

B. Product Description:

1. Material: Copper-clad steel.

2. Diameter: 3/4 inch.

3. Length: 8 feet.

C. Connector: U-bolt clamp.

2.2 WIRE

A. Material: Stranded copper.

B. Foundation Electrodes: 4 AWG.

C. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Copper conductor bare.

D. Bonding Conductor: Copper conductor bare.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with IEEE 142.

B. Install grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation

footing.

C. Install continuous grounding using underground cold water system and building steel as

grounding electrode. Where water piping is not available, install artificial station ground

by means of driven rods or buried electrodes.

D. Permanently ground entire light and power system in accordance with NEC, including

service equipment, distribution panels, lighting panelboards, switch and starter

enclosures, motor frames, grounding type receptacles, and other exposed non-current

carrying metal parts of electrical equipment.

E. Accomplish grounding of electrical system by using insulated grounding conductor

installed with feeders and branch circuit conductors in conduits. Size grounding

conductors in accordance with NEC. Install from grounding bus of serving panel to

ground bus of served panel, grounding screw of receptacles, lighting fixture housing,

light switch outlet boxes or metal enclosures of service equipment. Ground conduits by


means of grounding bushings on terminations at panelboards with installed number 12

conductor to grounding bus.


A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

C. Perform ground resistance testing in accordance with IEEE 142.

D. Perform leakage current tests in accordance with NFPA 99.

E. Perform continuity testing in accordance with IEEE 142.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 05 53-1 Identification for Electrical Systems

SECTION 26 05 53

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Nameplates.

2. Labels.

3. Wire markers.

4. Conduit markers.

5. Stencils.

6. Underground Warning Tape.

7. Lockout Devices.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data:

1. Submit manufacturer’s catalog literature for each product required.

2. Submit electrical identification schedule including list of wording, symbols, letter size, color

coding, tag number, location, and function.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation instructions, special procedures, and

installation.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged devices; include tag numbers.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with

minimum three years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with three years experience

approved by manufacturer.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and

protecting products.


B. Accept identification products on site in original containers. Inspect for damage.

C. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification,


D. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical

damage, by storing in original wrapping.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Install labels and nameplates only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions for

adhesive are within range recommended by manufacturer.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for extra materials.

B. Furnish two containers of spray-on adhesive.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 NAMEPLATES

A. Product Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on white

contrasting background color.

B. Letter Size:

1. 1/4 inch (6 mm) high letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads.

C. Minimum nameplate thickness: 1/8 inch.

2.2 LABELS

A. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background.

2.3 WIRE MARKERS

A. Description: split sleeve wire markers.

B. Legend:

1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number as indicated on Drawings.

2. Control Circuits: Control wire number as indicated on schematic and interconnection

diagrams, Drawings.


2.4 CONDUIT AND RACEWAY MARKERS

A. Description: Nameplate fastened with straps, Nameplate fastened with adhesive, Labels fastened

with adhesive, Stencils.

B. Color:

1. 208 Volt System: Black lettering on white background.

C. Legend:

1. 208 Volt System: 208 VOLTS.

2.5 STENCILS

A. Stencils: With clean cut symbols and letters of following size:

1. Up to 2 inches Outside Diameter of Raceway: 1/2 inch high letters.

2. 2-1/2 to 6 inches Outside Diameter of Raceway: 1 inch high letters.

B. Stencil Paint: As specified in Section 09 90 00 semi-gloss enamel, colors conforming to the

following:

1. Black lettering on white background.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

B. Prepare surfaces in accordance with Section 09 90 00 for stencil painting.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install identifying devices after completion of painting.

B. Nameplate Installation:

1. Install nameplate parallel to equipment lines.

2. Install nameplate for each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure with

corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

3. Install nameplates for each control panel and major control components located outside

panel with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive.

4. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws.

5. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on recessed panelboard in finished locations.

6. Install nameplates for the following:

a. Switchboards.

b. Panelboards.

c. Transformers.

d. Service Disconnects.

C. Label Installation:


1. Install label parallel to equipment lines.

2. Install label for identification of individual control device stations.

3. Install labels for permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

D. Wire Marker Installation:

1. Install wire marker for each conductor at panelboard, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes

and each load connection.

2. Mark data cabling at each end. Install additional marking at accessible locations along the

cable run.

3. Install labels at data outlets identifying patch panel and port designation as indicated on

Drawings.

E. Conduit Marker Installation:

1. Install conduit marker for each conduit longer than six feet.

2. Conduit Raceway Marker Spacing: 20 feet on center.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 22 00-1 Transformers

SECTION 26 22 00

TRANSFORMERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Dry type transformers

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Required.

B. Test Reports: Required.


A. Record Documentation: Required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. Manufacturer List:

1. Cutler-Hammer as basis of design.

B. Substitution: Owner approved equal.

C. Description: NEMA ST 20, factory-assembled, air-cooled, dry type transformers.

1. Mounting: Trapeze.

D. Operation

1. Primary Voltage: 208 volts, 3 phase.

2. Secondary Voltage: 208Y/120 volts, 3 phase.

3. Sound Levels: NEMA ST 20.

E. Materials:

1. Coil Conductors: Continuous copper.

2. Enclosure: NEMA ST 20, ventilated. Furnish lifting eyes or brackets and trapeze mount.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 24 13-1 Switchboards

SECTION 26 24 13

SWITCHBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes main switchboards.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

3. Section 26 25 00 - Enclosed Bus Assemblies.

4. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI C12.1 - Code for Electricity Metering.

2. ANSI C39.1 - Requirements, Electrical Analog Indicating Instruments.

B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:

1. IEEE C57.13 - Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers.

2. IEEE C62.41 - Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power

Circuits.

C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses.

2. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600 Volts

Maximum).

3. NEMA PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards.

4. NEMA PB 2.1 - General Instructions for Proper Handling, Installation, Operation, and

Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

D. International Electrical Testing Association:

1. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution

Equipment and Systems.

E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate front and side views of enclosures with overall dimensions shown;

conduit entrance locations and requirements; nameplate legends; size and number of bus bars for

each phase, [neutral,] and ground; and switchboard instrument details.


C. Product Data: Submit electrical characteristics including voltage, frame size and trip ratings, fault

current withstand ratings, and time-current curves of equipment and components.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures.

B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations, configurations, and ratings of switchboards

and their components on single line diagrams and plan layouts.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts data listing; source and current prices of

replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with

minimum three years experience.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and

protecting products.

B. Deliver in 48 inch maximum width shipping splits, individually wrapped for protection and

mounted on shipping skids.

C. Accept switchboards on site. Inspect for damage.

D. Store in clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide additional canvas or plastic cover

to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.

E. Handle in accordance with NEMA PB 2.1. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to

avoid damage to switchboard internal components, enclosure, and finish.


A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

B. Conform to NEMA PB 2 service conditions during and after installation of switchboards.

1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

1.9 SEQUENCING

A. Section 01 10 00 - Summary: Work sequence.

B. Sequence Work to avoid interferences with building finishes and installation of other products.


1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish two of each key.

C. Furnish two fuse pullers.

1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products.

B. Furnish three of each size and type of fuse installed.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DISTRIBUTION SWITCHBOARDS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Square D.


B. Product Description: NEMA PB 2, enclosed switchboard with electrical ratings and

configurations as indicated on Drawings.

C. Device Mounting:

1. Refer to plans and schedules.

D. Bus:

1. Material: Copper with standard size.

2. Connections: Bolted, accessible from front for maintenance.

3. Bus bars.

E. Ground Bus: Insulated, extend length of switchboard.

F. Line and Load Terminations: Accessible from front only of switchboard, suitable for conductor

materials and sizes as indicated on Drawings.

G. Utility Metering Compartment: Furnish metering transformer compartment for Utility Company's

use, in accordance with Utility Company requirements.

H. Finish: Manufacturer's standard light gray enamel over external surfaces. Coat internal surfaces

with minimum one coat corrosion-resisting paint, or plate with cadmium or zinc.

I. Mimic Bus: Show bussing, connections and devices in single line form on front panels of

switchboard using black color factory painting, fastened flat against panel face with screws.

2.2 FUSIBLE SWITCH ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers:


1. Square D.


B. Product Description: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, load interrupter knife switch. Handle lockable in

OFF position.

C. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU 1, Class R fuses.

2.3 MOLDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Square D.


B. Product Description: UL 489, molded-case circuit breaker.

C. Field-Adjustable Trip Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes and larger

have mechanism for adjusting continuous current.

D. Field-Changeable Ampere Rating Circuit Breaker: Circuit breakers with frame sizes 200 amperes

and larger have changeable trip units.

E. Current Limiting Circuit Breaker: Circuit breaker indicated as current-limiting have

automatically-resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Let-through Current and Energy:

Less than permitted for same size Class RK-5 fuse.

F. Solid-State Circuit Breaker: Electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for adjustable current

settings; ground fault trip with zero sequence type ground fault sensor; instantaneous trip; and

adjustable short time trip.

G. Current Limiter: Designed for application with molded case circuit breaker.

1. Coordinate limiter size with trip rating of circuit breaker to prevent nuisance tripping and to

achieve interrupting current rating specified for circuit breaker.

2. Interlocks trip circuit breaker and prevent closing circuit breaker when limiter compartment

cover is removed or when one or more limiter is not in place or has operated.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 24 16-1 Panelboards

SECTION 26 24 16

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Distribution and branch circuit panelboards.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

2. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS


1. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards.

2. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and Maintenance of

Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.

B. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 50 - Cabinets and Boxes

2. UL 67 - Safety for Panelboards.

3. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches, and Circuit-Breaker

Enclosures.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Requirements for submittals.

B. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,

integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.

D. Source Quality control submittals: Indicate results of factory tests and inspections.

E. Field Quality Control Submittals: Indicate results of Contractor furnished tests and inspections.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for submittals.


B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual circuiting

arrangements.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of

replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for maintenance

products.

B. Extra Stock Materials:

1. Furnish two of each panelboard key. Panelboards keyed alike to Owner’s current keying

system.


A. Qualifications

1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section

with minimum three years documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS


1. Square-D as basis of design.

B. Substitution Limitations:

1. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for substitutions for other

manufacturers and products.


C. Description: NEMA PB 1, circuit breaker type panelboard.

D. Materials:

1. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings.

Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard.

2. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, circuit breakers with integral thermal and

instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Furnish circuit breakers UL listed as Type HACR

for air conditioning equipment branch circuits.

3. Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: UL 489, circuit breakers with

replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous

magnetic trip in each pole.

4. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, circuit breakers with integral

thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically

resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical


amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size NEMA FU 1,

Class RK-5 fuse.

2.2 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS


1. Square D as basis of design.

B. Substitution Limitations:

1. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Requirements for substitutions for other

manufacturers and products.

C. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard.

D. Materials:

1. Panelboard Bus: Copper, current carrying components, ratings as indicated on Drawings.

Furnish copper ground bus in each panelboard; furnish insulated ground bus as indicated on

Drawings.

2. For non-linear load applications subject to harmonics furnish 200 percent rated, plated

copper, solid neutral.

3. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 65,000 amperes rms, or as indicated on

Drawings].

4. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers,

with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type HACR

for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers as

indicated on Drawings. Provide UL class 760 arc-fault interrupter circuit breakers as

indicated on Drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.

5. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: UL 489, circuit breakers with integral

thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically

resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000 symmetrical

amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for same size NEMA FU 1,

Class RK-5 fuse.

6. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1.

E. Cabinet Front: Flush or Surface cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal

directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finishes: Refer to plans for mountings.

1. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.

2.3 PANELBOARD

A. Description:

1. Panelboards

a. Top or bottom feed as indicated on Drawings. Furnish circuit directory inside door.

b. Construct box of galvanized steel. Box size as indicated on Drawings.

c. Main bus constructed of copper and rated for load current.

d. Furnish interior with branch circuit breakers.

e. Furnish standard rated, neutral assembly with copper neutral bus.

f. Furnish with insulated ground bus and safety ground bus.


g. Furnish wiring gutters in accordance with NEC.

h. Field connections to panelboard: main lug and/or main breaker type, as indicated on

drawings.

i. Construct with mounted trim and NEMA.

j. Furnish with branch breaker positions and nominal current rating as indicated on

Drawings.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install panelboards and load centers in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.

B. Install panelboards and load centers plumb.

C. Install recessed panelboards and load centers flush with wall finishes.

D. Height: 6 feet (1800 mm) to top of panelboard and load center; install panelboards taller than 6

feet (1800 mm) with bottom no more than 4 inches (100 mm) above floor.

E. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.

F. Provide typed or neatly handwritten circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard and load

center. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes to balance phase loads. Identify each circuit

as to its clear, evident and specific purpose of use.

G. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 05 53.

H. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling or

below floor. Minimum spare conduits: 5 empty 1 inch. Identify each as SPARE.

I. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. Connect equipment

ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70.


A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for testing, adjusting,

and balancing.

B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

C. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for starting and

adjusting.


B. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in panelboard to

balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire

branch circuits.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Requirements for cleaning.

B. Clean existing panelboards and load centers to remain or to be reinstalled.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 27 26-1 Wiring Devices

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes wall switches; wall dimmers; receptacles; multi outlet assembly; and

device plates and decorative box covers.


1. Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems: Outlet boxes for

wiring devices.

1.2 REFERENCES


1. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices.

2. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors,

and configurations.

1.4 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section

with minimum three years experience.

1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance

products.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Leviton Manufacturing Company.



B. Single Pole Switch:



C. Double Pole Switch:



2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Single Convenience Receptacle:



2.3 WALL PLATES

A. Manufacturers:



B. Decorative Cover Plate: Smooth 302 stainless steel.

C. Jumbo Cover Plate: Smooth 302 stainless steel.

D. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify outlet boxes are installed at proper height.

C. Verify wall openings are neatly cut and completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to

wiring devices.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean debris from outlet boxes.

3.3 EXISTING WORK

A. Disconnect and remove abandoned wiring devices.

B. Modify installation to maintain access to existing wiring devices to remain active.


C. Clean and repair existing wiring devices to remain or to be reinstalled.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Install devices plumb and level.

B. Install switches with OFF position down.

C. Install wall dimmers to achieve full rating specified and indicated after derating for

ganging as instructed by manufacturer.

D. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers.

E. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom.

F. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding

conductor.

G. Install wall plates on flush mounted switches, receptacles, and blank outlets.

H. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas.

I. Connect wiring devices by wrapping solid conductor around screw terminal. Install

stranded conductor for branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. When stranded conductors

are used in lieu of solid, use crimp on fork terminals for device terminations. Do not

place bare stranded conductors directly under device screws.

J. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.

K. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,

above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets.

3.5 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 33 to obtain mounting

heights as indicated on drawings.


A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout

Requirements: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Inspect each wiring device for defects.

C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation.

D. Verify each receptacle device is energized.


E. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.

F. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Testing, adjusting, and

balancing.

B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning.

B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 50 00-1 Lighting

SECTION 26 50 00

LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior luminaires, lamps, ballasts, and accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LUMINAIRES

A. Product Description: Complete luminaire assemblies, with features, options, and accessories as

indicated on Drawings.

B. Substitutions: Owner approved equal.

2.2 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Refer to schedule on plans.


B. Product Description: Self-contained incandescent emergency lighting unit.

C. Lamps: 12 watt minimum, sealed beam type in nickel or chrome plated steel housing.

D. Electrical Connection: Conduit connection.

E. Input Voltage: 120 volts.

2.3 EXIT SIGNS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Refer to plans for schedule.


B. Product Description: Exit sign fixture with integral battery power supply.

C. Face: Translucent face with red letters on white background.

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 26 50 00-2 Lighting

D. Input Voltage: 120 volts.

E. Lamps: 5 W per side, maximum.

2.4 INCANDESCENT LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Corp.


2.5 FLUORESCENT LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Corp.


PART 3 EXECUTION

END OF SECTION

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 27 00 00-1 Communications

SECTION 27 00 00

COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes arrangement with Telephone Utility Company for service and premises

telephone pathways, and premises wiring.


A. Service entrance from Telephone Utility Company to termination backboard per telephone

company requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TELEPHONE TERMINATION BACKBOARDS

A. Material: Plywood.

B. Size: 3/4 inch thick dimension per telephone company requirements.

2.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install pathways in accordance with EIA/TIA 569.

B. Install wire and cable in accordance with EIA/TIA 570.

C. Finish paint termination backboards with durable white enamel prior to installation of telephone

equipment.

D. Install termination backboards plumb, and attach securely to building wall at each corner. Install

cabinet trim plumb.

E. Install pull wire or polyethylene pulling string in each empty telephone conduit over 10 feet (3 m)

in length or containing bend.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Section 270000 GMP Set Communications

Communications 270000 - 1

SECTION 270000 – COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes general design requirements, administration topics, and installation for communications systems.


A. The objective of this project is to provide a complete communications cabling infrastructure system installation including, but not limited to: fiber backbone, riser system, horizontal data and voice cabling with attendant terminations, mounting equipment, cable pathway and management systems, testing and other items/materials, as specified in drawings, these specifications, and contract documents.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 3. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 4. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 5. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 6. Section 274116 Audio-Visual Systems 7. Section 274170 Community Access Television (CATV) 8. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections)

1.3 SCOPE OF WORK

A. This section establishes an infrastructure to be used as signal pathways for communications systems, but is not limited to the following:

1. Comply with all Project Contract documents and the following requirements for a complete project installation.

2. Provide a structured cabling system as described hereafter that includes, but is not limited to, supplying, installing and testing of: backbone cabling, riser cabling; data and voice horizontal cabling, cable connectors, communications outlets and terminations, and equipment racks/cabinets for networking hardware and patch panels.

3. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for the installation described herein.

4. Follow industry standard installation procedures for communications cable to assure that the mechanical and electrical transmission characteristics of this cable plant and equipment are maintained.

B. Work of this section covers complete installation of permanent and channel links for a data and voice communications networks utilizing copper and fiber transmission media that includes, but is not limited to the following:

1. Provide, install, terminate, test, and document all fiber and copper backbone cables, riser cables, and horizontal cables.



2. Provide and install all termination devices such as, but not limited to, modular patch panels, termination blocks, information outlets (jacks and plates), phone jacks, fiber distribution panels, bulkheads, connectors, and fiber fan out kits. Document all termination devices with proper labeling.

3. Provide in quantities specified, interconnect components such as, but not limited to, fiber patch cables, copper patch cords, and station cables.

4. Provide and install specified Telecommunication Room equipment such as, but not limited to, racks, cabinets, horizontal and vertical cable support devices, cable trays and cable runway, and required mounting brackets/hardware.

5. Provide and install UL-approved firestopping systems in all communication pass-through locations of rated ceiling, wall or floor penetrations involving, conduits, cable, and cable trays in coordination with General Contractor.

6. Provide and install grounding and bonding connection to the bus (TGMB/TGB) provided by Division 26.

7. Provide and install all appropriate consumable items required to complete the installation. 8. Coordination with other trades. 9. Provide complete documentation and demonstration of work. 10. Provide indexed and organized complete Test Results of all copper and fiber cable and

their components. 11. Provide Submittals as outlined below. 12. Provide a Manufacturer’s Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty

for this wiring system. 13. Conduct a final document handover meeting with client, consultant, and PM to review,

discuss and educate the Owner on the final product, test results, and As-Built Drawings.

C. Changes to the Scope of Work

1. Owner changes to the scope of work shall be in writing. 2. Change orders shall be submitted to the Owner/Project Manager complete with price

breakdown and description for approval before any work is done. 3. The Contractor shall respond to these changes with a complete material list, including

pricing, labor, and taxes in writing to be presented to the Owner for approval. 4. The Contractor shall not proceed with additional scope of work without signed approval

by the Owner. Owner will not pay for additional work performed by the Contractor without written/signed approval of these changes.

5. Contractor will attach a copy of the signed change order with billing information.

1.4 PRODUCTS AND WORK BY OTHERS (NIC)

A. The Owner may separately procure and/or provide certain equipment and component that will be installed during the course of project. Such items may not be indicated in the documents.

B. Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner and Owner’s suppliers when considering:

1. The provision and installation of phone systems, related system equipment/software, and employee station equipment/software.

2. The provision and installation of multi-port routers, switches, and other Layer 2 / Layer 3 networking components in communications rooms.

3. The provision and installation of Uninterruptable Power Source (UPS) devices in communications rooms.

4. Communications grounding busbars and grounding wires connecting to the main building electrode system.

5. Dedicated power panels, ground busbars, circuits, and utility outlets. 6. The installation and finishing of plywood backboards.



7. Building mechanical ductwork, cooling/heating system (HVAC), and environmental control sensors.

8. Communication pathway devices such as, but not limited to, cable tray and flex-tray in corridors, office spaces and open areas, outlet boxes and stub-ups, conduits, conduit sleeves, and penetrations in walls and floors.

1.5 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Substitution may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. An alternate product must be equal to or exceed specified requirements. The material substituted shall not void, alter or change manufacturers’ structured cabling system warranty.

B. Document substitution requests with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with Contract Documents. Include in each request for substitution:

1. Product identification, manufacturer’s name and address 2. Product Data:

a) Description, performance and test data, reference standards, finishes and colors. b) Samples: Finishes. c) Complete and accurate drawings indicating construction revisions required (if any)

to accommodate substitutions. d) Data relating to changes required in construction schedule. e) Cost comparison between specified and proposed substitution.

C. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

D. The Owner will be the final judge of acceptability, with review by DataCom Design Group and the distribution of the acceptance by the Architect.

E. No substitute shall be ordered, installed or utilized without the Architect’s prior written verification of acceptance from the Owner.

1.6 REFERENCES AND RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and General provisions of the contract, including Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Architectural plans and specifications, requirements of Division 1, Electrical, Mechanical, Plumbing, Audio-Visual, Security and Communications specifications and plans, and the publications listed below apply to the Communications section, are incorporated into this specification by reference, and shall be considered a part of this section.

B. Reference to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean reference to the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract.

C. The Contractor shall read all sections in their entirety and apply them as appropriate for work in this section.

D. Conflicts



1. Drawings and specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another.

2. In general, the specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials and tests, and the drawings establish the quantities, details, and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to during the installation of the communications system components.

3. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, or between specification sections, the items with the greater quantity and/or quality shall be estimated and installed.

4. Clarification with the Owner and/or DataCom Design Group about these items shall be made in writing prior to procurement and installation.

E. Codes and Standards

1. American National Standards Institute/Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA)

a) ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises" b) ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 "Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard" c) ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 "Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling and

Components Standard" d) ANSI/TIA-568-C.3 "Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard" e) ANSI/TIA-568-C.4 "Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components Standard" f) ANSI/TIA-569-C "Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" g) ANSI/TIA-606-B "Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications

Infrastructure" h) ANSI/TIA-607-B "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding

Requirements for Telecommunications" i) ANSI/TIA-862-A “Building Automation Systems Cabling Standard” j) ANSI/TIA-942-A: “Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centers” k) ANSI/TIA-1152: “Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for

Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling”

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

a) ANSI C80.1 Electrical rigid steel conduit (ersc)

3. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM)

a) ASTM A123/A123M-13 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products

b) ASTM A510/A510M-13 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Wire Rods and Coarse Round Wire, Carbon Steel, and Alloy Steel

c) ASTM A653/A653M-13 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

d) ASTM B3-13 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire e) ASTM B8-11 Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper

Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft f) ASTM B33-10 Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper

Wire for Electrical Purposes g) ASTM B633-13 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on

Iron and Steel h) ASTM B653/B653M-11 Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded

Zirconium and Zirconium Alloy Welding Fittings

4. BICSI



a) BICSI Outside Plant Design Reference Manual b) BICSI Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM)

5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

a) IEEE 142-1991 Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems

b) IEEE 1100-2005 IEEE Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment

6. National Electrical Code (NEC)

a) NEC Article 250 - Grounding and Bonding b) NEC Chapter 8 - Communications Systems

7. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

a) NEMA TC2 Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit b) NEMA TC3 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and

Tubing

8. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)

a) UL Cable Certification and Follow-Up Program b) UL 6: Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel c) UL 83: Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables d) UL 467: Grounding and Bonding Equipment e) UL 514B: Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings f) UL 651: Standard for Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and

Fittings g) UL 651A: Schedule 40 and 80 High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Conduit

9. Local, county, state and federal regulations and codes in effect as of date of installation. 10. Equipment of foreign manufacture must meet U.S. codes and standards.

a) It shall be indicated in the proposal the components that may be of foreign manufacture, if any, and the country of origin.


A. Communications Contractor shall have a complete working knowledge of low voltage communications cabling applications such as, but not limited to data, voice and video network systems.

B. Communications Contractor shall have installed similar-sized systems in at least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5) years prior to this bid and be regularly engaged in the business of installation of the types of systems specified in this document.

C. Communications Contractor and individual installation crew members shall be experienced and qualified to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission. All onsite supervision personnel that will be assigned to this project shall be listed in the Pre-Installation Submittal.

1. 80% shall have a minimum of three (3) years of experience in the installation of the types of systems, equipment, and cables specified in this document prior to this bid.



2. All installation team members must demonstrate knowledge and compliance with all applicable methods, standards, and codes.

3. All members of the installation team shall be certified by the Structured Cabling System Assurance Warranty provider as having completed the necessary training to complete their part of the installation and capable of an installation that falls under manufacturer’s guidelines necessary to obtain the Manufacturer’s System Assurance Warranty.

4. Any personnel substitutions shall be noted in writing to the Owner.

D. A BICSI RCDD shall supervise and approve all on-site work as a recognized member of the Contractor’s installation team.

E. Refer also to General Conditions.

1.8 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS

A. In order to accomplish the conditions of this agreement, the Contractor shall perform the specific duties listed herein.

B. Contractor shall provide and pay for all labor, supervision, tools, equipment, test equipment, tests and services to provide and install a complete communications cabling infrastructure system. Pay all required sales, gross receipts, and other taxes.

C. Regulatory Requirements

1. Communications Contractor shall supply all city, county, and state telecommunication cabling permits required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

2. Communications Contractor shall be licensed and/or bonded as required for telecommunications/low voltage cabling systems.

D. Use of Subcontractors

1. Successful bidder shall inform the Owner’s contact and General Contractor in writing about the intention to use Subcontractors and the scope of work for which they are being hired.

2. The Owner or Owner’s designated contact must approve the use of Subcontractors in writing prior to the Subcontractor’s hiring and start of any work.

E. The Contractor’s designated Project Manager will be recognized as the single point of contact. The Project manager shall oversee all work performed to ensure compliance with specifications as outlined in bid documents (which includes all specifications, references, and drawings) to ensure a quality installation and attend project meetings with the telecommunication consultant, the Owner and others.

F. Coordination

1. Coordinate installation work with other trades (examples include ceiling grid contractors, HVAC and sheet metal contractors, etc.) to resolve procedures and installation placement for cable trays and cable bundle pathways.

2. The goal of this coordination will be to establish priority pathways for critical data/voice network cable infrastructure, materials, associated hardware, as well as mitigate delays to the project and to allow service access for communications and HVAC components.

3. Exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.



4. Coordinate with electrical contractors and plan for the pathway routes used communications cabling to minimize cable lengths. Report any potential over distance cable runs for approval before pulling the cables.

5. Record agreements with other trades and distribute record to other participants, Owner and telecommunication consultant.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Communications Contractor shall attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to beginning any work of this section. This venue is to ask and clarify questions in writing with consultant and/or project manager/Owner representative.

B. Agenda

1. Safety 2. Work to be performed 3. Scheduling 4. Coordination 5. Other topics as necessary

C. Attendance

1. Communications project manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by General Contractor, Owner’s representatives, and other parties affected by work of this document.

2. All individuals who will serve in an on-site supervisory capacity, including project managers, site supervisors, and lead installers, shall be required to attend the pre-installation conference. Individuals who do not attend the conference will not be permitted to supervise the installation and testing of communications cables on the project.

1.10 CONTRACT ADMINISTRATION

A. DataCom Design Group may perform site visits and provide job field reports upon inspection of Contractor's installation, materials, supporting hardware, coordination with other trades and progress to schedule to the client.

B. Job Field Report outline:

1. General: The general installation progress in relation to scheduled work made by the Contractor up to that date.

2. Deficiencies and/or Items of Note: Documents observations of the cable installation that may require corrective action by the Contractor.

1.11 POST INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. At the time of substantial completion the contractor shall call and arrange for a post installation meeting to present and review all submittal documents to include but not be limited to As-Built Drawings, Test reports, Warranty paperwork, etc.

B. Attendees shall include

1. Communications Contractor



2. Project Manager/Owner Representative 3. DataCom Design Group 4. General Contractor 5. Other trades that the GC deems appropriate.

C. At this meeting the Communications Contractor shall present and explain all documentation.

D. Any discrepancies or deviations noted by and agreed to by participants shall be remedied by the Communications Contractor and resubmitted within one (1) week of the meeting.


A. Coordination with delivery companies, drivers, site address, and contact person(s) will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

B. Communications Contractor requirements:

1. Be responsible for prompt material deliveries to meet contracted completion date. 2. Coordinate deliveries and submittals with the General Contractor to ensure a timely

installation. 3. No equipment materials shall be delivered to the job site more than three weeks prior to

the commencement of its installation. 4. Equipment shall be delivered in original packages with labels intact and identification

clearly marked. 5. Equipment shall not be damaged in any way and shall comply with manufacturer’s

operating specifications. 6. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature

variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. 7. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the

Owner. 8. Contractor shall be responsible for all handling and control of equipment. Contractor is

liable for any material loss due to delivery and storage problems.

1.13 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor shall be a certified Manufacturer’s Value Added Reseller (VAR) and/or Authorized Installer and provide an end-to-end product warranty, adhere to the industry standard engineering, installation and testing procedures and utilize the authorized manufacturer components and distribution channels in provisioning this project.

B. Contractor shall coordinate with manufacturer for warranty paperwork and procedures prior to the start of the project.

C. Contractor shall provide a minimum one (1) year warranty on installation and workmanship PLUS an Extended Product Warranty and System Assurance Warranty for this wiring system and shall commit to make available local support for the product and system during the Warranty period.

1. The Extended Product Warranty shall apply to all passive structured cabling system components and shall cover the replacement or repair of defective products and labor for the replacement or repair of such defective products for a minimum of one (1) year.

2. The System Assurance Warranty provides a complete system and product warranty that will be extended to the end-user, ensuring the structured cabling system will be free of



defects in materials and workmanship, will meet or exceed applicable performance requirements defined in the contract documents, and support all current and future network applications for a minimum of twenty (20) years.

D. System Certification: Upon successful completion of the installation and subsequent inspection, the customer shall be provided with a numbered certificate, from the manufacturer, registering the installation.

1.14 PAYMENT

A. Refer to the General Contractor contract documents and/or master specifications issued by Architect for project and cost payment details.

1.15 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Requirements of Division 1

B. Refer to Sections 271300 and 271500

C. The Communications Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring submittal and review of shop drawings, product data, or samples until Owner has approved the respective submittal in writing. Such work shall be in accordance with approved submittals.

D. Pre-Installation Submittal Requirements

1. Communications Contractor shall provide certificates for the appropriate insurance coverage as defined in contract documents.

2. City, county, and/or state telecommunication cabling permits as required by Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

3. Executed non-disclosure agreement. 4. Appoint a Project Manager and provide the name and contact information. 5. Shop Drawings

a) Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, floor plans that identify all device locations, cable routes and quantities, cable types, riser locations, and references to installation details and diagrams.

1) Communication Contractor shall notify Owner of cable routes exceeding standardized lengths.

b) Communications Contractor shall submit, for approval, diagrams that show room layouts, rack layouts (including elevations), riser layouts, etc.

c) The Contractor shall make any corrections as required by the consultant team and submit revised shop drawings to the team for approval.

d) Approval by the Consultant of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the drawings or specifications, nor shall it relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules. Requests to deviate shall be submitted in writing to the Architect.

e) Release of CAD Files

1) Contractor may request to utilize the DataCom Design Group AutoCAD floor plan files for assistance in producing shop drawings.



2) Request shall be made by signing the DataCom Design Group "Agreement for Release of CAD Files" letter.

6. Product Data Cut-sheets

a) Communications Contractor shall submit catalogue cut-sheets that include manufacturer, trade name, and complete model number for each product specified. Model number shall be handwritten and/or highlighted to indicate exact selection.

b) Communications Contractor shall identify applicable specification section reference for each product performance for each component specified for approval prior to purchase and installation.

7. Warranty

a) The Communications Contractor shall submit appropriate documentation from the certifying manufacturer showing the project is registered and qualified for the System Assurance Warranty.

b) All subsequent work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. The Communications Contractor shall not perform any portion of the work requiring approval of the System Assurance Warranty manufacturer’s warranty registration qualification procedures that would disqualify any part or all of the wiring system from that warranty qualification.

8. Qualifications

a) Communications Contractor shall submit a list of the Contractor’s previous projects that demonstrate qualification for this project. This list shall include, but not be limited to:

1) At least ten (10) other projects in the last five (5) years 2) Name and location of project 3) Project contacts, email addresses, and phone numbers 4) Total square footage 5) Total number of cables/drops 6) Types of media

b) Communications Contractor shall submit an up-to-date and valid statement of qualifications for those assigned to perform the work specified herein at time of bid submission.

1) Communications Contractor Employees 2) Subcontractors

c) Manufacturer certifications for Contractor and installers.

9. Cable Testing Plan

a) The Contractor shall provide a complete and detailed test plan for approval of the cabling system specified herein, including a complete list of test equipment for copper and fiber components and accessories prior to beginning cable testing.

b) The following minimal items shall be submitted for review:

1) A testing plan that clearly describes procedures and methods. 2) Product data for test equipment.



3) Certifications and qualifications of all persons conducting the testing. 4) Calibration certificates indicating that equipment calibration meets National

Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards and has been calibrated at least once in the previous year of the testing date.

5) Examples of test reports, including all graphs, tables, and charts necessary for display of testing results.

10. Samples

a) For workstation outlet connectors, jack assemblies, housings and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical specifications and requirements. Confirm with Architect, interior designer, and Owner representative for color before purchasing materials.

E. Closeout Submittal Requirements

1. As-Built Drawings

a) Communications Design drawings are to be supplied to the Architect to prepare the master “As-Built” drawings.

b) Submit one electronic copy and one hard copy with project deliverables within three (3) weeks subsequent to substantial completion. Provide a laminated floorplan with drop designations in the respective serving Telecom Room.

c) As-Built drawings shall be in AutoCAD format, same version as used by Architect and consultant. Dimensions and scale of the drawing sheets submitted shall match the size of the drawing sheets used for the contract documents.

d) Utilize normal recognized drafting procedures that match AutoCAD standards, Architect and Consultant guidelines, and methodology.

e) The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the building identified in, but not limited to, addendum, change notices, site instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions.

1) Contractor shall clearly identify any resubmitted drawing sheets, documents or cut sheets either by using a color to highlight or cloud around resubmitted information.

2) Maintain drawing numbering or page/sheet scheme consistency as per previously issued drawings/documents.

f) Provide dimensioned plan and elevation views of networking components, showing:

1) All work area outlet locations complete with outlet/cable labeling. 2) Rack and/or cabinet locations complete with labeling. 3) One-line diagram of equipment/device interconnections with the cable plant. 4) Standard or typical details of installations unique to Owner’s requirements. 5) Graphic symbols and component identification on detail drawing shall

conform to the latest conventions:

i) ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 "Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises"

ii) ANSI/TIA-569-C "Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces" iii) ANSI/TIA-606-B "Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure" iv) ANSI/TIA-607-B "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and

Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications"



2. The Communications Contractor shall deliver the Installer's Extended Product Warranty and Manufacturer's signed System Assurance Warranty of installed cabling system to include all components that comprise the complete cabling system.

a) Delivery shall be completed within two (2) weeks of the time of final punch list review.

b) Product Certificates shall be signed by manufacturers of cables, connectors, and terminal equipment certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

3. Cable Testing Report Requirements

a) Submit certified test reports of Contractor-performed tests. Contractor shall submit the required Test Reports in the format and media specified, upon completion of testing the installed system.

b) The tests shall clearly demonstrate that the media and its components fully comply with the requirements specified herein.

c) Three (3) sets of electronic and hardcopy versions of test reports shall be submitted together and clearly identified with cable designations.

d) Cable inventory data shall be submitted for all fiber, copper, and coaxial cabling and termination components. Include products furnished:

1) Manufacturer's name 2) Manufacturer's part numbers 3) Cable designations 4) Location and riser assignments 5) Product Data

4. Supply Owner with training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases.

F. The Contractor’s BICSI Registered Communications Distribution Designer (RCDD) supervisor shall review, approve and stamp all documents prior to submitting. The Contractor’s RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein upon completion of all work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUMMARY

A. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening.

B. All material and equipment, as provided, should be the standard Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) products of a manufacturer engaged in the manufacturing of such products.

1. All shall be typical commercial designs that comply with the requirements specified. 2. All material and equipment shall be readily available through manufacturers and/or

distributors.

C. All equipment shall be standard catalogued items of the manufacturer and shall be supplied complete with any optional items required for proper installation.



D. Coordinate the features of materials and equipment so they form an integrated system. Match components and interconnections for optimum future performance and backward compatibility.

E. All materials shall be UL- and/or ETL-approved and labeled in accordance with NEC for all products where labeling service normally applies.

F. Materials and equipment requiring UL 94, 149 or 1863 listing shall be so labeled. Modification of products that nullifies UL labels is not permitted.

G. Backward Compatibility: The provided products shall be backward compatible with lower category ratings such that if higher category components are used with lower category components, the basic link and channel measures shall meet or exceed the lower category’s specified parameters.

H. Component Compliance: The provided products shall each meet the minimum transmission specifications listed herein such that no individual component will be less than specifications for permanent link and channel, regardless of the fact that tests for link and channel ultimately meet required specifications.

2.2 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Identification (Labeling) System

1. Brady 2. Dymo 3. Hellerman-Tyton 4. Acceptable alternate

B. Fire-Stop Systems

1. Hilti 2. SpecSeal 3. 3M 4. Acceptable alternate

C. Other Products as Referenced in other Division 27 Specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements

1. Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work.

B. Established Dimensions

1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, coordinate with the General Contractor to establish dimensions.

2. When approved in writing, proceed with fabricating units without field measurements.



3. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

C. Pre-installation inspection

1. The Contractor shall visually inspect all cables, cable reels, and shipping cartons to detect possible cable damage incurred during shipping and transport.

2. Visibly damaged goods are not acceptable and shall be replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General

1. Contractor shall install work in accordance with specifications, drawings, manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittal data.

B. Allowable cable bend radius and pull tension:

a) In general, communications cable cannot tolerate sharp bends or excessive pull tension during installation.

b) Refer to cable manufacturer's bend radius recommendations for the maximum allowable limits.

c) After installation, exposed cable and other surfaces must be cleaned free of lubricant residue. Use only lubricants specifically designed for cable installation.

C. Pull Strings

1. Provide pull strings in all new conduits, including all conduits with cable installed (trailer strings) as part of this contract.

2. Data and video cables can be pulled in tandem with pull strings. 3. The pull strings must move freely to prevent cable jacket/cable damage during pulls.

D. Labeling

1. Cable labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth wraparound tape markers, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations.

2. Flat-surface labels: Self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl-cloth labels, machine printed with alphanumeric cable designations.

3. Provide transparent plastic label holders, and 4-pair marked colored labels. 4. In accordance with ANSI/TIA-606-B "Administration Standard for Commercial

Telecommunications Infrastructure":

a) Install colored labels according to the type of field as per color code designations. b) Use “designation strip color-code guidelines for voice, data, cross-connect, riser,

and backbone fields”.

5. Pathway Labels and Labeling System

a) Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer b) Conduits: General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an

ultra-aggressive adhesive. Label size shall be appropriate for the conduit size. Font size shall be legible from the finished floor.



c) Inner duct: Polyethylene general-purpose tagging material attached using tie wraps.

d) Junction boxes: General-purpose label designed for powdered coated surfaces with an ultra-aggressive adhesive, trade name. Font size shall be easily visible from the finished floor.

e) All labels shall be permanent, i.e. will not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment or time.

f) Identification

1) All conduits, junction boxes, gutters, and pull boxes shall have machine-generated labels easily visible from the finished floor.

2) Conduits shall be labeled with the word “communications” and the conduit’s origination room number and destination room number.

3) The Contractor shall label conduit at each wall and floor penetration and at each conduit termination, such as outlet boxes, pull boxes, and junction boxes, or as otherwise specified in other sections.

4) Junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be labeled with identification name or number as determined by contractor and submitted for approval.

5) The Contractor shall label conduit sleeves at each wall and floor penetration.

E. Firestop

1. Provide approved fire-resistant materials to restore originally-designed fire-ratings to all wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations used in the distribution and installation for communications cabling system.

2. Install and seal penetrations (conduit, sleeves, slots, chases) in fire-rated barriers created for communications infrastructure to prevent the passage of smoke, fire, toxic gas, or water through the penetrations.

3. The firestopping material shall maintain/establish the fire-rated integrity of the wall/barrier that has been penetrated.

4. All through penetrations in a fire rated surface require a sleeve, regardless of penetration diameter or penetrating cable count.

5. Using a “ring and string” method of installing cabling for membrane penetrations in a wall cavity is acceptable, provided the solution was accepted by the Owner in writing. Code-compliant firestopping rules still apply.

6. Coordinate firestopping procedures and materials with General Contractor. 7. Sharing the pathway of other trades/utilities through compliant and non-compliant

penetrations does not remove the requirement to maintain code-compliant firestopping. 8. Provide and install removable, intumescent mechanical systems in floor chases for all

openings greater than 0’-4”. 9. Provide and install removable, intumescent, firestop bricks for all openings greater than

0’-4” where there are penetrations through walls. 10. Bricks shall be listed for insertion in fire-rated openings and require restraining materials

or apparatus as needed per manufacturers’ specifications. 11. Provide manufacturer recommended material for rated protection for any given barrier. 12. Laminate and permanently affix adjacent to chases the following information:

a) Manufacturer of firestop system. b) Date of installation/repair. c) Part and model numbers of system and all components. d) Name and phone numbers of local distributor and manufacturer’s corporate

headquarters.



13. Solutions and shop drawings/submittals for firestop materials and systems shall be presented to the General Contractor for written approval of materials/systems prior to purchase and installation.

14. Materials shall be installed per manufacturer instructions, be UL-listed for intended use, and meet NEC and locals codes for fire stopping measures.

15. The material chosen shall be distinctively colored to be clearly distinguishable from other materials, adhere to itself, and maintain the characteristics for which it is designed to allow for the removal and/or addition of communication cables without the necessity of drilling holes in the material.

16. Develop training manuals with instructions on methods of adding or removing cabling to/from firestopped sleeves and chases.

F. Within the normal environment, the installed systems shall not generate nor be susceptible to any harmful electromagnetic emission, radiation, or induction that degrades, or obstructs any equipment.

G. Expansion Capability: Unless otherwise indicated, provide spare conductor pairs in cables, positions in patch panels, cross connects, and terminal strips, and space in cable pathways and backboard layouts to accommodate 20% future increase in structure cable system capacity.

H. In the event of a breach of the representations and warranties contained herein, the Contractor, at their own expense, shall take all measures necessary to make the cabling system work and comply with the applicable manufacturer written technical recommendations and standards.

I. System Tests

1. Upon completion of the installation of the communications infrastructure systems, including all pathways and grounding, the Contractor shall test the system.

a) Cables and termination modules shall be affixed, mounted or installed to the designed/specified permanent location prior to testing.

b) Any removal and reinstallation of any component in a circuit, including faceplates, shall require retesting of that circuit and any other disturbed or affected circuits.

c) Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized.

d) The Contractor must verify that the requirements of the specifications are fully met through testing with an approved tester (rated for testing parameters listed elsewhere), and documentation as specified below.

e) This includes confirmation of requirements by demonstration, testing and inspection. Demonstration shall be provided at final walk-through in soft copy and printed test data.

2. Non-Compliant Cabling

a) Testing that shows some or all pairs of a cable do not comply with specifications, without written approval by the Owner, shall be replaced at Contractor’s expense (including respective connectors).

b) With the Owner’s written approval, the over-length cable(s) shall be excluded from requirements to pass standardized tests and shall be explicitly identified.

1) Testing is still required for non-compliant cabling. 2) The tests shall be for wire-mapping, opens, cable-pair shorts, and shorts-to-

ground. 3) The test results must be within acceptable tolerances and shall be submitted

with the Owner’s acceptance document.



3. Failed Tests

a) If tests fail, Contractor shall correct as required to produce a legitimate passing test.

b) Manipulation of tester parameters on a failing test in order to achieve a passing test is unacceptable.

c) If the Contractor is found to have manipulated or falsified any failing test result to show a “PASS” for any reason (without written notice and prior approval of the Owner), the Contractor shall be required to employ a Third-Party Testing Agent selected by the Owner to retest the complete cable plant and shall be required to pay all costs associated with this retesting.

4. Owner reserves the right to be present during any or all testing.

3.3 CLEANING

A. The Contractor will clean all surfaces prior to final acceptance by Owner.

3.4 COMPLETION INSPECTION AND PUNCH LIST

A. When the Contractor determines that the Scope of Work has been completed in accordance with the plans and specifications, Contractor shall schedule a Completion Inspection with the Owner.

B. A Punch List will be generated during the Completion Inspection containing deficiencies in need of corrective action.

C. Complete all punch list deficiencies within 10 working days. The work is not complete until all punch list deficiencies have been addressed.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE

A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted, and Owner is satisfied that all work is in accordance with contract documents, the Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system.

B. Contractor must warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein (Standards Compliance & Test Requirements).

C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and receipt of full documentation soft and hard copies as described herein.


Keesee Tract Section 270526 GMP Set Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems

Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 270526 - 1

SECTION 270526 – GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes grounding and bonding products, design requirements and installation for communications systems.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications Systems 4. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 5. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 6. Section 274116 Audio-Visual Systems 7. Section 274170 Community Access Television (CATV) 8. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections)

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The publications referenced in Section 270000 form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

B. Specific reference in specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated.

C. Conflicts

1. Refer to Section 270000.

D. Codes and Standards


1.3 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. General

1. All conductor wire, busbars and conduit shall be UL listed. 2. The communications ground system shall be independent from all power grounding except

for the connection to the building’s electrical service main grounding electrode system. 3. Power grounding and/or bonding shall not be allowed to interfere or provide any back feed

or be a conductor to the separate communications ground system source or to any communications bonded materials or equipment.

B. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) and Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT)



1. The main ground source feed for the Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB) in the MC (MDF) shall be an independent feed from the building’s electrical service main grounding electrode system, known as the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT).

2. The BCT shall be a stranded copper ground wire from the building ground system to the TMGB in the MC (MDF) sized at a minimum #4/0 unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record.

3. The BCT connections shall be low emission exothermic welds at the connecting ends.

C. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB) and Telecommunications Grounding Busbar (TGB)

1. The Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB) originates at the TMGB and shall be extended from the TMGB within the MC (MDF) throughout the building along the same route as the telecommunications backbone pathways, to the Telecommunications Grounding Busbar(s) (TGBs) in each TR (IDF).

2. The minimum TBB conductor size between busbars shall be a stranded copper ground wire one (1) AWG size smaller than the Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT).

D. TEBC and RBC

1. All cabinets and racks shall be connected by the Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC). The TEBC is a stranded copper #4 conductor from the TMGB/TGB extending along each row of racks within the room. Bond each rack with a Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC). The RBC is a stranded copper #6 conductor connected to the vertical rack bonding terminal. All connections shall be irreversible crimp connections. Route conductor so as to minimize the quantity of sweeping bends.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Section 270000


A. Refer to Section 270000.



B. The Contractor shall ship on manufacturer's standard reel sizes of one continuous length. Where cut lengths are specified, mark reel quantity accordingly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include:

B. Cable Manufacturers



1. Houston Wire and Cable Company 2. Okonite Company 3. General Cable 4. Pirelli Cable Corporation 5. Triangle Wire and Cable 6. Owner Approved Alternate

C. Electrical Service Entrance Bonding Conductor and Connector Manufacturers

1. Copperweld 2. Thomas & Betts 3. Blackburn 4. Owner Approved Alternate

D. Exothermic Connector Manufacturers

1. Erico Products (Cadweld) 2. Continental Industries (thermOweld) 3. Harger 4. Owner Approved Alternate

E. Crimp Connector Manufacturers

1. Thomas & Betts 2. FCI Burndy Electrical 3. O-Z/Gedney 4. Owner Approved Alternate

F. Telecommunication Grounding Busbars

1. Chatsworth 2. Panduit 3. Leviton 4. Owner Approved Alternate

G. Bonding Straps

1. Chatsworth 2. Harger 3. Brundy 4. Owner Approved Alternate

H. C-Type Compression Taps

1. Brundy 2. Harger 3. Owner Approved Alternate

I. Antioxidant Joint Compound

1. Chatsworth 2. Owner Approved Alternate

J. Labeling




K. Firestopping


2.2 MATERIALS

A. Communications Grounding Conductors: Copper American Wire Gauge (AWG) wire of the following sizes:

1. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT): #4/0 (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record)

2. Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB): #3/0 (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record)

3. Grounding Equalizer (GE): equal AWG as the TBB (unless otherwise sized by the Electrical Engineer of Record)

4. Telecommunications Equipment Bonding Conductor (TEBC): #4 5. Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC): #6

B. Grounding Connectors

1. Connectors shall be a copper alloy material and two-hole, double-crimp compression lug type at the connecting ends.

C. Telecommunications Main Ground Busbar (TMGB)

1. Use pre-drilled copper busbar with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors.

2. Sized for the immediate requirements and allow for 25% growth. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be 0’-¼” thick X 0’-4” wide X 1’-8”” long. 4. Contain (2) tiers of pre-drilled holes for use with standard sizes of two-hole copper

compression lugs. 5. ASTM-B187-C11000 Copper bar suitable for use with two-hole compression-type copper

lugs.

D. Telecommunications Ground Busbar (TGB)

1. Use pre-drilled copper busbar with standard NEMA bolt hole sizing and spacing for the type of connectors.

2. Sized for the immediate requirements and allow for 25% growth. 3. The minimum dimensions shall be 0’-¼” thick X 0’-4” wide X 0’-10”” long. 4. Contain (2) tiers of pre-drilled holes for use with standard sizes of two-hole copper

compression lugs. 5. ASTM-B187-C11000 Copper bar suitable for use with two-hole compression type copper

lugs.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION




3.2 PREPARATION


B. Copper and copper alloy connections should be cleaned prior to connection.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. The Contractor shall install the work in accordance with the specifications, drawings, manufacturer’s instructions and approved submittal data.

C. All work shall be supervised and reviewed by the Contractor’s on-site RCDD.

D. Installation plans and Requests For Information (RFIs) shall be reviewed by the Contractor’s RCDD.

E. General

1. Bonding and grounding procedures and components shall comply with ANSI/TIA-607-B "Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications".

2. Bonding should be accomplished such that the bonding system is integrated and compliant with NEC specifications.

3. Bonding conductors shall be routed with minimum bends or changes in direction and should be made directly to the points being bonded.

4. Bonding connections should be made by using compression copper lugs. However, for parts of the ground electrode system that are subject to corrosion, must carry high currents reliably, or for locations that require minimum maintenance, connections are made with low emission exothermic welding (see NEC Article 250).

5. Make connections to dry surfaces only. 6. Remove paint, rust, oxides, scales, grease and dirt from surfaces before making

connection. 7. Burnish clean a 0’-1” X 0’-1” area, drill, tap, apply an adequate amount of antioxidant joint

compound mixed for the metal surface types affected, and bolt conductor and connector to burnished and compounded area. Ensure proper conductivity.

8. Route bonding conductor(s) the shortest distance between bonding contact points. 9. The ground-wire connecting ends shall have a minimum amount of insulation removed at

the ground lug. 10. Do not connect ground wire in power cable assemblies to the telecommunications ground

system. 11. All grounding and bonding conductors shall be copper and may be insulated. If bare-

bonding conductors are used, isolate bonding conductors and prevent contact. 12. Antioxidant material shall be installed to separate dissimilar metals and prevent corrosion. 13. If multiple systems are involved (lightning protection systems, communications, radio and

TV, CATV, etc.), those systems shall be bonded together to minimize potential differences between the systems, per NEC 250.94.

F. Telecommunication Bonding Conductors

1. Each telecommunications grounding and bonding conductor shall be labeled at each end detailing the function and room number of its opposite end. Labels shall be located on conductors as close as practicable to their point of termination in a readable position.



Labels shall be nonmetallic and include the following text, “TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUND - DO NOT REMOVE. IF THIS CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE REMOVED, PLEASE CALL THE BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGER”.

2. Furnish and install all required bonding material, hardware, and utilize tools manufactured for this purpose.

3. The connections of the BCT, TBB, GE, TEBC, and RBC shall be made using low emission exothermic welding or hydraulically crimped with a double crimp connector. Two-hole grounding lugs are preferred for connection to the grounding bus bars.

a) All low emission exothermic welding shall be by Division 26.

b) Coordinate with the building services personnel in occupied spaces to prevent the smoke from the exothermic weld process from potentially setting off smoke/fire alarms.

4. Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit. If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in a ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds 1m (3ft) in length, the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No. 6AWG conductor, minimum.

5. The bonding conductors should be installed without splices.

a) Where splices are necessary, the number of splices should be minimized, be accessible, and be located within the telecommunications spaces.

b) Joined segments of a bonding conductor shall be connected using exothermic welding, irreversible compression-type connectors, or equivalent. All joints shall be adequately supported and protected from damage.

G. Equipment Cabinets and Racks

1. The busbar shall be installed at the base and back of each cabinet/rack for floor fed cabinets/racks.

2. The busbar shall be installed at the top and back of each cabinet/rack for top fed cabinets/racks.

3. Each cabinet and rack shall be provided with a minimum # 6 AWG ground wire. 4. Do not loop from cabinet/rack to cabinet/rack. 5. Each cabinet or rack bay against the wall shall be bottom/side ground fed from the wall.

a) Wall ground feeds/raceways to racks shall not be exposed on the walls.

b) Exception: Some cabinet or rack bays will require the ground to be fed from the ceiling raceway.

6. All ground raceways within each cabinet/rack or cabinet base and adjacent-ganged cabinet base shall be an insulated metallic flex type raceway and shall not interfere with equipment mounting frames or equipment mounting brackets.

H. Cable Runway, Cable Raceway and Support System Grounding

1. The Contractor shall provide communications cable tray and cable runway systems with a communications dedicated ground from the TGB.

2. All cable tray needs to be electrically continuous per NEC 250.96.

a) Metal raceways, wire-mesh cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal non-current-carrying parts that are to serve as an



alternate grounding path, with or without the use of supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively bonded where necessary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current plausibly to be imposed on them.

b) Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at the threads, contact points, and contact surfaces.

c) Grounding or bonding conductors shall be connected by fittings designed for that purpose to ensure adequate bonding.

3. The Contractor shall provide and install a #6 AWG ground wire to bond one end of each cable tray/runway system to the TGB.

4. For electrically non-continuous conduits that contain only grounding conductor, the Contractor shall bond the conduit and conductor together at both ends to ground to the nearest TGB with grounding bushings or ground clamps.

I. Shielded Backbone Cabling

1. The Contractor shall terminate and bond the shield to the nearest TGB or TMGB at both ends, following manufacturer’s guidelines.


A. Testing

1. Upon completion of the electrical system, including all grounding, the Electrical Contractor shall test the system for stray currents, ground shorts, etc.

2. Approved instruments, apparatus, services, and qualified personnel shall be utilized. 3. If stray currents, shorts, etc., are detected, eliminate or correct as required.


KeeseeTract Section 270528 GMP Set Pathways for Communications Systems

Pathways for Communication Systems 270528 - 1

SECTION 270528 – PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Hangers and Supports, including open-top supports (cable hooks) for communications systems.

2. Conduits and Pull Boxes for communications systems. 3. Cable Tray and Cable Runway with associated accessories and fittings for communications

systems.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications Systems 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 5. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 6. Section 274116 Audio-Visual Systems 7. Section 274170 Community Access Television (CATV) 8. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections)

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The publications referenced in Section 270000 form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.


C. Conflicts




1.3 SUBMITTALS






1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, and HANDLING


B. Conduit Storage

1. Package conduits in bundles maximum 10’-0” long, with conduit and coupling thread protectors for indoor/outdoor storage.

2. Package fittings in manufacturer's standard quantities and packaging suitable for indoor storage.

3. Protect coating on plastic-coated rigid conduit, fittings, and bodies from damage during shipment and storage.

4. Store conduit above ground on horizontal racks to prevent corrosion and entrance of debris.

5. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants. Protect plastic conduit and inner duct from sunlight. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers that may be incorporated in the work, include:

B. Cable Hooks

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Erico 3. Caddy 4. Owner approved alternate

C. Cable Tray

1. Cooper B-Line, Inc. 2. Chatsworth (CPI) 3. Hoffman 4. Owner approved alternate

D. Wire Basket Cable Tray Cutting Tool

1. Flex Tray 2. Owner approved alternate

E. Polyethylene Cable Support System

1. Erico 2. Owner approved alternate

F. Innerduct



1. Carlon Riser Guard Flexible Raceway (corrugated innerduct) 2. MaxCell (fabric innerduct) 3. Owner approved alternate

G. Measured pull tape (pull tape printed with sequential footage markings)

1. Fibertek 2. Condux International 3. Owner approved alternate

H. Labeling


I. Firestopping


2.2 CABLE HOOKS

A. Cable hooks shall be factory assembled for direct attachment to walls, hanger rods, beam flanges, purlins, strut, floor posts, etc. to meet job conditions.

B. Features

1. Cable hooks shall have a flat bottom and provide a minimum of 0’-1.625” cable-bearing surface.

2. Cable hooks shall have 90° radius edges to prevent damage while installing cables. 3. Cable hooks shall be designed so that the mounting hardware is recessed to prevent cable

damage. 4. Cable hooks for non-corrosive areas shall be pre-galvanized steel. Where additional

strength is required, cable hooks shall be spring steel with a zinc-plated finish. 5. Cable hooks for corrosive areas shall be stainless steel. 6. Cable hooks shall have a stainless steel cable latch retainer to provide containment of

cables within the hook. 7. The retainer shall be removable and reusable.

C. Factory assembled multi-tiered cable hooks shall be used where required to provide separate cabling compartments, or where additional capacity is needed.

D. Load cable hooks in accordance with manufacturer requirements and recommendations.

E. Provide capacity for 20% growth, add additional hooks as needed.

2.3 PULL BOXES, JUNCTION BOXES, AND GUTTERS

A. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements.

B. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall meet the following minimum material requirements:

1. 16-gauge steel or heavier 2. Seams shall be continuously welded and grounded smooth



3. External screws and clamps 4. External mounting feet (where applicable) 5. Oil-resistant gasket and adhesive 6. ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating inside and out over phosphatized surface

C. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be provided with bushings for conduits and/or cabling.

D. All junction boxes, gutters and pull boxes shall be securely installed.

2.4 CONDUITS

A. All conduits shall be UL listed and comply with NEC requirements.

B. Conduit Fittings

1. All fittings shall be compression or threaded. 2. Fittings shall provide a secure connection for pulling communications cables. 3. Setscrew fittings are not permitted. 4. Conduit “condulets” are not permitted.

C. Non-metallic conduits are not permitted in above ground installations. Conversion fittings are required for non-metallic (below ground) to metallic (above ground) transitions.

D. Innerduct:

1. All fiber shall be installed in innerduct unless fiber cabling is armored. 2. Shall be constructed of non-metallic material.

E. Only manufacturer’s fittings, transition adapters, terminators and fixed bends shall be used.

F. Measured Pull Tape

1. Pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant yarn with footage markers printed on the tape.

2. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1130 lbs. for 0’-1.5” and smaller conduits and innerduct.

3. Minimum average tensile strength shall be 1800 lbs. for conduits larger than 0’-1.5”.

G. Fill and Bend Radius

1. Conduit fill shall comply with NEC requirements. 2. The minimum bend radius is 6 X the conduit inside diameter (ID) for 0’-2” conduit or less. 3. The minimum bend radius is 10 X the conduit ID for a conduit greater than 0’-2”. 4. There shall be no more than two 90° bends (180° total) between conduit pull boxes. 5. Changes in direction shall be accomplished with sweeping bends observing minimum bend

radius requirements above. 6. Do not use pull boxes for direction changes unless specifically designated otherwise in the

drawings. 7. Unless otherwise noted in the drawings, conduits entering pull boxes shall be aligned with

exiting conduits.

H. Routing



1. Conduits shall be routed in the most direct route possible, with the fewest number of bends possible.

2. There shall be no continuous conduit sections longer than 100’-0” for premises conduits. For runs that total more than 100’-0”, insert junction or pull boxes so that no continuous run between pull boxes is greater than 100’-0”.

I. Penetrations

1. All conduit penetrations shall comply with all applicable fire codes. 2. All conduit penetrations in fire-rated walls or floors shall be sealed and fire-proofed to meet

or exceed the designed rating of the penetration area.

2.5 CABLE TRAY

A. Cable tray systems are defined to include, but are not limited to, straight sections of cable trays, bends, tees, elbows, reducers, crosses, wyes, vertical bends, up/down tees, cable support fittings, drop-outs, supports and accessories.

B. Install all tray types utilizing manufacturer recommended installation instructions and applicable standards.

C. Load cable tray and cable runway in accordance with manufacturer requirements and applicable standards.

D. Cable Tray Materials

1. Aluminum 2. Pre-galvanized Steel 3. Hot-dip Galvanized Steel 4. Stainless Steel 5. Yellow Zinc Dichromate 6. Pre-Galvanized Zinc 7. Electro-Galvanized Zinc

E. Cable Tray Systems

1. Wire basket (mesh) of types and sizes indicated on the drawings; with connector assemblies, clamp assemblies, connector plates, splice plates, cable drop outs, bonding accessories, and splice bars. Construct units with rounded edges and smooth surfaces.

2. Continuous mesh polyethylene cable-support system: with connector assemblies and appropriate support components. All parts shall be UL-listed. Plastic (non-metallic) parts shall have a zero detectable halogen content as substantiated by an independent test laboratory.

3. Ladder type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails) with transverse members (rungs) welded to the side rails. Rungs shall be spaced 0'-9" on center. Spacing in radius fittings shall be 0’-9” as measured at the center of the tray's width. Rungs shall have a minimum cable-bearing surface of 0’-.875” with radius edges. No portion of the rungs shall protrude below the bottom plane of the side rails.

4. Ventilated trough type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members (side rails) with a corrugated bottom welded to the side rails.

5. Solid bottom trough type trays shall consist of two longitudinal members welded to the side rails.



F. Cable trays shall have sufficient depth and width so as not to exceed a maximum 50% fill ratio, including 20% capacity for anticipated growth.

G. All straight sections shall be supplied in minimum 8’-0” lengths, except where shorter lengths are permitted to facilitate tray assembly lengths.

2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORT

A. Steel support brackets shall be galvanized steel and capable of supporting a minimum of 200 lbs with a safety factor of 3.

B. Steel support brackets shall have a removable galvanized steel retaining strap.

C. Steel support brackets shall accept 0’-3/8” (10mm) threaded rod for attachment to building structure or sub structure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 PREPARATION


B. Verify system is properly sized for cables before installation.

C. Verify that the manufacturer recommended loads are not exceeded.

D. Verify general routing and coordinate locations with other trades before installation. Layout cable runs in advance to determine quantities of cable to be installed along pathways, and to ensure non-interference from other trade installations.

3.3 INSTALLATION


B. Cable Hooks

1. Provide cable hook (j-hook) cable support system for horizontal and/or riser cabling in accessible ceiling space. Assemblies shall be complete with mounting hardware.

2. Provide threaded rod for supporting hangers when hanging from floor deck and deck members.

3. Follow manufacturers fill capacities. 4. Locate cable hooks on 4’ to 5’ centers to adequately support and distribute the cable’s

weight. 5. Suspended cables shall be installed with at least 0’-3” of clear vertical space above the

ceiling tiles and support channels.



6. For larger quantities of cables, provide special supports that are specifically designed to support the required cable weight and volume.

7. Do not support pathways or cables with the ceiling suspension system or use electrical, plumbing, or other pipes for support.

8. Cable supports shall be permanently anchored to building structure or substrates. Provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached, and that are suitably sized to carry the weight of the cables to be supported.

9. Secure and support exposed horizontal cable at intervals not exceeding 5’-0” and not less than 1’-4” (16”) from cabinets, pack pole, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals.

10. Cable sag between vertical supports for horizontal pathway shall not exceed 0’-6”. Provide at least 0’-3” cable sag between supports.

11. Painted J-hooks shall meet or exceed NEC requirements for the environment in which the product is installed.

C. Conduit and Pull Boxes

1. The Contractor shall route the conduit in approximate locations unless drawing is dimensioned for precise placement.

2. Conduit cuts shall be square. Ream ends of burrs, and remove metal shavings and cutting lubricants before conduit is connected to the conduit system.

3. For conduit embedded in concrete, coat threaded connections in conduits with colloidal rust and corrosion inhibitor and sealant. Conduit must be clean and dry and must pass standard sizing test after concrete is poured.

4. Cap unused conduits with watertight caps 5. Make conduit connections with appropriate fittings and tighten securely. 6. Use appropriate tools to install PVC coated conduit; avoid damage to exterior coating. 7. Install liquid-tight flexible metal conduit where exposed to weather, water, or other liquids. 8. Use IMC, PVC conduit, or rigid galvanized steel conduit in underground installations. 9. The Contractor shall provide fabric innerduct in all underground conduits, as indicated on

the drawings.

a) The Contractor shall use pre-lubricated, woven polyester, low friction, and high abrasion resistant fabric.

b) The Contractor shall be trained for proper installation technique by the innerduct manufacturer. The Contractor shall coordinate with the owner to demonstrate that pull ropes in each inner duct cell move freely from end to end.

D. Cable Tray and Cable Runway

1. Cut wire basket tray members square with approved cable tray cutting tool as to not leave sharp edges at cut point. Remove burrs and smooth the ends before the cut is connected to wire-mesh tray system.

2. Ensure that standard splices are designed to have less than 1 milliohm (0.0001 Ω) of resistance between connections and provide bonding between sections. Painted wire mesh tray requires the outer mask of the non-conductive surface be removed at each end of the tray prior to installing the splice to provide continuity between painted tray sections.

3. Threaded rod (minimum 0’-½” diameter) or equivalent and slotted channel shall be used for hanging cable tray between floor deck and deck members

E. Fiber Support:

1. Support vertical fiber optic cable with basket weave wire/cable grips. Support fiber riser with single weave support grip with a single offset eye.



2. Mount/attach pulling eye to a wall or ceiling deck secured hook to support/provide strain relief to riser cable. Provide a minimum 3’-0” loop of fiber prior to entering fire stopped floor sleeve.

3. Where required coil up slack fiber cable into pull box and secure with single weave support grip.

F. Clearances

1. A minimum of 1’-0” access headroom shall be provided above a cable tray. Ensure that other building components do not restrict access to the cable trays from the sides.

2. Power outlets shall not be installed in or mounted to cable tray or cable runway. 3. Provide 3’-0” of unencumbered space for every 10’-0” segment of tray. 4. Cable tray clearances

a) Motors or transformers: 4’-0” b) Power cables and conduit: 1’-0” c) Fluorescent lighting: 0’-5” d) Halide lights: 1’-0” e) Above the ceiling tiles: 0’-3” f) Access above and on one side of the cable tray: 1’-0”


A. Test system to ensure electrical continuity of bonding and grounding connections.

B. Ensure compliance with specified maximum ground resistance.

C. Refer to NFPA 70B Chapter 18 for testing and test methods.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove all unnecessary tools and equipment, unused materials, packing materials, and debris from each area where Work has been completed unless designated for storage.

B. Wipe clean all cable trays and apply appropriate manufacturer’s paint to areas that have been scratched.


Keesee Tract Section 271100 GMP Set Communications Room Fittings

Communications Room Fittings 271100 - 1

SECTION 271100 – COMMUNICATIONS ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section includes basic communications and equipment room design requirements and fittings including:

1. Equipment cabinets, racks, frames and enclosures 2. Cable management and ladder racks 3. Telecommunications service entrance pathways 4. Rack mounted power protection and power strips

B. Related Sections

1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 6. Section 274116 Audio-Visual Systems 7. Section 274170 Community Access Television (CATV) 8. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections)

1.2 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.


C. Conflicts

1. Refer to section 270000



1.3 COMMUNICATIONS ROOMS

A. Communications rooms must be dedicated to designated equipment and services:

1. Space shall not be used for storage of equipment not related to designated equipment and services.

2. Hazardous or corrosive materials shall not be stored in the space. 3. Piping, ductwork and distribution of power, not related to designated equipment and

services shall not pass through or be located within the space.



a) Foreign piping such as water pipes, steam pipes, soil pipes, sanitary drains, storm drains, A/C ducts, and other unrelated systems utilized for or containing liquids, or gases shall not be installed or pass through communication rooms.

b) With the exception of fire sprinklers, all water pipes shall be routed around communications room.

B. Each communication room shall be equipped with fire detection, fire-extinguishing system and prevention devices. Connect detection devices to base building fire alarm system. A minimum of one (1) smoke detector shall be installed in each communications room.

C. Walls shall be covered with 0’-¾” X 4’-0” X 8’-0” AC-grade plywood backboard 1’-0” AFF (smooth side to interior of room mounted vertically), capable of supporting mounted hardware and equipment.

1. Plywood shall be affixed to the studs in the walls with screws that penetrate the studs a minimum of 0’-1”, are spaced not greater than 1’-6” (18”) apart in each stud, and with screws 0’-0” from the top and bottom of plywood.

2. Plywood shall be sealed against the wall and painted on all exposed sides with two coats of flat white non-reflective paint.

3. If applicable fire-treatment verification stamps on plywood shall be left unpainted to be readable.

D. Communications room walls shall extend from floor slab to ceiling deck, with no drop ceilings installed.

E. Cable tray or ladder rack should be used to distribute cables between rooms through finished wall penetrations.

F. Cable ladder rack should be used to distribute cables within rooms, complete with cable bend limiters (drop outs).

G. To reduce static, floors should not have carpet, but be sealed concrete to prevent concrete dust from forming.

H. Communications rooms shall have only one lockable entrance door, a minimum of 3’-0” wide and 7’-0” high, that opens towards the outside of the room, and does not open into another room.

1. Doors shall be provided with a lockset for the appropriate technology key with pinned hinges and anti-pry guards.

2. Doors should have no windows or door seals. 3. Communications rooms should have no exterior identifying markings.

I. Mechanical

1. Install monitoring sensors with dedicated environmental controls operating 24 hours a day, 365 days a year in the communications rooms.

2. Provide ventilation in the communications rooms to dissipate heat generated by active devices.

3. Temperature and Humidity requirements:

a) Maintain communication rooms at an average of 60°F to 70°F, with a relative non-condensing humidity of 30% to 50%.

b) The temperature range should be maintained within ± 9°



J. Plumbing

1. If “wet” fire suppression is used, install wire cages on sprinkler heads to prevent accidental operation.

2. Do not place sprinkler heads over equipment or cabling. In the event of a leak this will protect the equipment and cabling.

3. Drainage troughs are also recommended for leakage protection.

K. Electrical

1. One manufacturer’s product is recommended for each type of installation. The mixing of different manufacturer products for one item is not acceptable.

2. No electrical feeders/branch circuits shall be placed in or run through any communications room except as required to service those rooms.

3. The Contractor shall install a slot (a UL-approved fire-rated assembly) to accommodate cable runway entry from corridor and a fire-retardant system (bricks, boards, mechanical, etc). The formed slot shall have no burrs or sharp edges. This opening in the wall will be used to pass data and voice cabling from the corridor cable tray into the communications room.

4. The Contractor shall provide uniform illumination of at least 50 foot-candles (fc) 3’-0” AFF for communications rooms located a minimum of 8’-6” AFF.

a) Light fixtures in communications rooms are to be positioned for maximum lighting. Do not install over cable tray, ladder rack, or 1’-7” (19”) standing racks.

b) Provide enough power receptacles to support equipment and service. Coordinate power requirements of active equipment with electrical designer.

L. Relay Racks

1. 1’-7” (19”) X 7’-0” relay racks are to be used for mounting and termination of inter-building and intra-building fiber optic/ copper cables and components.

a) The racks shall have adequate horizontal and vertical cable management for the 8P8C patch panels and switches.

b) Racks with active electronics shall have rack mounted power strips.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to section 270000



B. Product Standards

1. Equipment and materials shall be standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of telecommunications cabling products and shall be the manufacturer’s latest standard design in satisfactory use for at least one year prior to bid opening.

2. Items of the same classification shall be identical. This requirement includes equipment, modules, assemblies, parts, and components.





B. Coordinate layout and installation of equipment with owner's communications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier.

1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS


1.8 WARRANTY


B. At the start of the project, contractor shall register the project with the manufacturer to help insure and facilitate manufacturer’s warranty process.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. 1’-7” (19”) Floor-Mounted Equipment Racks and Support Components

1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. B-Line 3. Owner approved alternate

B. Horizontal Runway and Support Components


C. Horizontal Rack-Mount Cable Management

1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Owner approved alternate

D. Vertical Rack-Mount Cable Management

1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Owner approved alternate

E. Equipment Cabinet, Floor-Mounted

1. Chatsworth (CPI) 2. B-Line



3. Owner approved alternate

F. Equipment Cabinet, Wall-Mounted


G. Raised Floor Rack Support


H. Labeling


I. Firestopping


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 PREPARATION


B. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces.

C. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

D. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

3.3 INSTALLATION






3.5 CLEANING


3.6 ACCEPTANCE



Keesee Tract Section 271500 GMP Set Communications Horizontal Cabling

Communications Horizontal Cabling 271500 - 1

SECTION 271500 – COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This section of the horizontal cabling portion of a structured cabling system includes:

1. UTP Copper cabling 2. Coaxial cabling 3. Fiber cabling 4. Termination and patch cables

B. Provide all horizontal cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, and cross-connecting hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment including equipment located in communications rooms.

C. Related Sections

1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 6. Section 274116 Audio-Visual Systems 7. Section 274170 Community Access Television (CATV) 8. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections)

1.2 REFERENCES



C. Conflicts




1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to sections 270000







B. Storage temperature range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C)



1.7 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Labeling


B. Firestopping


2.2 ACCEPTABLE COPPER MANUFACTURERS

A. UTP Plenum Rated Cable

1. Berk-tek 2. CommScope 3. Superior Essex 4. Belden 5. General Cable 6. Owner approved alternate

B. Data/Voice Outlet Components

1. Leviton 2. Ortronics 3. Panduit 4. Systimax 5. Owner approved alternate

C. Patch Panels (24 or 48 port)



1. Ortronics 2. Leviton 3. Panduit 4. Owner approved alternate

D. Copper Patch Cords

1. Belden 2. CommScope 3. Superior Essex 4. Berk-tek 5. General Cable 6. Owner approved alternate

E. Wall and/or Rack Mount 110 Termination Blocks

1. Panduit 2. Leviton 3. Ortronics 4. Owner approved alternate

F. Faceplate for wall-mount telephones

1. Leviton 4108W-1SP 2. Panduit KWP6 3. Owner approved alternate

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Mount one laminated full-size hard copy in color of an as-built floor plan designating workstation locations, pathways, and communications room locations. Confirm hard copy size with Owner.

B. Provide clear plastic lamination serving each communication room.

C. Install the laminated drawings within a protective Plexiglas encasement on the wall of the servicing communications rooms. To ease accessibility the Plexiglas encasement shall be in either flip-down format or file folder format.

2.4 HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLING

A. Recognized cabling for providing the signal medium from the work area to the communications room shall include the following:

1. Category 5e UTP cable 2. 75 Ω coaxial cable

B. Category 5e UTP Cable Requirements

1. 23/24 AWG solid bare copper 2. UL Cable jacket shall comply with NEC Article 800 for use as a plenum cable and shall

be and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (communications multipurpose plenum)



3. Cable shall terminate on an eight-pin modular jack at each outlet. All horizontal cabling shall meet or exceed the ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components

4. Cables shall be marked as UL verified with a minimum of Category 5e rating 5. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Base band Video/Audio, Fax, Modem, Switched-

56, T-1, ISDN, RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, 10BASE-T Ethernet, Token Ring, 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100BASE-T Ethernet, 155 Mbps ATM, AES/EBU Digital Audio, 270 Mbps Digital Video, 622 Mbps 64-CAP ATM and emerging high-bandwidth applications, including 1 Gbps Ethernet, gigabit ATM, as well as all 77 channels (350 Mhz) of analog broadband video

6. The maximum horizontal cable length for Category 5e copper cable from the termination of the cable in the communications room to the outlet is 295’-0”

7. Cable shall meet or exceed the following electrical characteristics: 8. Cable shall be specified to 100 MHz and shall meet the manufacturer’s guaranteed

electrical performance and physical specifications.

C. Coaxial Cable Requirements

1. RG-11 shall be considered if distances are long; designer shall evaluate distance, bandwidth and frequency of operation.

2. Shall consist of a #20 AWG solid-copper center conductor with 95% copper braided shield. The cable shall be UL and (UL) Listed for Fire Safety and ISO 9001 Certified.

3. Characteristic Impedance shall be 75 Ω at 50 MHz

2.5 TERMINATION HARDWARE

A. Patch panels

1. Patch panels shall be rated to match installed cable plant 2. The wiring block shall accommodate #23 AWG cable conductors. 3. All modular cross connect panels shall be UL-listed.

B. Work Area Outlet

1. Universal eight-position jack pin/pair assignments 2. Jack Color:

a) White

C. Work Area Outlet Faceplates:

1. White or ivory to match electrical outlets.

2.6 PATCH CABLES

A. Verify exact quantities and lengths with Owner prior to purchase

B. Patch Cable requirements:

1. Category 5e, stranded UTP cable 2. Standard modular non-keyed, 8-position 8-conductor plug 3. 94V-0 rated 4. UL listed



5. Meets FCC Part 68

C. Provide 3’-0”, 5’-0”, 7’-0”, and 10’-0” Patch Cords at the communications room for each installed port.

1. Coordinate with Owner on the active equipment layout prior to purchase to ensure correct sizing of patch cords from patch panels to switching equipment.

D. Provide a 10’-0” Station Cord for each work area outlet port.

E. All cords shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Horizontal Cabling Section.

F. Cords shall be equipped with an eight-pin modular connector on each end, wired straight through and shall be of appropriate length for application.

G. All rated patch cords shall be round, and consist of #23 AWG copper, stranded conductors, tightly twisted into individual pairs.

H. Patch cords shall be made and warranted by the manufacturer of the cabling system installed in this project and shall meet or exceed patch cord specifications as outlined in TIA standards.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 PREPARATION


B. The Contractor shall check pathways, raceways, and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, debris, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation prior to installation.

3.3 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS


B. All installation shall be done in conformance with ANSI/TIA-568-C standards, BICSI methods, industry standards and manufacturer's installation guidelines.

1. The Contractor shall ensure that the maximum pulling tensions of the specified distribution cables are not exceeded and cable bends maintain the proper radius during the placement of the facilities.



2. Failure to follow the appropriate guidelines shall require the Contractor to provide in a timely fashion the additional material and labor necessary to properly rectify the situation.

3. This shall also apply to any and all damages sustained to the cables by the Contractor during the implementation.

C. Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with specified data cabling and the installed components and that ensure specified performance levels of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

1. Pull cables in smooth and regular motions using methods that prevent cable kinking. 2. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same

raceway/pathway. 3. If necessary, use approved cable pulling lubricant 4. Use fish tape, cable, rope, basket weave wire/cable grips, and other tools that will ensure

no damage to the media or raceway. 5. Install open cabling parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or structural members

following surface contours where possible. 6. Do not bend cable greater than a bend radius of 0’-1”.

D. Provide a 10’-0” service loop at the communications room and shall provide a 3’-0” service loop above the access ceiling or cable trays unless specified otherwise.

1. All service loops shall be a minimum of 1’-6” (18”) in diameter and be accessible for maintenance.

E. Coordinate loop placement and orientation with the technology consultant.

1. This allows for future changes or expansion without installing new cables.

F. Install cables in continuous “home run” lengths from work station outlet to specified patch panel.

1. No intermediate punch down blocks or splices may be installed or utilized between the communications rooms and the workstation outlet without written Owner permission.

G. All cable must be handled with care during installation so as not to change performance specifications.

1. Factory twists of each individual pair must be maintained up to the connection points at both ends of the cable.

2. There shall never be more than 0’-½” of unsheathed cable at either the wiring closet or the workstation termination locations.

H. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as to make efficient use of available space.

1. All cabling and associated hardware shall be placed so as not to impair equipment's efficient use of their full capacity.

3.4 CABLING METHODS

A. The Contractor shall provide cabling in accessible spaces, cable tray, (surface and/or enclosed raceway), conduits, and/or J-Hook cable support system.



1. Within consoles, racks, cabinets, desks, and counters, in accessible ceilings spaces and in gypsum board partitions where open cable method may be used.

2. Use UL or ETL listed plenum rated cable in all spaces. 3. Provide all necessary installation materials, hardware, tools and equipment to perform

insulation displacement type terminations at all data outlets, patch panels, and voice termination materials.

B. Conceal raceway and cabling except in unfinished spaces as is practical.

C. Exposed Cable

1. All station cabling shall be installed inside walls or ceiling spaces whenever possible. 2. Exposed station cable will only be run where indicated on the drawings and will only be

allowed when no other options exist.

a) Owner must approve all exceptions.

D. The Contractor shall utilize conduits/cable tray as indicated on the drawings.

E. All cabling placed above drop ceilings must be supported by cable tray, J-hooks, caddy bags or conduit.

1. The Contractor shall permanently affix cable supports to the building structure or substrates and provide attachment hardware and anchors designed for the structure to which attached and are suitably sized to sustain the weight of the cables to be supported.

a) Attaching cable to pipes or other mechanical items is not permitted. b) Cabling shall not be attached to ceiling grid wires.

2. Multiple cables are to be dressed every 5’-0” to 7’-0”.

a) Maximum cable sag between cable hooks is 3”-6”.

F. The Contractor shall route data and voice cables separately in a neat and orderly fashion.

1. No cable ties or wraps shall be used to secure the cables in the runway outside of the communications rooms. Cable ties shall be rated for the environment.

G. Keep all items protected before and after installation with dust and moisture proof barrier materials/envelopes.

H. If wiring is terminated on patch panels, data, voice jacks prior to painting, carpet installation, and general finish clean up, these jacks shall be placed in a protective envelope to ensure dust, debris, moisture, and other foreign material do not settle onto jacks’ contacts.

1. Envelope will be removed on final trim out after other trades have completed their finish work.

2. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure the integrity of these protective measures throughout the life/installation of the project.

a) Cable bundles brought into the communications rooms shall be routed and dressed in such a manner that prior to termination the cables are not subject to damage and misuse such as installers walking on the bundles that are on the floor.

b) Cable pulling force shall not exceed 25 lbs of pulling tension or cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions.



c) Do not leave cables on the floor unprotected or cable bundles hanging from the ceilings. Coil them up in a temporary manner and protect them from damage.

I. Communications room cables shall be combed and dressed in a manner as to prevent twists, “braiding” and crossed cables in the cable bundle from the communication room entrance to the termination point at the rear of the patch panel.

1. Behind the patch panel, the cable bundle shall be attached to the rear cable support bar, and shall drop out each cable in a neat, cascading manner to prevent crossed and/or interwoven cables to each patch panel port termination point.

a) Use Velcro wraps instead of cables ties for all bundling in the communications rooms.

b) Plastic/nylon tie-wraps are not allowed to permanently secure cables inside the communications room.

3.5 CABLING SEPARATION

A. Comply with TIA rules for separating unshielded copper communication and data-processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

B. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1’-6” (18”) from electrical feeders and/or branch circuit wiring including, but not limited to, light fixtures, sources of heat and EMI sources.

C. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1’-0” from auxiliary systems cabling.

D. Maintain a 1’-0” separation where cables must pass perpendicularly to electrical, plumbing, or other wiring, conduit, or piping systems.

1. Use non-conduit bushings, if necessary to maintain separation, which allow for the addition of a reasonable number of cables in the future.

E. Maintain communications pathways away from electrical apparatus such as motor driven equipment and transformers, minimum separation distance of 10’-0” is recommended.

3.6 CABLING TERMINATION

A. Terminate cables in consistent consecutive order.

B. Terminate cables onto 8P8C modular patch panels without damaging twisted pairs or jacket.

C. Arrange cables on patch panels and voice termination hardware in ascending order of room numbers and outlet numbers within rooms.

D. Provide a 10’-0” service loop for horizontal cables at each rack in communications rooms.

1. Locate loop at ceiling deck or on bottom of cable runway in minimum 1’-6” (18”) diameter.

E. Provide a 3’-6” service loop for horizontal cables at work area outlets. Locate service loop above or below data/voice outlet were vertical cable run transitions to horizontal run.

F. Maintain twists in cable pairs to within 0’-½” of termination.



G. Limit cable-bending radius to 20X the cable diameter during installation, and 15X the cable diameter after installation.

H. Start numbering at the left of the main door to the room and continue in a clockwise direction around the room.

1. The cables within the room will be terminated starting with the cables located to the left of the main door to the room and continue around the room in a clockwise direction.


A. Station Hardware

1. Flush mount jacks shall be mounted in a faceplate with back box. 2. Outlets shall not be mounted on temporary, movable, or removable surfaces, doors, or

access hatches without prior Owner approval. 3. 8P8C Jack Pin Assignments for work area outlets shall match the T-568B wiring scheme.

B. Patch panels

1. Copper cables shall be terminated in eight position/eight conductor (8P8C) modular patch panels.

2. All Modular jack panels shall match the T-568B wiring scheme.

C. Work Area Outlet

1. 8P8C non-keyed modular outlets for applications up to one Gbps and ANSI/TIA-568-C compliant for the specified transmission requirements

D. Work Area Outlet Faceplates:

1. Furnish and install blank plates in all unused ports.

3.8 SPECIAL CIRCUITS

A. The Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on the cable termination plan for special circuits, including cables to wireless access point locations, security, elevators, fire alarms, etc.

3.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING

A. Labeling system shall consist of a hand-held portable printer and labels appropriate to the application. Handwritten labels are not acceptable.

B. Fiber termination hardware (designation strip) shall have a 0’-¾” x 0’-¼” thermal transfer printable label with a permanent acrylic adhesive

C. All labels shall be permanent and shall not fade, peel, or deteriorate due to environment or time.

D. The Contractor shall provide a copy of the finalized plan in writing to the Owner representative and DataCom Design Group for review and authorization to proceed.



1. Coordinate with Owner for specifications on labeling of all hardware, cabling, and related equipment prior to any testing.

E. Labeling requirements:

1. Label cable terminations on designation strips 2. Label all cable at each terminating point. 3. Label each port of the work area outlet. 4. Cable identification numbers shall not be duplicated. 5. Label patch panels and wall mounted termination blocks in the communications rooms to

match those on the corresponding voice and data outlets.

a) The font shall be at least 0’-1/8” in height.

6. Where a wireless access point is installed above an acoustical ceiling, label the ceiling grid frame below the access point, displaying the data port number and, if applicable, the access point identification number. Coordinate labeling of grid with Owner and Architect prior to application of labels.

7. Label each distribution rack, block and other terminating equipment unit and field within that unit within 0’-4” from the block or patch panel termination. Keep labels in a neat and orderly lineup.

8. Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware within connector fields, in wiring closets and equipment rooms.

a) Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both communication and data-processing equipment, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service.

9. Post the cable schedule in a prominent location in each wiring closet and equipment room. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations.

F. Location and termination field description

1. Room location 2. Rack-mount or Wall mount 3. Termination field type

a) Specific patch panel ports versus a separate dedicated patch panel

G. Unique identifiers

1. Segregation and position on equipment rack 2. Port color-coding 3. Unique labeling

H. Documentation

1. Provide electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for project in software and format selected by Owner.

a) All labels shall correspond to as-built drawings and to final test reports.

2. All cable inventory data documentation shall be submitted in format coordinated with and approved by Owner so that data can be incorporated into existing databases.

3. Documentation shall include cable identification number, source and destination, type of cable, length of cable and number of pairs or fibers.



4. Complete cross connect documentation is required.



3.11 POST-INSTALLATION TESTING

A. Contractor shall test each pair or strand of every cable prior to acceptance. (100% PASS)

B. Contractor shall submit acceptance documentation as defined below. No cabling installation is considered complete until test results have been completed, submitted and approved.

C. Standards Compliance and Test Requirements:

1. Cabling shall meet ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 Category 5e Horizontal cabling requirements.

D. Attenuation, NEXT, PSNEXT, Return Loss, ELFEXT, and PSELFEXT data that indicate the worst case result, the frequency at which it occurs, the limit at that point, and the margin.

1. These tests shall be performed in a swept frequency manner from 1 MHz to highest relevant frequency, using a swept frequency interval that is consistent with TIA and ISO requirements.

2. Information shall be provided for all pairs or pair combinations and in both directions when required by the appropriate standards.

3. Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit.

a) Length, propagation delay, and delay skew shall be tested relative to the relevant limit.

b) Test shall also include mutual capacitance and characteristic impedance.

1) Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a ‘FAIL”.

E. Cable Test Documentation:

1. Cable test documentation shall be submitted in hard copy and electronic formats.

a) If proprietary software is used, disk or CD shall contain any necessary software application required to view test results.

b) Electronic reports shall be accompanied by a Certificate signed by an authorized representative of the Contractor warranting the truth and accuracy of the electronic report.

c) Certificate shall reference traceable circuit numbers that match the electronic record.

2. Each test record shall contain the cable ID as follows:

a) “MEDIA TYPE – SOURCE ROOM – DESTINATION ROOM – STRAND/PAIR #”, e.g. MM-MC-HC23-001.



3. Test results saved within the field-test instrument shall be transferred into an accessible database utility that allows for the maintenance, inspection and archiving of the test records.

a) These test records shall be uploaded to the PC unaltered, i.e., “as saved in the field-test instrument”.

b) The file format, CSV (comma separated value), does not provide adequate protection of these records and shall not be used.

4. Test reports shall include the following information for each cabling element:

a) Wire map results that indicate that 100% of the cabling has been tested for shorts, opens, miss-wires, splits, polarity reversals, transpositions, presence of AC voltage and end-to-end connectivity.

b) Length, propagation delay, and delay skew relative to the relevant limit. Any individual test that fails the relevant performance specification shall be marked as a FAIL.

c) Cable manufacturer, cable model number/type, and NVP d) Tester make & model, serial number, hardware version, and software version. e) Cable ID and project name f) Auto-test specification used g) Overall pass/fail indication h) Date of test

F. Cable Test Equipment

1. Acceptable testers:

a) Fluke DTX CableAnalyzer b) Owner approved equivalent

3.12 CLEANING


3.13 ACCEPTANCE

A. Once all work has been completed, test documentation has been submitted and approved, and the Owner is satisfied that all work has been completed in accordance with contract documents, the Owner will notify Contractor in writing of formal acceptance of the system.

B. Contractor’s RCDD shall warrant in writing that 100% of the installation meets the requirements specified herein.

C. Acceptance shall be subject to completion of all work, successful post-installation testing which yields 100% PASS rating, and submittal and approval of full documentation as described above. Tests with the “* PASS” (asterisk) will not be acceptable.

1. These circuits must be repaired to meet “PASS”.


Keesee Tract Section 274116 GMP Set AudioVisual Systems

AudioVisual Systems 274116 - 1

SECTION 274116 – AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This document covers the general requirements for the installation of audiovisual (AV) systems for the Ardent (Farmhouse) Apartments in Austin, Texas.



1.3 CODES

A. Execute work in accordance with best AV system installation practices, National Electrical Code, and applicable state and local codes.

1.4 REGULATIONS

A. Comply with terms and conditions of Americans with Disabilities Act, especially regarding provisions for hearing impaired and wheelchair access in control areas.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General

1. Refer to Division 1. 2. Submit in quantities, format and timetable as required by General Conditions.

B. Product Data Binders

1. Minimum number of Sets: four (4). 2. Timetable

a. Submit within thirty (30) days after award of contract. b. Submit simultaneously with Shop Drawings. c. Allow minimum of ten (10) business days for review. All sets minus one

(1) will be returned with review comments. If a resubmit is required, resubmit total quantity of complete sets. If second resubmit is required, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for expenses incurred during additional review process.

d. Review and approval of Product Data is required before equipment purchase and installation.

e. Bind product data sheets together either in GBC or 3-ring type binders.

C. Shop Drawings

1. Minimum Number of Sets: four (4). 2. Timetable



a. Submit within thirty (30) days after award of contract. b. Submit simultaneously with Product Data Binders. c. Allow minimum of ten (10) business days for review. All sets minus one

(1) will be returned with review comments. If a resubmit is required, resubmit total quantity of complete sets. If second resubmit is required, Contract shall reimburse Owner for expenses incurred during additional review process.

3. Description:

a. Shop Drawings shall be used for coordination between trades and updated as final record drawings.

b. Bind all Shop Drawings together to form set. Loose drawings will not be accepted.

c. Each drawing shall include: Project, Building, Location, Contractor Name, Architect, AV Consultant, Date and Revision Number.

d. Number and title each drawing in logical manner as a set. e. Include cover sheet with listing of all drawings included in bound set. f. Ensure that labeling on Shop Drawings match labeling on equipment. g. Minimum Scale:

1) Floor Plans: 1/8 inch = 1 foot. 2) Rack Elevations: 1-½ inch = 1 foot. 3) Plate/Panel Details: 6 inches = 1 foot. 4) Loudspeaker Details: 1 inch = 1 foot.

h. Include as a minimum:

1) Floor plans indicating locations of all AV devices, vertical risers, pull boxes, and exposed wiring. Include Device ID (PRJ, SCREEN, FRK, FB, AVP, etc., as referenced in design contract documents), as appropriate for projectors, screens, racks, floor boxes, AV plates in walls, etc.

2) Schematic diagram showing all primary and secondary devices, interconnectivity and signal flow.

3) Plate details showing size, material, finish, connectors, engraving, etc. a) Mounting detail drawings of loudspeakers, racks,

and overhead equipment. Hire services of professional structural engineer, licensed by the appropriate governing authority, to review shop drawings, building structural drawings, and any existing structures from which equipment is to be suspended. Include Structural Engineer’s stamped report with shop drawing submittal. Report shall include:

b) Itemization of items reviewed by the Structural Engineer.

c) Confirmation that proposed methods of suspending equipment as shown on the shop drawings conform to required safety factors.



d) Confirmation that building structure from which equipment is to be suspended will support equipment including required safety factors.

4) Rack elevations. 5) Complete schematic diagram. One-line diagram with detailed

descriptions of product inputs and outputs is acceptable. Include terminal strip details and cable label information. If wiring diagram spans more than three (3) sheets, additionally provide simplified block diagram of entire system on one (1) sheet.

6) Electrical power wiring diagram. Include circuit, switching, and control details.

7) Wiring diagram of grounding and shielding scheme. 8) Drawings for custom-fabricated items (i.e., plates, panels, cables,

and assemblies). 9) General construction drawings necessary for completion of work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals

1. Minimum number of Sets: four (4). 2. Bind Operation and Maintenance Manuals using either GBC or 3-ring binders. 3. Format and Minimum Information below:

a. Section 1 - System Operation.

1) Introduction/overview to system components and their functions and locations. Include a brief listing of basic system functions.

2) Complete but simple system operating instructions to accomplish basic system functions, written for non-technical personnel.

3) Certificate indicating names of Owner personnel trained by AV Contactor, date of training, name of AV Contractor representative that provided training, and name of project.

b. Section 2 - System Documentation.

1) Simplified system one-line schematic diagram showing changes made during construction.

2) Complete inventory of system components including serial numbers. Identify location (equipment rack, over stage, stored in control room, etc.) of each component.

3) Cable and terminal strip documentation including cable numbers, functions, originating locations, terminating locations, and signal levels.

4) All Shop Drawings corrected to reflect as-built conditions. 5) Other data and drawings required during construction. 6) Initial Tests and Adjustments data. 7) Final Tests and Adjustments data. 8) CD-ROM discs including all utilized manufacturer’s software and

saved copies of software configurations (configurations as established during Final Tests and Adjustments).

c. Section 3 - Manufacturer’s Documentation.



1) For each equipment model at no additional costs to Owner, even if manufacturer does not include costs of such documentation with purchase of equipment item.

2) Manufacturer’s Product Data. 3) Operating instructions. 4) Installation instructions. 5) Service information. 6) Schematic diagrams. 7) Replacement parts list.

d. Section 4 - Maintenance Information.

1) Preventive maintenance schedule letter clearly stating target dates of six month and end-of-warranty preventative maintenance inspections, and list of maintenance tasks performed.

2) Maintenance instructions including manufacturer’s recommended maintenance, recommended maintenance schedule and information concerning proper inspection, testing, and replacement of components.

3) Troubleshooting information complete with instructions for procedures during equipment failure.

e. Section 5 – Warranty Information

1) System warranty letter.

4. Provide three (3) sets on CD-R disc that include all material in Operation and Maintenance Manuals in PDF format except for copyrighted material.

5. Submit one (1) set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals at least ten (10) days before Final Tests and Adjustments procedures (minus data from Final Tests and Adjustments). This set will be reviewed by Owner and returned to Contractor. Re-submit after Final Tests and Adjustments and include data. NOTE: Do not schedule Final Tests and Adjustments or perform training of Owner personnel before submitting Operation and Maintenance Manual.

6. Submit remaining number of complete manuals as required by General Conditions within ten (10) days after return of reviewed set(s). Include Final Tests and Adjustment data, warranty period letter, and any other data not included in first submission.

E. Samples.

1. Request for Samples - Upon request, furnish samples (at no additional cost) to Owner and/or General Contractor of submitted items proposed as substitutes for specified items. Products will be reviewed to determine if proposed substitute items meet required function and quality.

2. Product Tests

a. Products submitted as samples may require testing by independent laboratory. Testing at expense of Contractor.

b. Obtain written approval of tested products before incorporating into system.




A. AV Contractor Qualifications.

1. Be established AV System Contractor, regularly engaged in furnishing and installing AV systems. NOTE: Electrical or general contracting firms responsible for completion of this work, but not meeting above requirement, shall employ services of approved AV Contractor as subcontractor to perform work described herein.

2. AudioVisual integration company personnel will be a certified Extron Control Professional Certification in order to be able to successfully configure and install an Extron Pro control system with LinkLicense.

3. Be experienced in installations of similar size and scope within last five (5) years. Submit list of four (4) (minimum) installed jobs of similar magnitude, completed within last five years. For verification, submit complete information, including project name, project address, contact person, daytime telephone number plus month and year of project completion. At Owner’s request, accompany Owner or Owner’s representative on visit to any or all example completed projects submitted.

4. Be Authorized Dealer for all major lines of equipment listed in Part 2 (Denon, Ashly, Samsung, JBL, Infinity, RTI, etc.) Must have at least one permanent staff member who is factory trained in the installation and maintenance of each major product line offered.

5. Employ personnel (at all levels of work) experienced in projects of similar size and scope. Provide list of key personnel to be responsible for each of the following aspects of work: Project Management, Technical Documentation, Control System programming, DSP programming and Leadership of Field Work (one who is present for all field work). For each identified employee, indicate number of years employed by contractor, number of years experience in assigned responsibilities, and list of previously completed projects where similar responsibilities were required.

6. Project manager assigned to this project must have a minimum of five (5) years experience in installing and integrating AV systems of similar scale. Project Manager shall also have either an INFOCOMM CTS-I or CTS-D certification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GUIDELINES

A. All active AV equipment shall be furnished by AV Contractor selected by the Owner. All active electronics shall be contractor furnished, contractor installed (CFCI).

B. Infrastructure Products – All conduits, basket tray/cable tray, pull boxes and associated parts required for infrastructure shall be installed by the electrical contractor unless specifically excluded in these specifications or drawings.

C. Performance - Regardless of completeness of descriptive paragraphs herein, each device shall meet its manufacturer’s published specifications. Verify performance.

D. Contract Documents - Drawings and specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another. In general the specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials, and the drawings establish the quantities, details, and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to in the installation of the AV system components. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, the items with the greater quantity or quality shall be provided and installed. Clarification with the owner about these items shall be made prior to the ordering and installation.



E. Quantities – All quantities are indicated on AV drawings and referenced in Part 2.3 AV Products list. Confirm quantities on final Contract Documents. If Contract Documents do not include quantities necessary to deliver complete working system, provide notification of disparity, and install required quantity of devices for complete working system.

F. Small Parts - Systems are described in terms of major products. Even if not specifically mentioned, provide and install patch cables, connectors, hardware, converters, power supplies, labels, terminals, mounting accessories etc. necessary for complete and working system meeting design intent of specifications.

G. Balanced Lines – Unless specifically directed otherwise, wire all line and microphone level circuits as balanced with respect to signal ground. For products without balanced inputs or outputs, provide high quality balancing transformers with proper level, shielding, and impedance characteristics. Assure all audio levels arriving and leaving matrix and routing switchers are equal to the manufacture’s recommended input audio level. If required, use Radio Design Labs, Inc. products or equivalent for level matching.

H. Keys - Provide two (2) sets of keys for any AV system product requiring keys.

I. Condition – Provide and install products listed in this section in factory new condition, conforming to applicable provisions of American National Standards Institute.

J. Designations - Each major product item is given unique designation (such as MIX1 for mixer number 1). The product designations are unique in this section only and may be repeated in other specification sections.

K. Security Screws - Use Bryce Security Penta-Plus button-head screws and bits to secure rack components, LCD mounts, Projector mounts and any other location deemed necessary by Owner. Use nylon washers (not provided by Bryce) to protect equipment surfaces. Account for appropriate tip wear when ordering quantity and do no use a bit beyond the manufacturer’s recommendations. Provide ten (10) additional unused driver bits and deliver to the customer after completion.

L. AV Electrical Power - Ensure that “Star” ground configuration is properly implemented by the Electrical Contractor. Ensure that ground wires from each outlet are isolated from conduit, neutrals, and each other and are each home-run back to the dedicated breaker panel for AV systems.

M. Control System Programming:

1. Touch panel functionality will be demonstrated to AV consultant (Dan Walker, with Datacom Design Group) prior to owner training. Once initial test results are provided a meeting will be scheduled with AV consultant.

2. The EDID strategy for this project is 1920x1080. 3. Program each panel to provide simple, intuitive control of all basic AV functions

including: per zone program volume levels, destination routing, AV system power, and media player transport functions.

a. Theater spaces include sources: 1) Cable television tuner, provide top 5-10 television channel icons

along with volume control, mute and manual channel input. 2) Bluetooth audio streaming from receiver (flat panel is off from

this selection). 3) Blu-ray player, configure the touch panel to leverage the onboard

streaming apps from this device (YouTube, Netflix, Vudu and



HuluPlus). Panel should provide selection arrows (up/down, left/right, tab, enter etc.) allowing residents to sign in and out of their respective accounts.

4) Touch panel will also have volume control/muting abilities for the distributed audio speakers within that space. Consult AV one-lines for detailed quantity and location of headend equipment.

4. Crestron X-Panel will be set up on a maximum of two owner’s laptop/desktops. Configure Dynamic DNS Service for Crestron Systems to support this requirement.

5. A maximum system volume will be set into the system defined at the end user training (based on DB), this is to prevent unwanted noise complaints from other tenants, please account for this programing adjustment in bid.

6. After programming is approved (after the initial test results are submitted, prior to end user training), all control system code and programming, including touch panel code and graphics, will become property of Owner. AV Contractor shall provide Owner both raw and compiled code on CD-R disc.

N. Audio System Programming – 1. The Denon Audyssey room acoustic correction, bass management,

Dynamic Volume control and DSP surround simulation will be calibrated and used for this project. Ensure that this is set in accordance with industry best practices and included within the initial test results.

2. After AV system is approved, all audio control system code and programming will become property of Owner. AV Contractor shall provide Owner both raw and compiled code on CD-R disc or USB drive.

O. AV Racks:

1. Provide blank faceplate in any area marked BLANK in drawings. 2. Provide shelf for mounting of any device for which rack mount kit is not available. 3. Provide one Panelcrafters DATCO-XXXXX-RHIM-01 designer/integrator

information plate or approved alternate per rack. Install information plate at the top of each rack unless 1RU space is not available. Contact Panelcrafters sales department to add AV Contractor graphic to the “integrator” section (approximately 8.5” x 1.75” of the right-hand side). All alternates must include AV Consultant graphic. Submit to AV designer for approval of final plate design prior to purchasing and installation.

P. AV Design Bid & Substitutions:

1. System design is around products listed in Part 2. Intent of product specification is to provide standard of quality and function for installed materials. Certain performance specifications are given to clarify job requirements.

2. Bid AV system with products specified in section below unless noted otherwise from Owner.

3. No substitutions will be allowed without prior approval from Owner specific to proposed manufacturer and model numbers.

4. Equipment listed in Part 2 is based on performance criteria to meet Owner design requirements.

5. All requested substitutions need to meet or exceed performance of devices listed in Part 2. For each request provide manufacturer’s published specifications to verify performance and explain functional and cost impact.

mailto:[email protected]



6. Evaluation and approval of substitution requests will be performed by Owner.

2.2 ROOM DESCRIPTIONS

A. Yoga Room

1. This space will have in-ceiling speakers for the centralized distributed audio system as well as a flat panel display for cable television or the input plate for user defined content. The sources for this distributed audio system will be owner defined and controlled by the managing staff. There is a wall mounted touch panel allowing for this distributed systems volume, channel selection etc. to be controlled. The distributed audio system can also provide tenant selected audio via the wall mounted Audio Input plate located beneath the keypad for control. The distributed audio system can also be controlled via the iPad app that will be configured to the Lamar Flats owner’s representative’s needs.

B. Fitness Room

1. This space will have in-ceiling speakers for the centralized distributed audio system, as well as a ceiling mounted flat panel display that cable television can be viewed. The sources for this distributed audio system will be owner defined and controlled by the managing staff. There is a wall mounted touch panel allowing for this distributed systems volume, channel selection etc. to be controlled. The distributed audio system can also be controlled via the iPad app that will be configured to the property management representative’s needs.

C. Conference Room

1. This space will have a wall mounted flat panel display allowing for tenant content to be sent to it via a table mounted interface as well as utilize high definition videoconferencing using Skype, Microsoft Lync, WebEx or any other UC application. This space will have in-ceiling speakers for the centralized distributed audio system, the sources for this distributed audio system will be owner defined and controlled by the managing staff.

D. Club Room

1. This space will have a standalone LCR surround sound system along with a wall mounted large flat panel display. The active AudioVisual components will be housed in the swivel rack, located within the millwork directly beneath the flat panel display. The LCR speakers (left, center & right) will be a passive Leon Sound bar mounted directly beneath the flat panel display. An active subwoofer will be housed within the millwork. An in-wall touch panel controller and processor will be programed to operate the standalone surround sound system as well as provide audio control for the distributed audio system within this space.

2. Also within this space are in-ceiling speakers for the centralized distributed audio system. The sources for this distributed audio system will be owner defined and controlled by the managing staff. The distributed audio system can also be controlled via the iPad app that will be configured to the Lamar Flats owner’s representative’s needs.

E. Patio



1. This space will have wall mounted loudspeakers for distributed audio selected by the management staff, volume/mute control will be provided from an in-wall touch panel just inside the door from the Club Room.

F. Business Center

1. This space will have in-ceiling speakers for the centralized distributed audio system. The sources for this distributed audio system will be owner defined and controlled by the managing staff. There is a wall mounted touch panel allowing for this distributed systems volume to be controlled or muted. The distributed audio system can also be controlled via the iPad app that will be configured to the Lamar Flats owner’s representative’s needs.

G. Leasing Lounge

1. This space will have in-ceiling speakers for the centralized distributed audio system. The sources for this distributed audio system will be owner defined and controlled by the managing staff. The distributed audio system can also be controlled via the iPad app that will be configured to the property management representative’s needs.

2.3 AV PRODUCTS

A. The following are major active and infrastructure products for this project.

1. IPAD – IPAD

a. APPLE – IPAD AIR2 (WHITE)

b. 16G WIFI ONLY

c. For building management staff, this will provide the touch panel interface for all systems within the project.

2. RCV – Receiver

a. DENON – AVR-X2200W

3. BLU– BluRay Player

a. DENON – DBT3313UDCI

4. SND – Sender

a. GEFEN – GTB-HD-DCS

5. RCR – Receiver

a. GEFEN – GTB-HD-DCR

6. AMP Type-1 – 70V Amplifier (DSP Enabled)

a. ASHLY – NE-820PE (Protea DSP) 1) Routing of the audio (via the control system) will be controlled via

mixer input mute messages per Ashly.



7. AMP Type-2 – Low impedance (8ohm)

a. Extron – XPA1002

8. NUVO – Media (RADIO) Streaming

a. NUVO – P100

9. AVP Type-1 – Audio Input Plate

a. DOUBLE GANG BRUSH (PASS-THRU) PLATE at locations behind flat panel displays.

10. AVP Type-2 – Audio Input Plate

a. Extron WPD-110-A at Yoga Room beneath flat panel display

11. EXP – Control Port Expander

a. Crestron C2N-IO

12. TUN – Cable Television Tuner (CATV)

a. OFE (Owner Furnished Equipment) - (Comcast / DirecTV / AT&T)

13. PWR – Power Conditioner / Surge Protector

a. JUICE GOOSE – IP-1520

14. PRO Type-1 – Control Processor

a. Crestron CP3

15. PRO Type-2 – Control Processor

a. Crestron RMC3

16. WCP TYPE-1 – In-Wall Control Panel

a. Crestron TSW-752 (White)

17. WCP TYPE-2 – In-Wall Control Panel

a. Crestron TPMC-3SMD

18. FPD Type-1 – Flat Panel Display

a. Samsung ED55D 55” 1080p display b. Include Chief Manufacturing LSM1U wall mount

19. FPD Type-2 – Flat Panel Display

a. Samsung UN65JS8500FXZA 65” 4K Display b. Mount with Chief Manufacturing LSM1U wall mount



20. S (Type-1) – Ceiling Speaker (Distributed Audio)

a. JBL – CONTROL 24CT MICRO-PLUS 1) With MTC-24NC new construction bracket

21. S (Type-2) – Ceiling Speaker (Distributed Audio)

a. Tannoy CMS401E

22. SUB – (Subwoofer)

a. Leon ACS8-400

23. S (Type-3) – Soundbar Speaker (L/C/R)

a. Leon Hz300A 1) With Hz-MMB new construction bracket 2) THE LEON SOUNDBAR WILL BE ORDERED TO MATCH THE

EXACT WIDTH OF THE INSTALLED PANEL AND FINISH OF THE TELEVISON BEZEL. SEND THIS FINAL CONFIGURATION DOCUMENT WITH AV SUBMITTAL FOR A&E REVIEW AND APPROVAL.

24. S (Type-4) – Surface Mount Outdoor Rated Speaker

a. JBL Control 25T (Black)

25. WRK – Wall Rack (located in telecom room for AV gear space

a. MIDDLE ATLANTIC - EWR-16-22 b. Use Middle Atlantic LVFD-16 vented locking front door c. Use Middle Atlantic VT series vented blanks for all unused spaces within

rack. d. Use Middle Atlantic U2V rack shelf to mount the internet radio player

(P100), and sender, splitter, receivers.

26. MRK – Millwork Rack

a. MIDDLE ATLANTIC –SRSR-2-14

b. Use MidAtl Cab-Cool fan(s) as appropriate to ensure optimal operating temperature for equipment within millwork rack. One will have to be placed into the top surface (painted to match the finish of the millwork). If millwork installed does not have a toe-kick that can be left out small circular cut out will be placed into the bottom of the millwork near the rear of the millwork. Coordinate this with the GC and architect, contact Dan Walker, CTS with DDG with any questions.

c. Use “U” series shelves at appropriate sizes to mount active equipment

d. Use “VT” series blanks for any unused spaces.

2.4 CABLES



A. Interconnect Wiring – All AV cables will be plenum rated per NEC.

1. All category cable interconnecting AV devices will be Extron XTP-DTP-24P 2. All HDMI cables will be Extron Micro Series (at appropriate lengths). 3. Analog Audio Plenum Rated Cable - West Penn 25291, or similar. 4. Digital Audio Plenum Rated Cable: Belden 1801B plenum-rated AES/EBU

compliant equivalent. 5. Analog Composite Video Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn 25806 or Belden

89120. 6. RGBHV Plenum Rated Cable: Belden 1283S5, or West Penn 258195. 7. Control Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn D25350. 8. Loudspeaker Plenum Rated Cable: West Penn 25226B & 25227B. 9. Shielded Cat Cable: Belden 10GX 10GX53F 10. Fiber 62.5 µm Cable: Corning 62.5/125.

B. Connectors – All AV (including microphone) connectors shall be made by Canare or Neutrik. Connectors shall be of the quantity and type as required for proper and durable operation, and signal transmission of the electrical characteristics for associated circuitry.

1. Microphone connectors: 3-conductor XLR AES/EBU compliant (for microphones in tables/lecterns, use Neutrik RF shielded connectors).

2. Control panels: XLR type with number of conductors as required. 3. Line level and left/right audio connectors: tip/ring/sleeve 1/4” phone jacks with

insulated bushings. 4. Composite video and RGBHV connectors: BNC dual crimp true 75 ohm BCP-C. 5. BNC shall be made by ADC or Kings and be HD-SDI compliant to 3 GHz. 6. Fiber: UniCam LC connectors. 7. Loudspeaker shall be Neutrik Speakon type. 8. DM Shielded Connector: DM-8G-CONN 9. Provide strain relief for each and every connector.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General Guidelines

1. Quality of Work - Perform labor to accepted industry standards and state and local codes to accomplish complete and working system.

2. Material and Labor - Provide specified products and other incidental materials, appliances, tools, and transportation required for complete and functioning systems. Provide personnel to perform labor who are skilled in techniques and can demonstrate technical knowledge AV infrastructure system installations.

3. Documents at Job Site - Keep following documents at job site during entire construction period:

a. Complete Specifications and Drawings. b. Approved Shop Drawings. c. Approved Product Data. d. Progress Set of Project Record Documents.

4. Mounting - Mount equipment and enclosures plumb and square. Ensure that permanently installed equipment is firmly and safely held in place. Design



equipment supports to support loads imposed with project safety factor of five (5) or greater. For devices hung overhead, obtain review by Structural Engineer licensed by the appropriate governing authority prior to installation.

5. Dimension Verification - Verify dimensions and space requirements to assure that proper mounting, clearance, and maintenance access space is available for system components.

6. Clean-Up - Leave project clean each day. Place debris where designated by General Contractor. Debris includes but not limited to: solder splatter, cable ends, stripped insulation, spent crimp connectors, gypsum board and ceiling tile dust, and product wrappings and cartons. After completion of installation, thoroughly clean areas worked, including non-visible areas such as equipment rack interiors, rack top panels, and inside lockable floor and wall boxes.

7. Coordinate installation of AV infrastructure and equipment with other trades in order to follow project schedule.

8. Maintain any licensing required by the appropriate governing authority to install and terminate low voltage systems.

B. Labeling

1. Equipment Labels - AV Contractor shall provide engraved lamicoid labels on front and rear of rack-mounted equipment. Mount labels plumb and square. Include schematic reference design, item name, and system or area controlled by labeled component. On program preamps and mixers, provide label for each input indicating which source is controlled by labeled channel. Unless otherwise indicated, provide permanently-mounted black labels engraved with 1/8-inch white block characters. Handwritten, self-laminating, or embossed plastic (Dymo) labels are not acceptable. Provide labels for major equipment with two (2) lines (minimum) of engraving, coded as follows:

a. Line 1: Generic name of device, such as MIXER AMPLIFIER. b. Line 2: Schematic designation of device, such as AV-MSW-1.

2. Control Labels – AV Contractor shall provide engraved label over each user-operated control that describes the function or purpose of control. Provide label of proper size to fit available space.

3. Terminal Strip Labels - AV Contractor shall label each terminal strip with unique identification code in addition to numerical label (Cinch MS series) for each terminal. Show terminal strip codes on system schematic drawings included with Project Record Documents.

4. Rear Equipment Labels - AV Contractor shall provide adhesive label on rear of equipment where cables attach, to indicate designation of cable connected at each point.

5. Cable and Wire Labels - Label cables and wiring logically, legibly and permanently for easy identification. Labels on cables shall be adhesive strip type, covered with clear heat shrink tubing. Factory stamped heat shrink tubing may be used. Hand-written or self-laminating type labels are not acceptable.

6. Cable Label Codes and Locations - Label each cable with unique alpha-numeric code. Locate cable designation at start and end of each cable run, within three (3) inches of termination point. For cable runs that have intermediate splice points, label cable with same designation throughout, with additional suffix to indicate each segment of run. Provide cable designation codes to schematic drawings included with Project Record Documents and Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

C. Power and Grounding



1. Power Coordination – Coordinate final connection of power and ground wiring to rack. Electrical contractor will provide power to audio visual systems. Before installation, verify load requirements for systems as accepted.

2. Bus Bars - Install 1-inch by ¼-inch copper ground bus bar, top to bottom in floor mounted AV racks. Ground and bond equipment chassis of each rack-mounted component without three-pin grounding plug to bus bars with #12 AWG insulated green wire using 6-32 or larger nuts, bolts, lock-washers, and appropriate NEMA connectors. Electrical Contractor (Division 16) shall provide and connect #4 AWG green insulated wire from Bus Bars to ground point in AV technical electrical panel.

D. Equipment Racks

1. Ventilation - Provide ventilation adequate to keep temperature in rack below 85 degrees Fahrenheit. Use “whisper” type ventilation fans in racks, adjusted to come on when temperature in rack rises above 85 degrees Fahrenheit, only if adequate cooling cannot be provided by Owner.

E. Wiring

1. Wiring Standards - Execute wiring in strict adherence to best AV engineering practices.

2. Field Connection Devices - Connect cable to active components through screw terminal connections and spade lugs when appropriate. For BNC connections use three-piece, dual crimp BNC properly sized for cable with insulating bushings. Wire nut or “Skotchlock” connectors are not acceptable. Do not wrap audio cable splices or connections with adhesive backed tape. Punch connectors or telephone-style punch blocks are not acceptable anywhere in the installation unless specifically authorized by Owner.

3. Run cable in ceiling plenums neatly parallel to building walls, supported every three feet to structure with plenum rated ties.

4. Raceways - Run vertical wiring inside rack in Panduit (or equivalent) plastic raceways with snap-on covers, sized to allow at least 50% future wiring. Mount raceways on full length ¾-inch flat black plywood backboards, attached to rack sides. If between-rack wiring chases are provided, Panduit raceways are not required. Horizontal wiring in rack shall be neatly tied in manageable bundles with cable lengths cut to minimize excess cable slack, but still allow for service and testing. Provide horizontal support bars if cable bundles sag. Individually bundle excess AC power cable away from rack mounted equipment with plastic cable ties. Electrical tape and adhesive backed cable tie anchors are not acceptable.

5. Accessibility - Ensure that wiring and connections are completely visible and labeled in rack. Mount termination resistors, if required, on terminal strips, fully visible and not concealed within equipment or connectors.

6. Loudspeaker Polarity - Connect loudspeakers electrically in phase, using same wire color for loudspeaker wiring throughout project.

7. Physical Damage Prevention - Take necessary precautions to prevent physical damage to cables and equipment. Damaged cables or equipment will not be accepted. Separate, organize, and route cables to restrict channel crosstalk and feedback oscillation.

8. Racks - Looking into the rack from the rear, locate AC power, control, data and speaker wiring on the left; line level audio, control, video, and RF wiring on the right. Keep several inches of space between power cables and other signals.

9. Hum Prevention - Ensure that electromagnetic and electrostatic hum is at inaudible levels. For line level signals, float cable shields at the output of the source device. Do not cut or remove shield conductors; fold back unconnected shields over cable jacket and cover with clear heat-shrink tubing. Do not obstruct cable labels.



10. Other Connections - Make connections using rosin core solder or approved mechanical connectors. Where spade lugs are used, crimp properly with ratchet type crimping tool. Solder spade lugs mounted on #22 AWG or smaller cable after crimping.

3.2 STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Power up any electronic equipment to ensure its proper functioning before its arrival onsite.

B. Ensure that materials (especially electronic and electro-acoustic devices) are protected against physical, environmental, and electronic damage until final acceptance by Owner.

C. Schedule delivery to minimize delays in the project.

D. Provide storage protection against temperature and humidity extremes, theft, vandalism, physical damage, and environmental damage.

3.3 WARRANTY

A. Refer to Division 1.

B. Warranty - Submit letter providing warranty covering labor and materials supplied under this contract. Bind in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Terms as described in General Conditions. Minimum terms as follows:

1. System - Systems shall be free of manufacturing or installation defects for a minimum period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. Clearly designate begin and end dates of system warranty period.

2. Parts and Labor - Provide parts and labor to repair defects in materials and workmanship during system warranty period.

3. Response Time - Within system warranty period, provide initial on-site service response within one (1) business day of service call. Provide resolution to any system defects within 72 hours or within 48 hours of receipt of repaired or replaced product from manufacturer.

4. Replacement Products - If any item must be removed for repair during system warranty period, provide replacement item of similar quality at no charge.

5. Repair Limit - Do not repair any piece of equipment found defective during installation or system warranty period more than two (2) times. After second repair, replace defective item with similar approved item at no additional cost to Owner.

6. Extended Manufacturer’s Warranties – Identify products with manufacturer’s warranties extending beyond one (1) year. Provide terms and conditions of such warranties.

7. Service Personnel Information - Provide name(s) and telephone number(s) of service personnel to be contacted regarding repair and maintenance.

C. Extended Warranty - Provide cost to extend complete AV system warranty from one (1) year to three (3) years. Included a list of all provided services including maintenance schedules.

3.4 INITIAL TESTS

A. Purpose – These tests are to ensure that the AV system is installed and functioning as specified, and to ensure the system is ready for Final Tests and Adjustments (described later).



B. Testing Standards – Perform testing in accordance with ANSI standards.

C. Inspection - Verify prior to beginning actual tests and adjustments on systems:

1. Proper grounding of all electronic components (through third prong of power connector or separate connection between component chassis and ground bus bar).

2. Cables dressed, routed, and labeled, connected with proper polarity. 3. Insulation and shrink tubing in place. 4. Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. removed. 5. Proper frequency settings (or modules) at crossovers and controllers. 6. All equalizer bands and tone controls set for flat frequency response. 7. Survey temperatures of each piece of equipment after four (4) hours use

(minimum). Note and report any hot equipment.

D. Electrical Power Quality - While all sound and AV system components are unplugged from electrical power outlets, AV Contractor shall turn on power to outlets, and confirm proper voltages at each outlet across the following pairs of terminals: hot and neutral, hot and ground, and neutral and ground (zero volts across neutral and ground). AV Contractor to document measurements.

E. General Function Tests - Test each piece of equipment to ensure that it performs its intended function. Include all portable equipment in tests. Intent of initial tests is to verify complete, functioning system before Final Tests and Adjustments. Correct problems found during initial testing before beginning Final Tests and Adjustments. Document whether all pieces performed intended functions; note any unresolved malfunctions.

F. Initial Tests and Adjustments Data - Submit written report of Initial Tests and Adjustments data upon completion to Owner. Include printed name(s) of technician(s) performing tests, date(s) and time(s) of tests, model and serial numbers of test equipment, results of each initial test, descriptions of problems encountered and their solutions, and statement that system is ready for Final Tests and Adjustments. Initial Tests and Adjustments Data to include signatures of technician(s) performing tests.

3.5 FINAL TESTS AND ADJUSTMENTS

A. Purpose – These tests are to be witnessed by AV Consultant and Owners Representative to determine if system is complete and functioning as designed and specified. Also, AV Consultant will perform listening and viewing tests and witness adjustments of all images for optimum clarity.

B. Timetable - Coordinate with Owner, General Contractor, and AV Consultant to schedule Final Tests and Adjustments after submittal of Initial Tests and Adjustments data.

C. System and Site Conditions – AV Consultant will witness Final Tests and Adjustments. Have systems fully functional and ready for observation and testing upon AV Consultant’s arrival. Coordinate with all trades for quiet conditions throughout the listening areas and for the duration of the test schedule. If upon AV Consultant’s arrival, systems do not meet criteria, site is not sufficiently quiet, or if Owner or AV Consultant is required to make additional trips to job site to witness additional testing or perform additional reviews of installed equipment, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for labor and expenses incurred by having incurred costs deducted from payments to contractor.



D. Test Labor - Provide technician familiar with this project’s AV systems and operation of test equipment to perform testing. Provide additional technician to assist in the tests and to perform troubleshooting, repairs, and adjustments. Include labor for these technicians to be present for one (1), eight (8)-hour day during Final Tests and Adjustments.

E. Tools - Provide standard hand tools including screwdrivers, pliers, wire strippers, nut drivers, soldering iron, and other tools appropriate for troubleshooting system problems.

F. Ladders and Scaffolds - Provide ladders and scaffolds to inspect/adjust loudspeakers and rigging points.

G. Verification of Initial Tests and Adjustments - Verify that Initial Tests and Adjustments have been performed and meet criteria. During Final Tests and Adjustments, AV Consultant may require portions of the Initial Tests and Adjustments to be repeated. Repeat measurements as requested without claim for additional payment.

3.6 FINAL ACCEPTANCE BY OWNER

A. Certificate – Submit Certificate of Final Acceptance form signed by Owner verifying complete installation and proper operation of systems upon fulfillment of all requirements and upon recommendation by Owner.

B. General Adjustments – Adjust, balance, and align equipment for optimum quality, meeting manufacturers published specifications.

C. Input/Output Jack Demonstration – Demonstrate proper performance and phase of each system input and output jack (all audio input and output jacks) as received at AV and network systems.

D. Inventory – Inventory all installed and portable equipment for correct quantities.

E. Functional Demonstration – Demonstrate operation of each function of each major piece of equipment.

F. Other Tests - Perform any other tests on any part of the AV system as requested by Owner.

G. Final Equipment Settings – Record final settings of all equalizer bands, tone controls, filters, delays, limiters, etc., including those established through computer software settings. Include descriptions of settings (including software settings) in Operation and Maintenance Manual. Include software copy of configuration file(s) in Operation and Maintenance Manual.

H. Security Inspection – Inspect equipment for security from tampering (covers, shaft-locks, etc.).

I. Review of Labels – Review installed labels on cables, equipment, controls, and terminal strips.

3.7 OWNER TRAINING

A. Provide Owner training as described in General Conditions. As a minimum, provide eight (8) hours instruction (within two (2) trips to site) regarding AV Systems operation to Owner-designated personnel. Schedule instruction time(s) with Owner to occur after completion of Final Tests and Adjustments. Coordinate with Owner in advance to schedule instruction



time. Document date, time, and attendees of the training session and include documentation in Operation and Maintenance Manuals to serve as record of trained personnel.

3.8 SUPPORT DURING OWNER’S FIRST USE OF COMPLETED SYSTEM

A. Provide personnel familiar with design, installation, and operation of each system to be present at Owner’s first use of each completed system (up to four (4) hours total in a single session). During first use of each system, respond to Owner requests for troubleshooting, adjustments, and additional training. If no one contractor employee or representative can provide expertise in all aspects of the system, provide multiple personnel for the four (4) hours per session as required. Schedule presence of personnel in advance with Owner. Should significant elements of the new system be operational prior to final completion, Owner may elect to schedule contractor presence for Owner function prior to final completion of system. Should Owner exercise this option, contractor presence will not be required at first use following final completion.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Section 274170 GMP Set Community Access Television (CATV)

Community Access Television (CATV) 274170 - 1

SECTION 274170 - COMMUNITY ACCESS TELEVISION (CATV)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section identifies the technical design, specifications, and requirements for a Community Antenna Television System (CATV)


A. The CATV Distribution System will support video and CATV communication networks.

1. The Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment and labor necessary for a complete distribution cable plant including all backbone cabling, horizontal cabling, terminating hardware, adapters, faceplates, equipment and miscellaneous hardware necessary to interconnect all system equipment.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications 3. Section 270526 Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems 4. Section 270528 Pathways for Communications 5. Section 271100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings 6. Section 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling 7. Section 274116 Audio-Visual Systems 8. Section 280000 Electronic Security (including related sub-sections)

1.3 REFERENCES



C. Conflicts


D. Codes and Standards (Most recent editions or as required in contract)


1.4 SUBMITTALS








B. Storage temperature range: -40°F to 149°F (-40°C to 65°C)



1.8 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. RG11 Coaxial Plenum Cable

1. CommScope 2. Belden 3. Mohawk 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

B. RG6 Coaxial Plenum Cable

1. CommScope 2. Belden 3. Mohawk 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

C. Wall CATV Amplifiers

1. Blonder Tongue 2. Toner 3. Owner Approved Equivalent

D. Wall CATV Taps


E. Wall Mount CATV Splitters




F. RG11 Coaxial Connector

1. AMP 2. Amphenol 3. Mohawk 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

G. RG6 Coaxial Connector

1. AMP 2. Amphenol 3. Mohawk 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

H. 75 Ω Terminator

1. AMP 2. Amphenol 3. Viewsonic Lockinator 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

I. Labeling

1. Refer to section 270000 J. Firestopping


2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Mount one laminated full-size hard copy in color of an as-built floor plan designating workstation locations, pathways, and communications room locations. Confirm hard copy size with Owner.

B. Provide clear plastic lamination serving each communication room.

C. Install the laminated drawings within a protective Plexiglas encasement on the wall of the servicing communications rooms.

1. To ease accessibility the Plexiglas encasement shall be in either flip-down format or file folder format.

2.3 HORIZONTAL CABLING

A. Recognized cabling for providing the signal medium from the work area to the communications room shall be 75 Ω coaxial cable

B. RG6 Coaxial Cable requirements



1. Quad shield, 18 AWG solid bare copper 2. Cable jacket shall comply with NEC Article 800 for use as a plenum cable and shall be

UL and c (UL) Listed Type CMP (communications multipurpose plenum). 3. Cable shall terminate with F-type compression connectors. 4. Cable shall be marked 75 Ω 5. Installed cable shall support CATV signaling up to 750 MHz.

C. Cabling Method Requirements

1. Provide cabling in accessible spaces, cable tray, (surface and/or enclosed raceway), conduits, and/or J-Hook cable support system.

2. Within consoles, racks, cabinets, desks, and counters, in accessible ceilings spaces and in gypsum board partitions where open cable method may be used, use UL or ETL listed plenum rated cable in all spaces.

3. Conceal raceway and cabling except in unfinished spaces as is practical. 4. Utilize conduits/cable tray as indicated on the drawings. 5. Examine pathway elements intended for cable.

a) Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerances, debris, hazards to cable installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

1) Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

2.4 APPLICATION OF MEDIA

A. Horizontal Cabling Requirements

1. Install cable using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with specified cabling and the installed components and that ensure specified performance levels of completed and linked signal paths, end to end.

2. Install cables in continuous lengths from outlet to specified telecom room. 3. Pull cables in smooth and regular motions using methods that prevent cable kinking. 4. Use approved cable pulling lubricant as required 5. Keep all items protected before and after installation with dust and moisture proof barrier

materials/envelopes.

a) If wiring is terminated on patch panels, data, voice jacks prior to painting, carpet installation, and general finish clean up, these jacks shall be placed in a protective envelope to ensure dust, debris, moisture, and other foreign material do not settle onto jacks’ contacts.

b) Envelope will be removed on final trim out after other trades have finished their finish work.

c) It shall be the contractor’s responsibility to ensure the integrity of these protective measures throughout the life/installation of the project.

6. Do not bind cables tightly together with tie or other wraps. Wraps shall slip loosely around cables.

a) Use Velcro wraps instead of cables ties for all bundling in the communications rooms.



7. Pull cables simultaneously if more than one is being installed in the same raceway/pathway.

8. Use pulling methods, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips that will not damage media or raceway.

9. Install open cabling parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or structural members following surface contours where possible.

10. Not bend cable greater than manufacturer’s recommendations. 11. Cable bundles brought into the communications rooms shall be routed and dressed in

such a manner that prior to termination the cables to prevent damage and misuse such as installers walking on the bundles on the floor.

a) Do not store cable slack inside rack mounted vertical wire managers.

12. Cable pulling force shall not exceed the cable manufacturer’s recommended pulling tensions.

13. When exiting runway and/or conduit via a means to ensure support of the cable, shall thereafter be supported with approved materials, and space supporting hardware to maintain performance characteristics.

B. Separation of Wires and Cabling Installation Practices:

1. The Contractor shall comply with TIA rules for separating copper communication and data-processing equipment cables from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

2. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1’-6” (18’) from electrical feeders and/or branch circuit wiring.

3. Maintain a minimum spacing of 1’-0” from auxiliary systems cabling. 4. Maintain a 0’-1” separation where cables must pass perpendicular to electrical, plumbing,

or other wiring, conduit, or piping systems.

a) Use non-conduit bushings, if necessary to maintain separation, which allow for the addition of a reasonable number of cables in the future.

5. Maintain minimum separation distance of 10’-0” from electrical apparatus such as motor driven equipment and transformers.

6. Provide all necessary installation materials, hardware, tools and equipment to perform insulation displacement type terminations at all patch panels.

7. Terminate cables in consistent consecutive order. 8. Arrange cables in ascending order of room numbers and outlet numbers within rooms. 9. Provide a 5’-0” service loop for horizontal cables at each rack in communications rooms. 10. Locate loop at ceiling deck or on bottom of cable runway in minimum 1’-6” (18’) diameter. 11. Provide a service loop for horizontal cables at outlet.

a) Locate service loop above or below outlet were vertical cable run transitions to horizontal run.

C. Coaxial Cable Requirements

1. RG-11 shall be considered in horizontal applications if distances exceed RG-6 limits. 2. Cable shall consist of a solid-copper center conductor with 95% copper braided shield. 3. Cable shall be UL and (UL) Listed for Fire Safety and ISO 9001 Certified. 4. Characteristic Impedance shall be 75 Ω.




A. Work area outlets shall consist of one RG6 cable terminated with the appropriate F-type connector mounted at elevation coordinated with architectural drawings.

B. Outlet Faceplates shall be single gang and color match all technology and electrical faceplates.

2.6 PATCH CABLES

A. Coaxial Copper

1. Provide the appropriately rated coaxial patch cables to support television connectivity from the wall plate to the device.

2. Coordinate exact length with owner prior to purchase.

a) Provide one patch cable per coaxial cable installed.

2.7 IDENTIFICATION (LABELING) SYSTEM


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

A. An approved cable preparation device or splicing tool shall be used in all splicing.

B. All outlets shall be flush mounted. Coordinate with architect and telecom cabling system contractor.

C. All CATV distribution equipment indicated in communications rooms shall be wall mounted.

D. Materials shall be consistent throughout the building.

1. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment or wiring are required, these units shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and shall be the same product with the same material, model, and manufacturer number.

E. Contractor shall structure and equip the cable and wire system to minimize vulnerability to single point of failures.

1. The Contractor will ensure that the wire and cable plant allows detection and diagnosis of problems to achieve high reliability and availability.

F. All wiring, materials, and equipment will be delivered and stored in a clean, dry space.

1. Items will be properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers and protected from damaging fumes, construction debris, and traffic until installation or job completion.

G. Labels on all wiring, materials, and equipment must show a nationally recognized testing laboratory listing.



H. All installation techniques and fixtures shall result in ease of maintenance and ready access to all components for testing measurements.

1. All external screws, nuts, and locking washers shall be stainless steel. No self-tapping screws shall be used unless specifically approved by Owner.

2. All parts shall be made of corrosion-resistant material, such as plastic, anodized aluminum, or brass.

3. All materials used in installation shall be resistant to fungus growth and moisture deterioration.

4. An inert dielectric material shall separate all dissimilar metals apt to corrode through electrolysis under the environmental operating conditions.

I. The cable pulling operation shall be performed such that a minimum bending of the cable shall occur in the unreeling and pulling operations.

1. The pulling tension shall not be allowed to exceed the maximum tension specified by the manufacturer of the cable.

2. Cables that pass through pull boxes shall be labeled and dressed in a neat fashion.

J. Jacketing and insulation shall satisfy the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listed fire-rated cable insulation requirements in all plenum areas.

K. Any pulling compound or lubricant used in cable installation shall not deteriorate the insulation or conductor(s).

1. Pulling lubricants shall be of a type that is approved by the cable manufacturer.

L. The Contractor shall provide technicians familiar with the installation to be onsite at the time that Owner connects equipment to the cable plant.

1. This support shall be for cut-over assistance and fault isolation that may be related to the cable plant.

3.2 ACCEPTANCE OF CABLE PLANT

A. Each area of construction completed and submitted as complete shall meet the following criteria under testing:

1. Plant must meet all specifications as described in these instructions. 2. Operational prints, manuals, signal logs, and as-built prints must be furnished. 3. Visual testing and signal verification will be conducted at random locations to determine

that video quality is consistent with signal levels. 4. Specifications set forth for construction of the system have been devised in order to

insure system compatibility and performance.

a) Compliance to these specifications shall be determined during periodic observances of construction.

b) All devices and the cable shall also be tested and the data shall be submitted to Owner as basis for acceptance.

c) If subsystem tests fail because of any components in the subsystem, the particular components shall be corrected or substituted with other components (with prior approval from Owner and Engineer) and the tests shall be repeated.



5. Contractor must notify the Owner prior to making any changes in submitted system design and/or installation.

6. Contractor is not to proceed with changes of any type without prior written approval from Owner.

3.3 WIRING PLAN REQUIREMENTS

A. The cable installation techniques shall be such that the mechanical and communications characteristics of the cables are not degraded at the time of installation.

1. Any special environmental requirements for equipment shall be specified.

B. Contractor will submit for approval a detailed description of the procedures and equipment used in the termination of the cabling plant.

C. Distribution of the cabling will be accomplished through cable trays, conduit raceways, ducts, core holes, extended columns, false half columns and plenums.

D. All cabling shall be run at right angles, parallel or perpendicular to the building’s structural members.

E. Horizontal cable segments will be dressed and placed in cable trays and supported by distribution rings and/or J-Hooks when individual segments leave the cable tray.

1. Where cables converge at Equipment Room locations, ladder trays, distribution rings and/or J-Hooks will support them.

2. All cable placements shall be based on the Communications and Audio-Visual drawings.

F. Contractor shall not place communications wiring in the same conduit, raceway, or J-Hook space as used for wire for electrical power distribution, or any other low voltage applications.

1. Communications pathways are exclusive and not designed or intended to be shared by any other high or low voltage applications.

G. Cable runs shall be properly supported at all times and not be allowed to run on ceiling grid. Contractor shall maintain a minimum clearance of 1’-0” from any electrical fixtures.

H. Under carpet wiring and flat wiring shall not be used.

I. Contractor shall not splice any cabling.

3.4 TESTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall perform sample tests in the presence of Owner representatives.

B. Performing the testing procedures specified herein assures that the communication cabling meets the performance characteristics specified.

1. All testing shall comply with TIA/SCTE Standards and Manufacturers. 2. If testing indicates that the performance characteristics are not met, the test shall be

declared FAIL:



a) The cable shall be modified and/or repaired accordingly. b) The failed test and any other test that may be affected by the modification and/or

repair shall be re-run. c) After all components have been installed in the cable plant, the integrity of the

cable plant shall be verified.

C. Testing shall check for continuity, length, anomalies, and approximate attenuation.

1. If subsystem test fail because of any components in the subsystem, the particular components shall be corrected or substituted with other components and the tests shall be repeated.

2. If a component has been modified as a result of the subsystem test failure, a report shall be prepared and delivered to Owner prior to re-testing.

3. The Contractor shall prepare and submit all test procedures and data forms for the pre-installation, post installation and subsystem test to Owner.

D. Testing and test equipment will be provided by the contractor to test and to certify 100% operational condition of all materials and equipment including:

1. Cables 2. Wiring 3. Terminals 4. Connections

E. Contractor shall prepare and submit all test procedures and data forms for the pre-installation, post installation and subsystem test to Owner.

1. The test procedures shall have Owner approval before the tests.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION, LABELING, AND DOCUMENTATION

A. Contractor shall label all termination devices, from workstation outlet to patch panel.

1. The contractor will mark each unit with permanently attached markings, which will not impair the cable, wiring, equipment, or present a hazard to maintenance personnel.

2. Cables shall be identified at all cable termination points.

B. If changes occur prior to acceptance testing that alter the documentation previously furnished, the Contractor shall formally update and re-issue the relevant documentation to all parties designated including Owner’s Engineer.

C. Owner and/or Owner’s designate will review all documentation for ac-curacy and completeness and may reject substandard submittals.

D. Contractor shall establish, maintain, and deliver complete system documentation, including:

1. Documentation procedures 2. Operational information 3. Configuration information 4. Historical records 5. Drawings



E. Contractor shall provide three sets of documentation for each product utilized. The documentation shall include:

1. Pamphlets 2. Product materials 3. Operation manuals 4. Technical specifications

F. Contractor shall establish cable records during the installation.

1. These cable records shall be computer readable (ASCII, MS-Word, MS-Excel) and provided to Owner in hardcopy and electronic formats.

2. Records shall include distribution cable number, duct paths, and workstation location.

G. The Contractor shall provide and install identification markers on all inside cables, wiring terminals and frames, so that they can readily be distinguished and referenced to the cable documentation.

3.6 WIRING METHODS

A. Contractor shall provide and install adequate service loops for all equipment.

B. Contractor shall provide and install new and unused wire and cable as required by the manufacturer of specified equipment items or by these specifications.

1. Any cable that does not travel within conduit must be equivalently specified and meet the National Electric Code, state, city, and local building fire codes.

C. Contractor shall route cables and wiring within equipment racks and cabinetry according to function, separating wires of different signal levels (line level, amplifier output, AC, etc.) by as much physical distance as is possible.

D. Contractor shall neatly arrange and loosely bundle all cable with hook and loop type ties.

E. Contractor shall provide and install cables and wires in continuous lengths without splices between terminations.

F. In each and every case, contractor shall terminate cables and wires with the proper connector required for the associated operation of the equipment to which it is connected.

1. Contractor shall not connect cables to equipment without the proper connector.

G. Contractor shall provide and install all wires, cables, and connectors (mechanical crimp type only) that are needed to support installation.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. Contractor shall provide and install equipment grounding connections for Television Broadband Distribution System, and tighten connections to comply with the tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.



B. Contractor shall ground equipment to eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.

C. Contractor shall ground and bond all racks and associated equipment to ground bus bar.


A. Manufacturer's Field Services

1. Contractor shall provide services of a duly factory authorized ser-vice representative for this project location to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and the pre-testing, testing of the system.

B. Inspection

1. Contractor shall make observations to verify that units and controls are properly labeled and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.

C. Testing

1. Contractor shall rectify deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such deficiencies at Contractor’s expense.

a) The Contractor shall also verify by the system test that the total system meets the specifications and complies with applicable standards.

2. Contractor shall inspect and test the completed systems for compliance with all specifications, including data rates, storage capacity, communication with all viewing locations, reporting capabilities, etc.

3. Contractor shall provide and install the system to be free of short circuits, adjacent channel interference, RF noise, and other problems that could cause the quality of the video signal to degenerate.

4. Inject a modulated signal into the amplifier to distribute to CATV locations to verify quality of service.

5. Arrange with Owner representative minimum 1 week prior to this QOS procedure for attendance during testing for Owner to verify quality of service.

3.9 WARRANTY

A. Contractor guarantees all equipment, labor, materials, and workman-ship furnished as required by General Conditions of Agreement and Supplemental General Conditions.

1. The warranty will commence from either the date of final system acceptance or the date of the Certificate of Project Substantial Completion, whichever occurs last.

B. Contractor and the material and equipment manufacturers will warrant the system for parts and labor for one (1) year.




A. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor will clean the system components and protect them from damage and deterioration.


Keesee Tract Section 280000 GMP Set 12/15/2015 Electronic Security

Electronic Security 280000 - 1

SECTION 280000 - ELECTRONIC SECURITY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PROJECT SUMMARY/OVERVIEW

A. This document covers the general requirements for work to be performed to provide electronic security and surveillance for the project.

B. The contents of this document, along with related drawings and other documentary material, are critical to the security of this project and Owner and shall remain secure and confidential.

1. Confidential information shall not be deliberately or inadvertently disclosed to anyone other than the Contractor's personnel and subcontractors who require disclosure to perform their portion of the work.

2. This confidential information shall be tracked to ensure that copies are accounted for and properly destroyed when no longer needed to perform the work.

C. The security systems shall consist of the following integrated subsystems as specified herein:

1. Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 2. Video Surveillance 3. Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 4. Wire and Cable

D. Provide complete turnkey systems with the exception of those items noted within this specification as being provided by others.

E. Related Sections include:

1. Section 087100 Door Hardware 2. Section 142000 Elevators (including related sub-sections) 3. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 4. Section 270000 Communications (including related sub-sections) 5. Section 281000 Electronic Access Control 6. Section 282300 Video Surveillance 7. Section 282600 Telephone Entry, Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 8. Section 283100 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Upon completion of commissioning testing and Owner acceptance, DataCom Design Group bears no liability or responsibility for the continued proper operation of the installed systems.

B. The Items described herein shall not be modified or substituted without consent of DataCom Design Group and/or the Owner.

C. Electronic security systems integrator (security subcontractor) manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by the Contractor, Architect, Owner or other parties affected by the work of this Section 280000.



D. If the manufacturer of security devices or connecting hardware has supplied post manufacture performance data, copies of such are to be kept for inclusion in the documentation and made available to the Owner upon request.

E. All materials are to be new unused and of the latest series of model number, unless otherwise indicated by the Owner or security system designer.

F. All security integrator personnel must be manufacturer certified and capable of an installation that falls under the manufacturer's guidelines necessary to obtain a manufacturer warranty.

1. The integrator shall provide all components/materials essential for a complete and functional security access and surveillance system.

G. Security integrator shall issue a two (2) year warranty on installation and workmanship.

H. These Specifications and Drawings are intended for bidding purposes only, No part shall be copied or used for any purpose other than bidding on this project.

1. This package shall be contractual upon bid award.

I. Drawings and Specifications are to be used in conjunction with one another and to supplement one another.

1. In general Specifications determine the nature and quality of the materials and tests, and drawings establish the quantities, details and give characteristics of performance that should be adhered to in the installation of the security system components.

2. If there is an apparent conflict between the drawings and specifications, or within the specifications themselves, the items with greater quantity or quality shall be estimated and installed.

3. Clarification with the Owner/Designer about these items shall be made prior to purchase and installation.

4. Questions regarding the Specification or system requirements should be directed in writing to DataCom Design Group or the Owner.

J. Security integrator shall adhere to Division 1 general requirements and written security Specifications and Drawings within this construction package and shall be responsible for complying with all local, state and federal laws or regulations applicable to the work being performed, even though said law, rule or regulation is not identified herein.

K. Security integrator shall arrange and pay for any inspections required by the public agencies having jurisdiction in the area.

L. The security contractor shall procure and maintain for the duration of this agreement, insurance against claims for injuries to persons or damages to property which may arise from, or conjunction with, the performance of the work hereunder by the security integrator, his agents, representatives, or employees.

1. The security integrator shall pay the cost of such insurance.

M. The security integrator will respect and protect the privacy and confidentiality of the Owner, his employees, processes, products, and intellectual property to the extent necessary, consistent with the legal responsibilities of the State of South Carolina and the Owner.

N. If required the security integrator shall sign a non-disclosure agreement and abide by its requirements to keep confidential all information concerning bid documents and this Project.



O. Furnish submittals and manuals in accordance with Division 1.

P. Furnish a detailed material list complete with suppliers (distributors) list of components and distributors name, address, and phone number.

Q. Refer to Specifications issued by Architect, Division 1, for Project and cost payments.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification. The publications are referred to in the text by basic designation only.

B. Specific reference in Specifications to codes, rules, regulations, standards, manufacturer’s instructions, or requirements of regulatory agencies shall mean the latest printed edition of each in effect at the date of contract unless the document is shown dated.

C. For conflicts between referenced requirements and contract documents comply with the one that is more stringent.

1. Federal, State, and Local codes, regulations and ordinances 2. NFPA 101: Life Safety Code 3. NFPA 72: National Fire Alarm Code 4. NFPA 730: Guide for Premises Security 5. NFPA 731: Standard for the Installation of Electronic Premises Security 6. National Electric Code (NEC), latest edition 7. Building Codes (UBC) (IBC), latest editions 8. Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSHA) 9. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 10. Local Governing Authorities Having Jurisdiction 11. Underwriters Laboratory (UL) Applicable Standards for Safety and Security 12. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) Applicable Standards 13. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) Applicable Standards 14. Client standards for Security Systems

D. Related Documents

1. Security Drawings 2. General provisions of contract 3. Uniform general conditions 4. Supplementary general conditions 5. Architectural plans & specifications 6. Requirements of Division 1 7. Electrical / Mechanical / Telecommunications specifications and plans.

1.4 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM WORK

A. Furnish and install all materials, tools, equipment, and services for all electronic security/surveillance devices to provide functioning systems in accordance with performance requirements specified and any modifications resulting from reviewed shop and field coordinated drawings.

1. Access Control System



a) This system replaces the typical mechanical key controlled door lock with a door locking system that uses an access card as the access credential.

b) The system includes an electric door-locking mechanisms, card reader located adjacent the door.

c) Typical system configuration is card or schedule controlled entry with free exiting.

2. Video Surveillance System

a) This system is used to provide video surveillance through the use of cameras of security sensitive areas and target items.

b) The system shall allow for the viewing and recording of images.

3. Telephone Entry, Emergency Intercommunications and Duress Systems

a) Telephone Entry System

1) This unit typically is a flush wall mounted enclosure with lockable hinged cover, twelve key telephone keypad, LCD display, and a duplex hands free speakerphone.

2) The system may be configured to provide facility access control, and to dial facility telephone extensions.

b) Duress Buttons

1) These buttons, also known as panic buttons, are installed in locations where potential personal safety or security threats exist.

2) Depressing the button sends a silent priority alarm signal to assigned monitor with location and specific alarm information

3) The panic button is usually located in the knee space underneath a desk or service counter.

c) Emergency Phone / Intercom / Call Stations

1) The device typically is a distinct box or pole with a call button. 2) Depressing the call button puts the individual in direct voice contact with

assigned monitor along with specific location information.

B. RACKS AND ENCLOSURES

1. Wall mounted enclosures, data gathering panels, and power supply panels shall be installed as per manufacturer’s requirements.

a) Coordinate pathways and power with Electrical and Telecommunications Contractors

b) Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for all control consoles, equipment racks, cabinets, and enclosures not provided by others in accordance with contract documents.

c) Completely coordinate with work of other trades to avoid duplication in purchasing. d) Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary

or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

2. The installation of the relay racks/cabinets for Electronic Surveillance shall be by the Telecommunications Contractor.



a) Coordinate locations with G.C.

3. The installation of the relay racks/cabinets for Electronic Surveillance shall be coordinated with the Telecommunications Contractor and G.C.

4. The designated security space will provide an area reserved for rack and wall mounted security equipment.

a) The rack area allows for vertical relay rack(s). b) Backboard wall area of 8’-0” X 8’-0” shall be reserved for wall-mounted components. c) Cable tray/ ladder shall be by the telecommunications contractor and is provided to

facilitate cable access into both wall and rack mounted equipment.

C. Provide all supplementary or miscellaneous items and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound and complete installation.

D. Drawings are representative and show general arrangement of systems and equipment, except when dimensioned or detailed.

1. For exact locations refer to dimensioned architectural drawings.

a) Field measurements take precedence over dimensioned drawings. b) Field verify locations and arrangement of all systems and equipment. c) Coordinate all work with other trades and Contractor.

E. Circuit Supervision

1. Supervise all signal and data transmission lines, links with other systems, and sensors.

a) Indicate circuit and detection device faults with both protected zone and trouble signals.

b) Initiate an alarm in response to opening, closing, or shorting of a signal or data transmission line.

F. Electronics systems work as specified in this Section and Sections 281000, 282300, 282600 shall include:

1. A project kick-off/pre-submittal meeting with the Architect, Designer, and Contractor to review security design package.

a) Additional participants shall include:

1) Division 8 subcontractors 2) Division 14 subcontractors 3) Division 26 subcontractors

2. Preparation of pre-installation submittals, including point-to-point wiring information for security equipment to interface to work by others prior to start of any installation work. Include lock permit requests in submittals for review.

3. Furnishing and installation of all security devices, components and accessories. 4. The furnishing and coordination on installation of special back boxes for security equipment

and field devices as required. 5. Equipment Racks and Enclosures shall to be furnished and installed by the Security

contractor.



a) Coordinate location, size and positioning of racks and enclosures with telecommunications contractor.

6. Furnishing, installation and termination of all copper wiring and cabling including any special purpose wire and cable for electronic security systems.

a) Coordinate all network and fiber optic cable interface provided by telecommunications subcontractor.

7. Coordinate raceway and power distribution systems provided by Division 26. 8. Provide and install 12/24 VAC/DC input power to all field devices as required. 9. Coordination with other trades and Owner required to facilitate the installation of the

security equipment including:

a) Division 08 (doors) b) Division 26 (power, raceways, and fire alarms) c) Division 14 (elevator controls) d) Division 27 (telecommunications network interface).

10. Wiring and termination of electrified door hardware by security subcontractor shall be concurrent with the installation of these electrified components by the door hardware subcontractor.

11. Programming of all security control equipment and prior coordination with the Owner’s security and telecommunications personnel.

12. Preparation of “As-Built” documentation. 13. Warranty service for completed work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to Requirements of Division 1.

B. Pre-Installation Submittal Requirements

1. Submittals for electronic security shall be complete and submitted at the same time.

a) No partial submittals will be accepted for review. b) Allow 2 weeks for consultant review of submittals.

2. General Requirements

a) A functional description of each system. b) All cable and wiring types for each device type used. c) Certification that lock wiring and access control systems requirements have been

coordinated with electrified door hardware, fire alarm systems, automatic door controls, and overhead door controls specified in other sections and other packages.

d) Power supply points listing with devices and maximum loads to prevent overloading. e) Battery backup calculations to show load and back-up times for UPS and power

supplies with batteries. f) Equipment schedules listing all system components, manufacturer, model number

and quantities of each. g) Qualifications and proof of work history (with references).

3. Product Data Cut-sheets



a) Complete manufacturer’s technical data including manufacturer warranty information, descriptive literature, illustrations, and installation instructions for all components included within this project indicating compliance with applicable referenced standards, size, dimensions, model number, electrical characteristics, support requirements, connection requirements and all applicable information verifying that submitted components comply with Contract Documents.

4. Shop Drawings

a) Floor plans necessary to identify specific device locations, cable routes and quantities, cable types, riser locations, and references to installation details and diagrams.

b) Riser diagram showing routes between floors or other areas that are not easily identified on the floor plans.

c) Security One-line diagrams showing all input and output points of the system.

1) The Contractor shall make any corrections required by the consultant team, file with him two corrected copies and furnish such other copies as may be needed.

2) The consultant’s approval of such drawings or schedules shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from drawings or specifications, unless he has in writing called the Architect's attention to such deviations at the time of submission, nor shall it relieve him from responsibility for errors of any sort in shop drawings or schedules.

d) Release of CAD Files

1) Contractor may request to utilize DataCom’s AutoCAD floor plan files for assistance in producing shop drawings.

2) Request shall be made by signing DataCom’s "Agreement for Release of CAD Files" letter.

5. Warranty

a) The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements described in the WARRANTY section.

6. Qualifications

a) The Contractor shall provide the appropriate documentation to comply with the requirements described in the QUALITY ASSURANCE section.

C. As-Built drawings shall be in current AutoCAD format, same version as used by the Architect.

1. Dimensions and scale of the drawing sheets submitted shall match the size of the drawing used for the contract documents, and shall include the following.

a) Utilize normally recognized drafting procedures that match AutoCAD standards, Architect, and Designer guidelines and methodology.

b) The As-Built drawings shall incorporate all changes made to the building identified in, but not limited to, Addenda, contemplated change notices, Site Instructions or deviations resulting from site conditions.

c) Dimensioned plan and elevation views of all security components. d) Cable routing paths of security cables to identified infrastructure pathways. e) All rack, cabinet, and enclosure locations and labeling thereof.



f) One-line diagrams of equipment/device interconnecting cabling of the security systems.

g) Standard or typical installation details of installations unique to Owner’s requirements.

h) Submit one soft and one hard copy with project deliverables within 30 days of project completion.

D. Security integrator shall provide three (3) paper copies and one (1) electronic copy (PDF format) of a properly indexed O&M Manual at the conclusion of the project, which will include, but not be limited to the following requirements:

1. Ring binder with project title, properly indexed, and contractor’s name on cover and spine including:

a) Sequence of operations, design philosophy, and specific functions b) System block diagram c) Equipment list including:

1) A brief description 2) Model 3) Total number of each item used in the project.

d) Camera schedule including:

1) Number 2) Location 3) Camera model/manufacturer 4) View 5) Lens 6) Power source 7) Multiplexer/input 8) Settings entered on site

e) Manufacturers’ data sheet and O&M manual for associated equipment. f) Maintenance requirements for equipment, inspections and preventative

maintenance schedules. g) As-built drawings for each floor plan layout and rack and wall elevation layouts. Each

drawing shall show:

1) Cable type and identifier 2) Actual cable routing pathway 3) Device number (camera, etc.), 4) Device input/output number.

h) Final test data (measured video levels, day & night camera snapshots in JPEG format and other significant operating parameters).

i) List of system associated mechanical locking keys with key codes and tamper resistant hardware types.


A. Electronic security systems integrator (security subcontractor) shall meet the following minimum requirements.



1. Have successfully completed three (3) projects of similar size and complexity that have been in proper operation for a period of one (1) year.

2. Technicians shall be factory trained and certified in specified systems. 3. The Project manager and supervising/lead technician shall have been regularly engaged

in the installation and testing of the products specified for not less than five (5) years and maintain manufacturer certification.

4. The security integrator must maintain an operating facility in the local area (50 mile radius) of the Project location to provide service to the Owner for the warranty period.

a) At the Owners request for service, the security integrator shall dispatch a service technician to the location to affect the required repairs or adjustments.

5. The contractor shall maintain a spare parts inventory necessary to resolve component failures of the system.

a) Refer to individual specification section for a list of specifically required parts provided to the owner and stored on site. These parts will become the property of the owner.

1) At the end of the warranty period the security integrator shall test the owner’s spare parts and repair or replace as needed to bring the parts up to proper operation.

B. Security integrators desiring approval must comply with Division 1 requirements.

C. Security integrator must be cognizant of site conditions, verify locations of new and existing equipment, and determine exact requirements for connection and interface.

1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Attend and/or arrange a scheduled pre-installation conference prior to beginning any work of this section.

1. Agenda

a) This venue is to ask and clarify questions in writing related to work to be performed, scheduling, and coordination with the Project manager/Owner representative and consultant.

2. Attendance

a) The security project manager/supervisor shall attend meetings arranged by General Contractor, Owner’s representatives, and other parties affected by work of this document.

b) All individuals who will be installers of the electronic security system and equipment in an on-site supervisory capacity, including project managers and lead installers, shall be required to attend the pre-installation conference.

c) Individuals who do not attend the conference will not be permitted to install, or supervise the installation of, any component of the security system.

1) This includes supervisors, project managers, and lead installers of this project.



1.8 POST INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. At the time of substantial completion the contractor shall call and arrange for a post installation meeting to present and review all submittal documents to include but not be limited to As-Built Drawings, Warranty paperwork, etc.

1. Attendees to be invited shall include:

a) Project manager/Owner representative b) General Contractor c) Other trades that the GC deems appropriate.

2. At this meeting the contractor shall present and explain all documentation, asking for feedback on its completeness.

3. Any discrepancies or deviations noted by and agreed to by participants shall be remedied by the contractor and resubmitted within one week of the meeting.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Equipment and components shall be delivered properly protected and undamaged with original containers, packaging, and labels intact.

B. Store, handle, and protect all related materials and equipment in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Provide additional protection during handling as necessary to prevent breaking, scraping, marring, or otherwise damaging products or surrounding areas.

D. Equipment and components shall be protected from the weather, humidity, temperature variations, dirt, dust, or other contaminants.

1. Equipment damaged prior to system acceptance shall be replaced at no cost to the owner.

E. Protect all equipment and components that are to be installed from theft, vandalism, or use by unauthorized persons.


A. Security integrator is responsible for conducting a site survey prior to the commencement of work to determine locations of all existing security devices and verify the proposed locations of the new components to be installed.

B. Security integrator will coordinate all work through the Contractor and schedule work to cause as little interference or interruption of existing services as possible.

C. Security integrator will arrange and pay for all necessary permits, licenses, and inspections.

1. Security integrator shall prepare all information necessary to obtain a permit for Electronic Locking Mechanisms in compliance with the Owner requirements.

D. Verify with Division 26 installer all conduits and special back box requirements in a timely manner.



1.11 WARRANTY

A. See requirements in Division 1 Specifications.

B. The Security Integrator shall warrant all completed work, including all materials and labor, to be free from defects in design, workmanship, and/or materials for a period of two (2) years from final acceptance date.

1. System acceptance is defined as the completion of all functional performance testing and the resolution of all punch list items.

C. Warranty Service

1. In the event that defects in the materials and/or workmanship are identified during the warranty period, the contractor shall provide all labor and materials to correct the deficiency.

2. All service work shall be performed by factory certified technicians. 3. All warranty service shall include the replacement of all parts and or components as

required to restore normal system operation.

a) If parts or components need to be repaired, a loaner will be supplied and installed until the part or component can be repaired and reinstalled.

4. Immediately following a warranty service request, the Contractor shall provide written documentation to Owner which details the service work completed, cause of trouble, and any outstanding work required to restore a complete and normal system.

D. Warranty service requests shall be responded to within 4 hours of notification with a qualified service technician on site.

E. All repairs shall be completed within 48 hours upon site arrival.

1. If the failure exceeds 48 hours, the Owner reserves the right to require the contractor provide on-site manufacturer support at no additional cost to Owner.

F. Extended warranties on equipment components offered by the manufacturer shall be passed through to the Owner.

1. Warranty provisions shall be fully transferable only at the direction of the Owner, in the event that ownership of the installed security systems is transferred.

1.12 SYSTEMS STARTUP AND TRAINING

A. After all systems have been tested, accepted and turned on for operation, the Security integrator shall provide "User Training" to Owner personnel.

1. The onsite training shall cover all newly installed electronic security components, devices and systems. The training classes shall total a minimum of four hours for up to three people of the Owner’s choosing.

2. Two (2) separate training sessions will be conducted, one for system operators and one for system administrators.

3. The contents of the manuals will include:



a) Title page with subject, system name, owner’s name, and an owner approved confidentiality notice.

b) Table of contents. c) Manual that details system and sub-system operation. d) Manuals that details system administration procedures and tasks. e) Manuals that fully detail all programming commands.

4. Provide three Bound hardcopy System Operation training manuals and one electronic copy (PDF format).

5. Provide two Bound hardcopy System Administration training manuals and one electronic copy (PDF format).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer’s are shown in individual specification sections.

B. Equipment manufacturers and model numbers indicated in individual specification sections are identified as minimum equipment requirements.

C. All substitutions shall meet or exceed these minimum requirements and must be approved by the Owner/Architect prior to purchase.

D. All manufacturers’ equipment shall be available through a nationally recognized supplier network.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Provide security fasteners on all equipment, device plates, etc. within public areas.

1. Allen head with center pin, hardened steel. 2. Provide four (4) fastener tools to Owner.

B. Equipment installed in exterior applications shall be fitted with fasteners and exposed surfaces of stainless steel or other corrosion resistant material.

C. All materials and equipment used must be new and unused, prime quality products.

D. All equipment or components installed on the exterior of a building where the equipment is subject to adverse weather/elements shall be enclosed in weatherproof enclosures.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE

A. All wire and cable shall be U.L. approved for its intended application and shall meet or exceed manufacturer’s recommendations for the components connected.

B. All conductors and cable shall meet individual security system manufacturer specifications.

1. Provide shielded conductors and cable as required by the manufacturer or as required to provide for interference-free signals.

2. Color coding shall be accomplished by using solidly colored insulation.



a) Grounding conductors, where insulated, shall be colored solid green or identified with green color as required by NEC.

C. Increase conductor sizes on cables as required to be consistent with circuit current ratings, length of wire runs, and manufacturers’ recommendations.

1. Alarm device field wiring shall be in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s specifications.

2. Low voltage power circuits shall use conductors as required by the equipment manufacturer’s specifications.

3. Plenum rated cable shall be used as required by code.

D. Follow requirements as outlined in Division 27 Sections on Structured Cabling Systems (including pulling, terminating, and testing) for all telecommunications UTP cables.

1. Intra-building data communications circuits shall utilize UTP cable as specified in Telecommunications specifications.

E. Coaxial Cable

1. RG-59U Coaxial Cable at 75 Ω with minimum center conductor of 20AWG solid Copper Center Conductor and dual braid shield shall be used for lengths up to 750’-0”.

2. RG-6/U Coaxial Cable at 75 Ω with minimum center conductor of 18AWG solid, bare copper and overall bare copper braided shield shall be used for cable runs more than 750’-0”.

3. All Coaxial Cable shall never be subjected to a bend less than a 0’-6” radius. 4. Coaxial cable connectors shall consist of three-piece crimp BNC connectors. 5. Coaxial cables with copper coated steel center conductors shall not be acceptable. 6. All Coaxial Cable runs shall have a service loop of 20’-0” to compensate for any final field

modification.

a) The cable shall be bundled and wrapped neatly in the above ceiling.

F. Patch Cables

1. Provide pre-manufactured patch cables (cable, connectors, boots, etc.) as required to connect security systems to voice and data communication outlets.

2. Patch cables shall be certified for their specific use to meet or exceed applicable industry specifications.

3. Provide cable lengths as necessary to neatly route cables through cable management systems and other cable organization systems.

4. Provide connectors as required for proper termination.

a) Provide boots for connectors where applicable to prevent snagging.

G. The minimum conductor sizes are for distances as per the manufacturer’s specifications from security device to security panel.

1. The contractor shall size the conductor accordingly for longer runs. 2. Minimum Conductor and Cable Types and Sizes.

a) Alarm device field wiring shall be 18/20 AWG stranded copper conductors. b) Low voltage power circuits will use 18 AWG stranded copper conductors.

1) Increase conductor gauge consistent with circuit current requirements.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. All personnel working on this project shall be experienced, highly skilled installers with a minimum of three (3) years work on similar type projects.

B. Changes in location of any work require the written approval of the Architect/Owner prior to initiation.

C. Changes in indicated sizes shall not be made without the written approval of the Owner/Architect.

D. Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

E. All systems shall be designed and installed to provide 24 hour a day, 7 days a week operation.

F. Primary pathways

1. All security cabling run from rack/enclosure head-end equipment to security devices shall follow primary telecom routing pathways.

2. Security wire non-UTP cabling shall be kept separated from the data cabling 3. Security wire non-UTP cabling shall be routed in bridle rings secured to the outside of the

telecom tray where applicable.

a) Arlington loops or J hooks shall be used where telecom pathways are not present

4. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.

a) Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated. b) Check loading and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings. c) Do not cut or weld to, building structural members.

G. Secondary pathways

1. Arlington loops or J hooks shall be used for secondary pathways 2. Security wire non-UTP cabling shall be kept separated from the data cabling 3. Provide all necessary anchoring devices and supports.

a) Use structural supports suitable for equipment, or as indicated. b) Check loading and dimensions of equipment with shop drawings. c) Do not cut or weld to, building structural members.

H. Coordinate extension and connection to commercial, emergency/UPS power circuits provided by Division 26.

1. Make power connections in accordance with Division 26.

I. Shielded and/or screened cables shall be grounded per the hardware manufacturer’s instruction.

1. Single point shield grounds shall be grounded at the field panel feeding the device or sub panel and insulated from ground at the termination end of the cable.

J. All installation of security systems shall be complete at least thirty calendar days prior to occupancy.



3.2 RACK AND CABINET INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate rack/cabinet installation with Telecommunications contractor and follow provisions in Section 281000.

B. After racks are installed, install all required components to support rack mounted security equipment.

1. Extend UPS/emergency power to rack mounted equipment as required.

C. Install all conduits, back boxes, wire and cable management as required for interconnection of security equipment, data gathering panels, power supply enclosures, and distribution panels in the Security room.

D. Extend commercial/emergency/UPS power circuits as required to security components as required.

E. Neatly lace and dress all cables in each rack.

1. All wiring and cable shall be properly supported. 2. Utilize suitable cable management devices, no tie-wraps for UTP structured cabling

allowed.

3.3 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Equipment Cabinets and Racks

1. To provide electrical continuity between rack elements, paint-piercing grounding washers shall be used where rack sections bolt together, on both sides, under the head of the bolt and between the nut and rack.

2. A horizontal busbar shall be installed at the top and back of each rack for floor fed cabinets/racks.

3. A vertical busbar shall be installed to the rear of the right-hand side rail with thread-forming screws to ensure metal-to-metal contact.

4. Each rack shall be provided with a minimum # 6 AWG insulated ground wire. 5. Do not bond racks serially (loop from rack to rack). 6. Each rack bay against a wall shall be bottom/side ground feeds from the wall.

a) Wall ground feeds/raceways to racks shall not be exposed on the walls. b) Exception

1) Some rack bays will require the ground to be fed from the ceiling raceway. Refer to drawings for details.

7. The Contractor shall provide a ground strap for each equipment rack and bond to the nearest Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB) connection, Furnish all required bonding materials and hardware manufactured for this purpose.

a) Follow NEC bonding procedures/specifications.

8. All ground raceways within each rack shall be an insulated metallic flex type raceway and shall not interfere with equipment mounting frames or equipment mounting brackets.

9. Each ground feed shall provide proper installation allowances and penetration depths to provide conversion fittings from solid metallic to insulated metallic flex conduit raceways.



10. To bond each rack to ground, burnish clean a one square inch area, drill, tap, apply an adequate amount of antioxidant joint compound mixed for the metal surface types affected, and bolt connectorized conductor to burnished and compounded area.

a) Ensure proper conductivity.

B. Cable Runway, Cable Raceway and Support System Grounding

1. The Contractor shall provide communications cable tray and cable runway systems with a communications isolated ground from the TBB.

2. All cable tray needs to be electrically continuous per NEC 250.96.

a) Metal raceways, wire-mesh cable trays, cable armor, cable sheath, enclosures, frames, fittings, and other metal non-current-carrying parts that are to serve as an alternate grounding path, with or without the use of supplementary equipment grounding conductors, shall be effectively bonded where necessary to ensure electrical continuity and the capacity to conduct safely any fault current likely to be imposed on them.

b) Any nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating shall be removed at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces, and be connected by means of fittings designed so as to make good bonding points.

3. The Contractor shall provide and install #6 AWG insulated ground wire to bond one end of each cable tray/runway system to the #2/0 TBB.

4. For electrically non-continuous conduits that contain only grounding conductor, the Contractor shall bond the conduit and conductor together at both ends to ground to nearest TGB with grounding bushings or ground clamps.

3.4 Labeling

A. Provide labeling for all security equipment components using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels.

1. Coordinate with Owner on numbering/labeling scheme.

B. Provide labeling for all security cable/wiring using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels.

1. Coordinate with Owner on numbering/labeling scheme. 2. Label all cables/wiring on both ends. 3. At multi conductor cable terminations label each conductor. 4. At a minimum, each cable/wire label shall designate:

a) Origination Point b) Alarm point description c) Opening description (if applicable)

C. Provide a complete cable/wire identification plan/list with project completion submittal.

D. Conduit and junction box exteriors may be identified with unique color paint, but shall not be identified with written words that easily identify the function of the conduit and boxes.

3.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS



A. 120 VAC emergency power dedicated to security will be provided. (By Electrical Contractor)

B. Back-up power for all equipment and devices shall be for at least 4 hours unless otherwise specified.

1. When generator backup power is available, provide a UPS, rated to maintain the load for a minimum of 15 minutes for all 120VAC equipment.

C. Provide a UPS to support 120% of the required load to allow for future load expansion and age related deterioration of the battery performance.

1. Provide the necessary data connection, hardware and software to remotely monitor the UPS

2. Provide user configurable computer operating system shutdown capability

D. All electronic locks shall be 12/24VDC (By Division 08)

E. Connect to AC power and provide UL listed power supplies and transformers to distribute low voltage power to the system components as required.

1. Provide uninterrupted battery backup power for the duration required above.

F. All equipment connected to AC circuits shall be protected from power surges.

1. The devices shall be installed and grounded per manufacturer instructions. 2. Equipment protection shall meet requirements of ANSI C62.41. 3. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

G. All non-fiber optic data circuits that serve devices exterior to the buildings will be protected by surge protectors at the device and the termination.

1. The devices shall be installed and grounded per manufacturer instructions. 2. Equipment protection shall meet requirements of ANSI C62.41. 3. Fuses shall not be used for surge protection.

3.6 Testing

A. Ensure that all provisions and requirements of this specification are met.

1. Verify through inspections, demonstrations and tests.

B. Perform required tests to demonstrate workmanship, operation, and performance.

1. Conduct tests with Architect/Owner and if required, inspectors of agencies having jurisdiction present.

2. Arrange test dates in advance and give all parties a minimum of 48 hours notice.

C. Repair or replace equipment or systems found defective or inoperative and re-test until 100% satisfactory results are obtained.

D. Verification inspections will be made of all equipment components and installations for proper functioning of locking hardware and lock controls, mounting/placement of sensors, and cameras, etc. to guarantee requirements of the Contract Documents are complied with.



1. The Owner’s quality control representative shall have the opportunity to witness all inspections, or to conduct installation inspections of his own.

3.7 Functional Performance Test

A. The Functional Performance Test (FPT) will be conducted at the end of the project and prior to system acceptance by the Owner.

1. The security integrator will provide all necessary staff and communications needed to fully test all functions of the system.

2. The contractor will submit for approval by the Architect and Owner, a comprehensive test plan that will include testing of every function on every door and security device thirty (30) days prior to the scheduled start of the test.

3. The system will not be considered for acceptance prior to the successful completion of the FPT and completion of punch list items.

B. Pre-Testing

1. Following installation and prior to the FPT, the security integrator shall individually test each component and field device and verify the proper functioning of each component within a particular sub-system.

a) The contractor shall also test each sub-system until all detection zones, alarm assessment components, alarm reporting, surveillance and display components; along with access control functions have been verified.

b) Prior to the FPT all deficiencies must be corrected. c) After sub-system verification is complete, test the entire system to assure that all

elements and subsystems are compatible and function properly as a complete system.

C. Upon completion of the outlined tasks and tests the security integrator shall schedule the FPT with the Architect and Owner.

1. The security contractor must demonstrate that the security system components and sub-systems operate together as a system and meet specification requirements in the “As-Installed” operating environment.

2. On conclusion of the FPT the test report document will be submitted to the architect for approval.

3. The FPT will be observed by the architect’s and Owner’s representatives. 4. The FPT may be stopped at any time by these representatives if they believe the failure

rate is too high or the system is not performing to contract document requirements. 5. The FPT will only resume when all deficiencies have been corrected. 6. Retesting will be required of all failed tests.

3.8 System Operational Test

A. Upon completion of the FPT, conduct a formal test to be known as the System Operational Test (SOT), in which all components and sub-systems of the security system are demonstrated to operate error and failure free together as a system.

1. This test is to be performed over a continuous seventy-two (72) hour period. 2. A formal test plan and test procedures shall be prepared by the security subcontractor and

submitted to the Owner/Architect for approval.



3. The Security integrator must demonstrate that the system components and sub-systems meet specification requirements in the “As-Installed” operating environment and operate error and failure free for the duration of the test.

4. If a system failure does occur, the failure must be documented and repaired, after which the seventy-two hour SOT period will restart.

B. In the event that the Owner, Architect, or Contractor are required to witness a retest at a later date because the Security integrator is not properly prepared to conduct the acceptance tests or because the systems being tested have failed such tests, which shall be solely determined by the Architect or Owner witnessing the tests, the cost of witnessing additional tests shall be borne exclusively by the Security integrator.

1. Costs are to be based on time and materials at the established rates of the Architect or Owner.

Keesee Tract Section 281000 GMP Set 12/15/2015 Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection

Electronic Access Control and Intrusion Detection 281000 - 1

SECTION 281000 - ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL AND INTRUSION DETECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY/OVERVIEW

A. This section provides specifications for the installation of Electronic Access Control (AC), Intrusion Detection (ID), and related components.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 087100 Door Hardware 2. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 3. Section 270000 Communications (including related sub-sections) 4. Section 280000 Electronic Security 5. Section 282300 Video Surveillance 6. Section 282600 Emergency Intercommunications and Duress 7. Section 283100 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection

1.2 REFERENCES

A. See Section 280000 Electronic Security.

1.3 SYSTEM COORDINATION

A. The Security Integrator shall completely coordinate all relevant work of other trades/systems including, but not limited to:

1. Door Hardware 2. Fire Alarm System 3. Elevator Control System 4. Electrical Systems(s) 5. Telecommunications System(s)

B. Electric Locking Mechanisms

1. The security integrator and door hardware contractor shall coordinate all door hardware, door and door frame design.

2. The security contractor shall verify all specified door hardware is appropriate for the security application and verify the sequence of operations for each access controlled opening.

C. Elevator Control System

1. The security integrator shall verify the elevator security requirements and coordinate with the elevator installer to ensure the appropriate system interfaces are in place.

D. Fire Alarm and Life Safety

1. The security integrator shall coordinate the access control system design with the life safety consultant to insure compliance with applicable codes and requirements.



2. This includes, but is not limited to:

a) Fire alarm interface b) Fail safe/fail secure locking mechanisms c) Delayed egress

1.4 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General Requirements

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for a complete security system as indicated and in accordance with provisions of the contract documents.

2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

3. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 for General Requirements.

a) In the event of a conflict between the provisions of this Section and Division 1, the more stringent provisions shall apply.

4. All system devices and components included shall be compatible.

B. The project shall be equipped with a stand-alone system maintained by the Owner.

1. All work required within the project for extension of the AC/ID system to the existing system head end shall be furnished and installed by the project security contractor.

C. The AC/ID system will support the needs of the project in accordance with these specifications.

1. The AC/ID system shall have the capability for future expansion to support the security needs of the completed complex.

D. Provide an AC/ID/Surveillance computer workstation as indicated on the drawings.

1. The expanded AC/ID system will be connected via the owner’s Local Area Network (LAN) to control and monitor equipment in the new locations.

2. The security subcontractor is responsible to coordinate setup and programming to ensure that all systems and alarm points report correctly at the remote location.

3. Refer to Section 282300 for additional requirements.

E. The AC/ID system shall be interfaced with the Fire Alarm system (by others) as required to comply with all building code requirements.

F. Security integrator shall furnish and install a system compliant ID credential printer complete with card stock and consumables to produce specified number of credentials.

1. The printer must be capable of double sided printing and applying laminate with a security feature to both sides of card.

G. Emergency/UPS power will be utilized to power the AC/ID system’s computer workstation (client) at the Security head end equipment location.

H. Emergency/APS power will be utilized to power the AC/ID system’s Data Gathering Panels and control components as required throughout the facility.



1.5 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The AC system will consist of card readers, door position switches, and request-to-exit sensors operating in conjunction with associated electric door hardware.

1. Card readers and adjunct devices shall be provided as shown on the drawings.

a) Provide card readers, Data Gathering Panels <DGP>, and alarm input and output devices connected to the security management system via Local Area Network (LAN).

b) The security integrator shall coordinate network and IP address requirements with Owner to identify the Media Access Control (MAC) address (Layer 2) of each provided device, the location to be installed, and the port configuration needed for communication.

c) Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for a complete system as indicated and in accordance with provisions of the contract documents.

d) Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

B. Card readers will work such that upon presentation of a valid AC card, the unique card data shall be transmitted to an associated control panel where the data is compared to an authorized user database and access is approved or rejected accordingly.

1. A valid authorization will activate operation of the electric lock and shunt the door position switch. The alarm shunt will not affect supervision of the detection circuit.

2. Coordinate with owner on card format and other pertinent details.

C. Card readers shall support 13.56 MHz smart card technology.

D. Door position switches at card reader controlled location serve to indicate the open/closed status of the associated door and shall establish the basis for reporting a door-propped or unauthorized entry condition.

1. Security contractor is responsible for coordinating the contact configuration (SPDT) (DPDT) and rating for door position switches, and for connection of switches with the AC.

2. The Division 08 contractor shall be responsible for providing all flush mounted door position switches as indicated on drawings.

E. Electrified door hardware for card reader controlled doors will include electrified locksets, electric exit devices, and electric power transfer as shown on the drawings.

1. All electrified door hardware shall be provided under the work of Division 08 unless otherwise noted.

2. Security subcontractor shall provide all security cables and, low voltage power supplies for operation of electrified door hardware associated with card reader controlled doors.

F. Request-to-exit (REX) devices at designated card reader controlled doors shall cause the associated door position switches to be shunted.

1. The alarm shunt shall not affect the supervision of the alarm detection circuit. 2. Electrified Lockset shall have an integral REX switch. 3. Electrified Exit devices shall have an integral REX switch. 4. Magnetic Locks shall have a Passive InfraRed (PIR) motion sensor REX device.



a) Wire the PIR to the Door REX Input. The configuration on this motion shall be non-resettable and activate for only 2 seconds.

b) A second set of output contacts for the REX motion sensor shall be wired in series with the power to the lock, disconnecting power to the lock when motion is sensed.

c) The PIR REX shall be mounted and the sensor positioned to avoid detection more than three feet from the door and at the door bottom sweep.

1) Deter under door spoofing attacks by pointing the sensor away from the door threshold. Position the sensor to detect motion at the door handle or door push plate.

d) Connect to REX switch in exit device (by Division 8).

1) Coordinate with Division 8 to ensure proper REX switch configuration 2) Wire the REX switch as described for the above motion sensor to

disconnect power to the lock and activate the REX input on the DGP.

e) Doors with out exit devices, a UL listed double pole pushbutton exit switch shall be provided as a redundant REX device.

1) It shall be wired as described for the above motion sensor to disconnect power to the lock and activate the REX input on the DGP.

2) Locate within 6’-0” of the door push-plate/handle.

G. Card Reader Controlled Automatic Sliding ‘Storefront’ Doors

1. Interface the Card Reader Control Point to the Automatic Sliding ‘Storefront’ Doors to activate/deactivate locking solenoid and to enable and disable the outside motion detector.

2. The egress motion detector shall always unlock and open the sliding door and send a signal to the system to shunt the notification of an intrusion alarm.

H. Card Reader Controlled Elevators

1. The system shall provide for card reader control of Elevator Floor select buttons. 2. When the card reader is in Card Access mode, a properly programmed card shall enable

the floor select buttons allowing the user to select the appropriate floor select button for access.

3. The contractor shall provide a relay for every floor in every cab.

a) Example: 3 floors and 2 cabs = 6 relays.

4. The system shall allow button selection for 5 seconds per valid card read. 5. When the card reader is in free access, the floor select buttons shall operate normally.

I. Remote Door Release Button

1. Designated doors equipped with electric locking devices that can be released from a remote location through the use of a door release push-button.

a) The momentary push-button shall be interfaced with the request-to-exit signal of the associated card reader to provide momentary release of lock and momentary door alarm shunt.

J. Door Management Unit (DMU)



1. Designated door will be equipped with a DMU to sound a local alert when doors are propped open beyond a field programmable time delay.

a) The DMU audible alert will be a recording prompting people in the area to close the door.

b) The DMU shall report a door propped alarm to the AC/ID after a field programmable delay. The delay will be sufficient for people in the area to correct the security violation.

c) The DMU shall have a key operated switch to bypass the alarm and report the bypass condition to the AC/ID.

1.6 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM

A. A series of field installed alarm initiating devices shall be connected to the ID system so that status changes of the devices are transmitted to the security management system.

1. Provide Data Gathering Panels <DGP>, alarm devices, and keypads to be connected to the security management system via Local Area Network (LAN).

2. The security integrator shall coordinate network and IP address requirements with Owner to identify the Media Access Control (MAC) address (Layer 2) of each provided device, the location to be installed, and the port configuration needed for communication.

B. Motion Detector

1. Provide dual technology (microwave and infrared) to prevent false alarms.

a) Specific model depends on application and mounting requirements. b) One motion detector per zone, do not wire in series.

C. Glass Break Detector

1. Contractor will need to provide compatible glass break tester for device being installed. 2. One glass break detector per zone, do not wire in series.

D. Tamper Switches

1. Typically closed tamper switches to monitor the secure status of all DGP’s, power supplies, terminal cabinets, power distribution units, and other Security System cabinets and enclosures.

2. Fasten tamper switches within the cabinet to provide no access to the switch and fasteners when the cabinet is closed.

3. Provide independent monitoring of tamper conditions for each cabinet.

a) Include the number of tamper switches in the total alarm input figures.

E. Provide ID keypads conveniently located near areas being protected so as to allow devices to arm and disarm.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow provisions of Section 280000 additional requirements.

B. Field Test Reports



1. Upon completion and testing of the installed system, test reports shall be submitted in booklet form and electronic media showing all field tests performed on, and adjustments made to each/any component and all field tests performed to prove compliance with the specified performance criteria.

2. Indicate and interpret test results in written form and verbally to owner/DataCom for compliance with performance requirements at a pre-scheduled meeting.

C. Battery calculations to show the expected loads and backup duration for power supplies and UPS devices for all active AC/ID equipment.

D. Security Contractor is responsible to prepare and submit as required to the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) any and all information to obtain an Electronic Locking Mechanisms permit.


A. Follow provisions of Section 280000.

B. Spare Parts:

1. Provide two (2) spare components for every model and configuration of electronic components and devices used on the project as spare parts inventory.

a) The security integrator will turn over the new and unused components and devices to the owner at project closeout.





1.11 WARRANTY


B. All devices and components shall comply with applicable U.L. standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. AC System Platform Software

1. AMAG 2. DSX 3. Hirsch 4. Lenel OnGuard



5. Maxxess Systems, Inc. 6. Software House 7. S2 Security 8. Schneider Electric

B. System Platform Server (By Owner)

1. Dell 2. Hewlett Packard 3. IBM 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

C. Workstation (refer to 282300)

2.2 ACCEPTABLE ACCESS CONTROL MANUFACTURERS

A. Access Control Data Gathering Panels <DGP>

1. AC/ID System compatible 2. Owner Approved Equivalent

B. Proximity Card Readers <CR>

1. HID 2. XceedID 3. Owner Approved Equivalent

C. ID credential printer (with card stock and consumables to produce 250 credentials)

1. Fargo 2. Nisca 3. Datacard 4. Magicard 5. Owner Approved Equivalent

D. Door Position Switches <DP> (By Division 08)

1. Concealed Magnetic Door Position Switch

a) Sentrol 1076D b) Magnasphere MSS-19C/L / MSS-25C/L c) Detection Systems, Inc d) Owner Approved Equivalent

2. Surface Mount Door and Hatch Position Switch

a) Sentrol 2500 b) Magnasphere MSS-3XXS c) Owner Approved Equivalent

3. Overhead Door Position Switch

a) Sentrol 2200 (floor) b) Sentrol 2300 (side)



c) Owner Approved Equivalent

E. Door Management Unit (DMU)

1. DSI ES4600 product family 2. Owner Approved Equivalent

F. Electric Locking Mechanism Power Supply

1. Altronix 2. Alarm-Saf 3. LifeSafety Power 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

G. Electric Locking Mechanisms (By Division 08)

1. Sargent 2. Schlage 3. Von Duprin 4. Locknetics 5. Owner Approved Equivalent

H. Electric Power Transfer (By Division 08)

1. Security Door Controls (SDC) 2. Schlage 3. Von Duprin 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

I. Uninterruptible Power Supply <UPS>

1. APC Smart-UPS 2. Minute-Man II UPS 3. Owner Approved Equivalent

J. Wire & Cable

1. Belden 658AFS 2. Windy City 3. General Cable 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

2.3 ACCEPTABLE INTRUSION DETECTION MANUFACTURERS

A. ID System Platform Software

1. Honeywell 2. UTC Caddx 3. Bosch 4. Tyco 5. DMP 6. Owner Approved Equivalent

B. Intrusion Detection Data Gathering Panels <DGP>




C. Keypads


D. Tamper Switches

1. Sentrol 3010 2. Owner Approved Equivalent

E. Dual Technology Motion Detectors


F. Glass Break Detectors


PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Power Supplies

1. Power supply requirements

a) A switch and on/off indicator within the power supply cabinet. b) Four hours of sealed gel battery backup to provide continuous operation during

power failure.

1) Provide batteries as required to provide specified battery backup time for a fully loaded power supply, regardless of the connected load.

c) A battery charger to maintain the battery. d) Low battery and power fail contacts to monitor the status of the input power and

the battery.

1) Connect each power supply low battery and power fail alarm as a separate alarm input into DGP.

e) Key lockable wall mount metal enclosure with tamper switch.

2. Additional DGP Power Supply Requirements

a) The DGP power supply provides power only to DGP’s and shall not provide power for locks or any other low voltage device.

3. Additional Electric Locking Mechanism Power Supply Requirements



a) Fail secure electric locking mechanisms shall remain locked during power failure and fire alarm conditions.

b) Connect fail safe locking devices in accordance with applicable life safety codes to unlock automatically under the following conditions:

1) Loss of power to the power supply 2) Failure of the power supply 3) Fire alarm activation

c) Provide power distribution boards with independently fused output relays and fire alarm control panel interface.

4. Additional Device Power Supply Requirements

a) Provide device power supplies for other security system devices requiring power (e.g. card readers, local alarms, motion sensors, etc.)

b) Provide power distribution boards with independently fused outputs.

B. Video Surveillance System Integration

1. Automatic Video Call-up

a) All alarms shall call up all cameras in the area of alarm to the screen of the ACID alarm operator workstation to allow for operator assessment of the alarm.

2. Pre and Post Alarm Video

a) The operator shall be able to view up to 10 seconds of video before the alarm and 30 seconds after the alarm for all cameras associated with the alarm.

b) This feature is to be integrated with the operator alarm notification to assist in alarm assessment.

c) This feature shall be displayed as an option on the alarm notification screen and will not require operator to make a manual video search.

3. Recording

a) All cameras whose field of view that include images of the area affected by the alarm, shall be recorded when an alarm is detected for use in forensic analysis, including the pre and post alarm video.

4. Duress and Emergency Intercommunications Integration

a) Calls from emergency intercoms/phones with cameras shall provide the above video call-up and the pre and post alarm video capabilities.

C. Tamper Resistant Screws

1. Provide appropriate screw heads for each application (e.g. countersunk heads for recessed cover plate screws, flat head screws for standard junction box covers, etc.).

2. The security integrator shall provide Torx® tamper resistant screws for:

a) Junction boxes located above doors b) Junction boxes located below ceiling height and/or within reach of hatch ladders c) Security device cover plates d) Surface mounted door position switches and armored cable



3.2 ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

A. Enclosures shall be lockable with a tamper switch and installed in a manner to be accessible with clearance to fully open enclosure door.

B. All security panels shall be wired through a dedicated power supply with battery backup.

1. Power to the data gathering panels is to be hardwired utilizing EMT or rigid conduit in accordance with the Electrical specifications.

2. A circuit from the Fire Alarm panel must be installed to each lock power distribution panel.

C. Enclosures shall be installed on designated wall fields in a neat and compact manner to allow for future growth.

D. Enclosures shall be sized to allow for 20% growth in each panel.

E. All panels and boards shall be installed in enclosure(s) suitable to their environment and have sufficient size and orientation to include all system components.

F. Each panel shall be labeled accordance with Owner standards.

The label for each panel shall be posted on the exterior of the panel door.

a) Each panel shall have a list of devices connected to it located on the inside cover. b) A detailed device layout drawing will be located on the inside of the panel door in an

appropriate sleeve and keeper.

3.3 FURTHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to provisions of Section 280000.

B. Furnish and coordinate installation of all special device back boxes and ACID field devices as shown on the security drawings and as specified in this section.

C. The exact installation locations of all equipment shall be coordinated and verified with the Contractor prior to installation.

1. Subcontractor shall notify the Contractor if any location appears to be unsuitable.

D. Provide low voltage power supplies for electric locking devices and ACID devices and components as shown on the security drawings and specified in this Section.

E. Coordinate with the Telecommunications Subcontractor for data network connections, IP address requirements, and telephone circuits as required.

F. Prepare all systems for user operation.

1. The security system must be complete and ready to operate prior to Owner final acceptance of the system.

G. Coordinate with the Owner for all system programming requirements.



H. Perform database programming as required to support the card reader, alarm point, surveillance system integration, and control panel configuration as required.


Keesee Tract Section 282300 GMP Set 12/15/2015 Video Surveillance

Video Surveillance 282300 - 1

SECTION 282300 - VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section provides specifications for the installation of a Video Surveillance (CCTV) System and related components.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 2. Section 270000 Communications (including related sub-sections) 3. Section 280000 Electronic Security 4. Section 281000 Electronic Access Control 5. Section 282600 Telephone Entry, Emergency Intercommunications and Duress

1.2 REFERENCES


B. RS-170 Broadcast Standards

C. NTSC Color System Standards


A. The facility will be equipped with Digital Video Recorders (DVR) and cameras as a stand alone Video Management System (VMS)

1. The system shall provide for recording, local monitoring, and remote monitoring of cameras.

2. The system shall be maintained and monitored by the building end user.

B. The security integrator shall furnish and install the CCTV system within the facility, consisting of camera assemblies, DVR, wiring & cabling, and low voltage camera power supplies.

1. The digital video recorder and camera power supplies shall be from emergency and UPS power.

C. Camera assemblies include camera, lens, housing, and mount. Provide and install wiring and low voltage power from the security wall field/rack to the camera locations.

1. Scope of work shall be complete from point of origin (camera) to point of termination (security rack).

D. Coordinate all work that must be performed in security head end spaces with the General Contractor, the Electrical Contractor, and the Telecommunications contractor. (if applicable)

E. The DVR shall not be loaded to exceed 50% of the camera and/or storage capacity to allow room for expansion.



F. Camera lenses for fixed cameras shall be varifocal and sized to provide the owner approved field of view. The lens shall be IR corrected and have megapixel resolution.

G. Surveillance camera audio functions shall not be installed and/or disabled unless specifically requested by Owner.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow provisions of Section 280000 for additional requirements.

B. Project Data

1. Provide a description of system operation indicating the purpose and capability of each device/component of the system with a functional diagram indicating all interfaces to other systems.

C. Video Signal test reports shall be provided for all cameras to confirm an optimum peak-to-peak video signal.

D. Shop drawings shall reflect all requirements associated with Owner provided or existing equipment and materials that will be used as part of this system.

E. Video Storage calculations to show the system capacity can accommodate the specified video retention.

F. Battery calculations to show the expected loads and backup duration for camera power supplies and UPS devices for all active surveillance equipment.

G. System programming, camera titles, descriptions, camera images and database

1. Camera titles and descriptions prior to system programming 2. Programming/database prior to performance testing 3. Provide a cross reference between specified camera numbers and programmed camera

numbers 4. Final programming, camera images and system documentation on electronic media to

Owner

H. Product Data

1. Manufacturer’s technical data sheets and specifications



B. Spare Parts:






A. See Section 280000.



1.8 WARRANTY


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE CAMERAS

A. General:

1. Wide Dynamic Range Feature: All exterior cameras and interior cameras that have exterior lighting or headlights in their field of view shall have a Wide Dynamic Range feature to improve picture quality in situations with strong backlighting.

2. Day-night Color/B&W camera with cut filter 3. Exterior cameras:

a) Shall be outdoor rated b) Include a heater to permit fog-free viewing in low temperatures c) Fan to prevent overheating in high temperatures (as required)

B. Fixed Camera:

1. Color/BW Day and Night 2. Wall mount 3. Image Device: 1/3" CCD 4. Total pixels: 811(H) x 508(V) 5. Scanning System: 525 line, 2:1 Interlace 6. Min. Scene Illumination, IR-LED On: 0.0 Lux 7. BLC: ON/OFF 8. AGC: ON/OFF 9. Lens IR distance: 250ft Range 10. Focal Length: 6-50mm 11. Resolution Horizontal 540 TV Lines [at TON (B/W) :570 TV Lines] 12. Video Output 1.0Vp-p (75 ohm) 13. S/N Ratio: 48dB 14. Environmental Conditions: Operating Temperature 14°F - 131°F 15. Humidity: <90% 16. Power Requirement 12VDC/24VAC (60Hz) 17. Power Consumption: DC12V: 0.260mA; IR ON: 1mA 18. NEMA Type: IP66

C. Fixed Dome Camera:



1. Video Standard: NTSC 2. Scanning System: 2:1 Interlace 3. Image Sensor: 1/3" Sony HAD CCD sensor 4. Number of Pixels (H x V): 811 x 508 (NTSC) 5. Minimum Illumination: 0.0 lux 6. Horizontal Resolution: 530 TVL 7. Video Output: 1.0 Vp-p, composite @ 75 Ohms 8. Sync System: Internal 9. S/N Ratio: 50 dB or more (AGC Off) 10. Auto Gain Control: On/Off 11. Automatic Electronic Shutter: 1/60–1/100,000 second 12. White Balance: Auto 13. IR LEDs: 850 nm, 20 LEDs 14. BLC: On/Off 15. Lens: Built-in fixed (f=3.8-9.5 mm VFAI) 16. Input Voltage: 12 VDC 17. Input Range: 10-14 VDC 18. Power Consumption: 4.5 W (max) with IR LEDs on 19. Housing: Die Cast Aluminum 20. Dome: Polycarbonate 21. Finish: Light gray powder coating 22. Cable Entry: One 3/4" (19.1 mm) NPT threaded opening on side 23. Connector: BNC connector; 2-pin connector for video test cable 24. Power Input: 2.1 mm Plug

2.2 DIGITAL VIDEO RECORDER

A. The Digital Video Recorder shall be compatible with other Video Surveillance system equipment provided for this project.

B. Minimum specifications

1. Video capacity: 15 days storage at maximum recording rate and resolution 2. Video Format: NTSC 3. Operating System: Embedded Linux 4. Triplex Function: Simultaneous record / playback / network 5. Video Input: 16 6. Monitor Output: 1 Main monitor, 1 spot, 1 VGA 7. Video Compression Method: MPEG-4 8. Average File Size: 2.5 - 8 KB 9. Maximum Recording Rate and resolution: 120pps @ 360 x 240; 60pps @ 720 x 240;

30pps @ 720 x480 10. Alarm In/Out: 16/2 11. System Control: Key buttons, IR remote controller, Remote client PC, and NVCK-3X 12. Audio In/Out: 1/1 13. PTZ Dome & Controller Interface: RS-422/485 14. Camera Title: 12 Characters per channel 15. Recording Modes: Continuous, schedule, alarm, motion 16. Recording Adjustments: Frame rate and picture quality adjustment per channel 17. Pre-Alarm & Post Alarm Recording: Pre-Alarm: 2sec.; Post-Alarm: 10 sec. - 300 sec. 18. Motion Detection: Per Channel 16 Selectable grids /20 Sensitivity levels 19. Search Modes: Time &date, camera, alarm, motion 20. Power Failure Recovery: Auto reboot while maintaining previous record settings 21. E-mail Notification: External alarm, video loss, power loss, HDD failure 22. System Utility: Auto key lock / disk check / fan lock detection



23. Password: 1Admin, 5 configurable users 24. Backup Device: DVD-RW 25. MCD-Player for Backup: Auto installation into OVO during backup 26. Watermark: Yes 27. Communication Port: RS-422/485 28. Internal HDD Bay: 1 (SATA) 29. Network: LAN, WAN, Internet 30. Power source: 100 - 240VAC(50-60Hz), Universal 31. Power consumption: DC 12V, 5Amp


A. Digital Video Recorder

1. Nuvico model EV-16000N/P 2. Owner Approved Equivalent

B. Fixed Camera

1. Digital Watchdog model B1362TIR650 2. Owner Approved Equivalent

C. Fixed Dome Camera

1. Honeywell model HD73 2. Owner Approved Equivalent

D. Camera Power Supply

1. Altronix 2. Alarm-Saf 3. LifeSafety Power 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

E. Equipment Racks and Racks Components:

1. Chatsworth Products (CPI) 2. Ortronics 3. Newton Instruments 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

F. Lockable Equipment Cabinet and Components:

1. Chatsworth Products (CPI) 2. Ortronics 3. Newton Instruments 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

G. Video Wire & Cable

1. Windy City 2. General Cable 3. Belden 4. CommScope



5. Owner Approved Equivalent

H. Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)

1. APC Smart-UPS Series

a) SMT series for workstations b) Smart-UPS on-Line series for rack mounted equipment

2. MinuteMan

a) Pro series for workstations b) Enterprise Plus series for rack mounted equipment

3. Owner Approved Equivalent

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONFIGURATION

A. Video Cameras

1. Provide day/night cameras in exterior locations 2. Lenses shall be field tested with Owner present to verify clear, crisp images and desired

field of view

a) Substitute camera lenses as necessary to obtain required field of view at no additional cost

b) Provide spot filters for exterior lenses as required to reduce picture washout caused by sunlight

3.2 CCTV VIDEO STANDARDS

A. The Analog CCTV system shall be compatible with local NTSC video broadcast standards.

B. When displayed, the video signals shall be uniform and consistent in quality.

C. Adjust all Analog cameras to produce:

1. 1.0-volt peak to peak video 2. 0.4 volt negative sync with no blooming 3. Streaking or noticeable lag

D. Utilize looping video outputs or provide distribution amplifiers to distribute a single video signal to multiple video devices.

E. Exceed 10 shades of gray on gray scale display measured with ambient light and a test chart using the system cameras and monitors.

F. Phase lock Sync to the power line zero crossing.

1. Make phase adjustment to insure roll free picture switching at all monitor locations.



G. Provide and install ground isolation transformers as required to eliminate 60 cycle hum bars and ground loops.

H. Provide video line equalization and/or distribution amplifiers as required to compensate for long cable runs and to ensure 1.0-volt peak to peak video signals to all monitoring locations.

1. Provide power supplies as required 2. Where amplifiers and/or transformers are required, submit locations for review and

acceptance and identify locations on the record drawings

3.3 POWER REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide uninterruptible power supplies for all active surveillance equipment

1. Rack mounted components, including all active network communication hardware, shall be on an Uninterruptible Power Supply <UPS> system.

2. Refer to Section 280000 for UPS and power requirements 3. Camera power supplies shall be on an Auxiliary Power Supply <APS>, system as required,

with a battery backup.

a) The Auxiliary power supply shall be furnished with a power distribution panel with each camera individually fused or protected with an over-current protector.

B. Power supplies shall provide:

1. 120 VAC input and output voltage as required 2. UL Listed 3. Power fail contacts to monitor the status of the input power

a) Connect each power supply power fail alarm as a separate alarm input into AC/ID system

4. Key lockable wall mount metal enclosure with tamper switch 5. Independently fused outputs

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to provisions of Section 280000

B. All surveillance system devices and components shall be compatible.

C. Distribute CCTV cameras evenly between multiple DVRs where applicable.

D. Intra-building video signal cable shall be, RG-59U with a 20 AWG solid copper center-conductor, and 95% bare copper braided shield for lengths up to 750’-0”.

1. Provide 20’-0” of additional cable for each camera mounted in accessible ceilings to provide for flexibility in camera placement.

E. Camera Housings and Mounts

1. Cameras shall include housings and mounts as indicated in the Drawings.



a) Provide the smallest available housing for each camera application.

1) Integrated miniature dome cameras are preferred

2. Wiring to cameras shall pass from the back-box through the mount and into the housing. Exposed wiring or conduit shall not be acceptable.

3. Provide sun shields for camera housings in outdoor locations exposed directly to sunlight. 4. Provide surge protection for power and copper video cables for exterior cameras at the

camera and at the point of termination (security rack). 5. Field verify the exact camera location, position, and mounting prior to installation. 6. Exterior cameras shall not be mounted on exterior walls or parapets. 7. Roof mounted cameras shall use roof deck brackets.

F. Video Management Control System

1. System platform software shall be ‘open architecture’ allowing for compatibility and integration with other building automated systems.

2. The system shall allow for secure remote viewing of live and recorded video as required.

G. Provide labeling suitable to Owner for all major equipment components. Coordinate with Owner on numbering scheme to match existing. Major equipment components:

1. Video monitors, CCTV system matrix units, video distribution/line amplifiers, Digital Video Recorders (DVR), and quad units.

H. Coordinate with Telecommunication subcontractor for network and patch panel provisions for security connections in the IT room. (If applicable)

I. Coordinate with Owner for all system programming and database requirements.

1. Provide all programming, setup, camera and device titling and data entry 2. Camera and device title and descriptions shall be consistent for all components

J. Install all Point-to-Point wiring with appropriate terminal connections for every wire and component termination so that all connections are mechanically and electrically secure.

K. Install field wiring in continuous lengths, without splices.

L. Verify upon job completion that all wiring and terminations are clearly labeled to identify the wire and terminal.

M. Testing of the surveillance system includes checkout of installed cameras back to the Security head end equipment to confirm proper operation of camera assemblies. Security integrator shall provide all necessary test equipment to fully demonstrate proper performance of field devices. Copies of test results shall be included in the project completion submittals given to the Owner.

Keesee Tract Section 282600 GMP Set 12/15/2015 Telephone Entry

Telephone Entry 282600 - 1

SECTION 282600 - TELEPHONE ENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. This section provides specifications for the installation of Telephone Entry, Emergency Intercommunications and Duress (TED) system and related components that includes but is not limited to:

1. Telephone Entry System 2. Emergency Phones 3. Intercoms 4. Duress Buttons

B. Related Sections

1. Section 087100 Door Hardware 2. Section 260000 Electrical (including related sub-sections) 3. Section 270000 Communications (including related sub-sections) 4. Section 280000 Electronic Security 5. Section 281000 Electronic Access Control 6. Section 282300 Video Surveillance 7. Section 283100 Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection

1.2 REFERENCES


1.3 SYSTEM COORDINATION

A. The Security Integrator shall completely coordinate all relevant work of other trades/systems including, but not limited to:

B. Fire Alarm System

1. Electrical Systems(s) 2. Telecommunications System(s)

C. Fire Alarm and Life Safety

1. The security integrator shall coordinate the TED system with the life safety consultant to insure compliance with applicable codes and requirements.

1.4 GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. General Requirements

1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for a complete system as indicated and in accordance with provisions of the contract documents.



2. Install per manufacturer’s recommendations. 3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all supplementary or

miscellaneous items, and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.

4. Comply with the provisions of Division 1 for General Requirements.

a) In the event of a conflict between the provisions of this Section and Division 1, the more stringent provisions shall apply.

5. All system devices and components included shall be compatible.

B. The TED system shall have the capability for future expansion to support the security needs of the completed complex.

C. TED systems utilized for life safety shall comply with all applicable codes.

D. Emergency/UPS power will be utilized to power the TED system’s components at the Security head end equipment location.

1.5 TELEPHONE ENTRY SYSTEM

A. Provide ADA–compliant hands-free Telephone Entry System that is compatible with the facility telephone system.

1. Communication: Full duplex 2. Programmable features: Telephone Entry: 1-4 digit directory code length, display

messages, talk time duration, extended talk time per user 3. Display:

a) Front Panel: LCD technology, 2 lines by 16 characters b) Keypad Lighting: surround LED lighting for the front panel keypad; LEDs remain on

at 50% intensity until a key is pressed; once a key is pressed, LEDs illuminate at 100% intensity for a period of 2 minutes

4. Outputs:

a) Relay: 4 form “C” relays; all can be configured for open/close; all relay contacts have extensive RFI, arc and lightning suppression

b) RS232: for local computer communications c) Modem: for remote programming d) Video: BNC connector for optional color camera

5. Inputs:

a) PBUS: 3 sets of inputs for connecting up to 6 proprietary addressable devices b) Wiegand: 2 sets of Wiegand inputs for connecting 26, 30, or 31 bit Wiegand devices;

each Wiegand input supports two reader LED indicators c) RF: Internal 318 MHz super heterodyne receiver with -100 dBm sensitivity; built-in

20 dB adjustable attenuator for fine tuning performance; antenna required for transmitters

d) Request To Exit: 4 normally open inputs; each input assigned to specific relay e) LEDs: for configuration, status, and troubleshooting Door Sense: 4 normally closed

inputs used to monitor the status of the controlled portal to support forced door/propped door alarm; also for auto-relock



6. Power: 12/24 VAC or VDC; 16 VAC transformer 7. Operating Temperature: -22° to +149°F 8. Clock/Calendar: built-in 24-hour clock/calendar with battery back-up and daylight savings

adjustment 9. Enclosure: 16 gauge powder coated steel cabinet; 16 gauge brushed stainless steel front

panel 10. Optional Equipment

a) Color camera b) Digital modulator converts raw video output of camera to TV channel for distribution c) Flush/recess mount trim ring d) Multiple Input/Output modules for monitoring and control of additional points; can

also be used for elevator control

11. Antennas

a) Remote, omni directional; includes mounting hardware and five feet of cable b) Remote, directional-type; includes mounting hardware and ten feet of cable

1.6 EMERGENCY PHONE

A. Provide outdoor rated, ADA–compliant hands-free Emergency Phones using POTS technology, and compatible with the existing system.

1. Vandal resistant stainless steel faceplate. 2. The phone shall be POTS powered. 3. Provide buttons for emergency and non emergency calls 4. Support SIP protocol 5. Provide call status LEDs

B. Emergency Phone Wall Mounted Enclosure

1. Provide Blue LED/CFL light to attract attention.

a) The Lighting powered from an emergency power source.

2. Coordinate with owner on housing color and graphics

1.7 DURESS PANIC BUTTONS

A. The Duress panic button is a switch that allows an individual to covertly send a duress signal, with no visible or audible indication when activated.

1. Wired Duress Button

a) Switch shall have a shroud over the activating lever that locks in activated position until reset with a key or have two buttons that must be press simultaneously to send alarm

2. Wireless Duress Buttons



a) Switch shall have a shroud over the activating lever that locks in activated position until reset with a key or have two buttons that must be press simultaneously to send alarm

b) Provide the adequate number receivers and place them to provide reliable wireless communications for the Duress Button transmitters.

c) Provide full integration of the subsystem’s receivers and transmitters to the AC/ID system

1) Provide individual alarm notification for fault, low battery, transmitter missing, as well as all other transmitter and receiver failures.

2) Provide alarm logging 3) Provide camera call-up capability

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Follow provisions of Section 280000 additional requirements.



B. Spare Parts:







1.12 WARRANTY


B. All devices and components shall comply with applicable U.L. standards.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS

A. Telephone Entry System



1. Linear AE100Plus 2. Owner Approved Equivalent

B. Emergency Duress Buttons

1. United Security 2. Ademco 269 3. Viking PB-1 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

C. Emergency Phone Wall Mount Enclosure

1. Talk-A-Phone 2. Code Blue 3. Owner Approved Equivalent

D. Wire & Cable

1. Windy City 2. General Cable 3. Belden 4. Owner Approved Equivalent

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Power Supplies

1. Provide device power supplies for all security system devices requiring power 2. Emergency Phone power shall be provided via locally, POTS or PoE 3. Provide power distribution boards with independently fused outputs. 4. Power supply requirements:

a) Sealed gel battery backup to provide continuous operation during power failure.

1) Provide batteries as required to provide specified battery backup time for a fully loaded power supply, regardless of the connected load.

b) A battery charger to maintain the battery. c) Low battery and power fail contacts to monitor the status of the input power and the

battery. d) Key lockable wall mount metal enclosure with tamper switch.

B. Tamper Resistant Screws

1. Provide appropriate screw heads for each application (e.g. countersunk heads for recessed cover plate screws, flat head screws for standard junction box covers, etc.).

2. The security integrator shall provide Torx® tamper resistant screws for:

a) Security device cover plates b) Duress buttons



3.2 FURTHER REQUIREMENTS

A. Refer to provisions of Section 280000.

B. Furnish and coordinate installation of all special device back boxes and field devices as shown on the security drawings and as specified in this section.

C. The exact installation locations of all equipment shall be coordinated and verified with the Contractor prior to installation.

1. Subcontractor shall notify the Contractor if any location appears to be unsuitable.

D. Labeling

1. Provide labeling suitable to Owner for all major equipment components.

a) Coordinate with Owner on numbering scheme to match existing.

2. Provide labeling for all security equipment racks and enclosures. 3. Provide labeling for all security device wiring.

a) Label all cables and wiring using waterproof, self-adhesive computer printed labels. Label both ends of each cable.

b) At multi conductor cable terminations label each conductor.

E. Coordinate with the Telecommunications Subcontractor for data network connections and telephone circuits as required.

F. Prepare all systems for user operation.

1. The security system must be complete and ready to operate prior to Owner final acceptance of the system.

G. Coordinate with the Owner for all system programming requirements.

H. Perform database programming as required to support the security sub-system integration, and control panel configuration as required.

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 28 31 00-1 Fire Detection and Alarm

SECTION 28 31 00

FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for complete installation

of fire alarm system.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all engineering and design of the system.

C. The fire alarm system shall provide supervision of the flow switch and tamper valve of each fire

sprinkler system, provide general alarm, and communicate signals to a constantly attended station

via two telephone lines.

D. System shall conform to requirements of local city and state codes, designed and installed under

supervision of licensed person.

E. System shall contain min. 20,000-volt surge protectors, or larger if required by manufacturer,

protecting all components of the system. Each system shall be equipped with grounding of all

equipment conforming to manufacturer’s requirements and all local and national fire and

electrical codes.

F. Submit four copies of proposed system design consisting of drawings, specifications, and catalog

data covering all systems and equipment.

1.2 REFERENCES

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 System shall include, but not be limited to the following:

A. Fire alarm control panel with annunciator, standby battery and signal lights.

B. Flow and tamper switches.

C. Audible and visual devices.

D. Wiring of all components.

E. Surge Protectors.

Farmhouse – GMP Set December 15, 2015 MEP Delta Design, LLC 28 31 00-2 Fire Detection and Alarm

2.2 All components shall bear the UL label and shall comply with all requirements of the Owner’s

insurance carrier.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 Contractor shall determine locations for all devices and coordinate such location with the Architect

and the local authority.

3.2 Contractor shall arrange for the Electrical Contractor to install needed boxes, conduit and 120-volt

wiring.

END OF SECTION

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TERMITE CONTROL Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 313116 - 1 14 December 2015

SECTION 313116

TERMITE CONTROL

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Chemical soil treatment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Indicate toxicants to be used, composition by percentage, dilution schedule, intended

application rate. C. Test Reports: Indicate regulatory agency approval reports when required. D. Manufacturer's Application Instructions: Indicate caution requirements . E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that toxicants meet or exceed specified requirements. F. Certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of toxicants. G. Record moisture content of soil before application. H. Maintenance Data: Indicate re-treatment schedule . I. Warranty: Submit warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing this type of work and:

1. Having minimum of 2 years documented experience. 2. Approved by manufacturer of treatment materials. 3. Licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

1.4 WARRANTY A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements. B. Provide five year installer's warranty against damage to building caused by termites.

1. Include coverage for repairs to building and to contents damaged due to building damage. Repair damage and, if required, re-treat.

2. Inspect annually and report in writing to Owner. Provide inspection service for [1 (one)] years from Date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers:

1. Bayer Environmental Science Corp : www.backedbybayer.com/pest-management. 2. FMC Professional Solutions : www.fmcprosolutions.com. 3. Syngenta Professional Products : www.syngentaprofessionalproducts.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

B. Toxicant Chemical: EPA approved; synthetically color dyed to permit visual identification of treated soil.

C. Diluent: Recommended by toxicant manufacturer.

2.2 MIXES A. Mix toxicant to manufacturer's instructions.

Keesee Tract Multifamily Development, Austin, Texas TERMITE CONTROL Davies Collaborative Project No. 15002 313116 - 2 14 December 2015

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that soil surfaces are unfrozen, sufficiently dry to absorb toxicant, and ready to receive

treatment. B. Verify final grading is complete.

3.2 APPLICATION A. Comply with requirements of U.S. EPA and applicable state and local codes. B. Spray apply toxicant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Apply toxicant at following locations:

1. Under Slabs-on-Grade. 2. At Both Sides of Foundation Surface.

D. Under slabs, apply toxicant immediately prior to installation of vapor barrier. E. At foundation walls, apply toxicant immediately prior to finish grading work outside foundations. F. Apply extra treatment to structure penetration surfaces such as pipe or ducts, and soil penetrations

such as grounding rods or posts. G. Re-treat disturbed treated soil with same toxicant as original treatment. H. If inspection or testing identifies the presence of termites, re-treat soil and re-test.

3.3 PROTECTION A. Do not permit soil grading over treated work.

END OF SECTION


PROJECT NAME AND NUMBER UNIT PAVING 32 14 00 - 1

SECTION 32 14 00

UNIT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


1. Concrete unit pavers set in aggregate setting bed over 6” concrete base. 2. Concrete base specified by civil.

1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for the following:

1. Pavers.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver. Mockups shall be minimum

5’ x 5’. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of

Substantial Completion.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store pavers on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed

location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not

use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and

contamination avoided. D. Store liquids in tightly closed containers protected from freezing.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or

frost. Do not build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. Remove and replace unit paver work damaged by frost or freezing.

B. Weather Limitations for Mortar and Grout: 1. Cold-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work against freezing when ambient

temperature is 40 deg F and falling. Heat materials to provide mortar and grout temperatures between 40 and 120 deg F. Provide the following protection for completed portions of work for 24 hours after installation when the mean daily air temperature is as indicated: below 40 deg F, cover with weather-resistant membrane; below 25 deg F, cover with insulating blankets; below 20 deg F, provide enclosure and temporary heat to maintain temperature above 32 deg F.

2. Hot-Weather Requirements: Protect unit paver work when temperature and humidity conditions produce excessive evaporation of setting beds and grout. Provide artificial shade and windbreaks and use cooled materials as required. Do not apply mortar to substrates with temperatures of 100 deg F and higher.

UNIT PAVING


a. When ambient temperature exceeds 100 deg F, or when wind velocity exceeds 8 mph and ambient temperature exceeds 90 deg F, set pavers within 1 minute of spreading setting-bed mortar.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONCRETE UNIT PAVERS FOR ENTRY DRIVE A. Concrete Unit Pavers: Light-duty paving brick; ASTM C 936. Provide pavers without frogs or

cores in surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for pavers is based on Pavestone pavers.

a. Pavestone Company, 512/296-4404 b. Or approved equal.

2. Products: a. Endicott Paver: Field

i. Size: 8” x 4” nominal ii. Pattern: 8” wide soldier border with herringbone field.

iii. Field Color: Manganese Ironspot b. Pavesone Paver: Parking Striping

i. Size: Holland Stone 8” x 4” nominal ii. Pattern: Ref. civil plans for striping location iii. Color: Charcoal with Shot Blast Finish

3. Sand filled Joints.

2.2 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Sand for Joints: Fine, sharp, washed, natural sand or crushed stone with 100 percent passing

No. 16 sieve and no more than 10 percent passing No. 200 sieve. 1. Provide sand of color needed to produce required joint color.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas indicated to receive paving, with Installer present, for compliance with

requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove substances from concrete substrates that could impair mortar bond, including curing

and sealing compounds, form oil, and laitance. B. Clean concrete substrates to remove dirt, dust, debris, and loose particles.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use unit pavers with chips, cracks, voids, discolorations, and other defects that might be

visible in finished work. B. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed, to produce uniform blend of colors

and textures.

UNIT PAVING


C. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Cut units to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. Hammer cutting is not acceptable. 1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used.

D. Joint Pattern: As indicated on paving schedule. E. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage) nor 1/8 inch in 24

inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level, or indicated slope, for finished surface of paving. F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install

joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers. G. Provide edge restraints as indicated. Install edge restraints before placing unit pavers.

1. Where pavers set in mortar bed are indicated as edge restraints for pavers set in aggregate setting bed, install pavers set in mortar and allow mortar to cure before placing aggregate setting bed and remainder of pavers. Cut off mortar bed at a steep angle so it will not interfere with aggregate setting bed.

3.4 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS A. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1 to 1-1/2 inches, taking care that moisture

content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. B. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful not

to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. Use string lines to keep straight lines. Fill gaps between units that exceed 3/8 inch with pieces cut to fit from full-size unit pavers. 1. When installation is performed with mechanical equipment, use only unit pavers with

spacer bars on sides of each unit. C. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to

5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. Perform at least three passes across paving with vibrator. Vibrate under the following conditions: 1. After edge pavers are installed and there is a completed surface or before surface is

exposed to rain. 2. Before ending each day's work, fully compact installed concrete pavers to within 36

inches of the laying face. Cover pavers that have not been compacted, and leveling course on which pavers have not been placed, with nonstaining plastic sheets to protect them from rain.

D. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling.

E. Do not allow traffic on installed pavers until sand has been vibrated into joints. F. Repeat joint-filling process 30 days later.

3.5 REPAIRING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace unit pavers that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise

damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Provide new units to match adjoining units and install in same manner as original units, with same joint treatment and with no evidence of replacement.

B. Cleaning: Remove excess sand from exposed paver surfaces; wash and scrub clean all paver areas.



32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation - 1/15

SECTION 32 84 00 - LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping, valves, sprinklers, accessories, controls, and wiring for automatic-control irrigation system.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Irrigation Lateral Lines: Downstream from control valves to sprinklers, specialties, and drain valves. Piping is under pressure during flow.

B. Drain Piping: Downstream from circuit-piping drain valves. Piping is not under pressure.

C. Irrigation Main Piping: Downstream from point of connection to water distribution piping to, and including, control valves. Piping is under water-distribution-system pressure.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include pressure ratings, rated capacities, and settings of selected models for the following:

1. General-duty valves. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Control-valve boxes. 4. Sprinklers. 5. Irrigation accessories. 6. Controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Show irrigation system piping, including plan layout, and locations, types, sizes, capacities, and flow characteristics of irrigation system piping components. Include water meters, backflow preventers, valves, piping, sprinklers, accessories, controls, and wiring. Show areas of sprinkler spray and overspray. Show wire size and number of conductors for each control cable.

C. Record and As-build Drawings

1. The Contractor shall provide and keep up to date and complete "as-built" record set of prints which shall be corrected daily and show every change from the origi-nal drawings and specifications and the exact "as-built" locations, sizes, and kinds of equipment. Prints for this purpose may be obtained from the Architect at cost. This set of drawings shall be kept on the site and shall be used only as a record set.

2. These drawings shall also serve as work progress sheets and shall be the basis for measurement and payment for work completed. These drawings shall be



available at all times for inspection and shall be kept in a location designated by the Architect. Should the record blue line as-built progress sheets not be availa-ble for review or not up-to-date at the time of any inspection (refer to Section 3.10 - Inspection Schedule), it will be assumed no work has been completed and the Contractor will be assessed the cost of that site visit at the current billing rate of the Architect. No other observations shall take place prior to payment of that as-sessment.

3. The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on the as-built progress sheets daily as the work proceeds, showing the work as actually installed.

4. Before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall transfer all information from the "as-built" prints to a mylar. All work shall be in waterproof ink and ap-plied to the mylar by a technical pen made expressly for use on mylar material. Contractor shall use symbols and notation consistent with original drawings.

5. The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference, build-ing corners, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the location of the following items:

a. Connection to existing water lines. b. Connection to existing electrical power. c. Gate valves. d. Routing of sprinkler pressure lines (dimensions max. 100' along routing). e. Sprinkler control valves. f. Routing of control wiring. g. Quick coupling valves. h. Other related equipment as directed by the Architect.

6. The final as-builts provided by the contractor shall be CAD generated. The

landscape architect will provide their CAD base file for the contractor to use as his starting point. The final CAD file provided by the contractor shall be completely bound (xrefs) and purged.

D. Controller Charts:

1. As-built drawings shall be approved by the Architect before controller charts are prepared.

a. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local manufacturer's representative.

b. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract.

c. Guarantee statement. d. Complete operating and maintenance instruction on all major equipment

E. Operation and maintenance instructions.

F. Spares and Special Tools – Provide Owner with 2 spare sprinkler heads of each size and type.

G. Water use budget for the system that includes each zone. Water use must comply with jurisdiction requirements.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. Installer – Installation of Irrigation System shall be performed under the direction of a State of Texas licensed irrigator with not less than 5 years experience in this type of work.

C. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications.

D. Ordinances, Codes and Regulations: All local, municipal and state laws, and rules and regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications, and their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Anything contained in these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of the above rules and regulations and requirements of the same. However, when these specifications and drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations, these specifications and drawings shall take precedence.

E. Explanation of Drawings:

1. Due to the scale of drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, sleeves, etc., which may be required. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finished conditions affecting all of his work and plan his work accordingly, furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such condi-tions. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be in-stalled. The work shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts be-tween irrigation systems, planting, and architectural features.

2. The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Owner's authorized repre-sentative or the Landscape Architect.

3. All work called for on the drawings by notes or details shall be furnished and in-stalled whether or not specifically mentioned in the specifications.

4. The Contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the drawings when it is obvious in the field that obstructions, grade differences or dis-crepancies in area dimensions exist that might not have been considered in engi-neering. Such obstructions or differences should be brought to the attention of the Owner's authorized representative. In the event this notification is not per-formed, the irrigation contractor shall assume full responsibility for any revisions necessary.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND HANDLING

A. Materials shall be delivered in manufacturer’s unopened packaging labeled to indicate manufacturer’s name and product identification. Insure that packaging and labeling remain intact until installation. Materials shall be stored protected from the elements, including direct sunlight.



B. Pipes shall be handled so as to prevent being damaged and to maintain their straightness. Pipe ends shall be wrapped. Pipes shall be stored on beds the full length of the pipes. Damaged or dented pipes or fittings shall not be used.

1.6 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. If the Irrigation Contractor wishes to substitute any equipment or materials for those equipment or materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications, he may do so by providing the following information to the Owner's authorized representative for approval:

1. Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a sep-arate sheet of paper for each item to be substituted.

2. Provide descriptive catalog literature, performance charts and flow charts for each item to be substituted.

3. Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved.

B. Owner's authorized representative shall have the sole responsibility in accepting or rejecting any substituted item as an approved equal to those equipment and materials listed on the irrigation drawings and specifications.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. When a conflict exists between products on the drawings and products on the specifications refer to the drawings.

2.2 PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS

A. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L , water tube, annealed temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K, water tube, drawn temper.

1. Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought- copper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.

2. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces and solder-joint or threaded ends.

C. Mainline PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, PVC 1120 compound, Schedule 40.

1. Pressure Main Line:



a. Pressure main line piping 4” and larger shall be Class 200 rubber gasket pipe and 3” and smaller shall be PVC Schedule 40 with solvent welded joints.

b. Pipe shall be made from an NSF approved Type I, Grade I, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1785. All pipe must meet require-ments as set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70, with an appropriate standard dimension (S.D.R.) (Solvent-weld Pipe).

2. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Line Piping:

a. Non-pressure buried lateral line piping shall be PVC class 200 with solvent-weld joints.

b. Pipe shall be made from NSF approved, Type I, Grade II PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D1784. All pipe must meet require-ments set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70 with an appropriate stand-ard dimension ratio.

3. Fittings 4” and larger shall be push on Ductile Iron designed and manufactured using ASTM A-536 Grade 70-50-05 ductile iron with tensile strength of 70,000 psi such as manufactured by Harco or approved equal.

4. Fittings 3” and smaller shall be Schedule 40, I-2, II-I NSF approved conforming to ASTM test procedure D2466 PVC solvent-weld fittings.

5. Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent-weld pipe and fittings shall be of type and installation methods prescribed by the manufacturer.

6. All PVC pipe must bear the following markings:

a) Manufacturer's name. b) Nominal pipe size. c) Schedule or class. d) Pressure rating in P.S.I. e) NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval. f) Date of expiration. g) Reclaimed Water

7. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, applicable I.P.S., schedule number and NSF seal of approval.

D. Irrigation Lateral Line Pipe

1. Pipes ¾ inch diameter and larger: ASTM D 2231, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 21.0, 200 PSI

2. Pipes ½ inch diameter: ASTM D 2241, PVC, 1120 or 1220, SDR 13.5, 315 PSI

E. FITTINGS FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS

1. Schedule 40: ASTM D 2466 2. Schedule 80: ASTM D 2467

F. FITTINGS FOR THREADED JOINTS

1. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80



2.3 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. Isolation valves shall have bell or spigot ends, flanges or screw joints as required for the piping in which they are installed.

B. Isolation valves shall be manufactured of Class D cast iron or brass conforming to the AWWA Standard C-500 or Federal specification WW-V-58, Class A. All valves must be resilient seat and shall be fitted with a 2” x2” square wrench nut and shall be opened counter–clockwise. Stem extension shall be added to bring operating nut to within 2 (two) feet of finished grade.

2.4 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES

A. Automatic Control Valves: Bronze body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac solenoid.

1. All electric control valves shall be of the same manufacturer. 2. All electric control valves shall have a manual flow adjustment and pressure

regulating module. 3. Provide and install one control valve box for each electric control valve. 4. Electric remote control valve shall be Hunter ICV-G. 5. All section valves shall have ball valve install upstream .

B. Automatic Drain Valves: Spring-loaded-ball type of construction and designed to open for drainage if line pressure drops below 2-1/2 to 3 psig.

C. Quick-Couplers: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass, two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, purple rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key.

1. All quick couplers shall be installed using “o”-ring style swing joint and located in

10” round valve box.

D. Remote Control-Valve Boxes: Box and cover, with open bottom and openings for piping; designed for installing flush with grade. Include size as required for valves and service.

1. Valve boxes shall be heavy duty plastic17 inch by 11-3/4 inch by 12 inch depth, black with purple cover. Valve box shall be Series 1419, bolt cover, by Carson Industries, Inc., 1925 Street, LaVerne, CA 91750, 213-732-6265, or approved equal.

2. Manufacturers: a. Carson Industries LLC. b. Christy Concrete Products, Inc.

E. Gate Valve and Control Wire Splice Boxes

1. Quick Coupler and Control wire splice boxes shall be heavy duty plastic 10 inch diameter by 10-1/4 inch deep, black with purple cover, No. 910-12B, by Carson Industries, Inc. or approved equal.



F. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/8 inch minimum to 1 inch maximum.

2.5 SPRINKLERS

A. Description: Brass or plastic housing and corrosion-resistant interior parts designed for uniform coverage over entire spray area indicated, at available water pressure.

1. Manufacturers: a. Hunter Industries Incorporated. b. RainBird Sprinkler

2. Flush, Surface Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. 3. Bubblers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. 4. Shrubbery Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment. 5. Pop-up, Spray Sprinklers: Fixed pattern, with screw-type flow adjustment and

stainless-steel retraction spring. 6. Pop-up, Rotary, Spray Sprinklers: Gear drive, full-circle and adjustable part-circle

types. 7. Pop-up, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle types. 8. Aboveground, Rotary, Impact Sprinklers: Impact drive, full-circle and part-circle

types.

2.6 SPRINKLER SPECIALTIES

A. Strainer/Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices downstream from unit.

B. Emitters: PE or vinyl body.

1. Manufacturers: a. Amiad Filtration Systems. b. Netafim USA. c. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.

2. Single-Outlet Emitters: To deliver the following flow at approximately 20 psig (138 kPa):

a. Flow: 1 gph. b. Tubing Size: 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum ID and 10 feet long.

3. Outlet Caps: Plastic, for outlets without tubing.

C. Drip Tubes: NPS 1/2 (DN 15) NPS 3/4 (DN 20), flexible PE or PVC tubing for emitters and other devices, of length indicated and with plugged end.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Agricultural Products, Inc. b. Agrifim. c. Netafim USA. d. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp.



D. Dripperline 1. Dripperline shall consist of nominal sized one-half inch low density, linear

polyethylene tubing, housing internal pressure compensating, continuously self-flushing, integral drip emitters. The tubing shall have an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches, and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. The emitters shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an output pressure of seven (7) to seventy (70) psi, at a constant flow of 0.62 gallons per hour (GPH). The dripperline shall have factory install emitters 12 inches on center.

2. Automatic line flushing valve shall be install at the end of each independent zone. The valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon of water at the beginning of each irrigation cycle.

3. Pressure regulating valve shall be capable of regulating pressure from 15 psi to 50 psi using interchangeable, color coded regulating springs. The regulator shall have a built in indicator that shows when the proper outlet pressure has been reached.

4. Disc filter shall be a multiple disc filter with color coded filter elements indicating the mesh size of the element being used. The disc shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion

2.7 CONTROLLER(S)

A. Controller(s) shall be Hybrid type Controller(s) as specified on drawings.

1. Controller shall be per the drawings.

2. Or approved equal.

3. The final location of the controller will be verified on site with the owner rep and the landscape architect.

B. Wiring: AWG-ULUF 600 volt with solid-copper conductors and insulated cable; suitable for direct burial.

1. Manufacturers: a. Paige Cable b. Regency Wire and Cable c. Approved equal

2. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers and runs over 1,000 LF.

3. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench.

4. Where more than one (1) wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped to-gether at intervals of ten (10) feet.

5. An expansion curl shall be provided within three (3) feet of each wire connection. Expansion curl shall be of sufficient length at each splice connection at each elec-tric control, so that in case of repair, the valve bonnet may be brought to the sur-face without disconnecting the control wires. Control wires shall be laid loosely in trench without stress or stretching of control wire conductors.



6. All splices shall be made with Wade, DBY (Direct Bury) Splice by 3M or approved equal. Use one splice per connector sealing pack. All splices must us UL ap-proved connector.

7. Field splices between the automatic controller and electrical control valves, less than 500' apart, will not be allowed without prior approval of the Architect.

8. All field splices shall be installed in a 10" round valve box.

2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Double Check Assembly: Febco No. 850 (CMB Industries), P.O. Box 8070, Fresno, CA 92747, 209-252-0791, or approved equal. Size as per drawings.

2.9 REMOTE CONTROL VALVE TIES

A. Remote control valve ties shall be Christy’s Valve I.D. tag model ID-STD-Y with wire to attach numbered tag to valve.

2.10 SOLVENT CEMENT FOR SOLVENT WELDED JOINTS

A. CHRISTY’S RED HOT BLUE GLUE T. Christy Enterprises, Inc., 1207 W. Struck Avenue, No. E, Orange, CA 92667, 800-258-4583, or approved equal. Use a compatible primer recommended by the solvent cement manufacturer.

2.11 SEALANT FOR THREADED JOINTS UNDER CONSTANT PRESSURE

A. RECTOR SEAL LIQUID TEFLON by Rector Seal Corp., 2830 Produce Row, Houston, Texas 77023, 713-928-6423, or approved equal.

2.12 SLEEVES UNDER PAVING FOR CONTROL WIRE AND IRRIGATION LINES

A. ASTM D 2455, PVC, Schedule 40 sized as shown on drawings.

2.13 FITTINGS FOR THREADED JOINTS

A. ASTM D 2466, PVC, Schedule 80.

2.14 RAINFALL MONITOR

A. Shall be Hunter Rain-Clik or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION



A. Site Conditions:

1. All scaled dimensions are approximate. The Contractor shall check and verify all size dimensions and receive Architect's approval prior to proceeding with work under this section.

2. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to utilities which are caused by his operations or neglect. Check existing utilities drawings for existing utility locations.

3. Coordinate installation of sprinkler irrigation materials including pipe, so there shall be NO interference with utilities or other construction or difficulty in planting trees, shrubs, and ground covers. Coordinate work other site contractors.

4. The Contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system.

5. No machine trenching, unless approved by Architect, is to be done within drip line of trees. Trenching is done by hand, tunneling or boring or other methods approved by Architect. It is understood that the piping layout is diagrammatic and piping shall be routed around trees and shrubs in such manner to avoid damage to plants.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Physical Layout:

1. Piping and head layout is shown on plans in schematic form only. All pipes to be installed directly behind curbs, walks, and walls wherever possible.

2. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines, routing and location of sprinkler heads.

3. All layout shall be approved by Architect prior to installation.

B. Water Supply:

1. Sprinkler Irrigation system shall be connected to water supply points-of- connection as indicated on the drawings.

2. Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on drawings. Contractor is responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

B. Location of Heads – Design location is represented as accurately as possible. Make minor adjustments on site with approval of Landscape Architect as necessary to ensure consistent and even spacing where applicable. Set all heads minimum 6” from back of curb and 4” from edge of concrete walls.

C. Install piping and wiring in sleeves under sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, and railroads.

D. [Drain Pockets: Excavate to sizes indicated. Backfill with cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3/4 to 3 inches, to 12 inches below grade. Cover gravel or



crushed stone with sheet of asphalt-saturated felt and backfill remainder with excavated material.

E. Provide minimum cover over top of underground piping according to the following:

1. Irrigation Main Piping: Minimum depth of 18 inches below finished grade. 2. Circuit Piping: 12 inches. 3. Drain Piping: 12 inches. 4. Drip irrigation in turf grass: 4” or per the drawings. See installation below. 5. Drip irrigation in plant beds: 2” or per the drawings. See installation below. 6. Sleeves: 24 inches.

F. BACKFILL –

1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed. Trenches shall be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density equal to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting area. Backfill will conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other surface irregularities.

2. A fine granular material backfill will be initially placed on all lines (minimum 4" depth). No foreign matter larger than one-half (1/2) inch in size will be permitted in the initial backfill.

3. Where rock is encountered in trenching, 4" of sand above the pipe and 4" of sand below the pipe will be used as the initial backfill.

4. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of Architect. 5. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, sprinkler heads,

lawn or planting, or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required adjustments without cost to the Owner

G. EXISTING LAWNS – Where trenching is required across existing lawns, (or in even of changes or repairs after new lawn has been established), uniformly cut strips of sod 6 inches wider than trench. Remove sod in rolls of suitable size for handling and keep moistened until replanted.

1. Backfill trench to within 6 inches of finished grade and compact. Continue fill with acceptable topsoil and compact to bring sod even with existing lawn.

2. Replant sod within 2 days after removal, roll and water generously. 3. Resod and restore to original condition all sod areas not in healthy condition equal

to adjoining lawns 30 days after replanting.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General - Unless otherwise indicated, Contractor shall comply with requirements of the governing Uniform Plumbing Code.

B. Pipes

1. Piping Mains and Laterals - Lay out sprinkler mainlines and perform line adjustments and site modifications to laterals prior to excavation. Lay pipe on solid subbase, uniformly sloped without humps or depressions.



2. PVC Pipe Assembly

a. Cut PVC pipe square and de-burr. Clean pipe and fittings using primer as recommended by the PVC pipe manufacturer. Use purple tinted primer to aid in visual inspection.

b. Apply a thin even flow coat of PVC solvent cement to inside of the fitting and pipe mating surface. Cure joints as recommended by the manufacturer and keep pipe and fitting out of service during curing period. Construct watertight joints equal or greater in strength than the pipe. Do not tap pipe at fittings.

3. Install plastic pipe in dry weather, when temperature is above 40 degrees F. and in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Allow joints to cure at least 24 hours at temperature above 40 degrees F. before testing.

4. Plastic pipe shall be snaked in the trenches in a manner to provide for expansion and contraction as recommended by pipe manufacturer.

C. Sleeves Under Paving - The majority of sleeves under paving are existing as shown on drawings. Where boring is required for new sleeves (refer to drawings), it shall be a "wet bore." Install sleeves 12" beyond edge of pavement. Perform trench and backfill in accordance with these specifications.

D. Concrete Thrust Blocks

1. Install where the rubber-gasketed irrigation main changes direction as at ells and tees and where the rubber-gasketed main terminates.

2. Pressure tests shall not be made for a period of 36 to 48 hours following the completion of pouring of the blocks.

3. Blocks for these mains shall be sized and placed in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's specifications and shall be of an adequate size and so placed as to take all thrust created by the maximum internal water pressure.

E. Irrigation Heads

1. Flush irrigation lines with full head of water and install heads after hydrostatic test is completed.

2. Install heads at manufacturer's recommended heights. 3. Locate part-circle heads to maintain a minimum distance of 4, 12, 24, 48 inches

from walls and 2 inches form other boundaries, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Check for uniformity of coverage and pattern correctness. Adjust for 100%

coverage where required. 5. Install nozzles with water running at reduced pressure starting with the head

closest to the valve. 6. Adjust arcs and radius at normal operating pressure.

F. Drip irrigation 1. lines shall be installed 2” below the surface of the soil to the top of the pipe when

installed in plant beds and 4” below the surface of the sod or soil to the top of the pipe when installed in lawn (sod, hydromulch, sod, plugs, sprigs) or grass areas

G. Electric Remote Control Valves



1. Adjust automatic control valves to provide flow rate at rated operating pressure required for each irrigation section.

2. Install valves in valve boxes, arranged for easy adjustment and removal. Locate valves to ensure ease of access for maintenance such that no physical interference with other elements of the project exist.

3. All valve boxes shall be located to not be easily visible or to be in an area that is the focus of the landscape.

H. Remote Control Valve Tags - One Remote Control Valve Tag shall be attached to stem of each electric remote control valve. Tags shall be numbered sequentially. Numbers shall correspond to station numbers in electric controller. Provide tags and corresponding numbers for wires pulled for future valves.

I. Valve Boxes - Install valve boxes to cover electric remote control valves. Install one valve per valve box. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support.

J. Control Wire Splice Boxes - Install control wire splice box to cover any splice in control wire. Top of valve box shall be flush with finished grade. Bury minimum 4 bricks under base of each box as support. Install control wire splice box to cover wires pulled for future valves.

K. Gravel Backfill - Backfill valve boxes and control wire splice boxes with gravel, minimum 6 inch depth.

L. Electric Controller

1. Controllers shall be fully grounded. 2. Connect remote control valves to controller in clockwise sequence to correspond

with stations 1, 2, 3, successively. 3. Affix a non-fading copy of irrigation diagram to cabinet door below controller's

name. Irrigation diagram shall be sealed between two plastic sheets, 20 mils. minimum thickness. Irrigation diagram shall show clearly all valves operated by the controller, showing station number, valve size, and type of planting irrigated.

4. Provide galvanized padlock against vandalism. Provide two keys to Owner. Keys to be matched with existing controller keylocking mechanisms.

5. Power to Controller & Locations: Locations shown on plan for controllers is approximate. Final location shall be determined on site by Owner. Contractor shall supply 120 VAC to controller from adjacent existing power sources. Follow local governing codes in electrical work.

6. Lightning Protection and Grounding: Provide full grounding and lightning protection per system manufacturer's recommendations. Grounding network shall measure 10 OHMS or less when measured with a Vibra-Ground instrument.

M. Irrigation Control Wires

1. Provide 24 volt system for control of automatic circuit-section valves of underground irrigation system. Provide unit capacity to suit number of circuits indicated.

2. Install control wires with irrigation mains and laterals in common trench where possible. Lay control wires neatly together to side of pipe. Provide looped slack at valves, corners, bores and snake wire in trench to allow for contraction. Tie



wires in bundles at 10 foot intervals. Line splices will be allowed on runs of 500 Ft. or more. Splices shall be made and placed in control wire splice boxes.

3. Common ground wire shall be white. No other wires shall be white. 4. Supply two extra wires, for each direction of run, to valve which is located the

greatest distance from the controller. Extra wire shall be orange. Leave two loops of wire at each valve location.

5. Color of wire from controller to control valve shall be consistent to each valve. 6. Solder splices and protect with splicing material specified. Provide 12 inch long

expansion loop within 3 feet of each wire connection and splice on runs of wire 100 feet or longer.

N. Backflow Preventers

1. Make required connection to water supply according to local codes and manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Install pressure type backflow devices at required grade in accordance with the local Plumbing Code. Exposed mainline and mainline risers above PVC pipe main elevation shall be copper. Install one brass union in riser downstream of device.

3. Insulate all above ground piping. 4. Provide Backflow Certification to Landscape Architect within 10 days of backflow

installation and operation.

3.5 TESTING

A. General - Notify Landscape Architect 48 hours in advance when testing will be conducted. Conduct tests in presence of Landscape Architect.

B. Hydrostatic Test - Test irrigation main line, before backfilling trenches, to a hydrostatic pressure of not less than operating pressure for 6 hour. Piping may be tested in sections to expedite work. Remove and repair or replace piping and connections which do not pass hydrostatic testing.

C. Pressure shall be maintained for a 24 hour leak test.

D. Shut off mainline at backflow preventer during non working hours until Contractor has demonstrated the mainline is stable.

E. Operational Testing - Perform operational testing after hydrostatic testing is completed, backfill is in place and irrigation heads are adjusted to final position.

1. Demonstrate to Landscape Architect that system meets coverage requirements, is a specified and indicated, and that automatic controls function properly.

2. Coverage requirements are based on operation of one circuit at a time. 3. After completion of grading, sodding and rolling of grass areas, carefully adjust

lawn sprinkler heads so they will be flush with or not more than 1/2 inch above finished grade. Set shrub sprinkler heads not more than 1/2 inch above top of mulch.



3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall correctly maintain the irrigation system during the installation process and throughout the landscaping maintenance service period. Specified in Section 329400 - Exterior Landscape Maintenance.

B. Contractor shall provide "As Built" Drawings for new work, showing dimensioned location of valves, meters, backflow preventers, controllers, and mainline. Contractor shall request reproducible mylars from the Landscape Architect in preparation of "As Built" Drawings.

END OF SECTION 32 84 00


TURF AND GRASSES 32 92 00 - 1 Copyright 2015 COLEMAN AND ASSOCIATES

SECTION 329200 – TURF AND GRASSES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Solid Sod.

2. Hydromulch.


1. Retain Sections in subparagraphs below that contain requirements Contractor might expect to find in this Section but are specified in other Sections.

2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for topsoil stripping and stockpiling.

3. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling and backfilling, and rough grading.

4. Division 32 Section "Planting Irrigation" for turf irrigation.

5. Division 32 Section "Plants" for border edgings.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of topsoil.

B. Imported Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. Imported soils must be used if no existing on-site soils or not enough on-site soils are available.

C. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

D. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

E. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.



F. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

G. Existing On-site soils: Salvaged and stockpiled topsoil that is tested and suitable for use in growing proposed grasses or plants. Soil must be tested and pass or be amended per the soil test. In addition to amendments and / or fertilizers the contractor shall process the soil by raking the soil until it is free of rocks larger than 1” in any direction or any other deleterious materials. Contractors shall not count on only using on-site soils. Imported soils shall be used to supplement or completely replace on-site soils. It is the contractors responsibility to estimate the amount of soil available on site.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.

2. Sod & Hydromulch: Include product label and manufacturer’s application instructions specific to this Project.

3. Imported Topsoil: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to this Project.

C. Product Certificates: For soil amendments and fertilizers from manufacturer.

1. Laboratory reports from Wallace Laboratories, LLC or approved equal. (310) 615-0116.

2. Provide 1 test sample and report for each 250 cubic yard, or a minimum of two samples total, if total stockpiled soil to be used is less than 500 cubic yards, of on-site stock piled top soil to be used on site. Samples to be taken from various areas in the stock piled material.


A. Installer Qualifications: Landscape Contractor shall have a permanent office located within a 50-mile radius of the project site.

B. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed for commercial application.


A. Seed and Other Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws, as applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants or near or under existing trees.



2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions.


B. Initial Turf Maintenance Service: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of Landscape Installer continuously after sod and/or hydromulch is installed and continue until final completion and acceptance by the Landscape Architect and Owner. Maintain as required in Part 3.

B. After receipt of final completion and acceptance, Landscape Contractor shall maintain the project for an additional 60 days as part of this scope of work. Maintain as required in Part 3.

C. Upon termination of 60-Day Maintenance period, Landscape Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect of request for final inspection. At this time all defective work shall be corrected by Landscape Contractor and 1 year guaranty period shall begin.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 TURFGRASS SEED/SOD

A. Turfgrass Species: State-certified seed of grass species as follows:

1. TIF 419 Bermuda Grass (Cynodon dactylon ‘TIF 419) – solid sod.

2. Sahara Bermuda Grass (Cynodon dactylon ‘Sahara’) – hydromulch

3. Annual Rye Grass - hydromulch

2.03 MULCHES

A. Fiber Mulch: Biodegradable, dyed-wood, cellulose-fiber mulch; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors; with a maximum moisture content of 15 percent and a pH range of 4.5 to 6.5.

B. Nonasphaltic Tackifier: Colloidal tackifier recommended by fiber-mulch manufacturer for slurry application; nontoxic and free of plant-growth or germination inhibitors.

2.04 IMPORTED TOPSOIL

A. Imported topsoil for sod and hydromulch lawns shall be Coleman Turf Mix as supplied by Organics by Gosh, 512/276-1211, or approved equal, with the following characteristics:



1. General - Topsoil shall be free of roots, clods, stones larger than 1-inch in the greatest dimension, pockets of coarse sand, noxious weeds, sticks, lumber, brush and other litter. It shall not be infested with nematodes or other undesirable disease-causing organisms such as insects and plant pathogens.

2. Topsoil shall be friable and have sufficient structure in order to give good tilth and aeration to the soil.

3. Gradation limits - soil shall be a sandy loam or loam. The definition of soil texture shall be the USDA classification scheme cited below. Gravel over 2 millimeters in diameter shall be less than 20% by weight.

4. Permeability Rate - Hydraulic conductivity rate shall be not less than one inch per hour nor more than 20 inches per hour when tested in accordance with the USDA Handbook Number 60, method 34b or other approved methods.

5. Fertility - The range of the essential elemental concentration in soil shall be as follows for approval of source soil:

Ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction

parts per million (mg/kilogram dry weight basis

phosphorus 10 - 40 potassium 100 - 220 iron 5- 35 manganese 0.6 - 6 zinc 1 - 8 copper 0.3 - 5 boron 0.2 - 1 magnesium 50 - 150 sodium 0 - 100 sulfur 25 - 500 molybdenum 0.1 - 2

6. Acidity - The soil pH range measured in the saturation extract (Method 21a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 6.0 - 7.9. a. If the soil pH is between 6 and 7, the maximum permissible elemental

concentration shall be reduced 50%. If the soil pH is less than 6.0, the maximum permissible elemental concentration shall be reduced 75%. No more than three metals shall be present at 50% or more of the above values

7. Salinity - The salinity range measured in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 0.5 - 2.5 dS/m.

8. Chloride - The maximum concentration of soluble chloride in the saturation ex-tract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 150 mg/l (parts per mil-lion)

9. Boron - The maximum concentration of soluble boron in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 1 mg/l (parts per million)



10. Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) - The maximum SAR shall be 3 measured per Method 20b, USDA Handbook Number 60

11. Aluminum – Available aluminum measured with the Ammonium Bicar-bonate/DTPA Extraction shall be less than 3 parts per million

12. Soil Organic Matter Content - Sufficient soil organic matter shall be present to impart good physical soil properties but not be excessive to cause toxicity or cause excessive reduction in the volume of soil due to decomposition of organic matter. The desirable range is 3% to 6%. The carbon:nitrogen ratio should be about 10. A high carbon:nitrogen ratio can indicate the presence of hydrocarbons or non-humified organic matter.

13. Calcium Carbonate Content - Free calcium carbonate (limestone) shall not be present for acid-loving plants

14. Heavy Metals - The maximum permissible elemental concentration in the soil shall not exceed the following concentrations:


parts per million (mg/kilogram) dry weight basis

arsenic 1 cadmium 1 chromium 10 cobalt 2 lead 30 mercury 1 nickel 5 selenium 3 silver 0.5 vanadium 3

.

15. Phytotoxic constituent, herbicides, hydrocarbons etc. - Germination and growth

of monocots and dicots shall not be restricted more than 10% compared to the reference soil. Growth inhibiting constituents must not be present.

2.2 FERTILIZERS

A. Organic fertilizers containing no artificial ingredients nor fillers nor urea or bio-solids.

1. Lady Bug All Purpose Fertilizer 8-2-4 as supplied by Lady Bug Natural Brand, 512-858-9090, 160 McGregor Land, Dripping Springs, Texas 78620. Or approved equal.

2.3 PESTICIDES / HERBICIDES

A. General: Pesticide, registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as



required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to be planted for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.

3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.


C. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by the Landscape Architect and replace with new topsoil.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, trees, shrubs, and plantings from damage caused by planting operations.

1. Protect adjacent and adjoining areas from hydromulching overspray.

2. Protect grade stakes set by others until directed to remove them.

3.03 TURF AREA PREPARATION (BERMUDA SOD & HYDROMULCH)

A. Limit turf subgrade preparation to areas to be planted.



1. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating finished grade with Sitework Contractor and General Contractor. Landscape Contractor shall be responsible for placement of final 6” to topsoil so rough grades should be left 4” to 6” below desired finished grade. Should excess existing soil or fill be left by Sitework Contractor or General Contractor, Landscape Contractor shall remove excess as needed to allow for the specified depth of topsoil within the turf grass area. Legally dispose of excess soil off-site.

B. Loosen existing subgrade to a minimum depth of 2 inches. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

C. Spread imported / or on-site salvaged topsoil to a minimum depth of 6 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. Contractor will bid and supply imported topsoil. Existing onsite stockpiled topsoil will only be used if it is determined (by the architect, landscape architect and general contractor) that the existing onsite stockpiled topsoil is acceptable based upon the laboratory test result submittals, quantity of soil, and on-site inspections, by the architect / landscape architect.

D. Finish Grading: Grade turf areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Grade to within plus or minus 1/2 inch of finish elevation.

E. Islands in parking lot shall have a minimum 5% slope to provide positive drainage unless grading plan specifically shows a different condition.

F. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Contractor shall be responsible for providing positive drainage in all lawn areas. Limit finish grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future.

G. Apply Fertilizer, thoroughly and evenly incorporating it with the soil to a depth of 6 inches by discing or other approved methods.

H. Before installing sod or hydromulch, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

I. Moisten prepared area before installing sod or hydromulch if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil.

3.04 SOLID SOD

A. Do not lay dormant sod or install sod on saturated or frozen soil.

B. Lay sod to form a solid mass with tightly filled joints. Butt ends and sides of sod strips. Do not overlay edges. Stagger strips to offset joints with adjacent courses. Remove excess sod. Sod shall be flush with adjacent curbs and pavement.

C. Install initial row of sod in a straight line, beginning at bottom of slopes, perpendicular to the direction of the sloped area. Place subsequent rows parallel to the previously installed row.

D. For slopes 3:1 or greater, stake sod/soil layers together using metal sod stakes that penetrate at least 6” into the subsoil.

E. Water sod thoroughly with a fine spray immediately after laying.



F. Roll with light lawn roller to ensure contact with subgrade.

G. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below sod.

3.05 HYDROMULCH

A. Hydromulch: Mix specified seed, fertilizer, and fiber mulch in water, using equipment specifically designed for hydromulch application. Continue mixing until uniformly blended into homogeneous slurry suitable for hydraulic application.

B. Mix slurry with tackifier.

C. Seed Content in Hydromulch slurry shall be as follows:

1. Sahara Bermuda Grass – 4 lbs per 1,000 square feet

2. Annual Rye Grass – 8 lbs per 1,000 square feet. Annual rye grass to only be planted if the construction schedule dictates that turf grass be installed between October 1st and March 1

5th. If annual rye is installed the contractor must return in February and scalp the

rye grass tight to the soil. The clippings shall be raked up and removed from the site. This must be done as many times as necessary to eradicate the rye grass and prior to installing the specified permanent turf grass.

3. Native Grass Mix – XXX lbs per 1,000 square feet

4. Wildflower Grass Mix – xxx lbs per 1,000 square feet

D. Hydromulch all areas as indicated on plans.

E. Hydromulch shall be applied in a uniform cover.

F. Immediately remove and clean all hydromulch overspray from trees, shrubs, curbs, pavement, fire hydrants, light poles and other site improvements.

G. Saturate hydromulch area with fine water spray immediately after installation. During first week after planting, water daily or more frequently as necessary to maintain moist soil to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches below seed.

H. Sod/seed.

3.06 TURF MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain and establish turf as prescribed in Section 1 above. Maintenance shall be done on a weekly basis during the months of April through October and on a bi-weekly basis during the months of November through March.

B. Maintenance shall include watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, trimming, replanting, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable turf. Roll, regrade, and replant bare or eroded areas and remulch to produce a uniformly smooth turf. Provide materials and installation the same as those used in the original installation.

1. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace materials and turf damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.



2. Apply treatments as required to keep turf and soil free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated pest management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards.

C. Watering: Schedule watering to prevent wilting, puddling, erosion, and displacement of seed or mulch. Water turf with fine spray at a minimum rate of 1 inch per week unless rainfall precipitation is adequate.

D. Mowing: Mow turf as soon as top growth is tall enough to cut. Repeat mowing to maintain specified height without cutting more than 1/3 of grass height. Remove no more than 1/3 of grass-leaf growth in initial or subsequent mowings. Do not delay mowing until grass blades bend over and become matted. Do not mow when grass is wet.

3.07 SATISFACTORY TURF

A. Turf installations shall meet the following criteria as determined by Architect:

1. Satisfactory Sodded Turf: At end of maintenance period, a healthy, well-rooted, even-colored, viable turf has been established, free of weeds, open joints, bare areas, and surface irregularities.

B. Use specified materials to reestablish turf that does not comply with requirements and continue maintenance until turf is satisfactory.

3.08 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Contractor shall notify Owner 48 hours prior to all pesticide applications. Notification shall include place of application as well as products being applied.

3.09 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. Promptly remove soil and debris created by turf work from paved areas. Clean wheels of vehicles before leaving site to avoid tracking soil onto roads, walks, or other paved areas.

B. Erect temporary fencing or barricades and warning signs as required to protect newly planted areas from traffic. Maintain fencing and barricades throughout initial maintenance period and remove after plantings are established.

C. Remove nondegradable erosion-control measures after grass establishment period.

D. Repair any areas disturbed by or not vegetated under erosion control devices. Repair shall include fine grading the area, installing topsoil, hydromulching and irrigating for establishment.


PLANTS 32 93 00 - 1 Copyright 2013 COLEMAN AND ASSOCIATES

SECTION 329300 – PLANTS

PART 1 GENERAL



1.02 SUMMARY


1. Plants.

2. Planting soils.

3. Tree stabilization.

4. Landscape edgings.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for protection of existing trees and plantings,

topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing.

2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials.

3. Division 32 Section "Turf and Grasses" for turf (lawn), hydroseeding, sod and erosion-control materials.

4. Division 33 Section "Subdrainage" for below-grade drainage of landscaped areas, paved areas, and wall perimeters.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation.

B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1.

C. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball



when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required.

D. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.

E. Planting Mix: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil.

F. Pesticide: A substance or mixture intended for preventing, destroying, repelling, or mitigating a pest. This includes insecticides, miticides, herbicides, fungicides, rodenticides, and molluscicides. It also includes substances or mixtures intended for use as a plant regulator, defoliant, or desiccant.

G. Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers, moles, and mice), unwanted plants (weeds), fungi, bacteria, and viruses.

H. Planting Area: Areas to be planted.

I. Plant; Plants; Plant Material: These terms refer to vegetation in general, including trees, shrubs, vines, ground covers, ornamental grasses, bulbs, corms, tubers, or herbaceous vegetation.

J. Root Flare: Also called "trunk flare." The area at the base of the plant's stem or trunk where the stem or trunk broadens to form roots; the area of transition between the root system and the stem or trunk.

K. Stem Girdling Roots: Roots that encircle the stems (trunks) of trees below the soil surface.

L. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed.

M. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms.

N. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments, the surface soil can be subsoil.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including soils.

1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials.

2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project.



3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. The actual plants that will be installed. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. For species where more than 20 plants are required, include a minimum of three photographs showing the average plant, the best quality plant, and the worst quality plant to be furnished. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant, plant size, and name of the growing nursery.

4. Contractor shall submit laboratory test reports of imported topsoil and onsite

stock piled soils to be used. Report shall clearly state that the imported soils are acceptable for plant growth. The report shall also state that the existing on-site soils are acceptable for plant growth or clearly list the amendment needed to achieve an acceptable condition.

1) Laboratory reports from Wallace Laboratories, LLC or approved equal. (310)

615-0116 2) Provide 1 test sample and report for each 250 cubic yard, or a minimum of

two samples total, if total stockpiled soil to be used is less than 500 cubic yards, of on-site stock piled top soil to be used on site. Samples to be taken from various areas in the stock piled material.

B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following:

1. Organic Mulch: 1-quart volume of mulch; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

2. Planting Mix: 1-quart volume of planting mix; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture.

3. Aggregates: 1-quart volume; in sealed plastic bags labeled with source. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

4. Topsoil: 1-quart volume; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color, texture, and organic makeup.

C. Qualification Data: Landscape Contractor shall have a permanent office located within a 50-mile radius of the project site.

D. Schedule of planting that includes delivery of plant material to the site, layout of beds, layout of plant material, bed prep, application of herbicides, pesticides and fertilizers,



planting of each bed (or areas of the site), staking, maintenance and all landscape/irrigation/site related items or events. The schedule shall also provide the overall master construction schedule and how the landscaping/irrigation fits into the master construction schedule and critical path.

E. The final as-builts shall be provided by the contractor and shall be CAD generated. The landscape architect will provide their CAD base file for the contractor to use as his starting point. The final CAD file provided by the contractor shall be completely bound (xrefs) and purged.


A. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1.

B. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.

1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes.

2. Other Plants: Measure with stems, petioles, and foliage in their normal position.

C. Plant Material Observation: Landscape Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Landscape Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of root ball and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.

F. Notify Architect of sources of planting materials seven days in advance of delivery to site.


A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable.

B. Bulk Materials:

1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants or near or under existing trees.



2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways.

3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates.

C. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling.

D. Handle planting stock by root ball or container only.

G. Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.

1. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with mulch.

2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.

3. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work.

B. Interruption of Existing Services or Utilities: Do not interrupt services or utilities to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary services or utilities according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Landscape Architect, Construction Manager, and Owner no fewer than five working days in advance of proposed interruption of each service or utility.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of services or utilities without Landscape Architect, Construction Manager, or Owner’s written permission.

C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be



obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

D. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated.

1. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas, protect turf areas, and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials, workmanship, or growth for a warranty period of 12 months from the date of Substantial Completion.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control.

b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of edgings and tree grates. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond

normal weathering.

2. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum:

a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season.

b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period.

c. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material.

d. Opinion of plant status by the Landscape Architect shall be final.


A. Initial Maintenance Service for all plant material: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer continuously after plants are installed and continue until final completion and acceptance by the Landscape Architect and Owner. Maintain as required in Part 3.

B. After receipt of final completion and acceptance, Landscape Contractor shall maintain the project for an additional 12 months as part of this scope of work. Maintain as required in Part 3.

C. Upon termination of the 12 month Maintenance period, Landscape Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect of request for final inspection. At this time all defective work shall be corrected by Landscape Contractor. At the end of the 12 month maintenance service/warranty period the landscape contractor shall remove all stakes and guy wires.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PLANT MATERIAL

A. General: Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.

1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected.

2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated.

B. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls.

C. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting.

D. Labeling: Label each plant of each variety, size, and caliper with a securely attached, waterproof tag bearing legible designation of common name and full scientific name, including genus and species. Include nomenclature for hybrid, variety, or cultivar, if applicable for the plant as shown on Drawings.

2.02 FERTILIZERS

A. Organic Fertilizer: Granular organic fertilizer containing no artificial ingredients nor fillers nor urea or bio-solids.

1. Lady Bug All Purpose Fertilizer 8-2-4 as supplied by Lady Bug Natural Brand, 512-858-9090, 160 McGregor Land, Dripping Springs, Texas 78620.

2.03 PLANTING SOILS

A. Planting Soil Bed Mix: Backfill Mix for Trees, Shrubs and ground covers shall be Coleman Shrub Mix as supplied by Organics by Gosh, 512/276-1211, or approved equal. 1. Physical properties as follows:



a. Decomposed Granite 3/8th screened 10% b. Organics 20-30% c. Imported Top Soil (low in clay, high in silt and sand) 60-70%. See below.

B. Imported Topsoil: Supply high quality imported topsoil of loamy character, high in humus and organic content

from local agricultural source. Topsoil to be free from clay, lumps, coarse sands, stones, roots, and other foreign matter. There shall be no toxic amounts of acid or alkaline elements. Topsoil to be used for on-site mixing of backfill mix. Supplier by Organics by Gosh or approved equal.

General - Topsoil shall be free of roots, clods, stones larger than 1-inch in the greatest

dimension, pockets of coarse sand, noxious weeds, sticks, lumber, brush and other litter. It shall not be infested with nematodes or other undesirable disease-causing organisms such as insects and plant pathogens.

Topsoil shall be friable and have sufficient structure in order to give good tilth and aeration to

the soil.

Gradation limits - soil shall be a sandy loam or loam. The definition of soil texture shall be the USDA classification scheme cited below. Gravel over 2 millimeters in diameter shall be less than 20% by weight.

Permeability Rate - Hydraulic conductivity rate shall be not less than one inch per hour nor

more than 20 inches per hour when tested in accordance with the USDA Handbook Number 60, method 34b or other approved methods.

Fertility - The range of the essential elemental concentration in soil shall be as follows for

approval of source soil:

Ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction parts per million (mg/kilogram

dry weight basis

phosphorus 10 - 40 potassium 100 - 220

iron 5- 35 manganese 0.6 - 6 zinc 1 - 8

copper 0.3 - 5 boron 0.2 - 1

magnesium 50 - 150 sodium 0 - 100 sulfur 25 - 500 molybdenum 0.1 - 2

Acidity - The soil pH range measured in the saturation extract (Method 21a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 6.0 - 7.9.

Salinity - The salinity range measured in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook

Number 60) shall be 0.5 - 2.5 dS/m.



Chloride - The maximum concentration of soluble chloride in the saturation extract (Method 3a,

USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 150 mg/l (parts per million).

Boron - The maximum concentration of soluble boron in the saturation extract (Method 3a, USDA Handbook Number 60) shall be 1 mg/l (parts per million).

Sodium Adsorption Ratio (SAR) - The maximum SAR shall be 3 measured per Method 20b,

USDA Handbook Number 60.

Aluminum – Available aluminum measured with the Ammonium Bicarbonate/DTPA Extraction shall be less than 3 parts per million.

Soil Organic Matter Content - Sufficient soil organic matter shall be present to impart good

physical soil properties but not be excessive to cause toxicity or cause excessive reduction in the volume of soil due to decomposition of organic matter. The desirable range is 3% to 6%. The carbon:nitrogen ratio should be about 10. A high carbon:nitrogen ratio can indicate the presence of hydrocarbons or non-humified organic matter.

Calcium Carbonate Content - Free calcium carbonate (limestone) shall not be present for acid-

loving plants.

Heavy Metals - The maximum permissible elemental concentration in the soil shall not exceed the following concentrations:


parts per million (mg/kilogram) dry weight basis

arsenic 1 cadmium 1

chromium 10 cobalt 2

lead 30 mercury 1 nickel 5 selenium 3

silver 0.5 vanadium 3

If the soil pH is between 6 and 7, the maximum permissible elemental concentration shall be

reduced 50%. If the soil pH is less than 6.0, the maximum permissible elemental concentration shall be reduced 75%. No more than three metals shall be present at 50% or more of the above values.

Phytotoxic constituent, herbicides, hydrocarbons etc. - Germination and growth of monocots

and dicots shall not be restricted more than 10% compared to the reference soil. Growth inhibiting constituents must not be present.



2.04 MULCHES

A. Shredded Hardwood: as supplied by Austin Wood Recycling, 512/259-7430, or approved equal.

2.05 AGGREGATES

A. Gravel: New Mexico River Rock, washed, as supplied by Custom Stone Supply, (512) 462-3363, or approved equal. Size: 1”-2” Dia..

B. Crushed Granite: Crushed Granite as supplied by Custom Stone Supply, (512) 462-3363, or approved equal. Size: ¼” to ½” sieve.

C. Decomposed Granite: Decomposed granite as supplied by Custom Stone Supply, (512) 462-3363 or approved equal. Size: ¼” to fine.

2.06 PESTICIDES & HERBICIDES

A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated.

2.08 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Concrete Edging:

1. 6” thick broom-finished concrete.

B. Steel Edging:

1. Steel Edging by COL-MET, (800) 829-8225, or approved equal.

2. Size: 1/8” x 4” deep with stakes.

3. Color: XXXX.

2.08 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS

A. Concrete Edging:



1. 6” thick broom-finished concrete.

B. Steel Edging:

1. Steel Edging by COL-MET, (800) 829-8225, or approved equal.

2. Size: 1/8” x 4” deep with stakes.

3. Color: brown.

C. Plastic Edging: A. Polyboard Edge, 1”x6”, as supplied by Valley View Industries,

www.valleyviewind.com, or approved equal. Color: Brown. B. Benda Board, 1”x6”, as supplied by Epic Plastics, 209-333-6161, or approved

equal. Color: Brown.

2.09 TREE STABILIZATION

A. Stakes and Guys:

1. Tree Stakes for Shade Tree Planting: 8’ length steel “T” posts – PAINTED BLACK – with plastic stake caps at each post.

2. Tree Stakes for Ornamental Tree Planting: 8’ length steel “T” posts – PAINTED BLACK – with plastic stake caps at each post.

3. Guying: Tree-Tie Webbing by Arborbrace, or approved equal, Arborbrace – 561-628-3591, www.treestaking.com

2.10 FILTER FABRIC

A. TenCate, Mirafi 140N

1. Geo Solutions Inc., 512-445-0796, or approved equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION



3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance.

1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar, roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area.

2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen, wet, or muddy conditions.

3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results.

4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty.


E. If contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations.

B. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations, outline areas, adjust locations when requested, and obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of layout before excavating or planting. Make minor adjustments as required.

3.03 PLANTING AREA ESTABLISHMENT

A. Bed Preparation:

1. Excavate existing soils or fill material to the depth indicated for ground cover

areas or shrub areas. Dispose of excess soils legally offsite or coordinate with civil drawings and specifications to determine if spoils can be used on site.

2. Remove stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. a. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting soil if planting will not proceed within

a few days.



3. Install planting soil bed mix in prepared bed. Planting soil bed mix shall be

installed in continuous beds –POCKET PLANTING OF SHRUBS AND GROUNDCOVERS SHALL NOT BE PERMITTED.

a. Groundcover Areas: install 12” of planting soil bed mix.

b. Shrub Areas: install 15” of planting soil bed mix.

B. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades.

C. Before planting, obtain Landscape Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading.

3.04 SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING

A. Apply fertilizers per the manufacturer’s recommendations to the prepared planting bed.

Allow enough time between the application of fertilizers, for safe planting of all proposed plant material

B. Remove all plant containers.

C. Install plants in straight rows using triangular spacing.

D. Use planting soil bed mix for backfill.

E. Backfill planting bed in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

F. Repair settling of plants or finished grade and ensure positive drainage.

3.05 EXCAVATION FOR TREES

A. Planting Pits for Trees: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45-degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit.

1. Excavate approximately two times as wide as ball diameter.

2. Excavate perimeter of pit at least 1 ½ times the depth of the root ball

3. Trees shall be placed so that root flare is 2” (NOTE: THIS AMOUNT CAN/MAY CHANGE DEPENDING ON PROJECT LOCATION) above adjacent finished grade. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball.



B. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.

1. All rock in planting beds or pits shall be removed to twice the specified depth (two times the size shown and specified). Where location changes for plant materials are requested, notify Landscape Architect of requested change at least 48 hours prior to need. In the event that locations cannot be adjusted, rock removal will be necessary and shall be the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor.

C. Drainage:

1. Fill excavations with water and allow to percolate away before positioning trees and shrubs

2. Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits.

D. .

3.05 TREE, PLANTING

A. Before planting, verify that root flare is visible at top of root ball according to ANSI Z60.1. If root flare is not visible, remove soil in a level manner from the root ball to where the top-most root emerges from the trunk. After soil removal to expose the root flare, verify that root ball still meets size requirements.

B. Apply fertilizers per the manufacturer’s recommendations to the tree planting pit. Allow enough time between the application of fertilizers, for safe planting of all proposed plant material.

C. Remove stem girdling roots and kinked roots. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break.

D. Set trees plumb and in center of planting pit with root flare 2 above finish grades.

1. Use planting soil bed mix for backfill.

2. After placing some backfill around root ball to stabilize plant, carefully cut and remove burlap, rope, and wire baskets from tops of root balls and from sides, but do not remove from under root balls. Remove pallets, if any, before setting. Do not use planting stock if root ball is cracked or broken before or during planting operation.

3. Backfill around root ball in layers, tamping to settle soil and eliminate voids and air pockets. When planting pit is approximately one-half filled, water thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water is absorbed.

4. Place planting tablets in each planting pit when pit is approximately one-half filled; in amounts recommended in soil reports from soil-testing laboratory. Place



tablets beside the root ball about 1 inch from root tips; do not place tablets in bottom of the hole.

5. Continue backfilling process. Water again after placing and tamping final layer of soil.

D. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball.

E. Install Tree Stabilization per manufacturer’s recommendations or per details shown on drawings.

3.06 TREE, SHRUB, AND GROUNDCOVER PRUNING

A. Prunethin, and shape trees, shrubs and vines according to standard professional horticultural and arboricultural practices. Unless otherwise indicated by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders; remove only injured, dying, or dead branches from trees and shrubs; and prune to retain natural character.

B. Apply pruning paint to wounds immediately.

3.10 PLANTING AREA MULCHING

A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated.

1. Trees in Turf Areas: Apply mulch ring of 4-inch depth. Do not place mulch within 6 inches of trunks or stems.

2. Mulch in Planting Areas: Apply 4-inch average depth of shredded hardwood mulch over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades.

3.11 PLANT MAINTENANCE

A. Maintain plantings as prescribed in Section 1 above. Maintenance shall be done on a weekly basis during the months of April through October and on a bi-weekly basis during the months of November through March

B. Maintenance shall include pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease.

C. Fill in as necessary soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost in areas of subsidence.



D. Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Use integrated past management practices whenever possible to minimize the use of pesticides and reduce hazards. Treatments include physical controls such as hosing off foliage, mechanical controls such as traps, and biological control agents.

3.12 PESTICIDE APPLICATION

A. Apply pesticides and other chemical products and biological control agents in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction and manufacturer's written recommendations. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Notify Owner before each application is performed.

B. Pre-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply to tree, shrub, and ground-cover areas in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations. Do not apply to seeded areas.

C. Post-Emergent Herbicides (Selective and Non-Selective): Apply only as necessary to treat already-germinated weeds and in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Contractor shall notify Owner 48 hours prior to all pesticide applications. Notification shall include place of application as well as products being applied.

3.13 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION

A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition.

B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged plantings.

C. After installation, remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire, burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and Project site.

3.14 DISPOSAL

A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.

3.14 EXPIRATION OF GUARANTEE PERIOD

Landscape Contractor shall notify Owner or Landscape Architect in writing, 30 days prior to the expiration of the one-year guarantee period. A site inspection will be made by the Owner or



Landscape Architect to verify that all work and materials are in good and healthy condition. All work and materials that are determined by the Landscape Architect to be unacceptable or dead shall be replaced at the Landscape Contractor’s expense. Upon completion of replacement of all unacceptable work or dead materials, the Landscape Architect will notify the Owner of the guarantee expiration


Room Item Key Image Manufacturer Product Information Finish Special Notes

Walls PT‐1 Sherwin Williams SW 7014 Eider White Eggshell No VOC

Ceiling PT‐1 Sherwin Williams SW 7014 Eider White Eggshell No VOC

Trim & Doors PT‐3 Sherwin Williams SW 7023 Requisite Gray Semi‐Gloss No VOC

Shiplap PT‐1 Sherwin Williams SW 7014 Eider White Eggshell No VOC

Cabinetry PT‐4 Sherwin Williams SW 6184 Austere Gray Eggshell Low VOC

Conference Room Shelves

PT‐7 Sherwin Williams SW 7014 Eider White Semi‐Gloss Low VOC

FARMHOUSEPAINT & CABINETRY SCHEDULE

12.15.2015GENERAL NOTES: ALL PAINT AND OTHER APPLIED FINISH ITEMS (INCLUDING ADHESIVES & GROUTS) SHALL BE APPLIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS.

WATER‐BASED OR LOW‐NO V.O.C. FINISHES REQUIRED. REFERENCE DRAWING ELEVATIONS FOR PATTERN DIRECTIONS AND LOCATIONS. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE LARGE 24" SQUARE RECOMMENED PAINT TEST SAMPLES ON APPROVED SHEETROCK/PLASTER WALL SAMPLES AND BASE TRIM FOR LBD AND CLIENT APPROVAL PRIOR TO PAINTING. SAMPLES TO BE PAINTED PER SELECTED MANUFACTURERS LISTED IN CLIENT SELECTED FINISHES; EX. "EGGSHELL". IF DIFFERENT PAINT SUPPLIERS TO BE USED, CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY WITH LBD PRIOR TO SAMPLING.

PUBLIC AREAS

Page 1 of 20 GMP Set






Ceiling PT‐3 Sherwin Williams SW 7023 Requisite Gray Eggshell No VOC

Trim PT‐3 Sherwin Williams SW 7023 Requisite Gray Semi‐Gloss No VOC

Doors to Resident Units

PT‐2 Sherwin Williams SW 6321 Red Bay Semi‐Gloss No VOC

Doors to Public or Utility Rooms

PT‐3 Sherwin Williams SW 7023 Requisite Gray Semi‐Gloss No VOC

CORRIDORS







Accent WallOption A

PT‐4 Sherwin Williams SW 6163 Grassland Eggshell No VOC

Accent WallOption B

PT‐5 Sherwin Williams SW 6222 Riverway Eggshell No VOC

Accent WallOption C

PT‐6 Sherwin Williams SW 7023 Requisite Gray Eggshell No VOC

Ceiling PT‐1 Sherwin Williams SW 7014 Eider White Flat No VOC

Trim PT‐3 Sherwin Williams SW 7023 Requisite Gray Semi‐Gloss No VOC

RESIDENT UNITS


Room Item Key Image Showroom Manufacturer Product Information Size Special Notes

Flooring WD‐1Reclaimed DesignworksContact: Lori

Type: Antique OakFinish: White Wash

3/4" thickness

Walls in Leasing Area, Meeting room and Kiosk

WallWS‐1

Coffee Bar and Leasing Area Countertop

SS‐2 3cm

Leasing Desk & Office Flooring

CPT‐1ProSourceContact: ChristinePhone: 512.836.7888

MillikenType: CarpetCollection: Color FieldColor: COL122 Pale Gull

10"x40"

Leasing Desk Flooring Trim

TS‐2Located at the transition from carpet to wood

Kiosk Countertop SS‐2 3cm

BaseThroughout

1x6

Threshold Throughout

FARMHOUSEFLOORING, TILE & COUNTERTOP

12.15.2015GENERAL NOTES: ALL PAINT AND OTHER APPLIED FINISH ITEMS (INCLUDING ADHESIVES & GROUTS) SHALL BE APPLIED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS. WATER‐BASED OR

LOW‐NO V.O.C. FINISHES REQUIRED. REFERENCE DRAWING ELEVATIONS FOR PATTERN DIRECTIONS AND LOCATIONS.***CUSTOM FLOORING AND TILES REQUIRE A CONTROL SAMPLE PRIOR TO ORDERING AND INSTALLATION FOR DESIGNER APPROVAL***

LEVEL 1

LOBBY

Concrete, natural

Concrete, natural

Painted shiplapSee paint schedule for color information








3/4" thickness

Computer Countertop SS‐2 3cm

ComputerAccent Wall

WD‐1Reclaimed DesignworksContact: Lori


3/4" thickness

Flooring CPT‐1ProSourceContact: ChristinePhone: 512.836.7888

MillikenType: CarpetCollection: Color FieldColor: COL122 Pale Gull

10"x40"

Countertop SS‐1 Caesarstone

Color: 1141 Pure WhiteFinish: PolishedEdge Detail: flat/pencilSplash Height: noneOverhang Preferred: 1/4"

3cm

Focal Wall (countertop wall)

WD‐1Reclaimed DesignworksContact: Lori


3/4" thickness

Shelves on Focal Wall

BUSINESS CENTER Concrete, natural

CONFERENCE ROOM

Painted ShelvesReference Paint Schedule for Color Information






Flooring LVT‐1Castle Floors 512‐326‐8820

Evoke: Stickk 3mm

Type: Vinyl TileCollection: Luxury VinylItem Number: 45114Color: StacyPattern Direction: Reference Plan

17 3/4" x 1/8" x 17 3/4"3mm Thickness

Countertop SS‐1 Caesarstone


3cm

Flooring at Fountains & Restroom

T‐1Concept SurfacesContact: EllanaPhone: 972.386.4900

Unicom Starker

Type: Porcelain TileCollection: MaxxiColor: TwoFinish: GripGrout joint: 1/8"

12" X 24"

Wall Field Tile T‐3American Tile & StoneContact: Lance512.837.2843

Atlas Concorde

Type: Porcelain TileCollection: eWallColor: PureGrout Joint: 1/8"

15.75" x 31.5"Thickness: 8mmPattern: Reference elevations

Wall Accent Tile T‐5Travis TileContact: Lee Ann HamerPhone: 512‐478‐8705

Ceramiche Supergres

Type: Porcelain TileCollection: TravelColor: East Grey StrutturatoGrout Joint: 1/8"

50/50 Mix of 2 widths:‐7.75" x 48"‐5.75" x 48"

MAILROOM Countertop SS‐1 Caesarstone


3cm

CORRIDOR & MAILROOM

Tile Flooringwhere specified on

Flooring PlanT‐1

Concept SurfacesContact: EllanaPhone: 972.386.4900

Unicom Starker

Type: Porcelain TileCollection: MaxxiColor: TwoFinish: GripGrout joint: 1/8"

12" X 24"COLOR TO BE VERIFIED ONCE EXTERIOR STONE

IS SELECTED

WORKROOM

LEASING RESTROOM






VESTIBULE Flooring T‐9Stone SolutionsContact: Marilyn RobertsPhone: 512‐834‐9211

Ceramiche Refin

Type: Porcelain TileCollection: BaitaItem #: LQ25Color: Natural R

60cm x 60cmThickness: 9.5mm

FITNESS AND YOGA STUDIO Flooring CPT‐2

ProSourceContact: ChristinePhone: 512.836.7888

Shaw Contract GroupType: CarpetStyle: 5T002 visible tileColor: 01557 beam

24"x24"

Flooring T‐5Travis TileContact: Lee Ann HamerPhone: 512‐478‐8705

Ceramiche Supergres


50/50 Mix of 2 widths:‐7.75" x 48"‐5.75" x 48"


Atlas Concorde



Wall Accent Tile T‐2American Tile & StoneContact: Lance512.837.2843

Atlas Concorde

Type: Porcelain TileCollection: eWallColor: RedGrout Joint: 1/8"


1st FLOOR PLUBLIC RESTROOMS








3/4" thickness

Kitchenette Countertop SS‐1 Caesarstone

Color: 1141 Pure WhiteFinish: PolishedEdge Detail: flat/pencilSplash Height: 4"Overhang Preferred: 1/4"

3cm

Club Room TV Wall WS‐1

Flooring T‐5Travis TileContact: Lee Ann HamerPhone: 512‐478‐8705

Ceramiche Supergres


50/50 Mix of 2 widths:‐7.75" x 48"‐5.75" x 48"


Atlas Concorde



Wall Accent Tile T‐5Travis TileContact: Lee Ann HamerPhone: 512‐478‐8705

Ceramiche Supergres


50/50 Mix of 2 widths:‐7.75" x 48"‐5.75" x 48"

Painted shiplapSee paint schedule for color information

RESTROOM

ROOFTOP LEVEL

CLUB ROOM & DECK






THROUGHOUT; UNLESS

OTHERWISE SPECIFIED

Flooring LVT‐2Castle Floors 512‐326‐8820

Evoke: Click 4mm

Type: Vinyl TileCollection: Luxury VinylItem Number: 45178Color: ChandlerClass: OakPattern Direction: Reference

6 3/4" x 3/16" x 47 3/4"4mm Thickness

Countertop

Option ASS‐3

White MintEnchanted Granite

3cm

Countertop

Option BSS‐3

Pacific Shore StonesContact: Katy KerbagePhone: 512‐339‐2300

Pacific Shore StonesPacShore QuartzColor: Samoa

3cm

Backsplash T‐6Travis TileContact: Lee Ann HamerPhone: 512‐478‐8705

Anatolia

Type: Glazed CeramicCollection: Soho Wall TileItem#: 50‐600 Glossy WhiteGrout Joint: 1/8"Pattern Direction: Reference Elevations

4" x 16"

Cabinets Master Wood CraftItalia ThermafusedColor: Vapor Strandz

RESIDENT UNITS

KITCHEN






Vanity Countertop and Backsplash

Option A

SS‐3White MintEnchanted Granite

3cm

Vanity Countertop and Backsplash

Option B

SS‐3Pacific Shore StonesContact: Katy KerbagePhone: 512‐339‐2300

Pacific Shore StonesPacShore QuartzColor: Samoa

3cm

Shower Walls T‐8 DalTile DalTile

Type: CeramicCollection: PolarisItem #: PL02Color: Gloss WhiteGrout Joint: 1/8"Pattern Direction: Reference Elevations

8" x 8"Thickness: 5/16"

Shower Wall Tile Trim Liner

TS‐1 Schluter

Type: Metal linerCollection: JollyItem #: A100ACGFinish: Polished chrome anodized aluminum

3/8" x 8' strip

Cabinets Master Wood CraftItalia ThermafusedColor: Vapor Strandz

BEDROOMS & CLOSETS

Carpet CPT‐3 MohawkCollection: Neutral ShiftColor: 859 Twilight Jungle

BATHROOM


Tag Location Image Qty Showroom Manufacturer/ Item No Product Size Mounting Notes

L‐1 Lobby ‐ Meeting Room 2Name: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Amy Anderson (512) 445‐5140

LBL Lighting: Loft Grande Pendant (LP875‐BL‐PN‐LED827)

Rubberized Black‐ Polished Nickel cage, E26 LED A19 3x11w 80 CRI 2700K 120v

21.6"Hx17.3"WBottom of Fixture at 5'‐0" AFF

Over Conference Table

L‐2Lobby ‐ Leasing Area& Clubroom

7(3 + 4)

Name: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Amy Anderson (512) 445‐5140

Hubbardton Forge: 209320 Henry Finish:10

BASE ITEM NUMBER: 209320 DESCRIPTION:Henry; Direct wire wall sconce. Available August 2015 U.S. Patent Pending MAX. HANGING WEIGHT: 3.8 lbs. BULB: (1) A‐19, 60

DIMENSIONS: 15.1" h. x 9.2" w.

Mounted 7'0" AFF on center

L‐3 Lobby 1 Custom TBD TBD 6' Round

L‐4Business Center/Coffee Lounge

5Name: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Amy Anderson (512) 445‐5140

Schoolhouse Electric & Supply Co.: Fuller Pendant‐ White Glass

Cord selection: White Vinyl Bulb shown: LED Bulb, $19.00 Fixture length selection: 43" Price as shown: $394.00 Max Wattage: 60UL Listed: Yes

Fixture length selection: 43" 10" Shade Dia Canopy Width: 5"

43" Length from Ceiling. Bottom of Fixture 5'5" AFF

L‐5 Conference Center 2Name: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Amy Anderson (512) 445‐5140

Troy Lighting Habitat

Item #: F3904Finish: Libery RustSocket Type: (4) 60W Candelabra BaseIron with hardback linen shade

24" diameter x 25.5" h Bottom of fixture at 66" AFF

L‐6 Mail 1Name: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Amy Anderson (512) 445‐5140

Troy LightingToledo

Item #: F2776Finish: Old SilverSocket Type: (3) 100w Med baseRated for exterior use

14"W 10.25"H 51"L

Include (1) 18" extension rod

Bottom of fixture at 6'‐6" AFF

FARMHOUSEAMENITY LIGHTING

12.15.2015

AMENITY AREA LIGHTING




12.15.2015

L‐7 Club Room 1 Custom TBD TBD 6' Round

L‐8 Public Restrooms2 per bath

Name: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Amy Anderson (512) 445‐5140

Kichler: Brinley 1 light wall sconce‐ Brushed Nickel‐ NI #45576NI (Brushed Nickel)

Safety Rated: DampHCWO: 6Glass: ClearCFL Blub Type: Hybrid (23‐30W)Light source : incandescentLamp Type: A19Finish: Brushed nickel

5"w x 11.5"h

Backplate: 5" diameterExtension: 6.25"

L‐9 Vestibule Sconces 8 Lamps Plus

Franklin Iron WorksAveril Park 14‐3/4" High Bronze Outdoor Wall Light2M699

Outdoor RatedLamping: Included, 60W vintage edisonFinish: Oil‐rubbed bronze with seedy glass

7‐1/4"H x 14‐3/4"H x 7‐3/4" EBackplate: 7"H x 4‐1/2"W x 1"D

Mounting height : Bottom of fixuture to be at 6'‐8" AFF

AL‐1 Lobby & Conference Room3 each(6 total)

Name: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Wayne Merrill (512) 445‐5140

Juno: Indy L‐Series 4" LED Adj Reflector LA400 **17W LED

800 to 2300 lumen units provide comparable light output to a 50W, 75W and 100W PAR30 halogen, or 20Wand 39W PAR30 Metal Halide, while reducing energyconsumption by 25% to 70%, and having a rated life of50,000 hours

4" See drawingsClear/White Flange *OR COMPARABLE SPECIFICATION

AL‐2 Lobby VerifyName: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Wayne Merrill (512) 445‐5140

4” IC 600 LUMENLED DOWNLIGHTNEW CONSTRUCTIONIC1LEDG4 RECESSED HOUSINGHYPERBOLIC TRIMS

ELECTRICAL DATADedicated 120V Only Driver Option120VInput Power 11.7W (+/‐5%)Input Current 0.10AFrequency 50/60HzEMI/RFI FCC Title 47 CFR, Part 15,

4" See drawings

White Cone/White Trim 11.7W *OR COMPARABLE SPECIFICATION

AMENITY AREA ARCHITECTURAL LIGHTING




12.15.2015


SPECTRUM LIGHTING 4" ROUND LED DOWNLIGHT OS SERIES/35 WATT MAX.

See specification sheet 4" See drawingsMW TRIM/SO TRIM 14W *OR COMPARABLE SPECIFICATION


Diode LED Double BLAZE™ 12V LED Tape Light

Input Voltage: 12V DCPower Consumption per ft.: 6W / 479mALumens per ft.: 517~579Beam Angle: 120°Maximum Run: 9.5 ft.Environment: Indoor dry locationWarranty: 5 YearsCertification: UL Listed (Field Cuttable)

9.5 ft max run See drawings3W per ft *OR COMPARABLE SPECIFICATION

AL‐5 Corridors VerifyName: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Wayne Merrill (512) 445‐5140

SATCO: S9240

18W/LED/9.5" Flush/WH/30KSurface mount fixtureSolid State LED lightingLong lifeDimmable

9.5" Flush mount See drawings

AL‐6 Corridors VerifyName: Ferguson Lighting Contact: Wayne Merrill (512) 445‐5141

Minka Aire: 54" Java Nickel Indoor/Outdoor Ceilign Fan F753‐BNW

Blade Material: Abs ConstructionBlade Sweep: 54"Number of Blades: 3Blade Pitch: 14Downrod 1: 3.5"Downrod 2: 6"

54" See drawings

AL‐7 LED Linear Fixture VerifyLumenPulseLL12PDI 1204DRO30KNOACC50SI

Lamping: LED Included 48"L x 2‐11/16" W x 3‐5/16" D

See drawings


Manufacturer Finish Item Number Item Detail

Toilet Toto #01 Cotton CT708EV#01 Commercial Flushometer High Efficiency Toilet, 1.28 GPF, Elongated Bowl, Back Inlet Spud

Sensor Flush Valve Toto Stainless Steel TET2LN31#SS Sensor Toilet Flush Valve, Concealed 14" x 12" (Back Spud Wall) ‐ 1.28 GPF ‐ See more at: http://www.totousa.com/sensor‐toilet‐flush‐valve‐concealed‐14‐x‐12‐back‐spud‐wall‐128‐gpf#sthash.rFKDmfgq.dpuf

Vanity Trueform Concrete Charcoal FLO‐30‐ADA 30" ADA floating concrete sinkApartment Unit‐ Exterior Kohler Polished Chrome K‐14760‐4‐CP Stance Single‐Hole Bathroom Sink Faucet Apartment Unit‐ Kitchen/ Dining

Kohler Brushed Stainless K‐11895‐BS Purist‐ 36" Grab Bar

42" Grab Bar Kohler Brushed Stainless K‐11896‐BS Purist‐ 42" Grab BarToilet Tissue Dispenser Bobrick Satin Stainless B‐4288 Contura Series Surface‐Mounted Multi‐Roll Toilet Tissue

DispenserToilet Toto #01 Cotton CT708EV#01 Commercial Flushometer High Efficiency Toilet, 1.28 GPF,

Elongated Bowl, Back Inlet SpudSensor Flush Valve Toto Stainless Steel TET2LN31#SS Sensor Toilet Flush Valve, Concealed 14" x 12" (Back Spud

Wall) ‐ 1.28 GPF ‐ See more at: http://www.totousa.com/sensor‐toilet‐flush‐valve‐concealed‐14‐x‐12‐back‐spud‐wall‐128‐gpf#sthash.rFKDmfgq.dpuf

Vanity Trueform Concrete Charcoal FLO‐30‐ADA 30" ADA floating concrete sinkFaucet Kohler Polished Chrome K‐14760‐4‐CP Stance Single‐Hole Bathroom Sink FaucetToilet Tissue Dispenser Bobrick Satin Stainless B‐4288 Contura Series Surface‐Mounted Multi‐Roll Toilet Tissue

Dispenser

FARMHOUSEAMENITY PLUMBING, HARDWARE & APPLIANCES

12.15.2015

PLUMBINGLocation

Level 1 Public Restrooms

4th Floor Club

Restroom


Manufacturer Finish Item Number Item Detail

FARMHOUSEAMENITY PLUMBING, HARDWARE & APPLIANCES

12.15.2015Location

Refrigerator Whirlpool Stainless Steel WRT541SZDM 33" Wide Top‐Freezer Refrigerator Dishwasher Whirlpool Stainless Steel WDT920SADM Whirlpool Gold Dishwasher with TotalCoverage Spray Arm

Microwave Whirlpool Stainless Steel UMC5225DS 2.2 cu ft. countertop microwave Sink Kohler Stainless Steel K‐5285‐SS Strive 32" undermount single bowl kitchen sinkFaucet Kohler Stainless Steel K‐72218‐B7‐SS Sensate Touchless Kitchen Undercounter Refrigerator Jenn‐Air Stainless Steel JUR24FLERS 24" Under Counter Refrigerator

Ice Maker Uline Stainless Steel ADA15IM 15" Crescent Ice Maker‐ADA SeriesDishwasher Jenn‐Air Stainless Steel JDB9600CWS 24" Flush Trifecta Dishwasher (Eurostyle SS)Undercounter Microwave Jenn‐Air Stainless Steel JMD2124WS 24" Under Counter Microwave with Drawer Design

Undercounter Warming Drawers

Jenn‐Air Stainless Steel JWD2030WS 30" Warming Drawer

Sink Kohler Stainless Steel K‐5285‐SS Strive 32" undermount single bowl kitchen sinkFaucet Kohler Stainless Steel K‐72218‐B7‐SS Sensate Touchless Kitchen

Throughout HDW‐1 Top Knobs Stainless Steel TK277SS 8" Modern Metro Tab Pull ‐ Sanctuary II

4th floor clubInterior Shades Texas Sun & Shade Charcoal/Cocoa Mermet E‐Screen 5%

30.61Roller Shade for exterior windows; Transparent / UV Blockage: 95%

Mailroom Island Trash Grommet for Countertop

Mockett Stainless Steel TM2C/SQ 9" Square x 3" Deep; Stainless Steel Trash Manager / Grommet for countertop

HARDWARE & ACCESSORIES

APPLIANCES

4th Floor Club

Workroom


Location Manufacturer Finish Item Number Detail

Tubs Aquarius Industries/ Pinnacle

White GT36TO LH WHITE GT36TO WHTE 60X36 OVAL TUB LEFT

Kitchen Sink Proflo Brushed Stainless PFUC208 Undermount 34" X 22" Approx.Kitchen Faucet Moen Inc. Polished Chrome 46201 46201 1HDL CP EDGESTONE PULLDWN FCTBathroom Sink Apartment Unit‐ Exterior White Oval PF1714UWH

Bathroom Faucet Apartment Unit‐ Kitchen/ Dining

Polished Chrome 46100 46100 CP 1HDL EDGESTONE LAV W/ PU

Aquatic Bath White F3636DPAN ACCESSIBLE SHOWER PANMoen Inc. 45318 45318 P‐TMP P‐BAL T/S VLV FIPMoen Inc. Polished Chrome 46302CGR 46302CGR 1HDL EDGESTONE SHWR CHROMEMoen Inc. 45318 45318 P‐TMP P‐BAL T/S VLV FIPMoen Inc. Polished Chrome 46301CGR 46301CGR 1HDL EDGESTONE T&S TRIM CHROMEWestern Pottery White B832W B832W WHITE 1.28GPF ELONG BOWLWestern Pottery White T8ULF‐HET‐W T8ULFHETW HET TANK 1.28 GPFGemline White GL202WH GL202WH ELON PLAS SEAT W/ CVR

Toilet Paper Holder Better Hm Products Soma IV 3409SNTowel Bar Better Hm Products Soma IV 3424SNRobe Hook Better Hm Products Soma IV 3401SNTowel Ring Better Hm Products Soma IV 3404SNBathroom Mirrors Per GC Sheet Mirror See plan for dimensionsShower Rod Proflo 5' Aluminum PFSCR60

FARMHOUSEAPARTMENT UNIT PLUMBING, CABINETRY & PAINT

12.15.2015

PLUMBING

PLUMBING ACCESSORIES

Shower

Tub / Shower

Toilet


Location Manufacturer Finish Item Number Detail

FARMHOUSEAPARTMENT UNIT PLUMBING, CABINETRY & PAINT

12.15.2015

Kitchen & Bath Cabinets Master Wood Craft Italia; Thermafused Vapor Strandz Slab door styleKitchen & Bath Cabinet Door/Drawer Pulls Hardware Resource Satin Nickel 625‐128SN Elements Collection

Door Trim Sherwin Williams Requisite Gray Painted SW 7023Window Sills Sherwin Williams Eider White Painted SW 7014Base Boards Sherwin Williams Requisite Gray Painted SW 7023Wall Color Sherwin Williams Eider White Painted SW 7014Switchplates White

Dishwasher Whirlpool Stainless Steel DU850SWPS Standard Unit ‐ Energy Star Qualified Standard Tub Dishwasher

ADA Unit ‐ Dishwasher Whirlpool Black‐on‐Stainless GU3100XTVS ADA Unit ‐ Tall Tub ADA Height Compliant Dishwasher

Garbage Disposal Whirlpool N/A GC1000PE 1/3 HP In‐Sink DisposerMicrowave Whirlpool Stainless Steel WMH1163XVS 1.6 cu. ft. Microwave‐Range Hood CombinationADA Unit ‐ Microwave Whirlpool Stainless Steel MT4155SPS 1.5 cu. ft. Countertop Microwave OvenRange Whirlpool Stainless Steel WFE366LVS 30‐inch Freestanding Electric RangeADA Unit ‐ Range Whirlpool Stainless Steel GY397LXUS 30‐inch Self‐Cleaning Slide‐In Electric RangeADA Unit ‐ Hood Whirlpool Stainless Steel UXT4030AYS 30‐inch Non‐Vented Under Cabinet HoodRefrigerator / Freezer Whirlpool Stainless Steel W8RXNGMWS 18 cu. ft. Top Freezer RefrigeratorADA Unit ‐ Refrigerator / Freezer Whirlpool Stainless Steel WRT359SFYM 19 cu. ft. Top‐freezer refrigerator with CEE Tier 3 ratingWasher & Dryer Whirlpool White WET4024EW Stackable Combination Washer/Electric Dryer with AutoDry™

Drying System

APPLIANCES

PAINT & MISC.

CABINETRY



AUL‐1 Apartment Unit‐ Exterior 1 per unitDiving LightingDEL DL‐VPWB‐SA‐SE26‐41‐FG

Lamping: IncludedFinish: Powder Coated, Satin Aluminum with frosted glass

12.5”H x 4.5”W x 7.125”EMust be mounted no less than 80" AFF (per ADA)

AUL‐2 Apartment Unit‐ Kitchen/ Dining

1 per unitSunset LightingADR F2991‐80

Lamping: Halogen, 4‐50W GU10Lamp IncludedWattage 200Bright Satin Nickel

34"L x 6.25" H See drawings

AUL‐3 Apartment Unit‐ Vanity TBDHome EnhancementsVS‐329‐NK

Lamping: 2‐18W GU 27KMax Wattage: 2 x 18WBrushed NickelWhite Glass

18‐5/8"W x 4‐5/8"H x 3‐3/4"D

See drawings‐ on center above vanity mirrors. Mounted horizontally

AUL‐4

Apartment Unit ‐ Island

(Except for units B1, B2 & B3‐ see AUL‐8)

3 per unitLumivert IncorporatedLMV 4183‐BN

Lamping: 1‐13W SP 27K Inner Satin Opal, Outer Clear Glass Cylinder

9.25" H x 5" Dia6' cord

See drawings

AUL‐5 Apartment Entry/ Hall TBD Per UnitLumivert IncorporatedLMV 2341‐G‐BN White Glass

Lamping: GU24‐Base SocketBrushed Nickel with White Glass

D12‐1/8" x 4"H See drawings

AUL‐6 Apartment Unit TBD Per UnitHome EnhancementsSUN503 NK3SV

Lamp IncludedBrushed Nickel with silver blades 52" Blade width See drawings

FARMHOUSEAPARTMENT UNIT LIGHTING

12.15.2015

APARTMENT UNIT LIGHTING




12.15.2015

AUL‐7Apartment Unit ‐ Exterior Balcony

TBD Per UnitHome EnhancementsPL‐795‐NK

Lamping: 1‐18W GU24Finish: Nickel

5"W x 7"H x 8‐3/8"E See drawings

AUL‐8Apartment Unit‐ Large Island(Units B1, B2, & B3 only)

1 per unitCB2 exclusiveeden white pendant light

Lamp included (23W CFL)White cotton shade with matching diffuser

19.75" dia x 8"hBottom of shade at 72" AFF

Unit Closets TBD Per UnitAmerican FluorescentAMF LW232R8

Lamping: (2) F32T848"L x 7" W x 2‐3/8" D See drawings

Unit Utility TBD Per UnitTrans GlobeTRG PL‐3620BN

Lamping: 1‐23W GU 27K Wattage: 26Base: GU‐24

10"W x 5‐1/4"H See drawings

Shower Option TBD Per UnitLumivert IncorporatedLMV LED RFM8/15W/30K/WH

Lamping: 15W LED 30KFinish: White

D7.5" x 1.25"H See drawings

Unit Utility TBD Per UnitAmerican FluorescentAMF LW232R8

Lamping: (2) F32T848"L x 7" W x 2‐3/8" D See drawings




12.15.2015

Bath Ceiling TBD Per UnitLumivert IncorporatedLMV 2341‐G‐BN White Glass



Unit Closet TBD Per UnitLumivert IncorporatedLMV 2341‐G‐BN White Glass


